Technical Minimum Standards For Ships On The Rhine And On Inland Waterways Of Zones 1, 2, 3, And 4 For Vehicles That Apply For A Certificate < Br / >(Anhang Ii Zuder Binnenschiffsuntersuchungsordnung)

Original Language Title: Technische Mindestvorschriften für Schiffe auf dem Rhein und auf Binnenwasserstraßen der Zonen 1, 2, 3 und 4 für Fahrzeuge, die ein Schiffsattest beantragen
(Anhang II zur Binnenschiffsuntersuchungsordnung)

Read the untranslated law here: http://www.gesetze-im-internet.de/binschuo2008anh_ii/BJNR245010008.html

Technical minimum standards for ships on the Rhine and on inland waterways of zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 for vehicles that apply for a certificate (annex II to the regulation on inspection of inland waterway vessels) BinSchUO2008Anh II copy date: 06.12.2008 full quotation: "technical minimum requirements for ships on the Rhine and on inland waterways of zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 for vehicles that apply for a certificate (annex II to the regulation on inspection of inland waterway vessels) from December 6, 2008 (BGBl. I S. 2450)" ", by article 2 number 1 of the regulation of 16th June 2014 (BGBl. I p. 748) is changed" stand: amended by art. 12 No. 9 V v. 16.12.2011 II 1300 Note: change article 1 No. 15 V v. 20.12.2012 I 2802 (No. 62) textually evidenced by, documentary still not finally change edited by article 1 No. 9 V v. 30.5.2014 I 610 (No. 23) still not included amendment article 2 No. 1 V v. 16.6.2014 I 748 (No. (25) learn still not taken into account to the stand number in the menu see remarks footnote (+++ text detection from: 1.1.2009 +++) (+++ text of inland waterway vessel inspection regulations see: BinSchUO 2008 +++) (+++ to the application see BinSchUO2008Anh XII +++) table of contents Part I Chapter 1 General article 1.01 definitions 1.02 scope 1.03 navigability lffezheim 1.04 Kanalpenichen transport between Basel and the locks 1.05 ships 1.06 orders of temporary nature 1.07 service instructions for the commissions of inquiry and the competent authorities Chapter 2 procedures 2.01 2.02 Commission request for investigation 2.03 demonstration vehicle for the investigation
2.04 grant of the vessel certificate 2.05 provisional certificate 2.06 lifetime of the vessel certificate 2.07 notices and changes in the ship's certificate 2.08 investigation 2.09 follow-up 2.10 voluntary investigation 2.11 investigation officio 2.12 certification or testing a classification society or other body 2.13 retention and return of the vessel certificate 2.14 replacement copy 2.15 costs 2.16 information 2.17 directory of navigability of 2.18 uniform European vessel number 2.19 equivalence and deviations part II construction , Equipment Chapter 3 shipbuilding requirements 3.01 rule 3.02 strength and stability 3.03 hull 3.04 machine, boiler, and bunker rooms Chapter 4 safety clearance, freeboard and draught display 4.01 safety distance 4.02 freeboard 4.03 minimum freeboard 4.04 draught marks 4.05 maximum draught of vessels whose holds not always sprühwasser-and weathertight closed 4.06 draught Chapter 5 manoeuvrability 5.01 General 5.02 5.03 trials test drive route 5.04 degree of loading of vessels and associations during the test drive 5.05 Board tools for the TestDrive 5.06 speed (go ahead) 5.07 stop properties 5.08 reversing properties
5.09 fallback properties 5.10 turning properties Chapter 6 controls 6.01 General requirements 6.02 propulsion system of the rowing machine 6.03 hydraulic drive system of the rowing machine 6.04 energy source 6.05 manual drive 6.06 rudder propeller, water-jet, Zykloidalpropeller - and debug waterjet systems 6.07 display and monitoring 6.08 turn speed regulator 6.09 test Chapter 7 wheelhouse 7.01 General 7.02 unobstructed view 7.03 General requirements operation, display and monitoring equipment 7.04 specific operation, display and monitoring equipment for engines and controls 7.05 signal lights , Light and audible 7.06 7.07 navigators radiotelephone installation for vessels with radar single man helm 7.08 internal voice communications on board 7.09 alarm system 7.10 heating and ventilation 7.11 operating device for stern anchor 7.12 height-adjustable control houses 7.13 note in the certificate for vessels with radar - one man tax stands Chapter 8 engineering requirements 8.01 General provisions 8.02 safety devices 8.03 drive systems 8.04 exhaust pipes of internal combustion engines 8.05 fuel tanks, pipes and accessories 8.06 lubricating oil tanks , cables and accessories 8.07 tanks for oils used in power transmission systems, switching, drive and heating systems are cables and accessories 8.08 Lenz facilities 8.09 facilities for the collection of oily water and used oil 8.10 noise of vessels chapter 8a emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from diesel engines 8a.01 definitions 8a.02 principle 8a.03 request for type-approval 8a.04 type-approval 8a.05 amendment of licences 8a.06 match 8a.07 (without content) 8a.08 control of the identification numbers 8a.09 conformity of production 8a.10 non-conformity with the approved engine type , approved approved engine family or the engine group 8a.11 installation, interim and special audit 8a.12 competent authorities and technical services section 9 electrical equipment 9.01 General rules 9.02 energy supply systems 9.03 protection against touching, penetration of foreign bodies and water 9.04 explosion protection 9.05 earthing 9.06 maximum permissible voltages 9.07 distribution systems 9.08 connection on shore or other external networks 9.09 power output to other vehicles 9.10 generators and motors 9.11 accumulators 9.12 switchgear 9.13 emergency shut-down devices 9.14 installation material 9.15 cables 9.16 lighting installations 9.17 signal lights 9.18 (without content)
9.19 alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment 9.20 electronic equipment of 9.21 electromagnetic compatibility Chapter 10 equipment 10.01 anchor equipment 10.02 other equipment installed 10.03 portable fire extinguisher 10.03a fixed fire extinguishing systems for protection of homes, control buildings and passenger spaces 10.03 b permanently installed fire extinguishing systems for protection of engine, boiler and pump rooms 10.03 c Fixed installed fire extinguishing systems for object protection 10.04 ship's boats 10.05 lifebuoys and lifejackets Chapter 11 security in the workspace 11.01 General 11.02 protection against fall and crash 11.03 dimensions of 11.04 jobs gang board 11.05
Access of the jobs 11.06 exits and emergency exits 11.07 climbing devices 11.08 Interior 11.09 protection against noise and vibration 11.10 hatch covers 11.11 winches 11.12 cranes 11.13 storage of flammable liquids Chapter 12 apartments 12.01 General provisions 12.02 special structural requirements of the apartments 12.03 sanitary installations 12.04 kitchens 12.05 12.06 drinking water systems heating and ventilation 12.07 other furnishings chapter 13 heating, cooking and cooling facilities, which operate with fuels 13.01 General requirements be 13.02 use of liquid fuel , Devices for petroleum 13.03 oil stoves with evaporation burners and oil furnaces with Atomising burners 13.04 oil stoves with evaporation burners 13.05 oil furnaces with Atomising burners 13.06 air heaters 13.07 with heating solid fuels chapter 14 liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes 14.01 General 14.02 installations 14.03 14.04 accommodation and establishment of container plants 14.05 spare and empty tanks 14.06 pressure regulators 14.07 pressure 14.08 piping and hoses 14.09 distribution system 14.10 gas-consuming appliances and their installation 14.11 ventilation and discharge of the exhaust gases 14.12 operating and safety instructions 14.13 examination 14.14 and 14.15 test conditions certificate chapter 15
Special provisions for passenger vessels 15.01 General provisions 15.02 15.03 hull stability 15.04 safety clearance and freeboard 15.05 maximum permitted number of passengers 15.06 passenger rooms and areas 15.07 propulsion system 15.08 safety devices and equipment 15.09 life-saving 15.10 electrical equipment 15.11 fire 15.12 firefighting 15.13 safety organization 15.14 facilities for the collection and disposal of domestic waste water 15.15 derogations for certain passenger vessels Chapter 16 special provisions for vehicles, for use as part of a pushed train , a tow or a coupled combination 16.01 vehicles suitable for sliding are 16.02 vehicles suitable to get pushed 16.03 vehicles suitable for the moving of coupled vehicles 16.04 vehicles suitable for the Fortbewegtwerden in associations 16.05 vehicles suitable for towing 16.06 trials with associations 16.07 entries in the ship's certificate chapter 17 special requirements for floating devices 17.01 General provisions 17.02 derogations 17.03 17.04 policy residual safety clearance 17.05 residual freeboard 17.06 inclining test 17.07 stability proof 17.08 stability proofs with reduced residual freeboard 17.09 draught marks and draught 17.10 floating Devices without proof of stability chapter 18 special provisions for construction vehicles 18.01 operating conditions 18.02 application of part II 18.03 derogations 18.04 safety clearance and freeboard 18.05 ship's boats chapter 19 special provisions for Kanalpenichen 19.01 of General 19.02 application of part II 19.03 (dropped out) Chapter 20 special provisions for seagoing ships 20.01 application of part II 20.02 (dropped out) Chapter 21 special provisions for sports vehicles 21.01 of General 21.02 application of part II 21.03 (dropped out) Chapter 22 stability of ships , the container transport 22.01 22.02 General conditions and calculation method for the stability detection with carriage of unsecured containers 22.03 boundary conditions and calculation method for the stability detection during transport of secured containers 22.04 procedure for assessing stability on board
Chapter 22a specific provisions for vehicles, exceeding 110 m in length 22a. 01 application of the part I 22a. 02 application of part II 22a. 03 strength 22a. 04 buoyancy and stability 22a. 05 additional requirements 22a. 06 application of part IV at revamps Chapter 22 b special provisions for fast vessels of 22 b 01 General 22 b. 02 application of part I 22 b. 03 application of part II 22 b 04 seats and safety belts 22 b 05 freeboard 22 b 06 buoyancy , Stability and subdivision 22b 07 wheelhouse of 22b/08 additional equipment of 22b 09 closed areas 22b. 10 exits and escape routes 22 b. 11 fire protection and fire fighting 22 b 12 transitional provisions part III Besetzung Regulations Chapter 23 equipment of vessels in terms of on the crew 23.01 (dropped out) 23.02 (dropped out) 23.03 (dropped out) 23.04 (dropped out) 23.05 (dropped out) 23.06 (dropped out) 23.07 (dropped out) 23.08 (dropped out) 23.09 equipment of vessels 23.10 (dropped out) 23.11 (dropped out) 23.12 (fell off) 23.13 (dropped out) 23.14 (dropped out) 23.15 (dropped out) part IV Chapter 24 transitional and final provisions 24.01 application of the transitional provisions on vehicles , 24.02 derogations for vehicles that are already in operation already in operation are 24.03 derogations for vehicles whose keel on 1 April 1976, or was earlier laid 24.04 other deviations 24.05 (without content) 24.06 derogations for vehicles, which are not under section 24.01 fall 24.08 transitional provisions to section 2.18 24.07 (without content) 24.09 transitional provisions on the occasion of the passage of the ADNR on the ADN attachments Annex A : Request for investigation system B: certificate attachment C: directory of navigability for the Commission of inquiry system D: provisional certificate / provisional certificate of approval system E: (dropped out) conditioning F: (dropped out) system G: certificate for ships on the Rhine system H: requirements to the rules concerning the installation of tachographs and tachograph's Board annex I: safety mark system J: emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants system K : (lapsed) plant L: schema of the uniform European vessel number system M: navigational radar equipment and turn indicators in the Rhine system N: requirements for Inland AIS devices and regulations investment u: directory of the certificate according to § 1.03 as equivalent conditions for their recognition and certificates recognised system P: data for the identification of a vehicle plant Q: service instructions part I Chapter 1 General article 1.01 definitions in this Regulation shall apply as : 1. vehicle types "Craft" means a vessel or floating equipment;
2. ship "a" inland waterway vessel or sea vessel;
3. "Inland waterway vessel" means a vessel which is exclusively or mainly for the journey on inland waterways;
4. "Ship" means a ship that is mainly designed and approved to the sea or coastal drive.
5. "Motor ship" means a motor tanker or a motor carrier;
6 "powered tanker" means a to the carriage of goods in fixed tanks given vessel that can drive their own motive power
7. a vessel intended for the carriage that can drive their own motive power and not a motor tanker is "ordinary powered vessel";
8 does not exceed a barge, the 38.5 m long and 5.05 m wide "Kanalpeniche" and usually operates on the Rhine-Rhône Canal.
9 "Tug" a specially built ship; towing
10 a "Towboat" specifically to propel a pushed train built ship;
11. "Barge" means a tank barge or a cargo barge.
12 "Tank barge" a to the carriage of goods in fixed tanks in particular and built to the movement by towing ship without its own driving force or with its own driving force, which only allows to perform short manoeuvres;
13. a particular to the carriage of goods and built to the movement by towing ship without its own driving force or with its own driving force, which only allows to make small movements, and no tank barge is "Cargo barge";
14. "Barges" means a tank barges or barges of a good or a ship-borne barges;
15. a "Tank barges" for the carriage of goods in fixed tanks specific and built by sliding it to the transportation or specially equipped ship without its own driving force or with its own driving force, which only allows to perform short manoeuvres outside a pushed train;
16. a vessel intended for the carriage of goods and built to the movement by pushing or specially assembled in without their own power or with its own driving force, which only allows to perform short manoeuvres outside a pushed train and no tank barges is "Freight barges";
17. "Ship-borne barges" a barges, which is built for the transport on board a ship, and for the navigation on inland waterways.
18 "Passenger ship" means a to more than 12 passenger built and furnished day trip or cabin vessel;
18A. "passenger sailing vessel": a passenger ship that is built and furnished, to move forward by sail
18. "Tradition vehicle": (Without content);
19. "Day excursion boat" means a passenger ship without cabins for the accommodation of passengers;
20. "Cabin vessel" means a passenger ship with cabins for the accommodation of passengers;
20A. "Quick ship": a vehicle with engine drive that can reach a speed of more than 40 km/h to water;
21. "Floating device" means a floating structure with him existing working equipment such as cranes, excavators, pile-driving, elevators;
22. "Worksite craft" means a vessel that is suitable and determined due to its construction and equipment for use on construction sites, such as a flushing, folding or deck barge, a pontoon or a Steinstürzer;
23 a "Sports car" for sport or recreational purposes given vessel that is not a passenger ship;
23A. "Tender" to the transportation, a boat rescue, mountains - and working;
24. "Floating equipment" a floating facility, which usually is not intended for the transportation, such as a swimming pool, a dock, a pier, a boat House.
25 a "Float" individually or in working order for connections made raft, as well as other items, as far as he is not a ship, a floating device, or a floating plant.
'A rigid lattice or a tow; Association of vehicle composition 26'
27. form "Formation" the compilation of an association;
28 "Rigid society" a flotilla or coupled vehicles;
29 "Flotilla" a rigid connection; referred to by vehicles, of which at least one before which or the two engine powered vehicles, that moved the Association or move and as "anti-annexation vehicle" or "sliding vehicles" also an Association of a precedent and a deferred vehicle, their coupling to enable a controlled buckling; is considered to be rigid
30 "-coupled vehicles" is a compilation of alongside rigidly coupled vehicles, of which none prior to the vehicle with engine drive is that moving the compilation;
31 "Tow" a compilation; towed by one or more vehicles, floating devices or floats, the engine powered vehicles belonging of one or more of the Association
Special areas of vehicle 32. "main engine room" of the space in which the engines are;
33. "Engine room" a space in the internal combustion engines are;
34. "Boiler room," a room in the a system powered with fuel for generating steam or thermal oil heating is;
35. "closed" is a continuous solid and waterproof construction with solid walls, all the time with the deck and waterproof added together;
36. are "Wheelhouse" the room in which that unites to the command of the ship of the necessary control and monitoring equipment;
37. "Apartment" for the persons usually on board specific areas including kitchens, storage rooms, toilets, washrooms, laundry rooms, parlors, corridors, but not the wheelhouse;
37A. "Passenger compartment" for passengers on board certain areas and closed areas such as lounges, offices, showrooms, Barber shops, drying rooms, laundries, saunas, toilets, washrooms, course, walkways and stairs not a pit;
37. "Control station" occupied a wheelhouse, a space containing an emergency power system or parts thereof, or a room with a constantly by cabin crew or crew job, such as for fire alarm systems, remote control of doors or fire dampers;
37c. "Stairwell" a shaft of a staircase or an elevator.
37d. "Hotel room" a space of an apartment or a passenger compartment. On passenger ships, kitchens are not living quarters;
37e. "Kitchen" a room with a stove or a similar cooking zone;
37F. "Store room", a room for the storage of flammable liquids or a room with an area of more than 4 m2 for storage of supplies;
38. "Hold" a forward and back by Scot limited open or hatch covers closed part of the vessel, which is intended for the carriage of goods in packages, in bulk, or for the inclusion of tanks independent of the hull;
39. "tightly connected tank" a tank connected to the ship, where the tank walls through the body of the ship itself or through walls independent of the hull; might formed
40.
"Workplace" an area in which the crew to perform their professional activities has including land bridge, swing tree and tender;
41. a "Road" area, which usually serves the people and goods;
41A. "safe area" which area, bounded by a vertical surface to the outside, which is parallel at a distance of 1/5 BWL history of the hull in the line of maximum draught;
41. b "Quilts" areas of the vessel which are specially protected and that persons in case of danger to keep up;
41c "Evacuation areas" part of the collecting surfaces of the ship that an evacuation can be performed by persons;
Ship technical terms 42. "plane of maximum draught" the floating plane of maximum draught at which the vehicle can drive, matches;
43. "Safety distance" the distance between the plane of maximum draught and the parallel plane through the lowest point above which, the vehicle is no longer waterproof.
43A. "residual safety distance" of existing at the heel of the vehicle vertical distance between the water level and the lowest point of the immersed side, over which the vehicle is; not more than waterproof seen
44. "Freeboard" or "F" the distance between the plane of maximum draught and the parallel plane of through the lowest point of the gear flange or, in the absence of the gang Bordes through the lowest point of the upper edge of the boards.
44a. "Residual freeboard" the existing at the heel of the vehicle vertical distance between the water level and the top of the deck at the lowest point of the immersed side or, if there is no deck the lowest point of the upper edge of the fixed Panel of the Board.,
45. "Diving border" a thought line on the Board wall, which runs at least 10 cm below the bulkhead deck and at least 10 cm below the lowest, not waterproof point of the Board wall. In the absence of a bulkhead deck a line is to accept, which is located at least 10 cm below the lowest line, to which the outer skin is waterproof,
46. "Water displacement" or (not viewable characters) the immersed volume of the vessel in m3;
47. "Deplacement" or "D" total weight of the vessel including the charge in t;
48. "Block coefficient" or "CB" ratio of displacement to the product of length LWL wide BWL draught T;
49. "excess water lateral plan" or "A" the side of the vessel above the waterline in m2;
50th, to which the required watertight bulkheads are carried up "Bulkhead deck" the deck and measure from which the freeboard;
51. "Schott" a generally vertical wall high; led to the subdivision of the vessel, which is limited by the ship's bottom, walls, or other Scot and up to a certain amount
52. "Transverse bulkhead" one of side wall to side wall enough SCHOTT;
53. "wall" a generally vertical parting surface;
54. "Partition" a non waterproof wall;
55. "length" ("L") the maximum length of the hull in m, excluding rudder and bowsprit;
56. "Length overall" ("LOA") the maximum length of the vehicle in m, including all fixed attachments such as parts of rudder and propulsion systems, mechanical equipment and similar items;
57. "Length at the waterline" ("optical fiber") that "Width measured maximum length of the hull in the plane of maximum draught of the vessel in m; 58." ("B") the maximum width of the hull in m, measured on the outside of plating (excluding paddle wheels, abrasive strips and similar);
59. "Width about everything" ("BOA") the maximum width of the vehicle in m, including all fixed attachments such as paddle wheels, abrasive strips, mechanical equipment, etc;
60 "Wide at the water line" ("business") the maximum width of the hull in m, measured in the plane of maximum draught of the vessel on the outside of the plating; 61. "page-height" ("H") the shortest vertical distance between the lower edge of the bottom plating or of the keel and the lowest point of the deck at the side of the vessel in m; 62. "draught" ("T") the vertical distance from the lowest point of the hull , without regard to the keel or other solid additions to the level of the maximum draught of the hull in m, 62a.
"Draught of everything" ("TOA") the vertical distance from the lowest point of the hull, including the keel or other solid additions to the level of the maximum draught of the hull in m, 63. "front lot" the vertical through the front intersection of the hull with the plane of maximum draught.
"The distance between a vertical through the clear 64. width of the side deck" furthest into the part of the hatch coaming and a perpendicular through the inner edge of the fall protection (railings, skirting board) on the outside of the side deck; outstanding into gear Board
65. control devices "Control device" any required to control the vessel institution; be applied to achieve the manoeuvrability for Chapter 5
66. "Rudder" of or the rowing body with rudder shaft, including the quadrant and the fasteners with the rowing machine.
67. "Rowing machine" the part of the control device, which causes the movement of the rudder.
68. "rowing machine drive" the drive of the rowing machine between the power source and the steering gear;
69. "Energy source" the energy supply of the rowing machine drive and control from the on-board power supply, battery or from an internal combustion engine;
70. "Control" components and circuits to control a motor rowing machine drive;
71. "Operator of the rowing machine" the rowing machine drive, whose control and whose energy source;
72. "Manual drive" a drive in which the movement of the rudder via a mechanical transmission operated by the steering wheel by hand causes no additional energy source;
73. "Handhydraulischer drive" a manual drive with hydraulic transmission;
74. "Turn speed regulator" is a device, which automatically results in a specific rate of turn of the vessel according to the requirements of input values and preserves;
75. a "radar - a man steering" tax level, which is decorated in such a way that the ship with radar navigation; be carried by a single person
Properties of components and materials 76. "watertight" components or devices that are set up to prevent the penetration of water;
77. "sprayproof and weathertight" components or devices, so established are that they let through only an insignificant amount of water in the commonly occurring conditions;
78. "gastight" components or devices that are set up; prevent the penetration of gases or vapours
79 "non-flammable" a material which neither Burns nor developed flammable vapours in such quantities that they ignite when a heated to approximately 750 ° C itself;
80. "flame-retardant" a material, himself or where at least its surface spread of flame according to the test procedure according to paragraph 15.11 no. 1 letter c restricts;
81. "fire resistance" the property of components or devices, by the test procedure according to paragraph 15.11 no. 1 letter d is proved;
81A. "Code for fire test procedures" of the international code for application of fire test procedures, adopted by the maritime safety Committee of IMO resolution MSC.61(67)
82. other terms "recognized classification society" a classification society which is recognized by all States of the Rhine and Belgium, namely: Germanischer Lloyd and Bureau Veritas, Lloyd's register of shipping;
83. "High class": highest class, has a ship if: - built in the body of the ship including steering system and maneuvering equipment as well as equipment with anchors and chain complies with the requirements of a recognized classification society and under the supervision and tested;
-the drive system as well as the necessary for the operation of the on-board auxiliary machinery, mechanical and electrical equipment according to the regulations of this classification society have been manufactured and tested, running their installation under the supervision of the classification society and the entire system successfully tested after installation of you been is;
83A. signal lights: light phenomena of signal lights to the designation of vehicles;
83 b. light: light effects to amplify by Visual or acoustic signals.
84. navigation devices "Radar equipment" is a electronic navigation aid for the detection and representation of the environment and transport;
85. "Inland ECDIS" a standardized system for the electronic representation of Inland ENCs and related information, the selected information from a vendor-specific electronic map of inland waterway transport and optional information of other transmitters of the vehicle represents.
86. "Inland ECDIS equipment" a device for displaying electronic maps of inland waterway transport, which can be operated in two modes: information mode and navigation mode;
87. "Information mode" the use of the Inland ECDIS for information purposes without overlaid radar image;
88. "Navigation mode" the use of the Inland ECDIS for driving the vehicle with superimposed radar image.
88a. "Inland AIS unit" a device that is fitted on a vehicle within the meaning of the standard "Vessel tracking and tracing in inland navigation", and used (decision 2006-I-21);
89. "Cabin crew" all employees on board a passenger ship, which do not belong to the occupation;
90.
"Persons with reduced mobility" persons who have particular difficulty when using public transport, such as such as elderly people, disabled persons, persons with disabilities of the sensory organs, wheelchair users, pregnant women and persons accompanying small children.
91. "ADN" the European Convention of 26 May 2000 concerning the international carriage of dangerous goods on inland waterways in the attached Regulation (BGBl. 2007 II S. 1906, 1908; 2009 II p. 534; 2010 II pp. 122, 123, 1183, 1184), most recently by article 1 of the Decree of December 17, 2010 (BGBl. 2010 II S. 1550, 1551) has been modified , in its up-to-date version;
92. one "Expert" by the competent authority or by an authorized institution of the Rhine riparian countries and Belgium person acknowledged that on the basis of their professional training and experience, to be tested special knowledge in the area has technical rules in other Member States of the European Union, with the relevant regulations and generally accepted rules of technology, in particular DIN EN standards, technical regulations, is fully familiar and check the specific equipment or facilities and expert judge;
93. "Knowledgeable" one on the basis of their professional training and experience about having sufficient knowledge in the field to be checked who EN standards, technical regulations, technical rules in other Member States of the European Union, as far as is familiar with the relevant regulations and generally accepted rules of technology, in particular, that she can assess the reliability of the respective plants or facilities.

§ 1.02 scope 1.
This annex applies a) for vessels with a length of 20 m or more;
(b) for ships, which the product a volume of 100 m3 or more results from L x W x T.
2. Furthermore, this annex applies to all a) towing and pusher craft, which are intended to tow vessels referred to in point 1 or floating equipment or alongside coupled to carry;
b) ships that have a certificate of approval according to ADN;
c) passenger ships d) floating equipment.
3. this annex does not apply to ferries in the Rhine navigation police regulation.

§ 1.03 certificate issued according to § 1.02 Nos. 1 and 2 must a navigability have cars, which is granted by a Commission of inquiry a Rhine River State or Belgium or a certificate recognized by the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine as equivalent.

§ 1.04 Kanalpenichen transport between Basel and the lock Iffezheim near Kanalpenichen, which travel on the Rhine between Basel (Middle Rhine bridge) and the lock lffezheim (including the lower offshore), is sufficient instead of the vessel certificate a certificate issued by a Commission of inquiry a Rhine River State or Belgium, which confirms the suitability for the ride on this route. In this case, Kanalpenichen must comply with Chapter 19.

§ 1.05 is ships for sea-going vessels the navigability according to Appendix B, if they do not have such a, Appendix G replaced by a certificate that confirms the suitability for the trip on the Rhine. In this case, they must comply with Chapter 20.

Orders temporary nature orders temporary nature that Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine may decide § 1.06 if it appears necessary of inland waterway transport for the adaptation to technical developments, to allow deviations from this regulation in urgent cases or to allow trials by which the safety and ease of navigation are not affected. The arrangements are by the competent authority to publish and apply a maximum of three years. You are in all States of banks of the Rhine and Belgium at the same time enacted and repealed under the same condition.

§ 1.07 service instructions for the commissions of inquiry and the competent authorities 1.
To facilitate and standardise the application of this regulation, the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine may decide the service instructions for the commissions of inquiry and the authorities referred to in this annex. These service instructions are brought to the attention of the commissions of inquiry and other authorities.
2. the commissions of inquiry and the competent authorities are bound by these service instructions, unless they are included in this regulation.
Chapter Investigation Commission 1 are 2 procedure article 2.01 commissions of inquiry by the States of banks of the Rhine and Belgium at suitable port locations.
2. the commissions of inquiry consist of a Chairman and experts. As experts are to appoint a minimum in each Commission) an official of a competent shipping administration, b) an expert for shipbuilding and marine engineering of inland waterway transport, c) an expert for nautical with inland patent, which shall be entitled to carry the vehicle to be examined.
3. the Chairman and experts of any Commission of inquiry are appointed by the authorities of the State in which it is built.
The Chairman and the experts have in taking over their role in writing to explain that they will be performing it in complete independence. A declaration is not required of officials.
4. the commissions of inquiry may invite special experts to assist in accordance with the respective national legislation.

Section 2.02 request for examination 1.
The owner of a vehicle or its authorised representative who wants to obtain an investigation, has a study Commission elected to make a request to Annex A. The Commission of inquiry determined that the documents to be submitted to her.
2. the owner of a vehicle which is not subject to this regulation, or its authorised representative can apply for a certificate. The request must be held if the ship complies with the provisions of this regulation.

Article 2.03 presentation of the vehicle for examination 1.
The owner or his authorised representative has equipped the vehicle unladen and cleaned to the investigation to demonstrate. He has to provide the necessary assistance in the investigation, to expose as a suitable boat and staff are available to provide, and the parts of the hull or of the facilities that are not directly accessible or visible.
2. the Commission of inquiry must visit the ship on the slipway at the initial examination. Visit can be omitted on ramp, when a class certificate or an attestation of a recognized classification society, according to which the construction complies with their regulations, is presented. Post or investigations, the investigation Commission may require an inspection on ramp.
The Commission of inquiry must perform test drives at the initial examination of motor ships and associations as well as significant changes on the controller or to the control unit.
3. the Commission of inquiry can perform additional viewings and test drives, as well as require more evidence. This is true even during the construction phase.

Section 2.04 grant of the vessel certificate 1 the Commission of inquiry in the investigation of the vehicle determines that the provisions of this annex for construction, furnishings and equipment are maintained, it granted the applicant a certificate according to Annex B. Also has the investigation you according to the paragraphs 3.18 and 3.19 of the tasks assigned to ship staff regulation-Rhine to perceive.
2. the Commission rejects the granting of the vessel certificate, she has the applicant, stating the reasons in writing.
3. the indicator of the Commission of inquiry with the serial number of the vessel certificate is in Latin letters and height prominently noted in the certificate is, protected, Arabic numerals of at least 2 cm on a part of the ship, from knocks and is little exposed to the wear unaustilgbar to install.

§ 2.05 provisional certificate 1.
The Commission may grant a temporary certificate for a) vehicles entering for the purpose of exhibition of a vessel certificate to a Commission of inquiry of their choice;
b) vehicles that 2.13 No. 1 or § 2.14 cases referred their navigability temporarily do not have due to a in §§ 2.07,
(c) vehicles, if after the examination is the certificate still in progress;
(d) vehicles, if not all the conditions for the issuance of a ship's certificate are met Appendix B or G;
(e) vehicles, which State as a result of damage no longer matches the certificate;
f) floating equipment and floats, unless the for the application of § 1.21 No. 1 of Rhine navigation police regulation authority permission for the implementation of special transportation of the existence of such certificate dependent makes;
(g) vehicles for the Commission of inquiry an equivalence No. 2 allows according to § 2.19 for the cases, that the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine, has pronounced yet no recommendation.
2. the provisional certificate issued according to Annex D, if the driving ability of the vehicle, the floating plant or the float appears reasonably assured.
It contains the obligations held by the investigation Commission for required and is a valid)
in the cases of the number 1 letter a, d to f for a single specified drive within a reasonable period of time, at the latest within one month;
(b) in the cases of the number 1 (b) and (c) for a reasonable period of time;
(c) in the cases of the number 1 letter g for six months. It may be extended only with the consent of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine.

Section 2.06 of validity of certificate 1.
The validity period of navigability licences issued in accordance with this regulation is for new buildings a) for passenger ships five years;
(b) for all other vehicles of 10 years.
In justified cases, the Commission may set a shorter validity period. The validity period is recorded in the ship's certificate.
2. for vehicles that have been before the investigation already in operation, the validity period of the vessel certificate of the Commission of inquiry is set in each case according to the outcome of the investigation. She must not exceed the limits prescribed in paragraph 1.

Section 2.07 notices and changes in the ship's certificate 1.
Any change, any change of ownership, the owner or his authorised representative established of a Commission of inquiry to inform each new calibration of the vehicle as well as any change in the registry or the hometown. He's got the certificate for the registration of the change to present.
2. all notices in the ship's certificate or changes thereof, which is the same adopted provisions are provided for in this regulation, in the Rhine navigation police regulations and others of all States of banks of the Rhine and Belgium, can be made of any Commission of inquiry.
3. a Commission of inquiry makes a change of the vessel certificate or it enters a note, she has this investigation Commission, which has issued the certificate to be communicated.

§ 2.08 investigation 1.
After any significant change or a repair, which has influence on the strength of the construction, the driving or manoeuvring properties or the special characteristics of the vehicle, it be produced before, before it is used again in trip, a Commission of inquiry to the investigation.
2. the examination Commission, which conducts the investigation, sets the lifetime of the vessel certificate according to the result of this investigation. She must not exceed the existing period of validity of the vessel certificate.
The validity period is recorded in the ship's certificate and is the Commission that issued the certificate to be communicated.

Section 2.09 follow-up 1.
Before the expiry of the validity of the vessel certificate, you must undergo a follow-up vehicle.
2. exceptionally at the justified request of the owner or his authorised representative, the Commission of inquiry can extend the validity period of the vessel certificate without follow-up to no more than a year. This extension shall be granted in writing and must be on board the vehicle.
3. the Commission of inquiry, which carries out the follow-up, sets the new period of validity of the vessel certificate according to the result of this investigation. It is aimed for section 2.06.
The validity period is recorded in the ship's certificate and is the Commission that issued the certificate to be communicated.
4. instead of an extension of the period of validity the certificate replaced with a new, the old certificate of the Commission that it has issued is something to return.

§ 2.10 may require at any time a voluntary survey voluntary study of the owner of a vehicle or its authorised representative.
The request for examination is to be held.

§ 2.11 examination of its own motion 1 comes you arrange an authority responsible for the safety of the navigation of the Rhine to the view that a vehicle represents a danger for the persons on board or for shipping, can the study of the vehicle by a Commission of inquiry.
2. the owner of the vehicle only bears the costs of the investigation, if the Commission recognizes the view of the authority referred to in paragraph 1 as justified.

§ 2.12 certification or testing a classification society or other body 1.
The Commission of inquiry can refrain wholly or partly of a vehicle to examine whether the provisions of part are met and of annex XI article 2.09, if it is evident from a valid attestation of a classification society recognized by all States of the Rhine and Belgium that the vehicle complies with these provisions wholly or in part.
2. a certificate of a classification society or - as far as according to this Regulation provided for specific ranges of equipment - must be recognised by the competent authority only somewhere else, if the classification society or the other body confirms that it has complied with the provisions of service instructions according to § 1.07.

Section 2.13 recognizes retention and return of the vessel certificate 1 a Commission of inquiry in an investigation, that a vehicle or its equipment has serious shortcomings, and that thereby the safety of the persons on board or the shipping is at risk, is to retain the certificate and immediately to inform the Commission, which has issued. Barges and construction vehicles, also the metal Panel is according to the Rhine navigation police regulation to retain.
The Commission of inquiry has found that the deficiencies have been eliminated, the certificate is returned the owner or his authorised representative.
This finding and the return of the vessel certificate can be made by an another Commission of inquiry at the request of the owner or his authorised representative.
Must the Commission of inquiry, which has retained the navigability, assume that the shortcomings not be eliminated any time soon, the navigability of the Commission of inquiry will be sent to, which has granted it, or has extended last.
2. is a vehicle definitively closed down or scrapped, the owner has navigability on the Commission of inquiry, which it has granted to return.

§ 2.14 replacement copy 1.
The loss of a vessel certificate must be communicated to the Commission which issued it.
This is a replacement copy of the vessel certificate, which can be described as such.
2. a certificate have become illegible or otherwise unusable, has a certificate issued by the Commission which it has granted, the owner of the vehicle or his authorized representative to return; This is a replacement copy according to number 1.

Section 2.15 costs 1 without prejudice to the § 2.11 no. 2 is the owner of a vehicle or his authorized representative the costs in connection with the investigation and the issuing of the vessel certificate each cost item issued by the States of banks of the Rhine and Belgium. No distinction shall be made in regard to the country of registration, the nationality or the residence of the owner.
2. the Commission may require prior to the investigation up to the amount of estimated costs an advance.

§ 2.16 information which allowed Investigation Commission are persons who allege a vested interest, allow insight into the navigability of a vehicle and grant at the expense of this person extracts or certified copies, to indicate as such.

§ 2.17 directory of navigability licences 1.
The commissions of inquiry provided the navigability licences issued by them with a serial number. To keep a register of all ship certificates issued by them, Appendix C. 2.
The commissions of inquiry have of each certificate which they have granted, the original or a copy to be kept. These carry all notices and changes and invalidations and new partitions and update the directory referred to in point 1 in accordance with.
3. for the implementation of administrative measures to maintain the safety and ease of navigation as well as to comply with the sections 2.02 up 2.15 of this annex and the § § the competent authorities of the Rhine River States or Belgium, the Member States of the European Union is 5 and 9 to 14 of this regulation and, where an equivalent level of data protection is ensured, access to the directory provides the competent authorities of third countries on the basis of administrative arrangements Appendix C.

Section 2.18 uniform European vessel number 1.
The European ship number (ENI), hereinafter referred to European ship number called, L consists of eight Arabic numerals according to System.
2. the Commission of inquiry issued the certificate, a vehicle enters the European ship number in this certificate. She will if the vehicle at the time of the exhibition of the vessel certificate still doesn't have a European ship number, issued by the competent authority of the State in which it was registered, or where his hometown is located.
European ship number to be entered in the certificate is granted to vehicles in their registry or home State, the granting of a European ship number is not possible, by the competent authority of the State where the investigating Commission is that issued the certificate.
These provisions do not apply to sea-going vessels.
3.
Only a single European ship number may be issued to a vehicle. The European ship number will be awarded only once and is maintained throughout the life of the vehicle.
4. the owner of the vehicle or his authorized representative must apply to the competent authority issuing the European ship number. He is also responsible to bring the European ship number on the vehicle, registered in the ship's certificate.
5. the Rhine States and Belgium share with the authorities which are entitled to the grant of the European ship number, the Secretariat of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine. The Secretariat of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine is a directory of these authorities.
6. each authority shall take the necessary measures to all other authorities responsible for issuing the European ship number, that are listed in the directory referred to in point 5, to teach P any European ship number newly issued by you as well as the data necessary for the identification of the vehicle in accordance with annex referred to in point 5. This data can be the competent authorities of the Rhine River States or Belgium, the Member States of the European Union and, where an equivalent level of data protection is ensured, the competent authorities of third countries on the basis of administrative arrangements for the implementation of administrative measures to maintain security and ease of navigation, as well as to comply with the sections 2.02 up 2.15 and 2.18 number be provided 3 and of articles 5 and 9 to 14 of this Regulation available.

§ 2.19 equivalence and deviations 1 writing the provisions of part II to that certain materials, facilities or equipment on a vehicle to install or carry or that certain construction measures or certain arrangements to meet are, the Commission may allow that on this vehicle other materials, facilities or equipment be fitted or carried, or that other construction measures or other arrangements are made , if they are recognised on the basis of recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine as equivalent.
2. If the Central Commission has still no recommendation to an equivalence for the navigation of the Rhine referred to in point 1, the Commission may grant a provisional certificate.
The competent authorities report Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine No. is 1(g), indicating the name and the European ship number of the vehicle, the nature of the deviation as well as the State in which the vehicle is registered within one month after the issuance of the temporary vessel certificate according to § 2.05, or where his hometown is located.
3. for experimental purposes and for a limited period, a Commission of inquiry on the basis of a recommendation of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine for a vehicle with technical innovations that differ from the provisions of part II can issue a certificate if these innovations are offering a sufficient security.
4. the equivalences and derogations according to paragraphs 1 and 3 are to be entered in the certificate.
Part II construction, furnishings and equipment Chapter 3 shipbuilding requirements article 3.01 basic rule 1. vessels must be built according to the rules of shipbuilding technology.

§ 3.02 strength and stability 1.
The strength of the hull must comply with the stresses he faced under normal conditions.
(a) in the case of new buildings and conversions, which can affect the strength of the vessel, the sufficient strength of the hull by a computational proof is to prove. This proof can be dispensed upon presentation of a certificate of class or an attestation of a recognized classification society.
(b) in the case of investigations according to article 2.09 the minimum thickness of soil, bilge - and page plating must comply with for ships, which are built of steel, at least the greater of the values determined by the following formulae: 1. for ships with more than 40 L m: tmin = f b · c (2.3 + 0.04 L) [mm];
for vessels with L equal to or less than 40 m: tmin · = f b · c (1,5 + 0,06 L) [mm], but at least 3.0 mm. 2nd tmin = 0.005 ·. a √ Τ [mm].
In these formulas mean: Spantabstand = a [mm];
f = factor for Spantabstand: f = 1 for a ≤ 500 mm, f = 1 + 0,0013 (a - 500) for a > 500 mm, b = factor for soil and page plating or bilge plating: 1.0 for soil and page plating = b, b = 1,25 for bilge plating.
When calculating the minimum thickness of which can bilge plating for the factor for the Spantabstand f = 1 are taken. The minimum thickness of the bilge plating but shall in no way that soil and page plating in - progress.
c = factor for design: c = 0,95 for vessels with double floor and Wall Gang, whose side cargo area limit SCHOTT is vertically arranged under the Dennebaum, c = 1,0 for ships with other types.
(c) the resulting according to the formulas in letter b minimum value for the thickness must be lower than ships in Längsspantbauweise with floor and wall gang up to the value which is set and certified by a computational proof for the sufficient strength of the hull (longitudinal and transverse strength and local strength) by a recognized classification society.
Plate renewals be carried if page plating, bilge - or ground below this maximum value.
The values for the minimum thickness of the outer skin panels determined in accordance with the foregoing procedure are limit values for normal and uniform wear provided that shipbuilding steel is used and the inner parts of the construction, such as frames, timbers and Hauptlängs - and cross associations are in good condition and on the body of the ship, no damage indicate overuse of the longitudinal strength.
If the measured values are too low, corresponding plates need to be replaced or repaired. Fixed small thinner bodies minimum thickness may be admitted to a deviation of not more than 10%.
2. is another material used for the body of the ship than steel, is a mathematical proof must be provided that the strength (longitudinal and transverse strength and local strength) is the same as at least, which is would be for the use of steel, approach of the minimum thicknesses referred to in point 1. This proof can be dispensed upon presentation of a certificate of class or an attestation of a recognized classification society.
3. the stability of vessels must comply with their intended use.

§ 3.03 hull 1.
It must at least the following waterproof up to the deck or, for vessels without deck, transverse bulkheads reaching up to the top edge of the side wall built into it: a) a collision bulkhead at a reasonable distance from the bow so that the buoyancy of the fully-laden vessel is preserved when the floods of the watertight compartment prior to the collision bulkhead and a residual safety clearance is not less than 100 mm.
The request is referred to in paragraph 1 usually met if the collision bulkhead at a distance, measured from the front lot, between 0,04 L and 0,04 L + 2 m is installed.
This distance is greater than 0,04 L + 2 m, the requirement must be demonstrated mathematically referred to in paragraph 1.
The distance may be reduced up to 0.03 L. In this case the request must be assigned to calculated pursuant to paragraph 1, where the Department prior to the collision bulkhead and the adjacent departments are flooded.
(b) a stern bulkhead at an appropriate distance from the rear ships with L of more than 25 of m 2, as well as for the safety of the vessel and ship operation, necessary facilities may not be front of the plane of the collision bulkhead are apartments. This does not apply to anchor institutions.
3. apartments, engine - and boiler rooms and associated work areas must be separated from the holds by watertight, up to reaching the deck transverse bulkheads.
4. accommodation must be accessible by mechanical engineering, boiler rooms and holds gas-tight separately and directly from the deck. Such access is not provided, an emergency exit must lead also directly to the deck.
5 paragraphs 1 and 3, and space constraints referred to in point 4 prescribed Scot may have no openings.
However, rear bulkhead doors and seals in particular of corrugated pipes and pipelines are allowed if they are running so that the purpose of the bulkheads and space restrictions are not undermined. Rear bulkhead doors are allowed only if a remote monitoring can be whether they are open or closed and is clearly marked on both sides determined by the wheelhouse,: "Immediately after each opening again close the door".
6 water inlet and-ausläufe as well as connected pipes must be designed so that an unintentional ingress of water into the body of the ship is not possible.
7 Vorschiffe must be built so that anchor neither as a whole nor partly over the ship's outer skin stand out.

§ 3.04 machine, boiler, and bunker rooms 1 rooms where machinery or boiler as well as their accessories are placed must designed and furnished, be operating, servicing and maintenance of equipment easy and safe to do so.
2. bunkers for liquid fuel or lubricating oil may have no common boundaries with passenger rooms and apartments, which are in normal operation under static pressure of the liquid.
3.
Walls, ceilings and doors of machinery, boiler, and bunker rooms must be made from steel or another equivalent non-combustible material.
Insulation in engine rooms must be protected against the penetration of oil and oil vapours.
All openings in walls, ceilings and doors of machinery, boiler, and bunker rooms must from outside be lockable. The closure of institutions must be manufactured from steel or another equivalent non-combustible material.
4. engine and boiler rooms and rooms where flammable or toxic gases can develop can be ventilated sufficiently.
5. machine, boiler, and bunker rooms leading ladders and stairs must be firmly affixed and made of steel or another shock-resistant and non-combustible material.
6 engine and boiler rooms must have two exits of which one may be trained as emergency exit.
The second output can be waived if a) the footprint (medium length · medium width at floor height) a machinery or boiler room is a total no more than 35 m2, b) the escape route from each site, where user actions or maintenance run, until the output or to the bottom of the stairs at the end, which leads to the outside, is not longer than 5 m and c) there is a portable fire-extinguisher at the service center that is farthest from the exit door. This shall apply by way of derogation from article 10.03 no. 1 letter e is even if the installed engine power of 100 kW or less.
7. the maximum permissible sound pressure level in engine room is 110 dB(A). The measuring points should be chosen taking into account the necessary during normal operation of the plant maintenance work.
Chapter 4 safety clearance, freeboard and draught indicators article 4.01 safety clearance 1.
The safety distance must be at least 300 mm.
2. for vessels with openings that can be completed not sprayproof and weathertight, and on board ships sailing with uncovered holds, the safety distance must be increased so far until each of these openings is at least 500 mm from the plane of maximum draught.

§ 4.02 freeboard of 1.
The freeboard of vessels with a continuous deck, without jumping superstructures is 150 mm. 2.
Ships with jump and bodies the freeboard is calculated according to the following formula: in this formula: α correction coefficient that takes into account all existing structures;
Βv weightings for the influence of front crack resulting from the presence of superstructures in the front area of L;
Βa weightings for the influence of the aftermost jump resulting from the presence of superstructures at the aftermost area of L;
SEV effective front jump in mm; sea effective fore jump in mm. 3.
The coefficient α is calculated using the following formula: in this formula: especially effective length of a superstructure in m in the middle half of L; lev effective length of a superstructure in the front quarter of the ship's length L; lea m effective length of a superstructure in the aftermost area of the ship's length L m.
The effective length of a superstructure is calculated using the following formulas: in these formulas mean: l actual length of the superstructure in m; b width of the construction in m; B1 width of the vessel in m, measured on the outside of plating on deck level, measured half length of the superstructure;
h height of the superstructure in m. For hatches h however obtained by reducing the height of coamings half fill the security gap after section 4.01. A higher value than 0.36 m is used for h in any case.
If is less than 0.6, the effective length of the design is to put le equal to zero.
4. the coefficients βv and βa are calculated according to following formula: 5 each effective front and aft jump SEV and sea is calculated using the following formulas: SEV = SV · p;
Sea = SA · p. in these formulas mean: SV actual jump in the forecastle in mm; for SV may but no greater value as 1000 mm;
SA actual jump aft in mm; for SA may but no greater value as a 500 mm;
p coefficient which is calculated using the following formula: where x is that of the respective end from appropriate abscissa of the point at which the crack equal to 0.25 SV or 0.25 is SA (sketch below): p but no value may be used for the coefficient greater than 1.
6. If the value of βa · Sea is greater than that of βv · SEV, is used for the value of βa · Sea of those by βv · SEV used.

§ 4.03 minimum freeboard under consideration of the reduction may according to § 4.02 the minimum freeboard to be not less than 0 mm.

§ 4.04 draught marks 1.
The plane of maximum draught is to assess, that the rules on the minimum freeboard and minimum safe distance are met. The Commission may impose a greater safety clearance or freeboard for security reasons.
2. the plane of maximum draught is characterized by well visible, indelible draught marks.
3. draught marks consist of a rectangle 300 mm long and 40 mm height, whose bottom line is horizontal and coincides with the plane of the permitted maximum draught. Different draught marks must contain such a rectangle.
4. vessels must have at least three pairs of draught brand, of which a pair of marks about 1/2 L and must be roughly 1/6 L behind the bow and attached before the rear two others. By way of derogation meet: a) less than 40 m, two pairs of brand, to install on a 1/4 L behind the bow and the stern are on boats, with L;
(b) in the case of vessels not intended for the carriage of goods, a pair of stamps, approximately on 1/2 L that is.
5. the draught marks once they become invalid as a result of a further investigation or information are under the supervision of the Commission to remove, or to mark as invalid. Has become indistinct draught marks must be replaced only under the supervision of a Commission of inquiry.
6 the ship under the Convention on the calibration of inland waterway is been calibrated and the verification marks at the same level as the draught marks prescribed in this regulation, are these verification marks are also draught marks; a corresponding notice is to be entered in the certificate.

§ 4.05 maximum permissible draught of ships, their loading spaces are not always sprayproof and weathertight is the plane of maximum draught condition stated that the cargo holds can be closed in a sprayproof and weathertight, and the distance between the plane of maximum draught and the upper edge of the hatch coamings is less than 500 mm, the maximum permissible draught for the ride with uncovered holds must be set.
In the ship's certificate shall be entered: "If the hold hatches are fully or partially open, the ship shall be not more than up to... mm below the draught marks unloaded."

§ 4.06 draught 1.
Ships, whose Tiefgang may exceed 1 m, a draught must be affixed on each side at the rear of the ship; additional draught are permitted.
2. the zero point of each draught indicator vertically below that in the level parallel to the plane of maximum draught, must be through the lowest point of the hull or, if available, is of the keel. The vertical distance above the zero point is to classify in decimetres. This Division is the empty plane to mark up to 100 mm above the plane of maximum draught on each draught through a granular or carved marks and to draw in the form of a highly visible Strip alternately in two different colors. The Division must be in addition to the draught at least every 5 decimetre and indicate at the top of the same numbers.
3. the two rear calibration scales, which are Convention referred to in no. 6 according to the § 4.04, can serve as draught, if they carry a classification corresponding to the above provisions; If necessary, figures for the draft are to add.
Chapter 5 manoeuvrability article 5.01 General vessels and associations must have sufficient traction and maneuverability: ships not propelled by mechanical means, which are intended to be towed, must comply with the specific requirements of the Commission of inquiry;
Vessels propelled by mechanical means and associations must comply with the articles 5.02 to 5.10.

§ 5.02 trials 1.
The driving and manoeuvrability must be determined through trial runs. There are to determine: – speed (go ahead) (§ 5.06);
-Stop properties (§ 5.07);
-Reversing properties (§ 5.08);
-Fallback properties (paragraph 5.09);
-Turning properties (section 5.10).
2. the Inquiry Commission may waive part or all trials, if compliance with the requirements on the driving and manoeuvring properties otherwise is proven.

Article 5.03 test drive route 1.
The trial runs are according to § 5.02 perform on the sections designated by the competent authorities of the Rhine or other inland waters.
2. This test drive routes must be as straight sections of at least 2 km long and sufficiently wide in flowing or still waters and be equipped with clearly visible marks for determining the position of the vessel.
3.
The hydrological data such as depth of water, fairway width and medium speed of airflow in the area of the fairway at different water levels, must be determined by the Commission.

§ 5.04 loading of ships and associations during the test drive ships and associations that goods certainly are, for the trial runs as possible right-heavy and loaded to at least 70% be. Is the test drive with less loading is performed, the approval for the trip on this loading is to limit.

§ 5.05 Board tools for the test drive 1.
At the trials no anchor, may all be used however 34 and 52 registered facilities in the ship's certificate under paragraphs, are operable from the steering station.
2. opening tool maneuver may be used but the bow anchor after section 5.10.

§ 5.06 speed (go ahead) 1 ships and associations need to reach a speed of at least 13 km/h against water. This does not apply for pusher craft when they travel alone.
2. for ships and associations that run exclusively on anchorages and ports, the Commission may allow deviations.
3. the Commission examines whether the unloaded vehicle can exceed a speed of 40 km/h to water. This is true, is to be entered in the ship's certificate under no. 52: "The vehicle may exceed a speed of 40 km/h to water."

§ 5.07 1 stop properties ships and associations must in time can stop and remain sufficiently manoeuvrable in Bow Valley.
2. in the case of vessels and associations with L of not longer than 86 m and not more than 22.90 m B, these stop properties can be replaced by the properties of turn of the.
3. stop properties must be proved according to section 5.10 stop maneuvers on a test drive route according to § 5.03 and the turning properties by opening tool maneuver.

§ 5.08 reversing properties is that according to § 5.07 necessary stop maneuvers in still waters making a reversing attempt is performed, in addition.

Section 5.09 fallback properties ships and societies can Dodge in time. The fallback properties must be proved by evasive maneuvers on a test drive route according to § 5.03.

Article 5.10 turning properties ships and associations with L of not longer than 86 m and not more than 22.90 m B can spend in time.
This properties of turn of the can be replaced by the stop properties according to section 5.07.
The turning properties are documented by opening tool maneuver.
Chapter 6 control devices § 6.01 General requirements 1 ships must with a reliable tax system be provided with at least the manoeuvrability are achieved according to Chapter 5.
2. motor-driven control devices must be designed that the rudder can do not mistakenly alter.
3. the entire control unit must for permanent inclinations of the vessel up to 15 ° and ambient temperatures from - 20 to + 50 ° C be designed.
4. the parts of the control device must be designed in terms of strength so that all forces acting on them in normal operation can safely be taken. The forces with an external influence on the rudder must not interfere with the functioning of the rowing machine and the drive.
5. control devices must have a rowing machine drive motor, if necessary for the force to be applied to the operation of the rudder.
6 steering gear with motor drive must be fitted with an overload protection, which limits the drive side exercised moment.
7 shaft bushings rudder shafts must be designed so that no water-polluting lubricants may be.

§ 6.02 propulsion system of the rowing machine 1.
Must be a second independent propulsion system or an additional hand drive in rowing machines with motor drive. Failure or malfunction of the propulsion system of the rowing machine the second independent propulsion system or the manual actuator can be used within about 5 seconds.
2. the commissioning of the second drive unit or manual drive is not automatically a direct, quick and easy commissioning by the helmsman must be with a single user action possible.
3. during operation of the second drive unit or manual drive, the manoeuvrability must be achieved according to Chapter 5.

§ 6.03 hydraulic drive system of the rowing machine 1.
No other consumers may be connected to the hydraulic drive unit of the rowing machine.
2. hydraulic reservoir must be equipped with level alarm indicators that monitor a drop in the oil level below the permissible level lowest for the safe operation of the.
3. dimensions, construction and installation of pipelines must as far as possible exclude damage by mechanical effects or fire.
4. hydraulic hoses are a) only allowed if vibration damping or freedom of movement of the components whose use makes inevitable, b) be interpreted at least for the maximum permissible operating pressure, c) to renew at least every eight years.
5. hydraulic cylinders, pumps and motors, and electric motors must be checked at least every eight years by a specialist company and, if necessary, repaired.

Two sources of energy are § 6.04 1 energy control devices with two motor drives must.
2. the second source of energy a rowing machine with motor drive while driving is not continuously ready for use, the time required for the boot process must be bridged by a buffer system of sufficient capacity.
3. in the case of electrical power sources no other consumers may supplied from the feeds of the controls.

Article 6.05 manual drive 1.
The hand wheel not be can turned as well by a motor drive.
2. a strike back, the steering wheel must be prevented during automatic coupling of the hand drive on each rudder position.

Article 6.06 rudder propellers, water jet, Zyloidalpropeller - and debug-Jet system 1.
The remote control for the change of direction of the thrust rudder propeller, water-jet, Zykloidalpropeller - and bow thrusters is electric, hydraulic or pneumatic, two independent control systems must exist from the steering station to the propeller - or shot blasting machine, which accordingly to match the articles 6.01 to 6.05.
This does not apply if the use of such equipment to comply with the maneuvering characteristics-ten is required under Chapter 5 do not or only when attempting to stop.
2. two or more independent rudder-propeller, water-jet, or Zykloidalpropelleranlagen are present, the second control system is not required, if the ship fails one of these plants manoeuvrable under Chapter 5.

Section 6.07 display and monitoring 1.
The position of the rudder shall be clearly at the steering position. Electric rudder position indicator must have an own power supply.
2. in the following cases a visible and audible alarm in the wheelhouse must be present: a) falls below the level of the oil level in the hydraulic tanks according to § 6.03 no. 2 and the operating pressure of the hydraulic system;
b) failure of the electrical control energy supply;
(c) failure of electric power energy supply;
(d) failure of the turn speed regulator;
(e) failure of the required buffer systems.

Section 6.08 reversible speed controller 1 speed controller of turn of the and its components must correspond to section 9.20 2.
The operational readiness of the speed controller of of turn of the must appear at the helm through a green indicator light. Failure, excessive deviation of the supply voltage and undue decrease of in rotor speed must be monitored.
3. other tax systems exist next to the turn speed control, must be clearly visible at the steering position which system is switched on. Must immediately be switching from one to another system. Turn speed control must be feedback-free compared to the controls.
4. the electrical power supply of the speed controller of of turn of the must be independent from other consumers.
5. the gyro used in speed controllers of turn of, sensors, or turn indicators must meet the minimum requirements of rules relating to the minimum requirements and test conditions for turn indicators in the navigation of the Rhine.

Section 6.09 examination 1.
The proper installation of the control device must be checked by a Commission of inquiry. To do so, it may require the following documents: a) description of the control unit.
b) plans and specifications regarding the propulsion systems of the rowing machine and the control;
(c) information concerning the steering gear;
(d) wiring diagram for the electrical installation;
(e) description of the turn speed regulator;
(f) operating and maintenance manual for the system.
2. during a test drive, check the function of the entire control unit. At the turn of speed controls, safe keeping of a straight course and the safe driving of curves is to check.
3. a) before first use.
(b) after a failure.
(c) after modification or repair;
d) regularly, at least every three years to be examined by a competent person.
4. the test has to include at least: a) check on compliance with the approved plans, and in periodic inspections, whether changes to the control unit, made
b) functional testing of the control unit with all operational capabilities;
c)
Perspective - leak testing of the hydraulic system parts, in particular valves, pipes, hydraulic hoses, cylinder, pumps, and filters;
d) Visual inspection of the electrical parts, especially relays, electric motors and fuses;
(e) testing of optical and acoustic monitoring equipment.
5. about the test is a certificate signed by the competent person must be, indicating the date of inspection should.
Chapter 7 wheelhouse article 7.01 General 1 tax houses set up have, that the helmsman can at all times fulfill its tasks while driving.
2. under normal operating conditions, the residual noise level at the control booth at head height of the helmsman must not exceed the value of 70 dB (a).
3. radar one man tax stands the helmsman can fulfil its tasks while sitting and all the leadership of the vessel necessary viewing, monitoring, and controls must be arranged so that it can easily monitor the helmsman during driving and use, without doing his place left and lose without the radar screen from the eyes.

Article 7.02 unobstructed view 1.
From the steering station, enough sight must be present on all sides.
2. the perspective shadow across the bow of the empty vessel half supplies and without ballast must not exceed 250 m for the helmsman.
3. the free field of vision from the place at which the helmsman is usually, must be at least 240° of the horizon. It must be a field of vision of at least 140 ° within the front half of the circle. No window post, supports, or structures should be located in the normal line of sight of the helmsman. Is back cannot be guaranteed in particular the installation of optical AIDS even in a free field of vision of 240 ° or more a sufficient visibility to, the investigating Committee may require additional measures.
4. clear vision through the front Windows must be ensured by appropriate means in all weathers.
5 window panes used in control homes must have a minimum light transmission by 75%.

Article 7.03 General requirements operation, display and monitoring equipment 1.
Control equipment essential to the management of the vessel must be easily into its operating position. This position must be clearly identifiable.
2. monitoring instruments shall be easy to read; they can be illuminated infinitely variable. Lighting sources may not disrupt or interfere with the visibility of the monitoring instruments.
3. a facility for controlling the signal lamps must be present.
4. it must be clearly identifiable whether a plant is. This is shown by an indicator must be green.
5. errors or failure of equipment, for which monitoring is mandatory, must be reported by Red pilot lights.
6. with lights up one of the Red pilot lights, an acoustic signal must sound. Acoustic alarm signals can be carried out as collective message. The sound pressure level of this signal must be higher than the locally prevailing at the steering station maximum noise level at least 3 dB(A).
7. the acoustic signal can be deleted after the detection of failure or an error. The function of the signal for more errors must not be overruled by the deletion. The Red pilot light may go out, however, only after elimination of the fault.
8 monitoring and viewing must be connected automatically with the loss of their power to another energy source.

Article 7.04 specific requirements for operation, display and monitoring equipment for engines and controls 1.
The operation and monitoring of the drive units and the control devices must be possible from the steering station. Engines that use clutch fitted with one from the steering station or one power operated constant-speed propeller from the steering station, need to be only in the engine room and shut off.
2. for each engine, there can be only one lever to the machine control system. The lever must be moving on a circle in a vertical plane approximately parallel to the longitudinal axis of the ship. Moving this lever towards the bow must ride ahead, moving towards the rear of the ship reverse that effect. In the neutral position of the lever, coupled or driven around. In the neutral position, the lever must engage.
3. the direction of the thrust acting on the ship by the drive and the speed of the propeller or propulsion machinery must be shown.
4. viewing and monitoring according to article 6.07 No. 2, § 8.03 no. 2 and § 8.05 no. 13 must at the helm be arranged.
5. radar one man tax stands must be the control of the vessel by means of a lever. This lever can be operated easily by hand. The lever deflection must correspond to the position of the rudders to the longitudinal axis of the ship. The lever can be released in any position, without that this changes the position of the rudder blades. The zero position of the lever must be clearly felt.
6. is the ship with rowing at bow or special rowing (in particular for the reverse) equipped, must these operated at radar one man tax stands via special lever are can, the number 5 mutatis mutandis comply with.
This also applies if the rowing facilities of other than the vehicle used to carry the Association be used for vehicle composition.
7. when using the turn of speed controllers the control organ to adjust the rate of turn in any position can be released, without altering the speed of turn of.
The turning radius of the control body must be so that a sufficient accuracy of the setting is ensured. The zero must differ noticeably from other positions. The scale can be illuminated infinitely variable.
8 remote controls of the entire control unit must be firmly installed and arranged so that the selected direction is clearly recognizable. The remote controls are deactivated, they must be fitted with an indicator, which indicates the current operating status "On" or "Off". The arrangement and the operating of controls must be functional.
For additional equipment of the control unit, such as bow thrusters, not built-in remote controls are allowed if the activity of the complementary system can be taken at any time through a priority circuit in the wheelhouse.
9. when rudder propeller, water-jet, Zykloidalpropeller - and bow thrusters, generally operating, display and monitoring equipment are allowed. Requirements referred to in point 1 to 8 mutatis mutandis and in accordance with the special characteristics and the selected arrangement of the above active control and drive institutions to meet. In analogy to number 2, operation by means of a lever must be for each plant, moving on a circular arc to a vertical, almost parallel to the direction of the thrust of the system level. The direction of thrust force acting on the vessel must be apparent from the position of the lever.
If rudder propellers or Zykloidalpropelleranlagen will not operate by means of lever, the Commission may allow derogations from paragraph 2. The differences are to be noted by the Commission of inquiry into the ship's certificate under number 52.

§ 7.05 signal lights, light and acoustic signal 1 signal lights and their housing and accessories the approval mark shall, according to section 5 paragraph 3 in conjunction with § 2 definition 11 of ship equipment regulation by October 1, 2008 (Federal Law Gazette I p. 1913) is prescribed. A marking on the basis of article 11 of Directive 96/98/EC of the Council of 20 December 1996 on marine equipment (OJ L 46 of the 17.2.1997, p. 25), most recently by the policy 2011/75/EC (OJ L 239 of 9, page 1) is changed, be implemented Act of a Member State of the European Union is considered to be equivalent.
2. for the control of signal lights, power indicator lights or equivalent bodies such as pilot lights in the wheelhouse must be attached if this control is not directly possible from the wheelhouse of.
3. radar one man control booths must be built to control of the signal lights and the pilot lights at the steering position light signals. The switch of signal lights must be integrated into the pilot lights or located in the immediate vicinity of the pilot lights and be clearly associated with these.
Arrangement and color of the pilot lights of signal lights and light signals must comply with the actual position and colour of switched signal lights and light signals.
The failure of a signal light or a light character must cause the termination of the corresponding indicator light or be signaled in other ways by the corresponding indicator.
4. radar one man tax stands the audible must you can give by footswitch. This does not apply for the "stay away signal" after the Rhine navigation police regulation.

Section 7.06 navigation devices 1.
Navigational radar equipment and turn indicators must comply with the requirements of the system M part I and part II or the requirements of annex IX, part I and part II. Compliance with the requirements will be determined by a type-approval granted by the competent authority. Inland ECDIS equipment operated in navigation mode may apply as navigational radar equipment. In addition, you must meet the requirements of the Inland ECDIS standard in issue at the date of the granting of type-approval. The rules for installation and functional testing of radar navigation equipment and the turn indicators Annex M of part III must be respected. The turn indicator must be located before the helmsman in its field of view. The directories of radar navigation equipment approved Annex M or on ground as recognized equivalent approvals and turn indicators issued by the Central Commission.
2. when radar - one man tax stands a) can be moved the radar screen, not far from the direction of the helmsman;
b) the radar picture in any prevailing outside the wheelhouse lighting without Aufsatztubus or light shielding hood must be completely visible;
(c) the turn indicators must directly above or below the radar screen be attached or built into this.
3. Inland AIS equipment must comply with a type approved by the competent authority of a Rhine River State or Belgium on the basis of the test standards (decision 2007-I-15).
The regulations for the installation and functional testing of Inland AIS devices must be complied after system N part I.
The test standard and equipment should be the directories of the AIS according to plant N or type-approvals recognized as equivalent approved by the Central Commission published.

Article 7.07 radio system for ships with radar - a man steering position 1.
Vessels with radar - a man steering position, the reception via loudspeakers and sending over fixed microphones must be done for the public ship-ship and nautical information; Button to receive/send has to be carried out by means of push button. The microphones of this public public message exchange can are not allowed for connections of the traffic circle.
2. for vessels with radar - one man steering, fitted with a radiotelephone installation for the traffic circle public message exchange must be the reception from the seat of the helmsman out.

Article 7.08 internal communication aboard aboard vessels with radar one man steering, a facility for internal voice communications must be present.
From the steering station following talk can connect: a) to the bow of the vessel or of the Association;
(b) to the stern of the vessel or of the Association, if no direct communication from the wheelhouse is possible.
(c) to the common rooms of the crew;
(d) to the captain's cabin.
The reception via loudspeakers and sending over fixed microphones must be in all places this voice connections. To the bow and the stern of the vessel or of the Association a radio speech connection is allowed.

Article 7.09 alarm system 1.
There must be an independent alarm system, the apartments, the engine rooms and, where appropriate, the separate pump rooms can be reached with the.
2. the helmsman must have within reach an on/off switch for the alarm signal. No switch can be used for this signal, can automatically return in the "Off" position when released.
3. the sound pressure level for the alarm signal shall be at least 75 dB(A) in the apartments.
There must be a well everywhere perceptible, visible all-round flashing light as a warning signal in engine rooms and pump rooms.

Article 7.10 heating and ventilation control houses must be equipped with an effective and controllable heating and ventilation.

§ Must 7.11 operating device for stern anchor on ships and associations with radar - a man steering position and L by more than 86 m or B more than 22.90 m the helmsman who can use stern anchor from his position.

§ 7.12 in height adjustable tax houses at the height adjustable control houses must be fitted with an emergency lowering.
A warning must automatically be clearly perceptible during each descent. This does not apply if a risk of injury caused by the height adjustment is excluded by appropriate constructional measures.
In all height positions, it must be possible to leave the wheelhouse safely.

§ 7.13 Note complies with special for radar - a man steering positions a ship after the articles 7.01, 7.04 to 7.08 and 7.11 in the certificate for vessels with radar one man tax stands, must be entered in the ship's certificate: "The vessel has about a radar - a man steering."
Chapter 8 Machinenbauliche requirements of § 8.01 General provisions 1. machines and the accompanying devices must be designed according to the rules of the art, constructed and built up be.
2. pressure vessels for the operation of the ship are a) before using the first time, b) before re-commissioning after a modification or maintenance and c) regularly to check at least every five years, by an expert on their safe working condition. The examination shall include an internal and external assessment. In addition a different non-destructive test methods or a water pressure test to be applied is compressed air tanks, which can be visited inside incorrectly, or whose impeccable State when the inner tour was not clearly recognized. The assessment is a certificate signed by the experts to be, indicating the date of inspection should. Other installations requiring a monitoring, particularly steam boilers, other pressure vessels and their accessories and elevators, must comply with the requirements of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
3. it only internal combustion engines may be installed, which are operated with fuel, which is above 55 ° C Flammpunkt.
Chapter 8a emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from diesel engines § 8a.01 definitions 1 "Motor" an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle (diesel engine);
2. "Type-approval" the decision of the competent authority confirmed that an engine type, engine family or engine group with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from the engine (the engine) meets the technical requirements of this chapter;
3. "Installation test" the procedure by which the competent authority ensures that the engine installed in a vehicle meets the technical requirements of this chapter after any since the type-approval of modifications and/or preferences with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants;
4. "Midterm" the procedure by which the competent authority ensures that the engine in a vehicle meets the technical requirements of this chapter even after any changes made since the installation testing and/or preferences with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants;
5. "Special audit" the procedure by which the competent authority ensures that the engine in a vehicle meets the technical requirements of this chapter also after any significant change in terms of the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants;
6. "Engine type" means a grouping of engines, the in terms of in system J part II annex 1 listed essential characteristics do not differ. at least one unit is made of a type of motor;
7 a set by a manufacturer and type approved by the competent authority summary of engines, which must combine constructionally similar properties in terms of the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and the requirements of this chapter in accordance with "Engine family";
8 a set by a manufacturer, and approved by the competent authority summary of engines, which must combine constructionally similar properties in terms of the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and the requirements of this chapter in accordance with "Engine group", where an adjustment or modification of individual engines is permissible after the type approval within fixed limits;
9. "Parent engine" one of an engine family or engine group selected engine that section 5 meets the requirements of system J part I;
10 "Power" the net power of the engine at rated speed and full load.
11 'Manufacturer' in the front of the competent authority for all aspects of the type-approval and conformity of production responsible person or body. This person or body must be involved in all stages of the construction of the motor. Is the motor only prepared after its original production through appropriate changes and additions for use on a vehicle within the meaning of this chapter, the manufacturer usually is the person or body who made the changes or additions;
12 "Information document" the document to that delivered by the applicant particulars are set to system J part II,
13.
"Information folder" the totality of the data, drawings, photographs and other documents, the applicant to submit the technical service or the competent authority according to the requirements in the information document has.
14 "Information package" the information folder of plus any test reports and other documents that the technical service or the competent authority in the exercise of their functions; added
15 "Type approval certificate" the document with Appendix J of part III, which the competent authority certifies the type approval;
16 "Motor parameter log" the document Appendix J of part VIII, in which all parameters, including the parts (components) and engine settings that affect the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants of the engine including their modifications, detained are.
17 "Instructions for controlling the emission related components and engine parameters" according to § 8a.11 no. 3 for purposes of performing the installation, intermediate or special tests created document.

§ 8a.02 principle 1.
This chapter applies to all motors with a rated power (PN) of 19 kW or more, which are installed in vehicles or machines on board, unless these machines not covered by relevant directives of the European Community with regard to the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants.
The following values must not exceed as a function of the nominal speed n 2 emissions of these engines of carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC), nitrogen oxides (NOX) and particulate (PT): PN [kW] CO [g/kWh] HC [g/kWh] NOx [g/kWh] PT [g/kWh] 19 ≤ PN < 37 5.5 1.5 8.0 0.8 of 37 ≤ PN < 75 5.0 1.3 7.0 0.4 of 75 ≤ PN < 130 5.0 1.0 6.0 0.3 of 130 ≤ PN < 560 3.5 1.0 6.0 0.2 PN ≥ 560 3.5 ≥ 1,0 n 3 150 min-1 = 6.0 of 343 ≤ n < 3 150 min-1 = 45 · n(-0,2) - 3 n < 343 min-1 = 11.0 0.2 3.
Compliance with the rules referred to in point 2 will be determined by a type-approval for an engine type, a group of engine or engine family. Type-approval is certified in a type-approval certificate. The owner or his authorised representative has to attach copy of the type approval certificate the application for examination according to § 2.02. A copy of the type approval certificate and the motor parameters log shall be carried on board.
4. a) an installation check is carried out after the installation of the engine on board, but before his commissioning,. This check, which is part of the initial investigation of the vehicle or a special examination on the basis of the installation of the motor, leads either to the registration of the engine in the certificate to be issued for the first time or to change the existing vessel certificate.
(b) the Commission may waive an installation check referred to in a, if a motor whose rated power PN is less than 130 kW, will be replaced by a motor with the same type-approval. A prerequisite is that the shipowner or his representative tells the replacement of motor, enclosing a copy of the type approval certificate, as well as mention the identification number of the newly built motor of the Commission of inquiry. This changes according to the certificate under number 52 5. intermediate operation checks of the motor must be performed within the framework of the follow-up to section 2.09.
6. after any significant change in a motor, which affects the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants of motor, a special examination must always be carried.
7. the type-approval number and the identification numbers of all the engines installed on board a vehicle which is subject to the requirements of this chapter, are to be noted by the Commission of inquiry into the ship's certificate under number 52.
8. the competent authority may use a technical service for the accomplishment of tasks under this chapter.

§ 8a.03 application for type-approval 1.
An application for type-approval for an engine type, engine family or engine group is by the manufacturer to the competent authority. An information folder and the draft of motor parameters Protocol and the draft of instructions for controlling the exhaust gas relevant components and engine parameter is the application to add. The manufacturer has a motor for the tests of type of to demonstrate the annex 1 line with the listed aspects in annex J, part II.
2. the competent authority determines in the case of an application for type-approval for an engine family or engine group that the submitted application with regard to the selected parent engine for in annex J, part II annex 2 is not representative described engine family or engine group, another is so and, if necessary, an additional to 87A by the competent parent engine to the authorisation referred to in point 1 to provide.
3. an application for type-approval for an engine type, engine family or engine group must not be more than a competent authority. For each engine type to be approved, each engine family to be approved or to be approved motor group is a separate request to make.

§ 8a.04 type-approval procedures 1.
The competent authority in which the application is submitted, granted the type-approval to all engine types, families or engine groups that correspond to the descriptions in the description and meet the requirements of this chapter.
2. the competent authority fills in for each motor type, each engine family or engine group, which approved them, all relevant parts of the type-approval certificate, whose specimen is included in attachment J of part III; It creates or checks the index to the information package. Type-approval certificate are to be numbered J part IV according to the procedure in Appendix. The completed type-approval certificate and its attachments are to be to the applicant.
3. the engine to be approved fulfils its function or it has specific properties only in conjunction with other parts of the vehicle in which it will be installed, and can for this reason compliance with one or more requirements only evaluated, if the engine to be approved with other real or simulated vehicle parts, the scope of the type-approval of engines (those engines) shall similarly restrict. In the type-approval for an engine type, engine family or engine group, all restrictions on their use, as well as perform all installation requirements are in such cases.
4. each competent authority submits a) the other competent authorities whenever the list of engine types, families and motor Group (with the system J part V for details), whose approval of the period granted, denied or revoked;
b) on the request of another competent authority aa) a copy of the type-approval certificate for the engine type, the engine family or the engine group with or without the information package for each engine type, has denied each engine family or engine group, whose permit issued them, or withdrawn, and, where appropriate, bb) the list of engines, which have been manufactured according to the description in section 8a.06 according to the granted type-approval No. 3; It contains the details of Appendix J of part VI.
5. any competent authority submits a copy of the data sheet the Secretariat of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine every year and in addition to receipt of an appropriate Appendix J of part VII of the engine types and engine families motor groups, for which a permit has been granted since the last notification.

8a.05 § modification of authorisations 1.
The competent authority which has granted type-approval, takes the necessary measures to ensure that any change in the details mentioned in the description of documents will be communicated to you.
2. the application for a change or extension of type-approval is exclusively to the competent authority which has granted the original type-approval.
3. mentioned details have been changed in the description documents, to the competent authority issues the following: a) if necessary, revised pages of the information package, whereby the Authority marks each page as that the nature of the change and the date of re-issue are clearly shown. With each new edition of pages is the index to the information package (which is attached to the type-approval certificate as an attachment) according to updated to bring;
(b) a revised (with an extension number), type-approval certificate provided that information in it (except the attachments) has changed or the minimum requirements of this chapter have changed since its original approval date. The reason must emerge from the revised approval certificate clearly for its change and the date of re-issue.
The competent authority which has granted type-approval finds that due to a change made to the information package new tests or exams are justified, inform the manufacturer and issuing the above documents only after performing successful new tests or exams.

§ 8a.06 compliance 1.
To each unit manufactured in conformity with the type approval you must be section 1 attached set features including the type-approval number by the manufacturer in annex J, part I.
2.
The type-approval contains restrictions on the use according to § 8a.04 no. 3, so detailed information on these restrictions and all installation instructions of the manufacturer must be attached every manufactured unit.
3. the manufacturer submitted a list with the identification numbers (serial numbers) of all motors which, these provisions were applicable for the first time in accordance with the requirements of this chapter since the last report or the time to request the authority which has granted type-approval, within 45 days after the end of each calendar year, and immediately following each additional date specified by the authority , have been produced. If they don't come to the expression by the engine coding system, the correlations between the identification numbers and the corresponding engine types, families or motor group and the type-approval number must be specified in this list. In addition, the list must contain specific information if the manufacturer stops producing an approved engine type, engine family approved, or approved motor group. If the competent authority shall require no regular transmission of this list by the manufacturer, it must store the registered data for a period of at least 40 years.

§ 8a.07 (without content) § 8a.08 control of the identification numbers 1.
The competent authority which granted type-approval, shall ensure that the identification numbers of engines produced in conformity with the requirements of this chapter -, if necessary, be registered in cooperation with other competent authorities - and controlled.
2. an additional control of the identification numbers can be done in conjunction with the control of conformity of production according to § 8a.09.
3. with regard to the control of the identification numbers of the manufacturer or his inform their direct buyers as well as the identification numbers of engines established representative of the competent authority on request in the Rhine States and Belgium immediately all the necessary information about which manufactured have been reported no. 3 as § 8a.06 according to.
4. is a producer unable to comply with the requirements set out in § 8a.06 on request of the competent authority, the approval of the engine type, the engine family or the engine group concerned can be withdrawn. In such a case, the notification procedure is applied according to § 8a.10 No. 4.

§ 8a.09 conformity of production 1.
The competent authority which granted type-approval, shall ensure - if necessary, in cooperation with other competent authorities - that appropriate arrangements have been made to ensure effective control of the conformity of production with regard to the requirements of the system J part I section 4.
2. the competent authority which has granted a type approval shall ensure - if necessary, in cooperation with other competent authorities, that the arrangements referred to in paragraph 1 as regards the provisions which would still sufficient J part I section 4 and each engine equipped with a type-approval number according to the requirements of this chapter continue to approved engine type of the description in the type approval certificate and its annexes for the that is equivalent to the approved engine family or engine Group approved.

§ 8a.10 approved non-conformity with the approved engine type, engine family approved or the motor unit 1.
A mismatch exists with the approved engine type, engine family approved or approved motor group, if deviations from the characteristics in the type approval certificate or, where appropriate, of the information package, not approved No. 3 by the competent authority which has granted type-approval according to § 8a.05.
2. the competent authority which has granted type-approval finds that for whom it has granted approval motors, which are provided with a certificate of conformity or an approval mark do not match with the engine type, engine family or the engine group, to take the necessary measures to ensure that the engines in production again agree with the approved engine type, engine family approved or approved motor group. The competent authority which has detected the lack of conformity shall inform the other competent authorities and the Secretariat of the Central Commission for navigation on the Rhine by the measures taken, which can go up to the withdrawal of type-approval.
3. can a competent authority demonstrate that engines that are equipped with a type-approval number do not match with the approved engine type, engine family approved or approved motor group, so it may require of the competent authority which has granted type-approval, that in the production engines on compliance with the approved engine type, engine family approved or approved motor group are checked. The necessary measures are to take within six months after the date of application.
4. the competent authorities shall inform each other and the Secretariat of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine within one month of any withdrawal of type-approval and of the reasons for this.

§ 8a.11 installation, and special examination 1.
The competent authority checks on the occasion of the installation inspection according to § 8a.02 No. 4, at intermediate inspections according to § 8a.02 No. 5 and at special audits according to § 8a.02 No. 6 specified the current state of the motor in the motor parameters log components, calibration and adjust its parameters.
The authority comes to the conclusion that the engine does not match the approved engine type, engine family approved or approved motor group, she can require, order that the conformity of the engine is restored, the type-approval is modified accordingly after § 8a.05 or a measurement of actual emissions.
Is the conformity of the engine is not restored, or is not accordingly changed the type-approval, or the measurements show that emissions do not comply the limits No. 2 according to § 8a.02, refuses to issue a vessel certificate authority, or draws up an already issued certificate.
2. in the case of motors with exhaust aftertreatment system, the function of the exhaust aftertreatment system within the framework of installation -, intermediate - or special audit must be checked.
3. the tests referred to in point 1 are made on the basis of the instructions of the manufacturer for control of exhaust gas relevant components and engine parameters. In this, the manufacturer instructions that are to be created and to be approved by a competent authority, the emission related components, settings, and parameters are specified, under whose use or compliance with ongoing compliance with the emission limit values be assumed can. It contains at least: a) specify of type of motor, the engine family or the engine group with specification of the rated power and rated speed;
b) collection of emission relevant components and engine parameters;
(c) identifying characteristics for the identification of approved emission related components (such as on the components part numbers);
(d) indication of emission relevant engine parameters such as setting ranges of the injection time, the permissible temperature of the cooling water, the maximum back pressure.
For engines with after-treatment systems, these instructions must include also methods to control of the proper operation of the exhaust after-treatment system.

§ 8a.12 competent authorities and technical services 1.
The States of banks of the Rhine and Belgium share with the names and addresses of the competent authorities and technical services of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine, who are responsible for the implementation of this chapter. The technical services must be the European standard about the General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories (EN ISO/IEC 17025: 2000) meet the following conditions: a) engine manufacturers can not be recognized as technical services.
(b) for the purposes of this chapter, a technical service with the consent of the competent authority can use facilities outside of the own body.
2. technical services outside the Member States of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine can be accepted only on the recommendation of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine.

§ 8.02 safety precautions 1 machinery designed and set up have, that they are sufficiently accessible for operation and maintenance and could not endanger persons operating them or wait. You can be secured against unintended operation.
2. on propulsion and auxiliary machinery, boilers, pressure vessels and their accessories, safety devices must be provided.
3. actuators for pressure - and suction fans can be switched off for emergencies outside of the Aufstel lungsraumes and the engine room.
4.
Where necessary, junctions of wires for fuel, lubricating oil and oils used in power transmission systems, switching, drive and heating systems must be shielded or protected in any other appropriate medium to prevent spraying or leaking these liquids on heated surfaces, the air intake of the engine or other source of ignition. The number of connection points in these piping systems must be restricted to a minimum.
5. exposed high-pressure fuel conveying lines of diesel engines between the high pressure fuel pumps and fuel injection devices must be protected by a pipe system that captures escaping fuel at a loss on the high pressure line. The pipe system shall be supplemented by a collector for leaks, and it facilities must be provided, which give an alarm signal in the case of damage to the fuel line; This alarm system is not required for machines with only two cylinders. Machines for anchor winches and spills on open decks not pipe systems are required.
6 insulation of machine parts must § 3.04 no. 3 correspond to paragraph 2.

§ 8.03 powered equipment 1 must ship's propulsion reliably and quickly set in motion, stopped and controlled to can be.
2. the areas a) temperature of the cooling water of the propulsion machinery;
b) pressure of lubricating oil in the engines and transmissions;
(c) oil and air pressure of the reversing system of engines, gearbox and propeller are to monitor, that trigger the alarm when reaching critical values by appropriate institutions.
3. for ships with only one drive machine, the motor does not automatically be shut down except by the overspeed protection.
4. for ships with only one drive machine this may only be equipped with an automatic device to reduce speed, if an automatic speed reduction in the wheelhouse is signaled visually and acoustically and the establishment can be used to reduce speed from the steering station out of operation.
5. shaft bushings must be designed so that no water-polluting lubricants may be.

§ 8.04 exhaust pipes of internal combustion engines 1 exhaust must be completely removed to the outside.
2. the penetration of gases in the various rooms of the ship must be prevented by appropriate measures. Exhaust pipes are led by apartments or the wheelhouse must be accommodated within these spaces in gas-tight sheathing. The space between the exhaust pipe and casing must be connected to the open air.
3. exhaust pipes must be so installed and protected that it can cause a fire.
4. in machinery spaces, exhaust pipes must be sufficiently insulated or cooled. A guard can meet outside the machinery spaces.

Article 8.05 fuel tanks, pipes and accessories 1 liquid fuels must in belonging to the hull or in steel tanks installed in the ship, or if it requires the design of the vessel, be accommodated from an material equivalent with respect to fire resistance. This does not apply tanks help units with a capacity up to 12 l, factory set associated with it.
Fuel tanks must have no common boundaries with drinking water tanks.
2. fuel tanks and fuel lines and other accessories must be so arranged and furnished be that neither fuel nor fuel vapours may accidentally arrive in the vessel premises. Valves on fuel tanks, which are used for the extraction of fuel or dehydration, must be self closing.
3. before the collision bulkhead, no fuel tanks may be located.
4. fuel tanks and their fittings shall be arranged does not have machinery or exhaust pipes.
5. fill openings of fuel tanks must be clearly designated.
6 nozzles for fuel tanks with the exception of the day's consumption tanks have to deck. Nozzles must be fitted with a connector according to the European standard EN 12 827: 1999. These tanks must have a vent pipe which leads above the deck in the open and is set up so that no water can penetrate. The cross-section of this vent pipe must be at least 1.25 times of the fill pipe cross-section.
Tanks for fuels are linked, the cross-section of the connection line must be at least 1.25 times of the fill pipe cross-section.
7 outlet pipes must be immediately equipped with a quick-acting valve on the tank for liquid fuels, which can be operated from the deck, even if the affected premises are closed.
The control device is installed, the cover may be not lockable.
The control device must be marked with red color. The facility is covered, it must be Figure 9 with an edge length of at least 10 cm marked by an icon for quick-acting valve of the tank in accordance with Annex I.
Sentence 1 does not apply to fuel tanks that are mounted directly on the motor.
8 fuel pipes, their connections, seals and fittings must be made from materials that can withstand the mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to be expected. Fuel lines must be not exposed to harmful effects of heat and must be checked over the whole length.
9 fuel tanks must be fitted with an appropriate tracking facility. The dip facility must be readable up to the highest level. Sight glass must be protected against damage, can be shut off at the bottom with self closing facilities and connected again to the tanks above the highest level at the upper end. The material of the sight glasses must remain inflexible at normal ambient temperatures. Sounding pipes may not end up in apartments. Dip tubes that end in a machinery or boiler room, must be fitted with self-closing locking devices.
10. a) fuel tanks must be protected against leakage of fuel during the bunkering by appropriate technical facilities on board, are to be entered in the ship's certificate under number 52.
(b) is being assumed by bunker posts that prevent a leakage of fuel on board by our own technical facilities during the bunkering fuel, dispenses the equipment regulation 3(1)(a) and paragraph 11 11.
Fuel tanks are equipped with an automatic shut-off device, the probe at a tank fill level of 97% need to stop the filling process; These facilities must comply with the "failsafe" design.
The probe operated an electrical contact that could disrupt the passed by the bunker site and fed current loop in the form of a binary signal, the signal at the bunker site using a waterproof plug of a coupling connectors according to the international standard IEC 60309-1: 1999 for direct current of 40 to 50 V, colour white, can be passed 10 h, position of the nose of the help.
12 tanks for fuels must be tightly closable openings that allow you to clean and inspect.
13 fuel tanks connected directly on the drive units and the required driving Motors must be equipped with a device, visually and acoustically displaying in the wheelhouse, that the filling of the tank for further safe operation is no longer sufficient.

Section 8.06 lubricating oil tanks, pipes and accessories 1 lubricating oil must be in belonging to the hull or in steel tanks installed in the ship, or if it requires the design of the vessel, be accommodated from an material equivalent with respect to fire resistance. This does not apply to tanks with a capacity up to 25 l. lubricating oil tanks shall have no common boundaries with drinking water tanks.
2. lubricating oil tanks as well as the associated pipes and other accessories must be so arranged and furnished be that neither oil nor lubricating oil vapour can enter accidentally the vessel premises.
3. before the collision bulkhead, no lubricating oil tanks may be located.
4. lubricating oil tanks and their fittings may not immediately be machinery or exhaust pipes.
5. fill openings of lubricating oil tanks must be clearly designated.
6 lubricating oil pipes, their connections, seals and fittings must be made from materials that can withstand the mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to be expected. The lines may be not exposed to harmful effects of heat and must be checked over the whole length.
7 oil tanks must be fitted with an appropriate tracking facility. The dip facility must be readable up to the highest level. Sight glass must be protected against damage, can be shut off at the bottom with a self closing device and connected again to the tanks above the highest level at the upper end. The material of the sight glasses must remain inflexible at normal ambient temperatures. Sounding pipes may not end up in apartments. Dip tubes that end in a machinery or boiler room, must be fitted with self-closing locking devices.

Section 8.07 tanks for oils used in power transmission systems, switching, drive, and heating systems, pipes and accessories 1.
Oils used in power transmission systems, switching, drive and heating systems must be in the parts belonging to the ship's hull or in steel tanks installed in the ship, or if it requires the design of the vessel, be accommodated from an material equivalent with respect to fire resistance. This does not apply to tanks with a capacity up to 25 l tanks to no common boundaries with drinking water tanks may have set 1.
2. tanks referred to under 1, as well as the associated pipes and other accessories must be so arranged and furnished be that can enter the corresponding oil nor fumes this oil brought into the vessel premises.
3. before the collision bulkhead, no tanks must not be referred to in point 1.
4. tanks may not immediately be arranged over machinery or exhaust pipes for number 1 and their fittings.
5. fill openings of the tanks referred to in point 1 must be clearly designated.
6. the lines for oils according to number 1, their connections, seals and fittings must be made from materials that can withstand the mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to be expected. The lines may be not exposed to harmful effects of heat and must be checked over the whole length.
7 tanks must be fitted with a suitable bearing device referred to in point 1. The dip facility must be readable up to the highest level. Sight glass must be protected against damage, can be shut off at the bottom with a self closing device and connected again to the tanks above the highest level at the upper end. The material of the sight glasses must remain inflexible at normal ambient temperatures. Sounding pipes may not end up in apartments. Dip tubes that end in a machinery or boiler room, must be fitted with self-closing locking devices.

Section 8.08 Lenz facilities 1.
Each waterproof Department must be drainable for themselves. This does not apply to watertight compartments, which are usually hermetically closed shut.
2. ships for which an occupation is prescribed, two independent bilge pumps must have, which may not be placed in the same room and of which at least one must be driven by a motor. Were adequate however these ships propulsion power of less than 225 kW or a carrying capacity less than 350 t, or vessels not intended for the carriage of goods, a water displacement of less than 250 m3, a hand - or motor-bilge pump.
Each of the required pumps must be suitable for any waterproof Department.
3. the minimum flow rate Q1 which first bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula: Q1 = 0.1 · D12 [l/min].
D1 shall be calculated using the following formula: minimum flow rate Q2 of the second bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula: Q2 = 0.1 · D22 [l/m].
D2 shall be calculated using the following formula: however needs to be not greater than the dimension d1 d2 dimension.
At the base of Q2, l refers to the longest watertight Division.
In these formulas mean: l length of the watertight compartment in [m];
D1 of calculated internal diameter of the main Lenz pipe [mm];
D2 of calculated internal diameter of the branch pipe of Lenz in [mm].
4. the bilge pumps on a Lenz system are connected, the inner spring diameter must have at least the level of d2 in mm at least the level d1 in mm and the internal diameter of the branch Lenz tubes.
For ships with less than 25 m L dimensions d1 and d2 can be used down to 35 mm.
5. only self-priming bilge pumps are permitted.
6. in each lenzbaren section with flat base and a width of more than 5 m at least a cleaner must exist on the starboard and port side.
7. the aft peak must be drained via an easily accessible self-closing valve to the main machine room.
8 branch Lenz pipes of individual departments must be connected to the main spring by a stop valve.
Departments or other rooms that are trained as ballast cells, need only about a simple shut-off device on the Lenz system to be connected. This does not apply to holds that are furnished to the ballasting. Filling such load compartments with ballast water shall be by a separate from the spring line, fixed ballast line or branch lines, which can be connected as a flexible wire or using mobile suits with the main Lenz. Foot valves are not permitted for this purpose.
9 cargo hold bilges must be equipped with sighting opportunities.
10 a Lenz system with permanently installed pipe lines exists, shut-off devices must be in Lenz pipes for bilges, intended for the collection of oily water, arranged and accompanied by a seal when closed by a Commission of inquiry. Number and location of these valves must be entered in the certificate.
11 to see a complete equivalent a seal is referred to under 10. The or keys for the locks of the shut-off devices must be stored labelled in a readily accessible and marked place in the engine room.

§ 8.09 institution for the collection of oily water and used oil 1.
Oily water falling during operation can be collected on board. This is the engine-room bilge considered collector.
2. to collect waste oil one or more special container must exist in engine rooms, with a capacity equivalent to at least the 1.5 times amount of waste oil from the sumps of all installed engines and transmissions, as well as the amount of hydraulic oil from the hydraulic oil tanks.
Connecting piece must comply to emptying these containers the European standard EN 1305: 1996.
3. for ships which are used only at short distances, the Commission of inquiry may allow exceptions to paragraph 2.

Section 8.10 noise of ships, especially intake and exhaust noise of motors, are noise of ships 1 to dampen by suitable devices.
2. the noise of vessels in a lateral distance of 25 m from the lift must not exceed 75 dB(A).
3. if dead ships, with the exception of the cover, the noise in a lateral distance of 25 m from the lifts not exceed the value of 65 DB (a).
Chapter 9 electrical equipment article 9.01 General provisions 1 absence for certain parts of a plant specific requirements, is the level of security considered sufficient if the respective parts are manufactured according to applicable European standard or according to the rules of a recognized classification society.
Required documents must be submitted of the Commission of inquiry.
2. on board, following, provided the inquiry with endorsement documents must reside: a) General plans over the entire electrical system.
b) plans of the main, emergency and distribution panels showing the most important technical data such as via Sicherungsnennstromstärken, switching devices;
c) specifications for electrical equipment;
d) cable types indicating the conductor cross-section.
On unmanned vehicles need these documents not on board to find, at any time but must be available to the owner.
3. the plants need for constant inclinations of the vessel up to 15 ° and ambient temperatures inside the 0 ° C to + 40 ° C and on deck from - 20 ° C to + 40 ° C be designed. You must work flawlessly up to these limits.
4. electrical and electronic equipment and devices must be readily accessible and easy to maintain.

§ 9.02 energy supply systems 1.
On vehicles equipped with an electric system, whose energy supply must basically consist of at least two energy sources, so that if an energy source failure, the remaining source of energy capable of is to engage consumers, that are required for the safe passage for at least 30 minutes.
2. sufficient assessment of energy supply must be proven by a current account. Here, an appropriate simultaneity factor may be taken into account.
3. regardless of number 1 applies for the energy sources of controls (steering systems) section 6.04.

Article 9.03 protection against touching, penetration of foreign bodies and water, the minimum degree of protection of fixed parts of a plant must meet the particular site of in accordance with the table below: site minimum protection class (according to IEC publ. 60529: 1992) Generators Motors transformers switchboards distribution switchgear installation material light operating, machine and rowing machine room IP 22 IP 22 IP 22(2) IP 22(1)(2) IP 44 IP 22 holds IP 55 IP 55 battery - and colour spaces IP 44 & (Ex)(3) free deck , open control desks IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 closed wheelhouse IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 flats except plumbing and wet rooms IP 22 IP 20 IP 20 sanitary and wet areas of IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 55 IP 44 notes: (1) for devices with high heat: IP 12 (2) if the protection is ensured by the device itself , the installation area must comply with type of protection as indicated in the table.
(3) electrical equipment of the type certified security, such as a) European standards EN 50014: 1997; 50015: 1998; 50016: 2002; 50017: 1998; 50018: 2000; 50019: 2000 and 50020: 2002 or b) the appropriate IEC Publication 60079 as amended on October 1, 2003.

§ 9.04 explosion protection
In rooms where explosive gases or gas mixtures can accumulate (as in battery rooms or in rooms that are intended for the storage of flammable substances), only electrical equipment in explosion-protected design (certified safety) are allowed. Switching devices must be installed in these rooms for lights and other electrical appliances. The explosion protection must correspond to the properties of any explosive gases and gas mixtures (explosion group, temperature class).

Article 9.05 earthing 1.
In systems with voltages above 50 V, a protective grounding is required.
2. Betriebsmäßig not under voltage standing metal parts that are accessible to the touch, base frame and casing of machines, equipment and lights, must be separately grounded unless they are metallic electrically connected by the way of their incorporation with the body of the ship.
3. housing mobile consumer and handheld devices must be grounded by an additional, under normal operating conditions no current-carrying protective conductor in the cable.
This does not apply when you use by safety isolating transformers and units with protective insulation (double insulation).
4. the cross section of the protective conductor must be at least the data in the following table: outer conductor cross-section [mm²] minimum protection wire cross section in insulated cables [mm²] separately moved [mm²] 0.5 to 4 equal to the external conductor cross-section 4 > 4 to 16 equal to the outer conductor cross-section equal to the outer conductor cross-section > 16 to 35 16 16 > 35 to 120 equal half outside conductor cross section equal to the half outside conductor cross-section > 120 70 70 section 9.06 permissible maximum voltages 1 voltages must not exceed the following values : Type of plant permissible maximum voltage DC AC three-phase a) power and heating plants, including the commonly used Sockets 250 V 250 V 500 V b) lighting, command, and alarm systems, including the commonly used Sockets 250 V 250 V - c) Sockets for power hand devices used on open decks or in narrow or damp metal rooms, with the exception of boilers and tanks 1 General 50 V(1) 50 V(1) - 2 with use a protection or isolation transformer , the only device feeds - 250 V(2) - 3 when using devices with protective insulation (double insulation) 250 V 250 V - d) mobile consumers such as electrical equipment for containers, shaft-mounted engines, portable fans, pumps, which normally not be moved during operation and whose touch accessible conductive parts by using a protective conductor in the cable are grounded and connected except by this earth through their lineup or a further head with the body of the ship 250 V 250 V 500 V e)
Sockets for power hand devices used in boilers and tanks 50 V(1) are 50 V(1) - comments: (1) higher production this voltage from networks voltage must be a galvanic separation (safety transformer used.
(2) the Sekundarstromkreis must be completely isolated from earth ground.
2. under higher voltages are compliance with the necessary protection measures allowed for: a) power plants, whose Leistungen so require;
b) on-board special equipment such as radio and ignition equipment.

Article 9.07 distribution systems 1.
The following distribution systems are allowed for direct current and 1-phase AC: a) 2-conductor, of which one is grounded (L1, N, PE);
(b) 1-wire and hull return, only for localised plants (such as launch complexes of a combustion engine, cathodic protection) (L1/PEN);
(c) 2-conductor insulated from the hull (L1/L2/PE).
The following distribution systems are allowed 2 for three-phase (3-phase alternating current): a) = 4-conductor with an earthed neutral point without hull return line (L1/L2/L3/N/PE) (TN-S Network) or (TT);
(b) 3-wire isolated from the body of the ship (L1/L2/L3/PE) = (lT net);
(c) 3-conductor systems with earthed star point and hull back line, but not for final circuits (L1/L2 / L3/PEN).
3. the Commission may allow the use of other systems.

Article 9.08 connection on shore or other external networks 1 supply lines from land and other external networks to wiring systems will need on board via fixed terminals or fixed plugs and Sockets can be connected. Cable connections may not be claimed on the train.
2. the ship's hull can be earthed effectively when the connection voltage over 50 v. Grounding connections must be specially marked.
3. by switching devices of connections, it must be ensured that a parallel operation of the onboard network generators with the national network or another external network is avoided. A short parallel operation to switch without power interruption of the systems is allowed.
4. the connection must be protected against short circuit and overload.
5. on the main switchboard must appear, whether the connection is live.
6 display devices must be installed in DC the polarity and to compare with three-phase the phase sequence of the port with the ship network.
7 a billboard connection must specify: a) the measures to be taken for making the connection.
b) type of current and voltage in AC in addition the frequency.

Article 9.09 power supply to other vehicles 1.
Electricity supplied to other vehicles, a separate connection device must be present. When using connectors for the power supply to other vehicles for rated currents over 16 A, facilities (such as switches or interlocks) must be provided, which allow the production or separation of the connection only in disconnected.
2. cable connections may not be claimed on train.
3. § is 9.08 No. 3 to 7 apply accordingly.

Article 9.10 generators and motors 1 generators, motors and their terminal boxes must for inspections, measurements and repairs be accessible. The type of protection must comply with the site (article 9.03).
2. generators driven by the main engine, the propeller shaft or a serving other purposes help aggregate, must be the normal operation occurring speed range according to.

Article 9.11 accumulators 1 batteries need to accessible and be installed in a way that it cannot move during movements of the vessel. They must be placed not on places where they are exposed to excessive heat, extreme cold, spray water or steaming.
You may not be housed not in control homes, apartments and cargo holds. This does not apply to batteries in portable devices, as well as for accumulators with a loading capacity of less than 0.2 kW.
2. rechargeable batteries with a loading capacity of more than 2.0 kW - calculated from the maximum charging current and the nominal voltage of accumulators, taking into account the charging characteristics of the loading facilities - must be housed in a special room. Accommodation in a Cabinet is sufficient when setting up on deck.
Accumulators with a loading capacity of up to 2.0 kW may be well below deck in a Cabinet or box. You can be open in a machine room or in other ventilated places; in such cases, they must be protected against falling objects and dripping water.
3. interior surfaces of all rooms intended for accumulators, cabinets or boxes and shelves and other components must be protected against the harmful effects of electrolyte.
4 closed rooms, cabinets or boxes in which accumulators are installed, can be ventilated efficiently. Artificial ventilation is to provide charging services of more than 2 kW for nickel-cadmium accumulators and of more than 3 kW for lead-acid batteries.
The supply air is below and to lead the exhaust up so that a perfect extraction of gases is guaranteed. Ventilation channels must contain no devices such as gate valves, which obstruct the free passage of air.
5. the required air quantity is Q to calculate using the following formula: Q = 0.11 · 1 · n [m3/h].
Mean in this formula: l = ¼ of the maximum current of the loading equipment in (A);
n = number of cells.
When accumulators in buffer circuit with the on-board power supply, other calculation methods for the required air flow from the Commission of inquiry may be admitted with appropriate charging curve of loading facilities unless they are based on provisions of the recognised classification societies or relevant standards.
6 in the case of natural ventilation, the cross-section of the ducts must be dimensioned such that the required air flow is achieved at an air velocity of 0.5 m/s. The cross section must be at least 80 cm2 for lead-acid accumulators and 120 cm2 for nickel-cadmium accumulators.
7 in the case of artificial ventilation a fan must exist preferably a suction fan, whose motor not included in the gas or air stream must be arranged.
This fan must be running so that sparks at touch of a grand piano with the fan housing, as well as electrostatic charges are excluded.
8. at the doors or covers of battery rooms, cabinets or boxes, a symbol of 'fire, open light and smoking forbidden' shown in Figure 2 of annex I with a diameter of at least 10 cm must be attached.

Article 9.12 switchgear 1 Control Panel a) devices, switches, fuses, and instruments in control panels must be clearly arranged and accessible for maintenance and repair work.
Terminal blocks must be voltage up to 50 V and such for voltages above 50 V separately arranged and marked accordingly.
(b) on the panels, labels must be attached for all switches and devices with indication of the circuit.
Backups must be marked with the rated voltage and circuit.
(c) devices with an operating voltage of 50 V, are located behind the doors live parts of this equipment against accidental contact with the open doors must be protected.
(d) materials for control panels must be mechanically fixed, permanently, flame-retardant, self-extinguishing and may be non-hygroscopic.
e) are inserted in switchboards NH fuse-links, to stay close to the panels of appropriate tools and protective equipment to the drag and drop this inserts.
2. switches, protective devices a) generator and consumer circuits must be protected in any non-earthed conductor against short circuit and overcurrent. This control system can be used with short circuit and overload trip or fuses.
Circuits for the electrical drive control devices (steering systems), as well as their control circuits must be protected against short circuit. Thermal triggers in circuit breakers are available, these must be made ineffective or at least to the twofold nominal current.
(b) consumer goods issues from the main control panel must be fitted with currents over 16 A with load switches or circuit breakers.
(c) consumers; they need to be fed for the marine drive, the controls (steering systems), the rudder position indicator, that navigation and safety systems are necessary, and consumers with a rated current of 16 A on a separate circuit.
(d) circuits for consumers who are required for the propulsion and maneuvering, need to be fed directly from the main switchboard.
(e) switching devices must be selected according to their nominal current, their thermal and dynamic strength and its switching capacity. Need to switch at the same time all live conductors. The position must be visible.
(f) fuse-links must have a closed room of melting and consist of a ceramic or equivalent material. You can be replaced so that there is no risk of contact for yourself.
3. measuring and monitoring equipment a) for generator, batteries - and distribution circuit, which must be present for a safe operation of the system required measuring and monitoring equipment.
(b) in the case of unearthed with a voltage above 50 V, a suitable ground fault monitoring device with optical and acoustic warning must exist. For secondary installations such as control circuits, on a ground fault monitoring device can be omitted.
4. installation of control panels a) control panels must be installed in easily accessible and sufficiently ventilated rooms in a way that they are protected against water and mechanical damage.
Pipes and air ducts are used, it must be so arranged that the switchgear is not compromised by leaks. Their installation in the vicinity of switchboards cannot be avoided, the tubes in this area may have no detachable connections.
b) cabinets and niches, where open relays are housed, must consist of flame-retardant material or be protected by a lining with metal or other non-combustible materials.
(c) main control panels must be fitted with insulating Grätin gene or mats at voltages above 50 V as site isolation.

§ 9.13 emergency shut-off devices for oil furnaces, fuel pumps, fuel separators and engine room fan must be present outside of the installation at the emergency centre.

Article 9.14 installation materials 1 cable gland of devices must be the connecting cables according to designed and tailored to the types of cable used.
2. Sockets of different distribution systems with different voltages or frequencies have to be distinctive.
3. switch must switch all non-earthed conductors of a circuit at the same time. In non-earthed networks, single-pole switch in lighting circuits are allowed by residential, except in washing and bathrooms and other wet rooms.
4. when currents over 16 A, Sockets with a switch must be locked so that inserting or pulling the plug under power is possible.

Article 9.15 cables 1 must be flame-retardant, self-extinguishing and resistant cable against water and oil.
In the apartments use can be permitted by other types of cable on the condition, that they are effectively protected, flame-resistant and self extinguishing.
(For determining the flammability of electrical cables are a) the IEC 60332-1: 1993 publications, 60332-3: 2000, and b) recognized equivalent regulations of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
2. for power and lighting systems, cables with a minimum cross section conductor per tube of 1.5 mm2 must be used.
3. metal reinforcements,-abschirmungen and coats of cables must be used in normal operation not as conductor or protective conductor.
4. metal shields and coats of cables in power and lighting installations must be earthed at least at one end.
5. the design of the conductor cross section must comply with the maximum permissible Leiterendtemperatur (current-carrying capacity), as well as the permissible voltage drop. This may be based on the rated voltage, not more than 5% for lighting and 7% for power and heating, between the main switchboard and the respectively most unfavorable point of attachment.
6 cables must be protected against the risk of mechanical damage.
7 through the fixing of the cables it must be ensured that any train loads within the permissible limits remain.
8. If cable is passed through bulkheads or decks, mechanical strength, tightness and fire resistance of these bulkheads and decks must not be impaired through the grommets.
9 terminals and connections of all conductors must be designed that preserved the original electrical, mechanical, fire retardant, and, if necessary, fire-resistant properties of the cable. The number of cable connections must be limited to a minimum.
10 cable for portable control houses must be sufficiently flexible and possess an insulation, the sufficient flexibility until - 20 ° c and in particular to vapours, UV rays and ozone is resistant.

Section 9.16 lighting installations 1 lamps must be so installed, that flammable objects or components can not be ignited by the heat produced by the lamps.
2. lights on the open deck must be so arranged that the recognition of signal lights is not affected.
3. two or more lamps in a machinery or boiler room are available, they must be distributed on at least two circuits. This also applies to rooms with cooling machinery, hydraulic machinery, or electric motors.

Article 9.17 signal lights 1 control panels for signal lights must be installed in the wheelhouse. You must be powered by a separate cable from the main control panel or can be supplied by two independent subdivisions.
2. signal lights must be powered separately from the control panel for lights, protected and switched.
3. a failure of the devices according to § 7.05 shall not interfere with the operation of the lights controlled by them no. 2.
4. several locally and functionally related lights may be jointly supplied, switched and monitored. The monitoring device must already report the failure of a light. In double-deck signal lights (two signal lights built in case one above the other) both light sources may not operate.

section 9.18 (without content) - article 9.19 alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment alarm and safety systems for monitoring and protecting the machine-technical installations must the following requirements: a) alarm systems: alarm systems are to rebuild, that failure in the alarm system may not cause failure of the device to be monitored or the system.
Binary encoder are run in the quiescent current principle or as a screened circuit principle.
Visual alarms shall remain visible until the Elimination of the fault; an acknowledged alarm can be distinguished from an unacknowledged. Each alarm is acoustically to report. Acoustic alarms must be deleted. Deleting an acoustic alarm triggering an alarm caused by new causes can not be prevented.
Deviations are possible for alarm systems with less than 5 measurement points.
(b) security systems: security systems are so run you to shut down the vulnerable plant before reaching critical operating conditions, reduce or encourage on a permanently manned location.
Binary encoder are run in the open-circuit principle.
Security systems are not self-monitoring, its function must be verifiable.
Security systems are independently run by other systems.

Article 9.20 electronic equipment 1 General information
The testing requirements apply only to electronic devices that are required for controls (steering systems) and machinery for the propulsion of the vehicle, including its peripheral devices, referred to in point 2.
2. testing requirements a) the following test loads must not cause damage or malfunction of electronic devices. The tests according to relevant international standards (such as IEC Publication 60092504: 2001) must be carried up on the cold test meter, where the function is to check.
b) voltage and frequency variations size deviation continuously for a short time General frequency ± 5% ± 10% 5 s voltage ± 10% ± 20% 1.5 s battery operating voltage + 30% / - 25 c) heat testing of the DUT is heated within a half an hour at 55 ° C and for 16 hours at this temperature held after reaching the steady-state temperature. Then, a function test is carried out.
d) cold test is the DUT switched from-25 ° C, cooled and held for two hours at this temperature. Then, increase the temperature to 0 ° C, and a function test carried out.
e) vibration test vibration tests should be carried out with the resonance frequency of the device or components in all three axes for a period of 90 minutes each. Determined no distinct resonance vibration examination at 30 Hz.
The vibration test takes place with sinusoidal oscillation within the following limits: General: f = 2,0 to 13,2 Hz; a = ± 1 mm (amplitude a = ½ working stroke);
f = 13.2 Hz-100 Hz; Acceleration ± 0, 7 g.
 
Resources that are to be fitted to diesel engines or steering gear, are to consider as follows: f = 2,0 to 25 Hz; a = ± 1, 6mm (amplitude a = ½ working stroke);
f = 25 Hz to 100 Hz. Acceleration ± 4 g.
 
Sensors for installation in exhaust pipes of diesel engines may be subject to considerably higher stresses. This is taken into account in the assessments.
(f) testing electromagnetic compatibility must be 610004-2: 1995, 61000-4-3: 2002, on the basis of international standards IEC publications 6100044: 1995 with the test level 3.
(g) proof that the electronic equipment comply with these test requirements, is from the manufacturer. The attestation of a recognized classification society is regarded as proof.

Article 9.21 electromagnetic compatibility, electrical and electronic equipment must not be impaired by electromagnetic disturbances in their function. General measures should equal footing across a) decoupling of the transmission paths between the source of interference and immunity depression;
(b) the reduction of the noise causes on the sources of interference;
(c) reducing the susceptibility to the fault sinks.
Chapter 10 equipment article 10.01 anchor equipment 1 ships intended ship-borne barges with L not exceeding 40 m, to the carriage of goods, except equipped with bow anchors be, whose maximum laden mass P is calculated using the following formula: P = k · B · T [kg].
Mean in this formula: k coefficient, which takes into account the relationship between L and B, as well as the type of vehicle: for barges but k = put c;
c number of experience according to the following table: Sustainability experience number c up to 400 t 45 about 400 tons up to 650 t 55 about 650 t up to 1 000 t 65 over 1 000 t 70 the Commission may admit that ships with a capacity of not more than 400 t, used because of their design and intended use only on short specific routes , for bow anchor, only 2/3 of the total mass P are required.
2. passenger vessels and vessels not intended for the carriage of goods, except pusher craft equipped with bow anchors be to their total mass P calculated according to the following formula: P = k · B · T [kg].
For passenger ships, which are intended to run, below km 885 (Emmerich) is to calculate the total mass P according to the following formula: P = k · B + 4 af [kg].
In these formulas mean: k is to use coefficient referred to in point 1, but in determining the number of experience of c the displacement in m3 in the ship's certificate instead of the load-bearing capacity.
Af frontal wind surface in m2.
3. vessels must be equipped with stern anchors to number 1 with L not more than 86 m, whose maximum laden mass amounts to 25% of the mass of P.
Ships with L greater than 86 m must be equipped with stern anchors whose maximum laden mass amounts to 50% of the mass of P referred to in point 1 or 2.
Are exempt from the equipment with stern anchors: a) ships, for a total mass of the stern anchors of less than 150 kg; result for vessels referred to in point 1 the last sentence is there to use the reduced Bugankermasse;
b) lighters.
4. vessels intended for moving rigid associations with L not more than 86 m, must be equipped with stern anchors whose maximum laden mass is 25% of the greatest mass P calculated for the compilations of (considered as a nautical unit) approved in the certificate referred to in point 1.
Ships that are moving rigid associations with L greater than 86 m of descent determines, must be equipped with stern anchors whose maximum laden mass amounts to 50% of the greatest mass P calculated for the compilations of (considered as a nautical unit) approved in the certificate referred to in point 1.
5. anchor mass determined according to the number 1 to 4 may be reduced in certain special anchors.
6. the total mass P specified for bow anchors may be distributed on one or two anchors. She must be reduced by 15% if equipped the ship with only a bow anchor and the anchor Hawse in the Mittellängsebene is arranged.
Mass prescribed for stern anchor may be distributed for pusher craft and ships with L greater than 86 m on one or two anchors.
The mass of the lighter anchor must be not less than 45% of this total.
7 anchor cast iron are not allowed.
8 anchor must be permanently marked with their mass in raised letters.
9. for anchor with a mass of more than 50 kg anchor winches must be present.
10 bow anchor chain must have following minimum length: a) 40 m for vessels with L of not more than 30 m; b) 10 m more than L, if L is between 30 and 50 m.
c) 60 m for vessels with L by more than 50 m. chain of stern anchor must be at least 40 m long. However, ships that must to stop to Bow Valley, stern anchor chain must have length of at least 60 m.
11 R of a chain is following formulas to calculate the minimum breaking force: a) at anchor with a mass up to 500 kg: R = 0.35 · P' [kN];
b) at anchor with a mass of 500 to 2000 kg: c) at anchor with a mass exceeding 2000 kg: R = 0.25 · P' [kN].
Means in these formulas: P' theoretical, determined according to paragraphs 1 to 4 and 6 mass of each anchor.
The breaking strength of the anchor chains is to refer to the standards in force in one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
12 the minimum tensile strength of the chain is be selected heavier anchor than is apparent from paragraphs 1 to 6, according to the existing larger mass to determine.
These heavier anchors and the corresponding stronger anchor chains on board, only the target values for the mass of the anchors and the minimum breaking force are paragraphs 1 to 6 and 11 in the certificate to enter.
13 connection parts (vertebrae) must withstand a tensile force between anchor and chain, which is 20% higher than the breaking strength of the corresponding chain.
14 cables instead of anchor chains is permitted. Wire ropes must have the same strength as the prescribed anchor chains, but their length must be greater than 20%.

Article 10.02 other equipment 1 following equipment according to the Rhine navigation police regulation must at least be present: a) radiotelephone installation;
b) devices and devices that are required to provide the prescribed Visual and audible, as well as to the designation of vessels;
(c) independent from the on-board power supply replacement lights for the prescribed lights for the lay-up.
At least the following containers must also be present: a) marked containers for domestic waste;
b) per a marked container made of steel or another shock-resistant and non-combustible material with tight-fitting lids of sufficient size, but at least 10 l capacity, to accommodate of the aa) oily rags, bb) solid hazardous waste, cc) liquid hazardous wastes, dd) slops, ee) other fatty ship-generated waste.
The container after the double letters cc and dd are required only if this waste.
2. Furthermore, must be at least present: a) rope for mooring: vessels must be equipped with three wire rope to the mooring. Their minimum length shall be: first cable: L + 20 m, but not more than 100 m, second cable: 2/3 of the first rope, third cable: 1/3 of the first rope.
Ships with L of less than 20 m may be omitted on the shortest cable. These ropes must be designed for a minimum breaking force RS, is to calculate the following formula: a certificate of in accordance with European standard EN 10 204: 1991, certificate form 3.1, on board must reside for the prescribed wire ropes. These ropes must be replaced with other cables of same length and same minimum breaking force. The minimum breaking strength for these ropes must be demonstrated in a certificate.
b) wire ropes for towing: tow boats must be equipped with a number of reasonable use of wire ropes.
The main wire rope must be at least 100 m long and its breaking load kN at least one third of the total power in kW of drive machines correspond to.
Motor vessels suitable for towing and pusher craft must be length equipped at least with a tow cable 100 m, whose Tensile strength corresponds to at least one quarter of the total output in kN in kW of engines;
(c) a heaving line;
(d) a land bridge at least 0.40 m width and at least 4 m in length, whose Seiten by a bright Strip are marked; This land bridge must be equipped with a handrail. The Commission of inquiry may allow shorter country bars for small vehicles;
(e) a boat hook;
(f) a suitable first-aid kit with a content according to a standard of a Rhine riparian State or Belgium. The first-aid kit must be kept in the apartment or in the wheelhouse and so placed that he sure can be reached easily and in case of need. Are first aid kits obscured placed, must be marked the cover by a symbol for first-aid kit in accordance with Annex I figure 8 with a side length of at least 10 cm;
(g) a double glass, 7 x 50, or larger lens diameter;
h) a poster providing clues to the rescue and resuscitation of drowning man;
(i) a from the steering station operated headlamps.
3. on vessels with a Board height of more than 1.50 m above the empty water line a Board porch or head must exist.

Section 10.03 portable fire extinguishers 1.
In the following places EN 3-7:2007 and must exist per one portable fire extinguisher according to the European standard DIN EN 3-8:2007: a) in the wheelhouse;
(b) near each entrance from deck to residential premises;
(c) near each entrance to not by living in accessible premises, which are heating, cooking or cooling devices, using solid or liquid fuels or liquefied petroleum gas;
(d) at each entrance to the engine and boiler rooms.
(e) at suitable locations in the lower part of engine and boiler rooms, arranged so that the way to a fire extinguisher from any point of the space from is more than 10 meters.
2 only a filler of at least 6 kg powder extinguisher or other portable fire extinguishers of extinguishing capacity may be used for portable fire extinguishers required in paragraph 1. You must be suitable for the fire classes A, B and C. Spray fire extinguisher foam are different of them on ships where no liquefied natural gas facilities are installed, with up to - 20 ° C Frost-proof water-film-forming foam agents (AFFF-AR) admitted, even if they are not suitable for the fire class C. The minimum of these fire extinguishers must be 9 litres. All fire extinguishers must be suitable for the extinguishing fires in electrical equipment up to 1 000 v DC.
3. in addition powder, wet or foam fire extinguishers may be used, which are suitable for the fire class that most closely applies to the room for which they are intended.
4. portable fire extinguishers with CO2 as the extinguishing agent may be used only for extinguishing fires in kitchens and electrical equipment. The Massecuite of this fire extinguisher must be not more than 1 kg per 15 m3 volume of space in which they are kept and used.
5. portable fire extinguishers must be checked at least every two years by an expert. About the audit a flag signed by the competent person on the fire extinguisher is to install, indicating the date of inspection should.
6. portable fire extinguishers are covered on, must be marked the cover by a symbol for fire extinguishers in accordance with Annex I figure 3 with a side length of at least 10 cm.

§ 10.03a fixed installed fire extinguishing systems for protection of homes, control buildings and passenger spaces 1.
Only appropriate automatic pressure water spraying systems may be used for the protection of homes, control buildings and passenger spaces as permanently installed fire-fighting systems.
2. the equipment must be a - or rebuilt only by specialist companies.
3. the equipment must be made of steel or equivalent non-combustible materials.
4. the equipment can spray over the surface of the largest room to be protected at least a water volume of 5 l / m2 per minute.
5. systems spraying smaller quantities of water, must have a type-approval on the basis of the IMO resolution A 800 (19) or another, by the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine standards. Type-approval is carried out by a recognized classification society or an accredited testing institution. The accredited testing institution must the European norm about the General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories (EN ISO/IEC 17025: 2000) are sufficient.
6. the facilities are a) before using the first time, b) before release, c) before re-commissioning after a significant modification or repair, and d) regularly to check at least every two years by an expert. Tests can perform from a specialist a specialist company for fire extinguishing systems referred to in d.
7. when the test referred to in point 6, the expert or the expert has to check whether the equipment complies with the requirements of this paragraph. The examination shall cover at least: a) external inspection of the entire system, b) control of the functioning of the safety equipment and the nozzles, c) control of the pressure vessel pumps system.
8. about the test is a certificate signed by the expert or experts to be, indicating the date of inspection should.
9. the number of the existing equipment is to be noted in the ship's certificate.

section 10.03 b fixed installed fire extinguishers extinguishing agents for the protection of engine, boiler and pump rooms may be used for protection of engine, boiler and pump rooms 1 in fixed fire extinguishing systems the following extinguishing agents: a) CO2 (carbon dioxide);
b) HFC 227ea (heptafluoropropane);
c) IG-541 (52% nitrogen, 40% argon, 8% carbon dioxide) d) FK-5-1-12 (Dodecafluoro-2-methyl-3-pentanone).
Other extinguishing agents are permitted only on the basis of recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine.
2. ventilation, air intake a) combustion air must not be sucked in for the necessary operation internal combustion engines rooms to be protected by fixed fire extinguishing equipment. This does not apply if there are two separate, gas-tight separated main engine room, or if in addition to the main engine room a separate machine room with a bow rudder drive, moving under its own power is guaranteed by the fire in the main engine room.
(b) existing forced ventilation of the room to be protected must switch off automatically when the fire extinguishing system.
(c) devices must be present to which all openings, which from the ambient air to be protected or escaping gas can leave, can quickly be closed. The lock state must be clearly identifiable.
(d) the air flowing from the overpressure valves of compressed air tanks installed in the engine room must be run to the outside.
(e) emergent in the case of the influx of the extinguishing agent or vacuum may not destroy the surrounding parts of the room to be protected. The pressure must be safe.
f) protected areas must have a way for extracting the extinguishing agent and fire gases. Suction devices are available, these should can not switch on during the erasure.
3. fire alarm system of the space to be protected is to monitor through an appropriate fire alarm system. The message can be perceived in the wheelhouse, the apartments and the space to be protected.
4. piping system a) the extinguishing agent must be led by a solid threaded piping system to the space to be protected and distributed there. The piping and the corresponding fittings made of steel must be manufactured within the room to be protected. Tank connecting pipes and expansion joints are excluded, provided that the materials used in the event of a fire have equivalent properties. The pipes are both in - as to protect from walled against corrosion.
(b) the vents must be attached that the extinguishing agent is evenly distributed and so. In particular, the extinguishing agent under the floor boards must act.
5. release mechanism a) fire extinguishing systems with automatic activation are disallowed.
(b) the fire extinguishing must be thrown at a convenient place outside the room to be protected.
(c) selector must be so installed that whose operation also in case of fire is possible and in case of damage due to fire or explosion in the space to be protected the amount required for this extinguishing can be fed.
Non-mechanical actuators must be powered by two different independent energy sources these energy sources must be located outside the room to be protected. Control cables must thus be in the protected area, that they remain functional in the event of a fire at least 30 minutes. For electric cables, this requirement is met, if they the standard IEC 60 33121: 1999, meet.
Actuators are installed, must be marked the cover by the symbol "Fire extinguisher" according to annex I figure 6 with a side length of at least 10 cm and the following text in red letters on a white background: "fire extinguisher
Installation d ´ extinction Brandblusinstallatie".
(d) the fire extinguishing system to protect of several spaces is intended, the selector for each room must be separated and clearly marked.
(e) in the case of each release mechanism, a user instructions in German, French and Dutch language must be clearly visible and affixed in a permanent version. They must in particular information about aa) the activation of the fire extinguishing;
BB) the need to control, that all persons have left the room to be protected;
CC) the behavior of the crew when triggered and when entering the room to be protected after triggering or flooding in particular with regard to the possible occurrence of hazardous substances;
DD), disruption of the fire extinguishing system contain the behaviour of the crew in the case.
(f) the instructions must point out that the internal combustion engines in the room with air intake from the room to be protected out of service are prior to activation of the fire extinguishing system.
6 alarm system a) fixed built-in fire extinguishers must be provided with an audible and visual alarm system.
(b) the warning system must automatically triggered first activation to activation of the fire extinguishing. The warning signal must sound a reasonable time before the extinguishing agent and may not be switched off.
(c) the warning signals shall be clearly visible in the spaces to be protected and their access and clearly audible under operating conditions with the largest equity noise. You must differ from all other acoustic and optical signal character in the room to be protected.
(d) the acoustic warning signals must be clearly audible even with doors closed connection under the operating conditions with the largest internal noise in the adjacent rooms.
(e) the alarm system not self-monitoring is with regard to short circuit, broken wire and voltage drop, its function must be verifiable.
f) at every entrance of a room, which can be loaded with extinguishing agent, a sign with the following text in red letters on a white background must be clearly visible: "caution, fire extinguisher!
When you hear the warning signal (description of the signal), immediately leave the room!
Attention, installation d ' extinction d ' has quitter immédiatement ce local au signal (description you signal)!
Let op, brandblusinstallatie!
Bij het in werking treden van het alarmsignaal (omschrijving van het signaal) deze ruimte onmiddellijk verlaten! "."
7 pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes a) pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes must meet the regulations in one of the Rhine River States or Belgium,.
(b) pressure vessels must be in accordance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
c) pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes must be installed in apartments.
(d) the temperature in the cabinets and exhibition halls of pressure vessels must not exceed 50 ° C.
(e) cabinets or installation rooms must be firmly anchored on deck and have air vents which are so arranged that no escaping gas inside the ship can penetrate in the event of a leakage of pressure vessels. Direct connections to other spaces are not allowed.
8 quantity of extinguishing agent is the quantity of extinguishing agent to protect more than one space, the total quantity of extinguishing agent available to be not greater than the amount that is required for the greatest space to be protected.
9 installation, testing, and documentation of a) the system must be installed only by a specialist company for fire extinguishing systems or rebuilt. The requirements (product data sheet, safety data sheet) of the manufacturer of the extinguishing agent and of the equipment manufacturer must be observed.
b) is aa) before first use, bb) cc before release,) before a significant change or repair and dd) regularly to check at least every two years by an expert. Tests dd can perform double referred also by a specialist a specialist company for fire extinguishing systems.
(c) in the case of the examination, the expert or the expert has to check whether the system meets the requirements of this paragraph.
d) the test shall at least include: aa) external inspection of the entire institution.
BB) check of the pipes for leaks;
CC) control of the functioning of the controls and meters;
DD) check of the tank pressure and content;
EE) check of the tightness and the closing devices of the space to be protected;
FF) inspection of fire alarm system;
Gg) testing of the alarm system.
(e) testing is a certificate signed by the expert or experts to be, indicating also the date of inspection should.
(f) the number of permanently installed fire-fighting systems is to be noted in the ship's certificate.
10 CO2 - fire-extinguishing fire extinguishing systems, which are operated with CO2 as the extinguishing agent, comply the requirements referred to in point 1 to 9, the following provisions: a) CO2 containers must be placed outside the room to be protected in a room separate from other rooms gas-tight or Cabinet. This installation rooms and cabinets doors must open outwards, be lockable and on the outside with a symbol of a "Warning of general danger" according to annex I be marked image 4 with a height of at least 5 cm, as well as the addition of "CO2" in the same colour and height.
(b) below-deck installation spaces for CO2 containers must be accessible only from the outside. These spaces must have a their own, completely separate from other ventilation systems on board, adequate artificial ventilation system with extraction ducts.
(c) the filling degree of the container with CO2 shall not exceed 0.75 kg / l. For the specific volume of the relaxed CO2 gas are 0,56 m3/kg basis to lay.
(d) the volume of CO2 for the room to be protected must be at least 40% of the gross volume of the space. This volume must occur to 120 seconds. Was feeding should be manageable.
(e) the opening of the tank valves and pressing of the flood valve must be by separate control actions.
f) who mentioned adequate time is under number 6 letter b at least 20 seconds. The delay must be ensured by a reliable institution up to the submission of the CO2 gas.
(11 HFC-227ea - fire extinguishing systems fire extinguishing systems, which are operated with HFC-227ea as the extinguishing agent, conform requirements referred to in point 1 to 9, the following provisions: a) are several protected spaces with different gross volumes of space, each room with an own fire extinguisher is to be provided.
(b) every tank containing HFC-227ea and is positioned in the room to be protected must be fitted with a pressure relief. They have safely leave the contents of the container in the room to be protected if the tank fire impacts is exposed and the fire extinguishing system was triggered not.
(c) each tank must be equipped with a device which allows the control of the gas pressure.
(d) the filling degree of the container shall not exceed 1.15 kg / l. For the specific volume of the relaxed HFC-227ea are 0,1374 m3/kg basis to lay.
(e) the volume of HFC-227ea for the room to be protected must be at least 8% of the gross volume of the space. This volume must be fed for 10 seconds.
(f) the HFC-227ea - containers are to be provided with a pressure monitoring, which triggers an acoustic and optical alarm signal in the wheelhouse when an unacceptable loss of propellant. If there is no wheelhouse, the alarm signal outside the room to be protected must be made.
(g) after flooding, the concentration in the room to be protected must be not greater than 10.5%.
h) the fire extinguishing system must contain no parts made of aluminium.
12 IG-541 - fire extinguishing systems fire extinguishing systems, which are operated with IG-541 as an extinguishing agent on the requirements referred to in point 1 to 9, the following provisions comply with: a) are several protected spaces with different gross volumes of space, each room with an own fire extinguisher is to be provided.
(b) every tank containing IG-541 and is positioned in the room to be protected must be fitted with a pressure relief. They have safely leave the contents of the container in the room to be protected if the tank fire impacts is exposed and the fire extinguishing system was triggered not.
(c) each tank must be equipped with a device which allows the control of the content.
(d) the filling pressure of the tanks must not exceed + 15 ° C 200 bar.
(e) the volume of IG-541 for the room to be protected must be at least 44% and must be no more than 50% of the gross volume of the space. This volume must be fed for 120 seconds.
13 FK-5-1-12 - fire extinguishing systems fire extinguishing systems, which are operated with FK-5-1-12 as the extinguishing agent, comply the requirements referred to in point 1 to 9, the following provisions: a) are several protected spaces with different gross volumes of space, each room with an own fire extinguisher is to be provided.
(b) any container that contains FK-5-1-12 and is positioned in the room to be protected must be fitted with a pressure relief. They have safely leave the contents of the container in the room to be protected if the tank fire impacts is exposed and the fire extinguishing system was triggered not.
c)
Each container must be fitted with a device which allows the control of the gas pressure.
(d) the filling degree of the container shall not exceed 1.00 kg / l. For the specific volume of the relaxed FK-5-1-12 are 0,0719 m3/kg basis to lay.
(e) the volume at FK-5-1-12 for the room to be protected must be at least 5,5% of the gross volume of the space. This volume must be fed for 10 seconds.
(f) the FK-5-1-12 - tank must be provided with a pressure monitoring, which triggers an acoustic and optical alarm signal in the wheelhouse when an unacceptable loss of propellant. If there is no wheelhouse, the alarm signal outside the room to be protected must be made.
(g) after flooding, the concentration in the room to be protected must be not greater than 10.0%.

section 10.03c Fixed installed fire extinguishing systems for object protection for object protection permanently installed fire-extinguishing installations only on the basis of recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine are allowed.

Article 10.04 ship's boats 1 must be with a tender in accordance with the European standard EN 1914: 1997 equipped following vehicles: a) motor vessels and barges exceeding 150 t capacity;
Water displacement of b) towing and pusher craft with more than 150 m3;
(c) floating equipment;
(d) passenger ships.
2. tenders can be made counting from the beginning of the first required manual activities sure five minutes by one person to water. They associated with help of electrically operated equipment to water, these must be designed so that failure of the driving force is not preventing the fast and secure to the water market.
3. inflatable ship's boats must be tested according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Article 10.05 lifebuoys and lifejackets 1.
(On board the vessels at least three lifebuoys must be present, the a) European standard EN 14144: 2003 or b) correspond to the International Convention for the safety of life at sea (SOLAS 1974), 1974 chapter III rule 7.1 and the international Rettungsmittel-(LSA-)code paragraph 2.1.
You must be ready for use at suitable places on the deck and may be not fastened into their holders. At least a lifebuoy must be in the immediate vicinity of the wheelhouse and be fitted with a self priming, battery-powered, not termoplastic in water light.
2. on board vessels must for each person on board, usually a personally assigned automatically inflatable lifejacket according to European standards EN 395:1998, EN 396:1998, EN ISO 12402-3: 2006 and EN ISO 12402-4: 2006 are ready exist.
For children, also Feststoffwesten that meet these standards are allowed.
3. life jackets must be tested according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Chapter 11 security in the workspace section 11.01 General 1 ships must be built, furnished and equipped be, that people can work safely and safely use the roads.
2 necessary to work on board and fixed facilities must be constructed, arranged and secured, that it can be easily and safely operated, used and serviced. If necessary, moving or hot parts with Schutzsvorrichtungen must be fitted.

Article 11.02 protection against fall and crash 1 decks and mainmast must be level and free of tripping; Water may not accumulate on them.
2. decks and mainmast, engine-room floors, landings, stairs and bollard cover in the course Borden must be slip-resistant.
3. bollard cover in the course of Borden and obstacles in the roads, such as the edges of steps, must be painted in contrast to the surrounding deck.
4. outer edges of decks, as well as such areas of work where the head is more than 1 m can, must at least 0.70 m height with Schanzkleidern or hatch coamings or fitted with railings according to European standard EN 711: 1995 be consisting of handrail, intermediate move in height of knee and foot bar. Must be a baseboard and a continuous handrail on the hatch coaming at gang Borden. Speed Board railing are available that are not reversible, can be omitted on the handrail on the hatch coaming.
5. in areas where the head is longer than 1 meter, the Commission may request appropriate facilities and equipment for safe working.

Article 11.03 dimensions of jobs jobs must be large enough that everyone employed there has been freedom of movement.

§ 11.04 Power Board 1.
The clear width of the side deck must be at least 0.60 m. On certain necessary for ship operation installations such as valves for deck washing line, this dimension may be reduced up to 0.50 m at bollards and cleats to 0.40 m.
2. up to a height of 0,90 m above the gang Board, the clear width of the side deck can be reduced up to 0.54 m if Furthermore exists a clear width of at least 0.65 m between the outer edge of the side wall and hold inner edge. The clear width of the side deck can be reduced in this case further up to 0.50 m if at the outer edges of the mainmast railing according to the European standard EN 711: 1995 as fall protection are built. Vessels of not more than 55 m with apartments only on the broader Sternside L can be omitted on the railing.
3. the requirements referred to in point 1 and 2 up to a height of 2.00 m above the corridor Board.

Article 11.05 access of employment 1.
In corridors, entrances and passageways, which are used by persons or for the transport of loads, a must) before the access openings sufficient space for unimpeded movement exist;
(b) the clear width of the passages of the purpose of employment correspond to the but at least be 0.60 m; ships with B not more than 8 m, the width of passages needs to be only 0.50 m;
(c) be at least 1.90 m the clear height of the passages including the coaming height.
2. doors must be safely for both sides to open and close. You can be secured against accidental opening or closing.
3. and exits and aisles, which exhibit differences in height of more than 0.50 m, must be equipped with appropriate stairs, ladders or rungs.
4. the height difference constantly occupied jobs is more than 1,00 m, stairs must be present. This does not apply to emergency exits.
5. in the case of cargo ships ever a platform device must exist at least at each end of every cargo space.
By way of derogation from sentence 1 may be waived the fixed platform device, if there are at least two portable space ladders that must extend at least 3 rungs over the edge of the hatch with a pitch angle of 60 °.

Article 11.06 exits and emergency exits 1 number, design and dimensions of exits including the emergency exits must meet the purpose and size of the rooms. One of these outputs is an emergency exit, it must be particularly marked.
2. emergency exits or serving as emergency exit Windows or skylights must have a clear opening of at least 0,36 m2, where the shortest side must be at least 0.50 m.

Section 11.07 climbing devices 1 stairs and ladders must be securely fastened. Stairs must be at least 0.60 m wide; the clear width between the handrail must be at least 0.60 m; the depth must be not less than 0.15 m; the footplates of the levels must be slip resistant, stairs with more than three steps should have handrails.
2. ladders and rungs must have a clear width of at least 0.30 m; the distance between the rungs must be not more than 0.30 m; the distance between of the rungs of components must be at least 0.15 m tall.
3. ladders and rungs must be visible from the top and fitted with handles on the output holes.
4. ladders must at least 0.40 m and at the bottom of at least 0.50 m wide; they must be protected against tipping over and slipping; Rungs must be firmly inserted in the uprights.

Article 11.08 Interior 1 jobs inside the ship must according to size, Setup and arrangement be adapted to the work and meet the requirements of hygiene and safety. You must be sufficiently and glare-free lighting and sufficiently ventilated. If necessary, they must be fitted with heating, which ensure a suitable temperature.
2 floors of jobs inside the ship must be fixed, permanently running, free of tripping and slip-resistant. Openings in decks and floors must be protected in the State against the risk of falling. Windows and skylights must be constructed and be arranged that they can be safely operated and cleaned.

Article 11.09 protection against noise and vibration 1. workplaces must as remote, décor, be that are exposed to the employees of any risks from mechanical vibration.
2. constantly used working spaces must be in addition so constructed and soundproofed that the safety and health of employees is not endangered by noise.
3. for workers, have expected a daily noise exposure of more than 85 of dB(A), personal ear protectors must be present. At workplaces where these values 90 exceed DB (a), must be stated by the symbol for "Hearing protection use" according to Figure 7 of annex I with a diameter of at least 10 cm on the obligation to use the ear protectors.

Article 11.10 hatch covers 1.
Hatch covers must be reached easily and safely moved. Can be also slide or fold or parts of hatch covers with a mass of more than 40 kg must be set up for mechanical lifting. Hatch covers, whose handling is carried out, with the help of hoists must be fitted with appropriate and accessible devices for attachment of slings. On hatch covers and shaving sticks, which are not replaced, the hatch to which they belong, and the proper location on this must be clearly specified.
2. hatch covers can be protected against lift off by wind and loading facilities. Schiebeluken must be equipped with locks that prevent not intended movement in the longitudinal direction by more than 0,40 m; they must be determined in the end position. To fasten hatch covers stacked on, appropriate devices must be provided.
3. in the case of electrically operated hatch covers, the energy supply must be disconnected automatically after sharing the driving switch.
4. hatch covers must absorb the stresses to be expected, walk-in hatch covers at least 75 kg point load. Not walkable hatch covers must be marked. Hatch covers, intended for mounting of deck load, must be marked with the permissible load in t/m2. Braces are required to obtain the permissible load must be noted at appropriate point; in this case, appropriate plans on board are to carry.

Section 11.11 winches 1 winds must be such that it is possible to have a safe work. You must have devices that prevent unintentional starting back the load. Winds which are not self-locking, must be fitted with a brake that is sized for the traction.
2. hand operated winch must be equipped with facilities that prevent a kickback of the cranks. Winds, which have both power and manual drive, must be so that the power drive can put the hand drive shaft not in motion.

Article 11.12 cranes 1 cranes must be built according to the rules of the art. The forces during operation must be initiated in the convoys safely; they must not jeopardise the stability.
2. cranes have a maker's label with the following information be appropriate: a) name with the address of the manufacturer;
(b) EC mark indicating the year of manufacture;
(c) designation of series or type;
(d) where appropriate, the serial number.
3. on cranes, the maximum permissible loads must be durable and easily recognizable attached.
Cranes, their operating capacity 2000 kg does not exceed, only the maximum permissible payload at maximum RADIUS needs to be durable and easily recognizable attached.
4. to avoid crushing and shearing hazards, protection devices must be provided. Outer parts of cranes must have to all parts of the environment of out of the crane upwards, a safe distance below and on the sides by at least 0.5 m. The safety distance is not necessary outside of the work area and the roads on the sides.
5. interlocking must be secured cranes against unauthorised use. You can be switched only on the control device provided for the crane. Controls must be self return setting (switch without self-holding); their functional direction must be clearly identifiable.
Failure of the driving force, the load not automatically can expire. Unintentional crane movements must be avoided.
The upward movement of the lifting work and exceeding the payload must be limited by adequate facilities. The downward movement of the lifting plant must be limited, if two rope marks of the Tragseiles be provided for operations of the crane with the implementation of the lifting device on the rope drum. After speaking of the automatically-acting devices, the opposite movement must be still possible.
The tensile strength of wire ropes for running rigging shall be at least 5 times the maximum permissible line pull. The construction of the wire rope must be flawless and suitable for use on cranes.
Cranes are 6) for the first time, b) before re-commissioning after a significant modification or repair, and c) regularly to check at least every ten years, by an expert. With sufficient strength and sufficient stability are to prove mathematically and by a load test on board. For cranes, their operating capacity 2 000 kg does not exceed, the expert can decide the computational proof by a test with the 1,25-Fachen of the payload, which will run from the full infrastructure to replace wholly or in part. The assessment is a certificate signed by the experts to be, indicating the date of inspection should.
7 cranes are regularly, to check at least once a year by a competent person. This is the work-safe status of the crane by Visual and functional testing to determine. The assessment is a certificate signed by the competent person must be, indicating the date of inspection should.
8 cranes, their operating capacity 2000 kg exceeds that cargo handling serve or are on Board of derricks, pontoons and other floating devices or construction vehicles, in addition to the regulations of a Rhine River State or Belgium match.
9. for cranes, the operating instructions of the crane manufacturer on board must be located. It must contain at least the following information: a) application and function of control organs, b) maximum permissible payload, according to the projection, c) maximum permissible inclination of the crane, d) instructions for Assembly and maintenance, e) General technical data.

Section 11.13 storing flammable liquids for the storage of flammable liquids with a flash point of less than 55 ° C a ventilated cupboard made of non-flammable material must be on deck. On the outside, it must be attached to a symbol for "fire, open light and smoking prohibited" shown in Figure 2 of annex I with a diameter of at least 10 cm.
Chapter 12 apartments para 12.01 General provisions 1 However, must ships for the persons living on board, usually at least for the minimum crew, be provided with apartments.
2. accommodation must be so constructed, furnished and equipped to meet the needs of the safety, health and well-being of the people on board. You must be easily and safely accessible and sufficiently insulated against cold and heat.
3. the Commission may admit exceptions to the provisions of this chapter if the safety and health of persons on board in a different way.
4. the examination Commission adds restrictions on the form or type of ship operation navigability, which are necessary because of exceptions referred to in point 3.

§ 12.02 special structural requirements of the apartments 1 apartments can be lifted sufficiently even with closed doors; also need to get enough sunlight lounges and should have possible outward perspective.
2. apartments, if your access not equal to the deck and the difference in height is more than 0.30 m, must be accessible by stairs.
3rd the floors may not deeper than 1.20 m below the plane of maximum draught are in the forecastle.
4. living and sleeping quarters must have at least two as far apart this outputs, which serve as escape routes. An output can be trained as emergency exit. Sentence 1 does not apply to rooms, which Ausgang leads directly to the deck or on a passage that serves as an escape route, provided that this is two away from each other this outputs after baking and starboard. Emergency exits, which may include also skylights and Windows, must have a clear opening of at least 0,36 m2, a minimum side length of at least 0.50 m and permit a rapid evacuation in an emergency. Insulation and cladding of escape routes must be made of flame-retardant materials and the use of escape routes must be guaranteed by appropriate measures such as ladders or rungs.
5. accommodation must be protected against exposure to unacceptable noise and vibration. The maximum permissible sound pressure levels are: a) in common rooms: 70 dB(a);
(b) in bedroom: 60 DB (a). This does not apply to vessels that are only in the A1eingesetzt form. The constraint of the form is to be noted in the ship's certificate.
6 the headroom must be not less than 2.00 m in apartments.
7. as a rule the ships must have at least a living room separated from the bedroom.
8. in rooms allowed the free floor area not less than 2 m2 per person, it must be but at least 8 m2 (deducted Furniture except tables and chairs).
9. the volume of living and sleeping quarters shall be at least per 7 m3.
10. in residential premises, the minimum volume of air per person is 3,5 m3. In sleeping rooms has a volume of air of at least 5 m3 for the first person, each additional person at least 3 m3 to be present (the volume of the furniture is to pull off). Sleeping rooms should be designed for a maximum of two persons. Beds must be installed at a distance of at least 0.30 m above the floor. They are one above the other, a free space of at least 0.60 m must exist on each bed height.
11.
Doors must have an opening, whose Oberkante is at least 1,90 m above deck or floor and has a clear width of at least 0.60 m. The prescribed height can be achieved by application of sliding or hinged covers or flaps. Doors must can be opened from both sides on the outside. Door coamings may be more than 0.40 m high; Provisions of other safety regulations must be adhered to but.
12 stairs must be securely fixed and safely accessible. This is satisfied if a) you at least 0,60 m wide;
(b) the levels of at least 0.15 m deep;
c) the levels of non-slip and d) stairs with more than three levels with a handle or handrail at least are provided.
13 cables for hazardous gases and dangerous liquids, especially those that are under such high pressure that a leak could endanger persons, may be not in the apartments and in the meantime leading courses. This does not apply to pipes for steam and hydraulic systems, which are housed in a metal conduit, and for the pipes of liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes.

§ 12.03 sanitary installations 1 ships with apartments must have at least the following sanitary facilities: a) a toilet per accommodation unit or per six crew members. These needs can be ventilated with fresh air;
(b) a sink with drain and connecting hot and cold potable water per accommodation unit or per four crew members;
(c) one shower or bath connected to hot and cold potable water per accommodation unit or per six crew members.
2. sanitary facilities must be located in the immediate vicinity of the living quarters. Toilets may have no direct link to the kitchens, dining rooms and kitchen.
3. toilet rooms must have a surface area of at least 1.00 m2, width 1.10 m is at least 0.75 m and the length. Toilet rooms in cabins up to two people can be less. A wash basin and/or shower, located in the toilet room must be the base to at least the surface of the sink and / or the shower tray (or, if necessary, the bathtub) be enlarged.

§ 12.04 kitchens 1 kitchens can be combined with lounges.
2. kitchen must be equipped with: a) cooking utensils;
b) sink with drainage;
(c) installation for the supply of drinking water;
(d) refrigerator;
(e) sufficient storage, work and storage space.
3. dining areas must be sufficient for the number of crew members, usually at the same time using them, in galleys. The seat width is not less than 0.60 m.

§ 12.05 potable water installations 1 ships, where apartments are available, must be equipped with a drinking-water system. Filling apertures of potable water tanks and water hoses are to be provided with a notice, according to which they are intended exclusively for potable water. Filler neck must be arranged above the deck for drinking water.
2. potable water tanks must a) be made of corrosion-resistant and physiologically harmless material on the inside.
b) be free of pipe sections, whose regular Durchströmung is not guaranteed and c) be protected against excessive heating.
3. potable water tanks must in addition a) a capacity of at least 150 l per person living usually on board, at least however have per crew member.
(b) have suitable lockable opening to the interior cleaning;
(c) a have level indicator;
d) loading and vent have that lead in the open or that are equipped with appropriate filters.
4. potable water tanks must have no common walls with other tanks. Drinking water supplies must not cause through tanks containing other liquids. Connections between the potable water system and other pipes are not allowed. Pipelines for gas or liquids other than potable water shall not lead through drinking water tanks.
5. pressure vessel may be operated only with compressed air is not polluted for drinking water. It is generated by means of compressors, appropriate air filters and oil separators must be immediately before the pressure vessel for drinking water, unless the drinking water is separated from the air by a membrane.

Article 12.06 heating and ventilation 1 apartments can be heated their purpose. The heaters must be designed for the present weather conditions.
2. living and sleeping quarters can be ventilated sufficiently even with doors closed. The ventilation and exhaust must allow a sufficient air circulation in all climatic conditions.
3. accommodation must be so designed and constructed as far as possible the penetration of foul air from other ship departments such as machinery or compartments prevent; with forced ventilation, the inlet ports are arranged so that they meet these requirements.

§ 12.07 other apartment facilities 1.
Each crew member living on board must have a bed and an own lockable wardrobe. The bed must have at least an inner dimension of 2,00 x 0,90 m.
2. for storing and drying work clothes are appropriate ways to provide outside the bedrooms.
3. all rooms can be lit electrically. Additional lamps for gaseous or liquid fuels are admitted only in common areas. Lighting devices using liquid fuel must be made of metal and may be operated only with fuels whose Flammpunkt is above 55 ° C, or with commercially available petroleum. You must be attached or installed in a way that there is no danger of fire.
Chapter 13 heating, cooking and refrigeration facilities, with fuel operated General requirements 1 heating, cooking and cooling facilities, which are operated with LPG, § 13.01 14 must meet the provisions of this chapter.
2. heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment including their accessories must be constructed and be positioned that they represent no danger even if it overheats; they must be protected against unintentional flipping and moving.
3. the facilities must be referred to in point 2 in rooms, where substances with a flash point are stored up to 55 ° C or used, not provided. Flue pipes of these facilities may not pass through these spaces.
4. the air supply necessary for the combustion must be ensured.
5. heaters must be firmly connected to smoke pipes. These pipes must be fitted with suitable caps or protection against wind. You must be so designed that it is possible to clean.

Article 13.02 use of liquid fuel, equipment for petroleum 1.
Are heating, cooking and refrigeration facilities with liquid fuels used, only fuel with a flashpoint above 55 ° C may be used.
2. by way of derogation from point 1 stove and refrigerator equipped with wick burners and heating facilities, which are operated with conventional petroleum in homes and tax are allowed if the their consumption tank capacity does not exceed 12 litres.
3. with wick burners equipped facilities must: a) have a fuel tank made of metal with a closable fill opening, which has no soft soldered seams below the highest level and is so constructed and installed that he can; not accidentally open or empty
b. without the aid of another combustible liquid can be lit and c. be so positioned that the combustion gases be safely dissipated.

§ 13.03 oil stoves with evaporation burners and oil furnaces with Atomising burners 1 oil stoves with evaporation burners and oil furnaces with Atomising burners must be built according to the rules of the art.
2. is an oil burning stove with evaporation burners or an oil heating system with atomization burner in a machine room, the air supply to the heater and the engine must be such, that the heater and the motors can work independently, reliably and safely. If necessary, a separate air supply must be provided. The unit must be installed so that a flame beating back possibly from the Firebox can reach any other parts of the institution of the engine room.

§ 13.04 oil stoves heating oil furnaces can be lit with evaporation burners 1 with evaporation burners without the aid of another combustible liquid. You must be mounted on a metal pan that collects the oil parts and has a rim height of at least 20 mm and a capacity of at least 2 litres.
2. when oil stoves placed in machinery spaces with evaporation burners, the metal pan must have an edge height of at least 200 mm referred to in point 1. The lower edge of the evaporation burner must be above the edge of the tub. The edge height must be at least 100 mm above the floor plate.
3. oil furnaces must have appropriate oil control with evaporation burners, which ensure a virtually constant oil flow to the burner for the selected setting and which prevent any leakage of fuel for an eventual extinction of the flame. As suitable apply oil controls that work properly even with vibrations and inclinations up to 12 °, and except with a float to a level adjustment) for exceeding the permitted levels of oil which reliably includes fuel supply or b are equipped with a second float,)
with an overflow pipe are provided if the oil collecting tray can hold at least the contents of the tanks of consumption.
4. the fuel tank of the oil stove with evaporation burners is separately set up a) he must be mounted no higher than is specified in the operating instructions of the device manufacturer.
(b) he has against excessive temperature rise protection be installed;
c) the fuel supply from the deck can be interrupted.
5. flue pipes for oil furnaces with evaporation burners natural train must be equipped with devices to prevent train reversal.

§ 13.05 oil furnaces with Atomising burners oil furnaces with Atomising burners must in particular following requirements: a) before beginning the oil supply a sufficient ventilation of combustion chamber be sure;
(b) the fuel supply must be thermostatically regulated;
(c) the ignition must be electrically or with ignition burners;
(d) a flame monitoring device must exist, that turns off the fuel supply if the flame is accidentally extinguished;
(e) the main switch must be installed in an easily accessible position outside the installation room.

§ 13.06 air heaters air heaters, where the heated air under pressure is led to a combustion chamber to a distribution system or space, must meet the following requirements: a) is atomized the fuel under pressure, the supply of combustion air must be done by a fan.
(b) before the burner can be ignited, the firing chamber must be well ventilated. This can be done by trailing the combustion air blower.
c) the fuel supply must be automatically closed, if aa) the fire goes out;
BB) no adequate combustion air supply is present;
CC), the heated air exceeds a preset temperature or dd) the power supply of the safety devices fails.
In these cases this may not automatically reinstalled after you close the fuel supply.
(d) fan for combustion and heating air can be turned off outside the room where the heater is positioned.
(e) if the heated air is drawn from the outside, the air intake openings must be as high as possible above deck. Their design must be sprühwasser - and weather-sealing.
(f) heating air pipes must be made of metal.
(g) the heating air outlet can not completely be closed.
h) emitted when a leak fuel can not spread until in the heating air pipes.
(i) air heaters can suck on their hot air from a machine room.

§ 13.07 heating with solid fuels 1. heaters that run on solid fuels, must be on a plate with up-raised edges, glowing fuel or hot ashes not on the sheet fall out.
This is not required in spaces that are constructed and designed exclusively for the accommodation of a boiler made of non-combustible materials.
2. solid fuels heated boiler must be fitted with thermostatic controls governing the air supply required for combustion.
3. in the vicinity of each heating unit, a means of easy extinguishing of the ash must exist.
Chapter 14 liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes article 14.01 General 1 liquid gas systems include mainly a container plant with one or more tanks, one or more regulators, a distribution system and appliances.
Spare and empty receptacles outside the container are not be regarded as parts of a liquefied natural gas plant. Article 14.05 shall apply it accordingly.
2. the equipment may be operated only with commercial propane.

Section 14.02 installations 1 liquid gas systems must be suitable throughout for use with propane and executed according to the rules of the art and built.
2. liquefied gas installation may be used only for domestic purposes in the accommodation and the wheelhouse, as well as the corresponding purposes on passenger ships.
3. on board there must be several separate liquefied natural gas facilities. Apartments separated by a hold or a fixed tank may not be supplied by same liquefied natural gas plant.
4 there are no part of the liquefied gas installation in the engine room.

Section 14.03 container 1.
Only tank with a filler from 5 to 35 kg are allowed. The Commission of inquiry may allow container with large Napolnitelem for passenger ships.
2. containers must comply with the rules applicable in one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
You must bear the official stamp as a sign of acceptance on the basis of the prescribed tests.

§ 14.04 accommodation and facilities the tank 1 tank systems must be installed on deck in a free-standing or built-in Cabinet outside the home be that traffic on board is not obstructed. You may not be placed on the front or aftermost bulwark. The Cabinet may only be inserted in superstructures, if this is gas-tight and be opened only from the outside of the structures here can be. He must be so located that the pipes to the consumption points are as short as possible.
Only so many concurrent collection containers must be connected, as it requires the consumption system. Several tanks may be connected only by using a shift or sequence valve. Up to four tanks may be connected per supply unit. Including the replacement tank, no more than six containers on Board may be located per plant.
Up to six containers can be connected on passenger ships with passenger kitchens or-kantinen. Including the replacement tank, not more than nine containers on Board may be located per plant.
The pressure regulator, or in two-stage regulation the pressure regulator in the first stage, must reside in the same cabinet as the container and be firmly installed.
2. vessel systems are so arranged that in the event of a leak leaking gas out of the closet into the open can occur and does not penetrate into the Interior of the ship or come with a source of ignition in contact.
3. cabinets must made of flame-retardant material and ensure a sufficient ventilation through openings in the lower and upper part. The containers must be placed in the cabinets standing and secured against falling over.
4. cabinets must be constructed and be set up, that the temperature of the container may not exceed 50 ° C.
5. on the outside of cabinets, the note must be attached "Liquefied petroleum gas" and a symbol of "fire, open light and smoking prohibited" shown in Figure 2 of annex I with a diameter of at least 10 cm.

Article 14.05 spare and empty receptacles spare and empty receptacles which are not in the tank, must be stored outside the apartment and the wheelhouse in a cupboard after section 14.04.

Article 14.06 pressure regulator 1 appliances connected with the receptacles only through a distribution network must, which is equipped with one or more regulators, which reduce the gas pressure to use pressure. The reduction may be in one or in two stages. All pressure regulator must be set to a specific pressure according to section 14.07.
2 in or behind the last pressure regulator a protection device must be attached or installed, which automatically protects against pressure rise the consumption line when failure of the controller. It must be ensured that in the event of a leak from the guard escaping gas into the atmosphere can occur and does not penetrate into the Interior of the ship or come with a source of ignition in contact; If necessary, a special pipe must be fitted for this purpose.
3. safety valves and vent pipes must be protected against penetration of water.

Article 14.07 pressure 1.
Two-stage regulation the mean pressure allowed a maximum of 250 kPa (2.5 bar) above the atmospheric pressure.
2. the pressure at the outlet from the last pressure reducer must not exceed 5 kPa (0.05 bar) above atmospheric pressure with a 10% tolerance.

Section 14.08 piping and hoses 1 lines must consist of tightly threaded steel or copper pipes.
However, tank connection cables must consist of high pressure hoses suitable for propane or pipe spirals. Not fixed gas-consuming appliances may be connected with suitable hoses of not more than 1 m in length.
2. pipes must comply with all stresses occurring on Board under normal operating conditions, in particular as regards corrosion and strength, and to the type and arrangement a sufficient supply of appliances with regard to quantity and pressure make sure.
3. piping to have the fewest connections. Pipework and connections must be gas-tight and maintain their tightness at all vibration and strain.
4. pipes must be easily accessible laid, properly fixed and protected wherever, where risk of impact or friction, particularly at leadthroughs through steel bulkheads or metal partitions. Steel pipes must be equipped with corrosion protection on all sides.
5. hoses and their connections must comply with all the stresses occurring on Board under normal operating conditions. They must be also so moved that they are voltage-free, not impermissibly be warmed and checked over the whole length can.

Article 14.09 distribution system 1.
The entire distribution system must be locked through at any time easily and quickly reachable main shut-off valve.
2.
Each consumption unit is to connect to a dedicated branch line, which must be can be isolated by a shut-off device for himself.
3. shut-off valves must protected against weather influences and impacts be installed.
4. after each pressure regulator, a test connection must exist. By means of a shut-off device, it must be ensured that the pressure regulator when assessing subjected to the test pressure.

Article 14.10 gas-consuming appliances and their installation 1.
It only gas-consuming appliances may be installed, that are approved in one of the Rhine River States or Belgium for propane. You must be equipped with devices that effectively prevent unburned gas when going out of the operation or the flame from escaping.
2. appliances must be so placed and connected, that you can not fall down or be moved inadvertently and accidentally tearing of the connecting cable is not possible.
3. heating equipment, water heaters and refrigerators must be connected to an exhaust pipe leading to the outside.
4. gas-consuming appliances must only be placed in the wheelhouse if it is built so that escaping gas cannot penetrate in the deeper areas of the vehicle, particularly at leadthroughs through of control equipment in the engine room.
5. gas-consuming appliances may be placed in bedrooms only if the combustion of the air regardless.
6 appliances must be placed in a sufficiently large room with dependent combustion air.

Article 14.11 ventilation and discharge of the exhaust gases 1.
But at least, the ventilation of the rooms where the air-dependent appliances are placed must be ensured by free per 150 cm2 cross-section by sufficiently large supply and exhaust air openings.
2. ventilation openings must have no closing devices and do not lead to sleeping rooms.
3. exhaust systems must be running so that the exhaust be properly dissipated. You must be reliable and constructed of non-combustible materials. Fans for ventilation of the room must not adversely affect the exhaust systems.

Article 14.12 operating and safety rules on the appropriate place on board must be installed by a user manual; It must contain at least the following information: "the valves of tanks, which are not connected to the distribution system must be closed, even if the container is considered to be empty."
"The hoses should be replaced as soon as their condition requires it."
"All gas-consuming appliances must connected or the relevant cables tightly used be."

14.13 check liquid gas systems are a) before using the first time, b) before re-commissioning after a significant modification or repair, and c) to check whether the system meets the requirements of this chapter for each renewal of the certificate according to article 14.15 from an expert. The assessment is a certificate signed by the experts to be, indicating the date of inspection should. A copy thereof shall be provided to the inquiry by the expert.

§ 14.14 test conditions is the unit under the following conditions to consider: 1 pipes under medium pressure between the shut-off device to 14.09 paragraph No. 4 of the first pressure regulator and the shut-off valves before the final pressure reducer: a) pressure test with air, inert gas or a liquid at a pressure of 2000 kPa (20 bar) above atmospheric pressure;
b) tightness with air or an inert gas at a pressure of 350 kPa (3.5 bar) above atmospheric pressure.
2. piping under utilization pressure between the shut-off device according to § 14.09 No. 4 of the only or the last pressure regulator and the valves fitted before the appliances: tightness with air or an inert gas at a pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar) above atmospheric pressure.
3. lines between the shut-off device according to § 14.09 No. 4 of the only or the last pressure regulator and the wall fittings of appliances: tightness test at a pressure of 15 kPa (0.15 bar) above atmospheric pressure.
4. during the tests referred to in point b, number 2 and 3 are considered 1(a) the lines sealing, if after sufficient waiting for the temperature compensation of pressure does not fall during the subsequent test duration of 10 minutes.
5. jointing, cable connections and faucet connections, which are under pressure and the connection of the controller to the consumption line: checking for leaks under pressure with a foaming agent.
6 appliances are to take into operation at nominal load and to check for proper, trouble-free burning at different settings.
Ignition fuses are to check for proper operation.
7. after the examination referred to in point 6 is consumption device that is connected to an exhaust pipe, according to a running time of five minutes under nominal load at Windows and doors closed and operations which whether leaking exhaust vents on the current backup to check.
Exhaust leak not only temporarily, is the cause to determine immediately. The consumption unit may not be released for use until all defects have been rectified.

Article 14.15 attestation 1.
The match of every liquefied gas installation with the requirements of this chapter is to certify in the ship's certificate.
2. This certificate is issued after the test according to section 14.13 of the Commission of inquiry.
3. the validity period of the certificate is not more than three years. A new check must precede a renewal after section 14.13. Exceptionally, the Commission of inquiry at the justified request of the owner or his authorised representative may extend the validity of the certificate to a maximum of three months, unless preceded by a test according to section 14.13. This extension must be entered in the certificate.
Chapter 15 special provisions for passenger vessels article 15.01 General provisions 1 the following provisions shall not apply: a) § 3.02 No. 1 letter b;
b) articles 4.01 to 4.03;
c) article 8.08 paragraph 2 sentence 2 and paragraph 7;
d) article 9.14 No. 3 set 2 at nominal voltages via 50V. 2. following devices are prohibited on passenger vessels: a) lamps powered by liquefied petroleum gas and liquid fuel according to § 12.07 No. 3 sentence 2;
(b) facilities with wick burners according to article 13.02 Nos. 2 and 3;
c) oil furnaces with evaporation burners according to article 13.04;
d) heaters and heated boiler according Article 13.07;
(e) liquefied gas installations may be not admitted ships not self-propelled according to chapter 14-3 to carry passengers.
4. on passenger areas for use by persons with reduced mobility must exist, which comply with the provisions referred to in this chapter. If the application of the provisions referred to in this chapter, which are used to take into account the specific safety needs of persons with reduced mobility, is practically difficult or unreasonably high costs, the Commission of inquiry on the basis of recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine may permit derogations from these rules. These deviations are to be entered in the certificate.

Article 15.02 hull 1.
The thickness of the outer steel passenger ships is in investigations under section 2.09 as follows to set: a) the minimum thickness tmin of soil, bilge - and page plating of the outer skin of passenger ships shall be determined by the larger value of the following formulas: in these formulas mean: f = 1 + 0,0013 · (a-500);
a = longitudinal or Querspantabstand [mm]. Is at a lower Spantabstand than 400 mm a = 400 mm.
(b) the resulting referred to a minimum value for the thickness can be reached, if the permissible value on the basis of a mathematical proof for the sufficient strength of the hull (longitudinal and transverse strength and local strength) is fixed and certified.
(c) at any point of the outer skin, the value calculated on the letter a or b must be less than 3 mm.
(d) renewal of the plates are carried out if soil, Kimm - or side plates have fallen below the minimum value according to letter a or b, in conjunction with letter c.
2. number and arrangement of the bulkheads are to be selected so that the ship in the Leckfall No. 7 to 13 remains buoyant according to the § 15.03. Each part of the internal structure which affects the efficiency of the subdivision of the ship, must be waterproof and designed so that the integrity of the subdivision is maintained.
3. the distance of the collision bulkhead from the front lot must be at least 0.04 LWL and 0.04 LWL + 2 m not exceed.
4. a transverse bulkhead may be fitted with a slackening of the Schott, if all parts are this transfer within the safe range.
5. the bulkheads which were taken into account no. 7 to 13 in the leakage calculation according to article 15.03, must be waterproof and high up to the bulkhead deck. Missing a bulkhead deck, they must be high at least 0.20 m above the diving limit.
6. the number of openings in these bulkheads must be kept as low as allow the design and the proper operation of the ship. Openings and penetrations shall not adversely affect the watertight function of the bulkheads.
7 no openings and no doors must have collision bulkheads.
8 bulkheads separating machinery spaces of passenger spaces and living quarters for personnel on board, have no doors.
9 manual are allowed only outside the passenger doors in bulkheads referred to in point 5 without remote control. You must: a)
remain permanently closed and may in the short term; open only to the passage
b) quickly and safely can; be sealed by suitable devices
(c) be fitted on both sides with the inscription: "Immediately after passage close door".
10 doors in bulkheads referred to in point 5, in the long term open must meet the following requirements: a) you can be closed in place from both sides of the bulkhead and from an accessible position above the bulkhead deck.
(b) when a remote valve closed must reopen the doors in place and securely closed. In particular the close operation must not be impaired by carpets or skirting boards.
(c) the duration of the remote valve closing must be at least 30 seconds and must exceed 60 seconds.
(d) during the closing process, an audible alarm when the door must be given automatically.
(e) it must be ensured that door drive and alarm time independently of the electrical work. At the location of the remote control, a device must be present, indicating whether the door is open or closed.
11 doors in bulkheads referred to in point 5 and its operating bodies must be in the safe range.
12. in the wheelhouse a warning system must exist, showing which door in bulkheads referred to in point 5 is open.
13 piping with open mouths and ventilation ducts need to be installed in that about it in any considered Leckfall additional spaces or tanks are flooded.
a) are several departments through piping or ventilation ducts in connection is open, so this must be kept up on appropriate place on the worst leak water line.
(b) Piping need not meet the requirement, if there are shut-off valves with remote control from above the bulkhead deck at the openwork Scots referred to in a.
(c) a piping system in a Department has no open mouth, the pipeline in case of damage this Department is considered intact, if it runs within the safe range and distance from the ground more than 0.50 m.
14 remote controls of bulkhead doors are letter b above the bulkhead deck to number 10 and shut-off valves referred to in point 13 as clearly indicate such.
15. with raised floors whose height and when wall passages whose width must be at least 0.60 m.
16 window may lie below the diving line, if they are waterproof, not opening, possess sufficient strength and article 15.06 meet no. 14.

Article 15.03 stability 1.
The applicant must demonstrate through a calculation based on the results of applying a standard for intact stability that the intact stability of the vessel is appropriate. All calculations must be carried out with free trim and free immersion. The empty ship data which are the stability calculations to reason, must be determined by an inclining test.
2. the intact stability must be proven for the following standard load conditions: a) at the beginning of the drive 100% passengers, 98% fuel and fresh water, 10% waste water;
(b) while driving changed 100% passengers, 50% fuel and fresh water, 50% waste water;
(c) at the end of the drive 100% passengers, 10% fuel and fresh water, 98% waste water;
(d) empty ship no passengers, 10% fuel and fresh water, no waste water.
For all standard load conditions, the ballast tanks are either empty or full, to assume their usual application.
In addition, letter d must be provided for the following load condition the proof for number 3: 100% passengers, 50% fuel and fresh water, 50% waste water, all other liquid tanks, including ballast, filled to 50%.
3. the proof of adequate intact stability by a calculation must be the following provisions for the intact stability and for the letter of a standard charging conditions to (d) are provided in paragraph 2: a) the maximum righting lever Laura needs at a heeling angle φmax ≥ (φmom + 3°) occur and must be at least 0.20 m. If φf < φmax is, must the righting lever arm at the flooding angle of φf at least 0.20 m behavior. b) the flooding angle φf shall be not less as (φmom + 3°). c) the area A under the curve of the righting levers must reach in dependence on the position of φf and φmax, at least the following values: case A 1 φmax ≤ 15° or φf ≤ 15° 0.05 m · wheel until the smaller the angle of φmax or φf 2 15° < φmax < 30° ≤ φmax φf 0.035 + 0.001 · (30 - φmax) m · wheel to angle φmax 3 15° < φf < 30° φmax > φf 0.035 + 0.001 · (30-φf) m · wheel to angle φf 4 φmax ≥ 30° and φf ≥ 30° 0.035 m · wheel to the angle φ = 30 °, while Hanif is the maximum lever;
Φ the heeling angle;
Φf the angle of flooding, i.e. the heeling angle where openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses, not weathertight can be sealed, immerse;
Φmom the maximum angle of heel after letter e;
Φmax the heeling angle at which the maximum righting lever occurs;
A the area under the curve of righting lever arms.
(d) the metacentric height at the beginning of GMo, corrected by the effect of the free surfaces in liquid tanks, must be not less than 0.15 m.
e) the angle of heel φmom in the two following cases respectively the value of 12 ° not exceed: aa) approach of the heeling moment from people and wind after number 4 and 5;
BB) approach of the heeling moment of people and movements referred to in point 4 and 6 f) the residual freeboard 4, 5 and 6 may under the approach of a heeling moment of people, wind and turning according to number not less than 0,20 m.
(g) the residual safety distance must be for vessels with Windows or other openings in the shell below the bulkhead deck, which are not waterproof sealed, under the approach of the three heeling moments from letter f at least 0.10 m.
4. the moment due to one-sided accumulation of people (MP) shall be calculated as follows: mean in this formula: P = total mass of persons on board in [t], calculated on the sum of the maximum number of passengers and the maximum number of board personnel and crew under normal operating conditions, assuming an average mass of 0.075 t per person.
y = lateral distance of centre of gravity of the Personenmasse P from the centerline of the ship in [m];
g = gravitational Acceleration (g = 9.81 m / s2);
Pi = mass of persons accumulated on the surface of AI with: n1 = P1 · 0.075 · AI [t], A1 = area where there are people in [m2];
N1 = number of persons per square meter with: ni = 3.75 for free deck areas and areas with movable furniture; is for areas with fixed integrated indicating seating furniture such as benches, ni assuming a seat width of 0,50 m and a depth of 0.75 m per person to charge;
yi = lateral distance of the areas focus of area AI from the centerline of the ship in [m].
The calculation must be performed for an accumulation of persons both to starboard and to port.
The distribution of persons must be from the point of view of stability seen be the most unfavourable. Cabins are in the calculation of the moment of the person as to accept unfilled.
For the calculation of the loading cases height a person with 1 m above the lowest point of the particular deck on 0.5 fibre optic without taking into account any deck curvature and assuming a mass of 0.075 t per person focuses into account.
A detailed assessment of the deck surfaces, which are occupied by people can be omitted, if the following values are used: P = 1.1 · FMAX · 0.075 for day-trip vessels;
 
1.5 · FMAX · 0.075 for cabin vessels.
 
In these formulas means: FMAX = maximum permitted number of passengers on board.
y = B/2 [m].
5. the moment of wind (MW) shall be calculated as follows: MW = pW • AW (lW + T / 2) [kNm] mean in this formula: pW = the specific wind pressure of 0,25 kN/m2;
AW = lateral plan of the vessel above the level of the draught corresponding to the observed Ladefall in [m2];
Baddaci = the distance of the Centre of gravity of the lateral plan AW from the level of the draught corresponding to the observed Ladefall in [m].
In the calculation of the lateral planes are to take into account the planned deck enclosures by tarpaulins or similar mobile devices.
6. the moment from centrifugal force (MDR), caused by the turning of the vessel, is to calculate as follows: MDR = cdr · CB · v2 · D/LWL · (KG - T/2) [kNm]
Mean in this formula: cdr = a coefficient of 0.45;
CB = the block coefficient of displacement (if this 1.0 is not known to use);
v the maximum speed of the vessel [m/s];
KG the distance of the Centre of gravity from the top of keel in [m].
If the passenger vessel with a motor according to section 6.06, MDR from wholesale or model tests or from corresponding calculations is to derive.
7. the applicant must demonstrate through a calculation, which is based on the method of falling away buoyancy, that the damage stability of the vessel is appropriate. All calculations must be carried out with free trim and free immersion.
8. the buoyancy in the Leckfall must be proven for the standard load conditions specified in paragraph 2. This calculated proof of sufficient stability must be provided for three intermediate States of flooding (25%, 50% and 75% of the charge of the Endzustandes of flooding) and the final State of the flooding.
9 passenger ships must comply with the Department status of 1 and 2 Department status.
The following specifications are to be considered for the Leckfall: 1 department status 2 Department status extension of page leaks along 1 [m] 0.10 · Optical fiber, but not less than 4.00 m 0.05 · Optical fiber, but not less than 2.25 m transverse b [m] B/5 0.59 vertical h [m] from the ship ground to above without limiting expansion of the ground leak longitudinal l [m] 0.10 · Optical fiber, but not less than 4.00 m 0.05 · Optical fiber, but not less than 2.25 m, transverse b [m] B/5 vertical h [m] 0.59; Pipelines, which according to article 15.02 No. 13 letter c. laid, can be considered intact.
(a) for the status of a Department, the Scot as not damaged can be accepted, if the distance between two adjacent bulkheads is greater than the length of the leak. Longitudinal bulkheads are located at a distance of less than B/3 to the outer skin, measured at right angles to the vessel axis in the plane of maximum draught shall not be considered in the calculation. A SCHOTT transfer to a transverse bulkhead, which is longer than 2.50 m, is a longitudinal bulkhead.
(b) for the 2 Department status each assumed bulkhead within the leak extension as corrupted. This means that the position of the bulkheads must be chosen so that the passenger vessel remains afloat after the flooding of two or more adjacent compartments in longitudinal direction.
(c) the lowest point of every non-watertight opening (E.g. by doors, Windows, entry doors) must be at least 0.10 m above the waterline of the leak in the final State of the flooding. The bulkhead deck should not dive into the final State of the flooding.
(d) the ability to flood is believed to 95%. Is proven by a calculation that the Middle surge of a Department is less than 95%, the calculated value can be employed.
The following values may not be exceeded: accommodation 95% machine and boiler rooms 85% luggage and store rooms 75% luggage and store rooms, double bottoms, fuel tanks, ballast tanks and other tanks depending on whether they accordingly accepted their determination for the vessel floating at the level of the draught than full or empty to 0 or 95%.
(e) If a leak of less extent than the above given less favourable conditions with respect to heeling or loss of metazentrischer height results in a such leak in the calculation must be adopted.
10 in all intermediate States of flooding referred to in point 8 following criteria is required: a) the heeling angle φ of the equilibrium position of the intermediate state must not exceed 15°.
(b) on the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate state, the positive area of the lever arm curve must be a righting lever GZ ≥ 0,02 m, before the first unprotected opening immersed or a heeling angle φ of 25 ° is reached.
(c) non-watertight openings may not immersed before the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate state is reached.
(d) for the calculation of the free surface effect in all intermediate States of flooding is assumed by the gross surface area of the damaged areas.
11 in the final State of flooding the following criteria, taking into account the heeling moment after number 4 must be complied: a) the angle of heel φE 10° not exceed.
(b) about the equilibrium position, the positive area of the lever arm curve must be a righting lever of GZR ≥ 0,02 m in conjunction with an area A ≥ 0.0025 m · wheel exhibit. These minimum values of stability are to comply up to immersion of the first unprotected opening or in any case before reaching a heeling angle of 25 °.
(c) openings may not immerse not water density before the equilibrium position is reached. If such openings before this point plunge, the spaces that are connected to them, must be viewed in the leak stability into account as flooded.
It is: φE of the heeling angle in the final State of the flooding taking into account of the moments after number 4;
Φm of the angle of vanishing stability or the angle at which the first unprotected opening comes to water, or 25°; the lower these values is to apply;
GZR the rest of lever arm in the final State of the flooding taking into account of the moments after number 4;
GZK the krängende lever arm from the moment referred to are 4-12 closure devices for openings that need to be waterproof, lockable, to label.
13 be cross flood openings to reduce asymmetrical flooding provided they comply with following requirements: a) for the calculation of cross-flooding, IMO resolution is A. 266 (VIII) anzu - contact.
(b) you must act automatically.
(c) they must be equipped with shut-off valves.
(d) the time for the full compensation may not exceed 15 minutes.

Article 15.04 safety clearance and freeboard of 1.
The safety distance must be at least the sum: a) from the additional lateral immersion, which, measured on the outer skin, the permissible heeling results letter e No. 3 according to article 15.03, and b) from the safe distance of the rest according to article 15.03 no. 3 letter g.
For vessels without a bulkhead deck, the safety distance must be at least 0.50 m.
2. the freeboard must correspond to at least the sum: a) from the additional lateral immersion, which, measured on the outer skin, the heeling results letter e No. 3 according to article 15.03, and b) the residual freeboard according to article 15.03 no. 3 letter f.
The freeboard shall be at least 0.30 m.
3. the maximum draught level is to assess, that the safety distance referred to in point 1, the freeboard referred to in point 2 and the sections 15.02 and 15.03 complied.
4. the Commission may impose a larger margin of safety or a greater freeboard for security reasons.

Article 15.05 maximum permitted number of passengers 1.
The Commission sets the maximum permitted number of passengers and enters it in the certificate.
2. the maximum permissible number of passengers may exceed any of the following values: a) number of passengers for a gathering space after paragraph 15.06 No. 8 is proved;
b) number of passengers that the stability calculation according to article 15.03 is based;
(c) number of existing beds for passengers on cabin vessels used for trips with overnight stay.
3. for cabin vessels which are also used as day trip vessels, is to calculate the number of passengers as a day trip vessel and as a cabin vessel and entered in the ship's certificate.
4. the maximum number of passengers is on board in conspicuous place clearly beat.

Article 15.06 passenger rooms and areas 1 passenger compartments must: a) on all decks behind the plane of the collision bulkhead and, as long as they are below the bulkhead deck, front of the plane of the rear compartment are and b) be gastight separated from engine - and boiler rooms.
Deck areas, the plan or similar mobile devices not only upwards, but also side partially or completely housed are, must meet the same requirements as closed passenger compartments.
2. cabinets in accordance with paragraph 11.13 and spaces for the storage of flammable liquids must be located outside the passenger area.
3. number and width of the exits of passenger rooms have the following requirements: a) rooms or groups of rooms, which are furnished or intended for 30 or more passengers or have beds for 12 or more passengers, must have at least two exits. On day trip vessels one of these two outputs by two emergency exits must be replaced. Rooms, except cabins, or groups of rooms, which have only one exit, must have at least an emergency exit.
(b) spaces below the bulkhead deck, are one of the outputs must be a watertight bulkhead door no. 10 to a neighboring Department according to article 15.02, from which the higher lying deck can be reached immediately. The other output must immediately or, if referred to a permitted as emergency exit on the bulkhead deck or in the open lead. This shall not apply in the case of the individual cabins.
(c) outputs to letter a and b have to be suitably arranged, have a clear width of at least 0,80 m and a height of at least 2.00 m. At doors of passenger cabins and other small spaces, the clear width may be reduced up to 0.70 m.
(d) in the case of rooms or groups of rooms intended for more than 80 passengers the sum of the widths of all exits intended for passengers and these must be used in an emergency must be at least 0.01 m per passenger.
(e) the number of passengers for the total width of all outputs is decisive, the width of each output must be at least 0.005 m per passenger.
(f) emergency exits must be a minimum side length of at least 0.60 m or of a minimum diameter of 0.70 m. You need to get open in the direction of escape and on both sides be identified.
(g) exits of rooms intended for use by persons with reduced mobility must have a clear width of at least 0.90 m. Outputs, which are usually used for the presence or movement of persons with reduced mobility, must have a clear width of at least 1.50 m.
4. doors of passenger spaces must meet the following requirements: a) with the exception of the doors, which lead to connecting corridors, they must open outwards or be constructed as sliding doors.
(b) cabin doors shall be so designed that they can be closed at any time from the outside.
c)
Doors must be with drive failure easily open the drive energy.
(d) in the case of doors, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, the lateral distance between the Castle-side edge of the door frame and a neighboring, arranged perpendicular to the plane of the door wall on the side at which the door swings out, must be at least 0.60 m.
5. connecting corridors must meet the following requirements: a) you must have a clear width of at least 0,80. They lead to rooms that are intended for more than 80 passengers, they must meet the 3 (d) and referred to in e requirements for the width of the connecting corridors leading outputs in number.
(b) their height must not be less than 2.00 m.
(c) connecting corridors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility must have a clear width of at least 1.30 m. Connecting corridors with a width of more than 1.50 m must be on both sides of handrails.
(d) only a connecting corridor leads to a room intended for passengers, the clear width of the connection duct must be at least 1.00 m.
(e) they must be free from paragraphs.
(f) you may lead only to free decks, rooms or staircases.
(g) dead ends in connecting corridors should be no longer than two metres.
6 escape routes must in addition to number 5 following requirements: a) the arrangement of staircases, exits and emergency exits must take into account be, that all other areas can be evacuated in fire in any room.
(b) escape routes must lead on the shortest route to collecting areas referred to in point 8.
(c) escape routes shall not lead through engine rooms and kitchens.
(d) in the course of escape routes, no crampons corridors, ladders or the like may be installed.
(e) doors on escape routes must be so constructed that they not restrict the minimum width of the escape route letter a or d referred to in point 5.
(f) escape routes and emergency exits must be clearly marked. The markings must be illuminated by emergency lighting.
7 escape routes and emergency exits must have a suitable safety guidance system.
8 for all persons on board quilts must be available to meet the following requirements: a) the total area of the collecting surfaces (AS) must meet at least the following value: day-trip vessels: AS = 0,35 · FMAX [m2];
Cabin vessels: AS = 0.45 · FMAX [m2].
In these formulas means: FMAX = maximum permitted number of passengers on board.
(b) any individual collection and evacuation area must be greater than 10 m2.
(c) the collecting surfaces must be free of movable and fixed furniture.
d) is located in a room, is assigned in the collecting area, moving furniture, this must be sufficient to prevent slipping back.
(e) is located in a room in which a collecting area is designated, fixed seating furniture, the number of persons for which it is suitable, when calculating the total area of the collecting surfaces referred not to be considered a. The number of people considered for the in a room fixed seating furniture, for in this room collecting spaces but not the number of persons exceed, are available.
f) from the evacuation areas, the life-saving appliances shall be easily accessible.
(g) a safe evacuation of persons from the evacuation areas must be possible from both sides of the vessel.
h) the collecting surfaces must be above the edge of the diving.
(i) the collection and evacuation areas are to represent the security plan as such and to mark on board.
(j) the rules referred to in d and e also apply to open decks where collecting areas are designated.
(k) appropriate Sammelrettungsmittel available on board, the number of persons for which they are suitable for the calculation of the total area of the collecting surfaces referred to in not to be considered a need.
(l) the total area must be referred to in a but in all cases in which a reduction is carried out after letter e, j, and k, sufficient for at least 50% of the maximum permitted number of passengers on board.
9 have stairs in the cabin area and their platforms: a) according to the European standard EN 13056: 2000 be built;
(b) a clear width of at least 0,80 m or, if they lead to connecting corridors or stairs that are used by more than 80 passengers, at least 0,01 m per passenger have;
(c) a clear width of at least 1.00 m have, if they lead to a room intended for passengers, that is accessible only via this intercommunication;
(d) in the safe area are, if not on every ship page in the same room at least a staircase exists;
e) in addition, if they are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, meet the following requirements: aa) the angle of the stairs must not exceed 38°.
BB) the stairs must have a clear width of at least 0.90 m;
CC) the stairs may have no tread;
DD) allowed stairs not across run to the ship;
EE) the handrails of the stairs in - and outlets are with a horizontal distance of 0.30 m above to move that they do not restrict circulation routes;
FF) handrails, front edges of at least the first and the last steps and floor coverings are at the ends of the stairs highlighted by color.
Lifts that are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, and lifts, stairlifts or lifting platforms, must be carried out according to a relevant standard or rule of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
10 for passengers, not closed parts of the deck must meet following requirements: a) you 711: 1995, type PF, must with a solid bulwark of at least 1.00 m high or a railing according to European standard EN PG or PZ be surrounded. Bulwarks and railings of decks, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility must have a height of at least 1.10 m.
b) apertures and installations for the arrival or departure, as well as openings for loading/unloading or showing must be protected and have a clear width of at least 1.00 m. Openings, which are usually used for the presence or movement of persons with reduced mobility, must have a clear width of 1.50 m.
(c) the openings or facilities for the arrival or departure of the wheelhouse are visible, optical or electronic tools must be present.
11 parts not intended for passengers of ships, in particular the access to the wheelhouse, to the winds and engine rooms, must be secured against unauthorized access. At these entrances a symbol according to annex I must also be in conspicuous place attached figure 1.
12 land bridges must be designed according to the European standard EN 14206: 2003. By way of derogation from article 10.02 No. 2 letter d can whose length less than 4 m.
13 traffic areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility must have a clear width of at least 1.30 m and be free of thresholds and Süllen, the amount of which exceeds 0.025 m. Walls in traffic areas, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility are to be provided with handrails at a height of 0,90 m above the ground.
14 glass doors, glass walls in traffic areas and window panes must be manufactured from pre-stressed glass or laminated glass. You can also be, if permitted in terms of fire safety, made from plastic.
Transparent doors and up to reaching the ground transparent walls in traffic areas must be conspicuously marked.
15 established that the full or their roofs consisting of Windows, or by planning or similar mobile facilities, as well as the substructure may enclosures only made of such materials and must be so constructed that the risk of injury to persons is as low as possible in the event of damage.
16 drinking water systems must comply with at least the requirements of § 12.05.
17 it must be toilets for passengers. At least a toilet must be according to a relevant standard or rule of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium for use by persons with reduced mobility equipped and passenger areas, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility be achieved.
18 cabins, which do not have a window to open, must be connected to a ventilation system.
19 rooms, where the crew or cabin crew are housed, mutatis mutandis comply with this paragraph.

Article 15.07 propulsion system 1.
In addition to the main drive system the vessel with a second independent propulsion system must be fitted, which ensures that the ship in the event of failure of the main drive system can move under its own power.
2. the second independent propulsion system must be located in a separate machine room. The two engine rooms have common surfaces, they must be built in no. 2 according to article 15.11.

According to paragraph 7.08 have article 15.08 safety devices and equipment 1 passenger ships have an internal speech connection. She must in addition the premises and, if there is no direct communication from the wheelhouse, the entry areas and collecting surfaces capture No. 8 for passengers according to article 15.06.
2.
All passenger areas must be achieved with a loudspeaker system. The system must be dimensioned so that information can be clearly distinguished from background noise. Unless you have a direct understanding of the helm to a passenger area, there no speakers need to be available.
3. an alert system must exist. This must be divided in: a) an alarm system to alert of ship management and crew by passengers, crew members or flight attendants.
This alarm shall be made only in the spaces for navigation and crew and can be deleted only by the navigation. The alarm can be triggered at least at the following locations: aa) in each cabin;
BB) in hallways, elevators and stair shafts so, that towards the next release is not more than 10 m, but at least a trigger per watertight Department must exist;
CC) in social, dining and similar lounges;
DD) in toilets, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility;
EE) in machinery spaces, kitchens and similar flammable areas;
FF) in cooling and other storage rooms.
The alarm triggers are at a height of 0.85 to 1.10 m above the ground.-bring;
(b) an alarm system to warn passengers through the navigation.
This alarm must be clear in all areas for passengers and unmistakably noticeable. He can be triggered in the wheelhouse and at one point occupied continuously by staff;
(c) an alarm system to warn the crew and the crew through the navigation according to § 7.09 No. 1.
This alarm system must reach even the lounges for flight attendants, the cold rooms and other store rooms.
The alarm triggers must be protected against unintentional use.
4. any waterproof Department must be equipped with an alarm of level of.
5. There must be two motor-driven bilge pumps.
6. a Lenz system with fixed piping must be present.
7 refrigerators must can be opened even when the door is closed off from the inside.
8 parts of CO2 dispensing systems are located in rooms below deck, so this must be fitted with a ventilation system, which deploys automatically when you open the door or the door of this room. The ventilation pipe must be up to 0.05 m to the floor of this room down.
9. in addition to the first-aid kit according to article 10.02 No. 2 letter f need more first aid kits in sufficient numbers exist. The first aid kits and their accommodation must comply to section 10.02 No. 2 letter f correspond.

Article 15.09 life-saving appliances 1.
In addition to the section 10.05 no. of 1 called rescue rings lifebuoys, must on all intended for passengers, not closed parts of the deck on both sides of the ship which - the European standard EN 14144: 2003 or - the International Convention for the safety of life at sea (SOLAS 1974), 1974 rule 7.1 and the international Rettungsmittel-(LSA-)code paragraph 2.1 correspond to chapter III, be present in each 20 m distance.
One half of all prescribed lifebuoys must be provided with each at least 30 m long, floating line from 8 to 11 mm diameter. The other half of the prescribed lifebuoys must be fitted with a self priming and not extinguishing water, battery-powered light.
2. in addition to rescue rings after number 1 Einzelrettungsmittel must exist for all members of the crew at hand no. 2 according to article 10.05. For the members of the crew, which assume no tasks to the security role, are allowed the standards referred to in no. 2 also solid or semi automatic inflatable life jackets according to in article 10.05.
3. passenger ships must have adequate facilities, the people allow a safe transition from Board in shallow water, ashore or on Board of an another vehicle.
4. in addition to the life-saving appliances referred to in point 1 and 2 Einzelrettungsmittel must exist for 100% of the maximum permissible number of passengers no. 2 after section 10.05, where also solid or semi automatic inflatable lifejackets are permitted standards referred to in no. 2 after the in article 10.05.
5. (without content) 6 additional Sammelrettungsmittel are pieces of equipment that allow lift more in the water of persons. They must: a) have a caption, which, the purpose and the number of persons stating for which they are suited.
(b) a buoyancy in fresh water of at least 100 N per person have;
(c) made of suitable material and resistant to oil and its derivatives and to temperatures up to 50 ° C be;
(d) take a stable floating position and maintained and thereby have appropriate fasteners for the specified number of persons;
e) return-bright orange or have permanently attached back bright, highly visible surfaces at least 100 cm2 and f) of their site quickly and safely by a person overboard are left can or be freely aufschwimmbar.
7 inflatable Sammelrettungsmittel must in addition: a) consist of at least two separate air compartments;
b) when to water automatically or manually inflated are can and c) each occurring load, even if only half of the air compartments inflated, a stable floating position take and keep.
8. the life-saving appliances must be housed on board so that they easily and safely can be reached in case of need. Covert storage points must be clearly identified.
9. the equipment must be tested according to the manufacturer's instructions.
10. the tender must be equipped with a motor and a searchlight.
11. a suitable stretcher must be present.

Article 15.10 electrical equipment 1.
For lighting, electrical systems are allowed.
2nd No. 3 paragraph 9.16 in addition also applies to corridors and recreation rooms for passengers.
3. for the following rooms and offices must be provided an adequate lighting and emergency lighting: a) places where life-saving appliances are stored and where they usually; prepared for use
b) escape routes, entrances for passengers, including land bridges,- and outputs, connecting corridors, lifts and stairs of flats, cabins and living areas;
(c) marking of escape routes and emergency exits;
(d) other areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility;
(e) operational, machinery, rudder engine room and their outputs;
(f) wheelhouse;
(g) space for the emergency source of power;
h) fire fighting equipment and the operating parts of the fire extinguishing systems are; imagine, where
(i) areas where passengers, flight attendants and crew in an emergency collect.
4. es an emergency power system must exist consisting of emergency power source and emergency switchboard, which can take over whose simultaneous replacement power supply failure power the following electrical equipment unless the establishment has no internal power source: a) signal lights;
b) sound equipment;
(c) emergency lighting referred to in point 3;
d) radiotelephone installation;
e) alarm, loudspeaker and on-board internal messaging systems;
f) lamps according to section 10.02 No. 2 point (i); g) fire alarm system;
h) other safety equipment such as automatic pressure water spray systems and fire pumps;
(i) lifts and lifts according to article 15.06 No. 9 set 2 5.
The lighting of emergency lighting shall be marked as such.
6. the emergency power system must be outside of the main engine room, the rooms in which the energy sources, no. 1 are accommodated according to § 9.02, and of the installation space of the main switchboard set up and of these spaces by separating areas according to article 15.11 no. 2 separated.
Cables that supply electrical equipment in an emergency, are to position and maintain that continuity of supplies to these facilities in the case of fire and flooding is maintained. In any case these cables may be not carried, by the main engine room by kitchen or rooms, which contain the electric main energy source and the associated equipment, except only to the extent, as it is necessary to provide for the emergency in these areas of facilities.
The emergency power system must no. 1 away on be above the edge of the diving or as far as the energy sources according to § 9.02, that she at the same time is flooded No. 9 in leak cases according to article 15.03 to these energy sources.
7 as emergency power supplies are allowed: a) units with their own independent supply of fuel and independent cooling system, which can start automatically and automatically take over the power supply for 30 seconds during a power failure or, if they are located in the immediate vicinity of the wheelhouse or any other body occupied continuously by crew members, be tempered by hand.
b) batteries, which automatically take over at mains power supply or, if they are in the immediate vicinity of the wheelhouse or any other body crew members constantly occupied by hand switched on can be. You must be able to provide to consumers during the prescribed time without intermediate load and without unacceptable voltage drop.
8 for the emergency power supply to be specified operating time is set according to the intended use of the passenger vessel. She must not be less than 30 minutes.
9.
The insulation resistance and grounding for electric systems must at be examined by testing according to section 2.09.
10. the energy sources according to § 9.02 No. 1 must be independent of each other.
11 errors in the main or emergency power system must not cause a mutual influence of the reliability of the equipment.

Article 15.11 fire protection 1.
The fire protection technical suitability of materials and components must be determined by an accredited test Institute on the basis of appropriate testing.
a) must testing Institute: aa) the code for fire test procedures or bb) meet the European standard EN ISO/IEC 17025: 2000 about the General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories.
b) test for determining the non-combustibility of materials are: aa) Annex 1 part 1 of the code for fire test procedures and bb) equivalent regulations of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
c) test for determining the flammability of materials are: aa) the applicable requirements of Appendix 1, part 5 (surface discharge flammability test), 6 (test for deck coverings), 7 (test for hanging textiles and plastics), 8 (test for upholstered furniture), 9 (test for items of Bettzeuges) of the code for fire test procedures and bb) equivalent regulations of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
d) test requirements for determining the fire resistance are: aa) the annex 1 part 3 of the code for fire test procedures and bb) equivalent regulations of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.
(e) the Commission may require a trial on a sample cutting area in accordance with the code for fire test procedures to ensure that number 2 about the resistance and temperature increase the regulations is complied with.
2. parting surfaces a) spaces must be designed according to the following tables: aa) 5 table for parting surfaces of spaces, where according to section 10.03, a installed no pressure water spray systems are spaces control stations stair shafts quilts living quarters machine rooms kitchens storerooms stations - A0 A0/B151 A30 A60 A60 A30/A605 stair shafts - A0 A30 A60 A60 A30 collector surface - A30/B152 A60 A60 A30/A605 accommodation rooms-/ A0/B153 A60 A60 A30 machinery spaces A60/A04 A60 A60 kitchens A0 A30/B156 storerooms - bb) table for parting surfaces of rooms , in which pressure water spray systems according to § 10.03a rooms are installed machine stations stair shafts quilts accommodation rooms kitchens storerooms stations - A0 A0/B151 A0 A60 A30 A0/A305 stair shafts - A0 A0 A60 A30 A0 collector surface - A30/B152 A60 A30 A0/A305 accommodation rooms-/ B15/B03 A60 A30 A0 machinery spaces A60/A04 A60 A60 kitchens - A0/B156 storerooms - 1 separation surfaces between stations and inner composite surfaces must comply with type A0 , outside gathering areas only to type B15.
2 parting surfaces between accommodation spaces and inner composite surfaces must be type A30, with external collecting surfaces but only the type B15.
3 walls of cabins with one another, walls between cabins and corridors and vertical surfaces passenger areas by number 10 must comply with type B15, for rooms with pressure water spray systems type B0. Parting surfaces must comply with type A0, in rooms with pressure water spray systems between cabins and saunas type B15.
4 parting surfaces between engine rooms according to the articles 15.07 and 15.10 paragraph 6 must type A60, the remainder of which correspond to type A0.
Type A 30 5 parting surfaces between storage rooms for the storage of flammable liquids and stations, as well as collecting surfaces must comply with type A60, areas with pressure water spray systems.
6 for parting surfaces of kitchens to cold rooms or storage rooms for food, B15 is sufficient.
b) of type A are bulkheads, walls and decks, meet the following requirements: aa) they are made of steel or another equivalent material;
BB) they are stiffened in an appropriate manner;
CC) they are insulated with an approved non-combustible materials such that the average temperature rises opposite off side not more than 140 ° C above the initial temperature, fire on the and at no point including joint a temperature increase of more than 180 ° C above the initial temperature also occurs within the time specified below: type A60 60 minutes type A30 30 minutes type A0 0 minutes;
DD) they are designed to prevent the passage of smoke and flame to the end of the one-hour normal fire test.
c) of type B are bulkheads, walls, decks, ceilings or panels, which meet the following requirements: aa), they consist of an approved non-combustible materials and all materials used for the manufacture and Assembly of the cutting surfaces are non-combustible with the exception of the surface material of that must be; at least flame resistant
BB) they such a insulating value have, that the average temperature rises opposite off side not more than 140 ° C above the initial temperature, fire on the and at no point including joint a temperature increase of more than 225 ° C above the initial temperature also occurs within the time specified below: type B15 15 minutes type B0 0 minutes;
CC), they are built to half an hour of the normal fire test prevent the passage of flame to the end of the first.
3 colors used in spaces, except engine and stock rooms, varnishes, and other products for surface treatment and decking must be flame retardant. Carpets, fabrics, curtains and other hanging textile materials as well as upholstered furniture and bedding must be flame-retardant if the rooms in which they are located, do not have a pressure water spraying system according to § 10.03a.
4 ceiling mounted in accommodation spaces and wall coverings including its substructure must, where the rooms do not have a pressure water spraying system according to section 10.03a, be manufactured from non-combustible materials with the exception of their surfaces, which must be at least fire resistant. Sentence 1 shall not apply for saunas.
5. in accommodation spaces, where there are quilts, furniture and fixtures made of non-combustible materials must be made, unless the rooms do not have a pressure water spraying system according to § 10.03a.
6 paints, varnishes and other substances that are used on exposed interior surfaces must not create any extraordinary quantities of smoke and toxic substances. This is in accordance with the code for fire test procedures to prove.
7 insulation materials in accommodation spaces must be non-flammable. This shall not apply in the case of insulation of refrigerant lines. The surfaces of the insulation of these lines must be at least flame-retardant.
7A. schedule or similar mobile devices, with which deck areas partly or wholly be housed, as well as the substructures must be flame retardant.
8. doors in cutting areas referred to in point 2 must meet following requirements: a) you must meet the same requirements of the number 2 as the surfaces themselves.
(b) you need to be if it is to doors in partition walls according to number 10 or in packings machine rooms, kitchen and stairs, self-closing.
(c) self-closing doors that are open in normal operation can be connected on the spot and a location occupied continuously by ship personnel. After a remote valve closed must reopen the door in place and securely closed.
(d) watertight doors according to article 15.02 need not to be isolated.
9 number 2 walls must be continuous from deck to deck or end at continuous ceilings, which satisfy the same requirements referred to in point 2.
10. the following passenger areas must be divided by vertical surfaces after number 2: a) passenger areas, whose total area exceeds 800 m2;
b) passenger areas, where cabins are located, at intervals of not more than 40 m.
The vertical surfaces must be smoke-tight under normal conditions and continuously from deck to deck.
11 cavities ceilings, beneath floors and behind wall panels must be separated at intervals of not more than 14 m by non-combustible draught locks good sealing also in case of fire.
12 stairs must be manufactured from steel or another equivalent non-combustible material.
13 stairs and elevators must be at all levels by walls according to point 2 a geschachtet. Following exceptions are allowed: a) a stairway connecting only two decks need to be not a geschachtet when on a deck the stair walls is enclosed by number 2.
b) in a hotel room need to be not a geschachtet stairs if they lie completely inside this space and when aa) this room spans only two decks or bb) a pressure water spraying system is installed according to § 10.03a in this room on all decks, this room has a smoke extraction system according to paragraph 16 and the room on all decks has access to a stairwell.
14 ventilation systems and air supply systems have to following requirements: a) you must be so designed that is bent-over a spread of fire and smoke through these systems and equipment.
(b) openings for supply and exhaust air and air supply systems must be closed.
c)
Ventilation channels must from steel or an equivalent non-combustible material produced and connected safely with each other as well as with the construction of the ship be.
(d) if ventilation channels be carried with a cross section by more than 0,02 m2 surfaces after number 2 of type A or parting surfaces after number 10, they must be equipped with automatic and from a point occupied continuously by cabin crew or crew operated fire damper.
(e) ventilation systems for kitchens and machine rooms must be separated from ventilation systems which supply other areas.
(f) return air ducts are to be provided with lockable openings for inspection and cleaning. These vents must be arranged in the vicinity of the fire valves.
(g) built-in fans must be deactivated by a central point outside the engine room.
15 kitchens must be equipped with ventilation systems and kitchen stoves with deductions. The exhaust air channels of the deductions must comply with the requirements referred to in point 14 and in addition be fitted with manually operated fire dampers at the inlet openings.
16 control stations, stair shafts and inner composite surfaces must be equipped with natural or mechanical smoke extraction systems. Smoke extraction systems must meet the following requirements: a) you must have a sufficient performance and reliability.
(b) you must meet the operating conditions of the passenger vessel.
(c) If smoke extraction systems serve also the general ventilation of the rooms, their function as smoke extraction system in case of fire must not be obstructed as a result.
(d) smoke extraction systems must have a release mechanism is actuated by hand.
(e) mechanical smoke extraction systems in addition can be operated from a location occupied continuously by cabin crew or crew members.
(f) flue systems must be fitted with an opening mechanism with natural deduction which is operated either by hand or from a power source located within the trigger.
g) hand-activated selector and opening mechanisms must by be accessible inside and outside the room to be protected.
17 living quarters, not constantly be seen by Board staff and crew, kitchens, machinery spaces and other vulnerable areas must be connected to an appropriate fire alarm system. The presence of fire, and the fire area must automatically are displayed at one point occupied continuously by cabin crew or crew members.

Article 15.12 fire-fighting 1.
In addition to the portable extinguishers according to section 10.03 at least the following portable extinguishers on board must be present: a) a portable fire extinguisher started 120 m2 gross floor space of passenger compartments;
(b) a portable fire extinguisher on each started group of 10 cabins;
(c) a portable fire extinguisher in every kitchen, and in the vicinity of any room in which flammable liquids are stored or used. The extinguishing agent for fighting fat fires must be suitable in kitchens.
These additional fire extinguishers must no. 2 comply with the requirements of section 10.03 and be installed and distributed on the ship, that a fire extinguisher can immediately be achieved at a fire place anywhere at any time. In any kitchen, as well as in hairdressing salons and perfumeries near at hand there must be a fire blanket.
2. passenger ships must be provided with a hydrant system, comprising: a) two fire pumps with motor drive and sufficient capacity, of which one permanently installed;
(b) a Feuerlöschleitung with a sufficient number of hydrants with permanently connected, at least 20 m long Feuerlöschschläuchen with nozzle that is designed to produce a jet of water as well as a spray, and which is equipped with a locking option).
3. the hydrant equipment designed and constructed in a way be that a) any part of the vessel by at least two different local hydrants out length; possible ever single hose length of not more than 20 m
b) the pressure at the hydrants is at least 300 kPa and c) on all decks a water jet length of at least 6 m can be achieved.
If hydrant cabinets are available, an icon for "Fire hose" according to annex I must be on their outer sides attached image 5 with an edge length of at least 10 cm.
4 Hydrant valves with screw threads or cocks can be placed so, that any of the fire hoses can be separated and removed during operation of the fire fighting pumps.
5. fire hoses in the Interior must be rolled up on an axially connected reel.
6 materials for fire-fighting equipment must be protected adequately against an ineffective will over heat or heat resistant.
7 pipes and hydrants must be so arranged that the possibility of freezing is avoided.
8 the two fire pumps must: a) be placed in separate rooms or housed.
b) can be operated independently of each other
c) each on all decks in the position be, to maintain the required pressure at the hydrants and to reach the required length of the water jet.
(d) be made from the rear bulkhead.
Fire fighting pumps may be used for general operating purposes.
9 machinery spaces must be fitted b with a solid built-in fire extinguishing according to section 10.03.
10 on cabin vessels must: a) two self-contained breathing apparatus according to the European standard EN 137: 1993 with full-face mask according to the European standard EN 136: 1998;
(b) two sets of equipment consisting of at least from protective suit, helmet, boots, gloves, axe, crowbar, torch and lead;
(c) four smoke hoods exist.

Article 15.13 safety organisation 1.
A security role must be present on passenger ships. Describes the tasks of the occupation and of the staff for the following cases: a) general average;
b) fire on board;
(c) evacuation of passengers;
(d) person overboard.
Special security measures that are required for persons with reduced mobility are taken into account.
The various tasks are assigned to the function to the members of the crew and the crew, who have tasks in the security role. In particular, it must be ensured by special instructions that all doors and openings in watertight bulkheads are closed immediately waterproof according to article 15.02 in case of danger.
2. on the security role belongs to a security plan of the vessel on which are clear and clearly at least known: a) areas, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility;
b) escape routes, emergency exits, collection and evacuation areas;
c) life-saving appliances and ship's boats;
d) fire extinguishers and fire extinguishing and automatic pressure water spray systems;
(e) other safety equipment;
(f) alarm system according to § Aug 15 No. 3 letter a;
g) alarm system according to § Aug 15 No. 3 letter b and c; h) doors in bulkheads according to article 15.02 No. 5 and its control points, as well as other openings according to article 15.02 No. 9, 10 and 13 and article 15.03 no. 12;
(i) doors in accordance with paragraph 15.11 no. 8;
j) fire dampers;
k) fire alarm system;
l) emergency power plant;
(m) operating organs of the ventilation systems;
n) country connections;
(o) shut off valves of fuel lines;
(p) liquefied gas installations;
(q) speaker systems;
(r) radiotelephone installations;
(s) first aid kits.
3. the role of the security referred to in point 1 and the safety plan referred to in point 2 must: a) carry an endorsement of the Commission of inquiry and b) be clearly visible hanging on each deck at a suitable place.
4 rules of conduct for passengers, as well as a short security plan, which 2 letters a contains only the information referred to in point to f, must be in each cabin.
This code of conduct must at least include: a) designation of emergencies: aa fire.
BB) leak;
CC) general danger.
b) description of the respective emergency signals.
c) instructions regarding: aa) escape route;
BB) behavior;
CC) preservation of peace.
d) notes Re: aa) smoke;
BB) use of fire and open light;
CC) opening of the Windows;
DD) use of certain facilities.
This information must be available in German, English, French and Dutch.

Section 15.14 facility for the collection and disposal of domestic waste water 1. passenger vessels must be equipped with Abwassersammeltanks or appropriate on-board sewage treatment plants.
2. waste water collecting tanks must have a sufficient content. The tanks must be fitted with a device for determining the level or degree of filling. To empty the tanks must be on-board pumps and lines exist, can be used to pass waste water on both sides of the vessel. A conduit of waste water of other ships must be possible. The pipes must be fitted with a charge port according to the European standard EN 1306: 1996.

Article 15.15 derogations for certain passenger ships 1 passenger ships, which are approved for the carriage of passengers, less than 50 and which does not exceed 25 m LWL must either according to article 15.03, no. 7 to 13 provide proof of a sufficient damage stability or to demonstrate that they meet the following criteria in the symmetrical flooded State: a) the ship, maximum, can dive up to the limit of diving and b) the residual metacentric height GMR shall not be less than 0.10 m.
The necessary residual buoyancy is the appropriate choice of material of the hull or buoyancy body made of closed-cell foam, which are firmly connected to the fuselage to ensure. For vessels with a length of more than 15 m, residual buoyancy can be ensured by a combination of flotation and SCHOTT divisions for the Division 1 status according to article 15.03.
2. the Commission may for passenger ships referred to in point 1 minor deviations from the in article 15.06 No. 3 (c) and no. 5 letter of b required clear height to admit. The deviation must be not more than 5%. Deviations from the relevant parts of the ship are colour marked.
3. by way of derogation from article 15.03 no. 9 passenger ships, which are approved for the carriage of no more than 250 passengers and the length of which does not exceed 45 m, do not need to meet the 2 Department status.
4. (without content) 5.
The Commission of inquiry can see for passenger ships, which are approved for the carriage of no more than 250 passengers and their LWL does not exceed 25 m, of the fulfillment of section 10.04 If the passenger ships with a platform on both sides to reach shortly is fitted above the waterline of the swimming, which allows to recover persons in the water. The passenger vessel can be equipped with a comparable institution with: a) a person; sufficient for the operation of the institution
b) mobile devices are allowed;
c) that institution must remain outside of the danger zone of the propulsion organs) and (d) an effective communication between the captain and the person-use the facility must be possible.
6. the Commission of inquiry can see for passenger ships, which are approved for the carriage of no more than 600 passengers and the length of which does not exceed 45 m, of the fulfillment of section 10.04 If the passenger ships with a platform set 2 set 1 or comparable with one of the platform set up after number 5 referred to in point 5. In addition, the passenger vessel a must) as a main drive a rudder propeller, a Zykloidalpropeller or a water jet propulsion, or b) a main drive with 2 propulsion organs or c) have a main drive and a bow shot blasting machine.
7 by way of derogation from article 15.02 No. 9 may on passenger vessels not exceeding 45 m in length and its maximum passenger number of the length of the vessel is in meters, a manually operated door without remote control in a bulkhead according to article 15.02 No. 5 in the passenger area exist, if: a) the ship has only one deck;
(b) this door is directly from the deck to reach out and not more than 10 metres from the access to the deck;
c) which is at least 30 cm above the floor of the passenger area lower edge of the door opening) and (d) the two divisions separated by the door with an alarm of level of are equipped.
8 by way of derogation from article 15.06 No. 6 letter c an escape route through a kitchen must lead on passenger ships referred to in point 7, if a second escape route is available.
9. for passenger ships the length of which does not exceed 45 m, section 15.01 does no. 2 letter e, if the LPG are equipped with suitable warning devices for hazardous concentrations of CO, as well as for explosive gas-air mixtures.
10. following rules do not apply to passenger ships, which does not exceed 25 m LWL: a) § 15.04 no. 1 last sentence;
b) article 15.06 No. 6 letter c, as far as kitchens are concerned, if there is a second escape route;
c) § 15.07. 11.
For cabin vessels, the length of which does not exceed 45 m, section 15.12 does no. 10, if there in each cabin smoke hoods are within reach in a number that corresponds to the the beds being there.
Chapter 16 special provisions for vehicles intended for use as part of a pushed train, a tow or a coupled combination appropriate section 16.01 to push vehicles 1 vehicles, to be used for pushing, must be fitted with a suitable pushing device. You must be so constructed and equipped that a) transition to the deferred vehicle with the clutch means is easy and safe to do so.
b) they can take up a fixed position or the coupled vehicles and c) moving the vehicles against each other is prevented.
2. wire ropes used to couple, at least two special winches or equivalent facilities to tension the ropes must be on the vehicle suitable for sliding.
3. coupling devices must allow a rigid connection with the or the deferred vehicles.
For pushed convoys, which consist of a precedent and only a deferred vehicle, the coupling facilities could allow controlled kinking. The required drives must can properly absorb the forces to be transmitted and easily and is safe to use. The articles 6.02 to 6.04 shall apply mutatis mutandis for these drives.
4. for pusher craft No. 1 can be eliminated according to § 3.03 2(a) the collision bulkhead.

Appropriate § 16.02 to get pushed vehicles 1.
For barges without control unit, apartment, machinery or boiler rooms shall not apply: a) Chapter 5 to 7, 12;
b) article 8.08, no. 2 to 8, article 10.02, section 10.05 no. 1.
Tax facilities, apartments, machinery or boiler rooms are available, should the corresponding requirements of this Regulation shall apply.
2. for ship-borne barges with L not exceeding 40 m also applies: a) watertight transverse bulkheads according to § 3.03 no. 1 can be omitted if the front side can accommodate at least 2.5 times load as the collision bulkhead of a comply with appropriate depth, which is built according to the requirements of a classification society recognized by all States of banks of the Rhine and Belgium.
(b) by way of derogation No.1 inaccessible floor cells from article 8.08 must be only drainable, if their volume exceeds 5% of the water displacement of the carrier ship Lakka with maximum permissible draught.
3. vehicles which are to be moved must be fitted with coupling devices which ensure a secure connection with other vehicles.

Appropriate section 16.03 to the moving of coupled vehicles vehicles vehicles that are used to the moving of coupled vehicles should allow bollards or equivalent installations there must be a secure connection of coupled vehicles according to number and arrangement.

§ 16.04 to the Fortbewegtwerden in associations suitable vehicles vehicles which are to be moved in associations, must have about coupling facilities suitable, bollards or equivalent devices which ensure a secure connection with the other vehicles of the association according to number and arrangement.

Appropriate article 16.05 to towing vehicles 1 vehicles, to be used for towing, must meet the following requirements: a) the towing devices must be so arranged that their use does not affect the safety of the vehicle, its crew and its cargo.
(b) bugsierende and slow vehicles must be equipped with a towing hook can of the wheelhouse safely; This does not apply if due to the type or other facilities the capsizing is prevented.
(c) as a towing equipment, towing winches or a towing hook must be present. The towing devices must be before the screw level. This does not apply to tow boats, which are controlled with the drive body, such as rudder propellers or Zykloidalpropeller.
(d) by way of derogation from point c enough for vehicles which are used exclusively for the towing of vehicles propelled by mechanical means in the Rhine navigation police regulation, also a tow facility, bollards or equivalent devices. Point (b) shall apply mutatis mutandis.
(e) there is a risk that the towing hawser on the rear of the ship can catch defectors with wire trap must be attached.
2. vehicles with more than 86 m L may not be admitted to the towing to the Valley.

Section 16.06 trials with associations 1.
For approval as a pusher or motor vessel to the moving of vehicles in a rigid body and the registration of the corresponding notice in the certificate, the Commission determines whether and what information demonstrate you are and causes the trials according to § 5.02 with the Association in which or the requested formations that make their appearance at worst. While this association must comply with the articles 5.02 to 5.10.
The Commission verified whether the rigid connection of all vehicles of the Association during the manoeuvres is ensured according to Chapter 5.
2. special devices on the vehicles moving away in the Association (such as steering gear, drive or maneuvering equipment, shaft couplings) used in the trials referred to in point 1, articles 5.02 to 5.10 to the meet, are to be entered in this case, the certificate of the vehicle moving the Association: formation, position, name and European ship number of approved vehicles, have facilities employed about these special.

Article 16.07 entries in the ship's certificate 1 set a vehicle to move a dressing or moving in it, must be stated in the certificate that it is suitable on the basis of the requirements after the articles 16.01 to 16.06 it.
2. in navigability of on moving vehicle have to be: a) approved associations and formations;
b) way of clutches;
c) largest measured coupling forces and d)
If necessary, minimum breaking force of the clutch cables of the longitudinal joints as well as number of eyelets.
Chapter 17 special provisions applicable to floating equipment article 17.01 General requirements for floating devices apply to construction and equipment chapters 3, 7 to 14 and 16. For floating devices with drive in addition the chapters 5 and 6 actuators that allow only small movements, not apply as travel drives.

Article 17.02 derogations 1.
The Commission of inquiry may allow deviations of the following provisions: a) § 3.03 Nos 1 and 2 shall apply mutatis mutandis;
b) § 7.02 shall apply mutatis mutandis;
(c) the maximum permissible sound pressure level no. 5 sentence 2 must be exceeded after § 12.02 during operation of the equipment, if; stayed during operation not on board
(d) of the remaining provisions concerning construction, furnishings and equipment, as far as is demonstrated in each case-same security.
2. the Commission of inquiry can waive on the application of the following provisions: a) on § 10.01 no. 1, if the floating device anchored safely during operation of the equipment by means of working anchors or piles can be. A floating device with its own propulsion must have no. 1 according to § 10.01 but at least an anchor, using the coefficient of k equal to 45 and for T to address the minimum page height;
(b) to section 12.02 No. 1 second half-sentence, if the rooms are sufficiently electrically to illuminate.
3. Additionally: a) for article 8.08 No. 2, sentence 2: the bilge pump must be driven
(b) the noise in a lateral distance of 25 m from the lift shall exceed that during operation of the working equipment of 65 dB(A) devices for article 8.10 floating No. 3: if dead;
(c) section 10.03 no. 1: for free on deck equipment at least an additional portable fire extinguisher must be provided for;
(d) for article 14.02 No. 2: in addition to liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes there must be other liquefied natural gas facilities. These units and their accessories must comply with the requirements of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium.

§ 17th March other provisions 1.
A general alarm system must be present on floating devices which during operation persons are present. The alert must differ significantly from other signals and in all apartments and all workplaces generate a sound pressure level, which is higher than the local prevailing maximum noise level at least 5 dB(A). The alarm system can be triggered in the wheelhouse and in the main operating places.
2. work equipment must have a sufficient strength for their load and comply with the requirements of one of the Rhine River States.
3. stability and strength of the working facilities and, where appropriate, their fixtures must be such that they can withstand loads expected heel, trim and movements of the floating device.
4. be lifted loads using hoists, which is of stability and strength resulting maximum load on a table on the deck and at the control points visible to install. The lifting capacity can be expanded by connecting additional floats the values with and without additional buoyancy chamber must be specified.
5. floating devices that are approved for use in the coastal or maritime navigability is replaced, if they don't have one, by a certificate in accordance with Annex G, B after installation. In addition, Chapter 20 in accordance with the requirements of chapter 17 must be met.

Article 17.04 residual safety clearance 1.
For the purposes of this chapter and by way of derogation from article 1.01 of residual safety clearance is the shortest vertical distance between the smooth water level and the lowest point over the the floating device is no longer watertight, taking into account trim and heeling, which occur under the influence of the moments according to section 17.07 No. 4.
2. a residual safety clearance No. 1 is sufficient according to article 17.07 at sprühwasser - and weather erdichten openings if he is 300 mm.
3. on a not sprühwasser - and weather-erdichten opening the safety distance of rest of must be at least 400 mm.

Article 17.05 residual freeboard of 1.
For the purposes of this chapter and by way of derogation from article 1.01 of the residual freeboard is the shortest vertical distance between the smooth water mirror and side deck, taking into account trim and heel that occur under the influence of the moments according to section 17.07 No. 4.
2. the residual freeboard No. 1 according to article 17.07 is sufficient, if it is 300 mm.
3. the residual freeboard may be reduced if it is shown that article 17.08 is not exceeded.
4. the shape of the float differs substantially from the shape of the pontoon, in cylindrical floats or a float, whose Querschnitt has more than four pages, the Commission of inquiry can request a residual freeboard different from number 2 or allow. This also applies to a floating device with several floats. If he is 300 mm is sufficient.

Section 17.06 slight attempt 1.
The stability proof must be submitted on the basis of a properly performed inclination attempt after the articles 17.07 and 17.08.
2 insufficient angle of heel in the inclining test can be achieved or conducting the heeling test causes unreasonable technical difficulties, a weight and focus on Bill can be carried as a substitute. The result of the weight calculation is to control, where with the help of depth measurements the difference no more than ± exceed 5%.

Article 17.07 stability detection 1.
It is to demonstrate that there is adequate residual safety clearance and a sufficient residual freeboard at the loads on the usage and operation. While the sum of the angles of heel and trim may be not more than 10 ° and the bottom of the float must not out diving.
2. the stability must be the following data and documents include evidence: a) scale drawings of floats and the working equipment as well as their required for the stability detection details like tank contents, openings to the Interior of the ship;
b) hydrostatic data or curves;
c) lever arm curves of static stability, as referred to in point 5 or article 17.08
(d) description of operating conditions with the appropriate weight and priority data including empty and transition state.
(e) calculation of the heeling, trimmenden and righting moments with indication of the occurring heel and trim angles, residual safety clearance and rest freiborde.
(f) compilation of calculation results with indication of the usage - and load limits.
The stability detection are 3. at least the following load assumptions to use: a) density of the excavator goods with excavators: aa) sand and gravel 1.5 t / m3;
BB) very wet sand 2,0 t / m3;
CC) soil in an average 1.8 t / m3;
DD) mixture of sand and water in pipes 1.3 t / m3;
(b) in the case of Greifbaggern, the values are referred to a increase by 15%;
(c) in the case of hydraulic excavators, the maximum lifting capacity is to be based.
4.1 in the proof of stability are to take into account the following moments: a) of load;
structural asymmetries of b) from;
(c) from wind pressure;
(d) from rotation on units with its own motive power;
(e) from cross flow, if necessary.
f) of ballast and inventories;
(g) for deck loads and, where appropriate, cargo;
h) of free liquid surfaces;
(i) from dynamic mass forces;
(j) for any other mechanical devices.
There are moments that can work at the same time, to add.
4.2 the moment as a result of the wind pressure shall be calculated using the following formula: in this formula: c shape-dependent coefficient of drag.
For frameworks c = 1.2 and for full wall bracket c = 1.6 to use. Both values include the influences of gusts of wind.
The area enclosed by the outline of the framework must be used as attack surface of wind power.
PW-specific wind pressure, he is uniformly set with 0.25 kN/m2;
A lateral plan above the plane of maximum draught in m2;
LW distance of centre of gravity of the lateral plan A from the plane of maximum draught in m. 4.3 for the determination of the moments from the rotation is according to point 4.1 floating devices with drive to use the formula given in section 15.03 no. 6 letter d.
4.4 by cross flow according to point 4.1 letter e caused moment needs only for floating devices that while lying crosswise in streaming water anchored or moored, to be reckoned with.
4.5 the calculation of moments from liquid ballast and liquid stocks f is letter referred to in point 4.1 to determine the worst degree of filling of tanks for stability and to use the appropriate moment in the Bill.
4.6 this caused 4.1 letter i by dynamic mass forces currently referred to under consideration in an appropriate manner, if you expect an influence of stability by movements of the load and the working equipment.
5. the righting moments can be calculated according to the formula for floats with vertical side walls.
Mean in this formula: the metacentric height, in m, φ of the heeling angle in °.
This applies to heeling angles of 10 ° or to a heeling angle deck appears with the page or where the ground off appears. This is the smaller angle. At diagonal sides, the formula is valid up to heeling angles of 5 °; Moreover apply the conditions referred to in point 3 and 4.1 to 4.6. does not allow the particular shape of the float this relief, are required for number 2 lever curves letter c.

§ 17.08 stability proofs with reduced residual freeboard is a reduced residual freeboard according to article 17.05 no. 3 to complete, proven for all operating conditions must, that a) after correction for the free surface of the liquid the metacentric height is not less than 0.15 m;
(b) within a continuous range of 0 ° to 30 °, an erecting lever of at least h = 0,30 - 0,28 · Φn [m] is available. It should be n of the angle of heel of from the lever arm curve takes negative values (stability level). He should not less than 20 °, or 0.35 wheel and with not more than 30 ° or 0,52 wheel to use in the formula, whereby for φn the unit radian (wheel) is to use (1° = 0,01745 wheel);
(c) the sum of the angles of heel and trim is not more than 10 °;
(d) a residual safety clearance exists after section 17.04;
(e) a residual freeboard of at least 50 mm exists;
f) within a continuous range of 0 ° to 30 ° the lever in a rest of at least h = 0.20 - 0.23 · Φn [m] is available. This is φn of the angle of heel of from the lever arm curve takes negative values; He is not more than 30 ° or 0,52 rad to use in the formula. Among rest lever is heel between 0 ° and 30 ° to understand existing biggest difference between the curve of the righting levers and the heeling lever curve. An opening comes to the inside of the ship at an angle of heel to water, which is smaller than the angle of heel associated with the largest difference, the rest lever requirement applies to this angle of heel.

Article 17.09 draught marks and draught draught marks according to § 4.04 and draught according to § 4.06 must be attached.

Article 17.10 floating equipment without proof of stability 1.
On the application of articles 17.04 to 17.08 may be dispensed with floating devices, a) any change of the heel or the trim can be caused by their work setting up and b) where reduce is a shift of gravity.
2. but a must) at maximum load the safety distance 300 mm and the freeboard 150 mm;
(b) the safety distance for not sprühwasser - and weather-tight lockable openings be 500 mm.
Chapter 18 special provisions for construction vehicles section 18.01 operating conditions construction site vehicles, who are referred to B as such in the ship's certificate for plant, may outside run only without load from construction sites. This edition is to be entered in the certificate.
To do this, these construction vehicles must have a certificate of the competent authority duration and local limit of the construction site, where the vehicle may be used.

Article 18.02 application of part provided in this chapter, unless otherwise determined is II, apply for the construction and equipment of construction vehicles the chapters 3 to 14 of part II.

Article 18.03 derogations 1 a) section 3.03 shall apply mutatis mutandis; No. 1
(b) sections 5 and 6 shall apply mutatis mutandis if there is a separate drive;
c) section 10.02 No. 2 letter a and b shall apply mutatis mutandis;
(d) from the other rules concerning construction, furnishings and equipment, the Commission of inquiry can allow exceptions if in some cases same safety is proven.
2. the Commission may on the application of the following provisions of the exposure: a) article 8.08 No. 2 to 8, if no crew is prescribed;
b) § 10.01 no. 1 and 3, if the construction vehicle by means of working anchors or piles can be securely anchored. A construction vehicle with its own drive must have no. 1 according to § 10.01 but at least an anchor, using the coefficient of k equal to 45 and for T to address the minimum page height;
c) section 10.02 No. 1 letter c, not if the construction vehicle over an own drive has.

Article 18.04 safety clearance and freeboard of 1.
Operated a construction vehicle as a dishwasher and hopper barge, at least 300 mm and the freeboard shall be the safety distance outside the cargo area at least 150 mm. The Commission of inquiry may allow a lower freeboard when it is mathematically proven that sufficient stability when loaded with a medium density 1.5 t / m3 and no side of the deck is water. The influence of liquefied cargo must be considered.
2. for construction vehicles, which do not fall under section 1, the sections 4.01 and 4.02 shall apply mutatis mutandis. Here, the investigation Commission for the safety distance and the freeboard may set different values.

§ 18.05 ship's boats construction vehicles need not to be equipped with a tender if a) no drive is available or b) on the construction site is an another tender available. This relief is to be entered in the certificate.
19 special provisions for Kanalpenichen section 19.01 General information for Kanalpenichen, which travel on the Rhine between Basel (Middle Rhine bridge) and the Iffezheim locks, including the lower offshore, shall apply chapter for the construction and equipment only the sections 19.02 and 19.03

Article 19.02 application of part II apply to Kanalpenichen: 1 § § 3.01, 3.02 No. 2, § 3.03 no. 2 to 4, 6;
2. sections 5 and 6;
by way of derogation from § 6.01 no. 1 Kanalpenichen must be fitted with a reliable steering system, enables the sufficient driving and manoeuvrability;
3. § 8.01.
4. § 9.01 no. 1 is similar;
5. Kanalpenichen must be fitted to the bow with a lever with a mass of at least 250 kg, which is equipped with a chain of at least 50 m long, whose minimum breaking force in kN a third of the actual Ankermasse is in kg. The chain must be replaced by a wire cable of same minimum breaking force.
Following equipment must be aboard: a) two suitable bilge pumps;
b) wire ropes for mooring: aa) a wire rope of at least 100 m length and a diameter of 18 mm, bb) two wire ropes of at least 60 m length and a diameter of 16 mm to 18 mm; c) a heaving line;
(d) a drinking water tank;
e) devices and devices that are be required to specify in the Rhine navigation police regulation of the prescribed Visual and audible, as well as to the designation of vessels;
(f) a land bridge at least 0.40 m width and at least 4 m in length, whose Seiten by a bright Strip are marked; This land bridge must be fitted with a railing;
(g) a boat hook;
h) a first aid kit;
(i) a double glass 7 x 50 or larger lens diameter;
(j) a poster providing clues to the rescue and resuscitation of drowning man;
(k) a qualified fire resistant container with lid for storing oily rags;
(l) ever a qualified fire resistant container for the collection of solid hazardous waste and a qualified fire resistant containers with lids for the collection of liquid hazardous waste treatment;
(m) a qualified fire resistant containers with lids for slops;
(n) on vessels with a Board height of more than 1.50 m above the empty water line, an external Board staircase or ladder;
(o) two portable fire extinguishers;
p) a dinghy with aa) a set of rudder belts, bb) fixed mooring line, cc) a baler.
(q) two lifebuoys and two life vests;
6 § 13.01;
7. Chapter 14.

§ 19.03 (fallen off) Chapter 20 special provisions for seagoing ships section 20.01 application of part II 1 ships, to which the International Convention for the safety of life at sea (SOLAS 1974) or the international load line Convention 1966, 1974 applies, must be in possession of the respective valid international certificate.
2. ships to which SOLAS 1974 or the international load line Convention does not apply, must carry certificates and bear the freeboard mark which are prescribed under the law of the flag State and regarding construction, furnishings and equipment comply with the requirements of the Convention or provide comparable security in other ways.
3. seagoing vessels, to which the International Convention of 1973 for the prevention of the MEE resverschmutzung shall apply from ships (MARPOL 73), must be in possession of a valid international certificate on the prevention of marine pollution (IOPP certificate).
4. ships, the MARPOL 73 does not apply, must carry an appropriate certificate, that is required under the law of the flag State.
5. It also apply: a) Chapter 5.
b) Chapter 6: § 6.01 no. 1; § 6.02 Nos. 1 and 2;
(c) in Chapter 7: § 7.01 no. 2; § 7.02 No. 1 and no. 3 para 1 and 3; § 7.05 no. 2;
§ 7.13 for sea-going vessels, which are admitted to the leadership of the vessel by a person in radar navigation;
(d) in Chapter 8: § 8.03 no. 3, for naval vessels, it is nevertheless allowed when an automatic stop device from the steering station may be decommissioned; Section 8.05 no. 13; Section 8.08 No. 10; § 8.09 Nos. 1 and 2; section 8.10.
No. 10 is a seal of the shut-off body according to article 8.08 a closing of the shutoff valves in the Lenz system about the oily water can be pumped outboard, as equally effective. The or the key must be stored somewhere Central, marked accordingly.
A monitoring and control system for the discharge of oil according to MARPOL 73/78 rule 16 is section 8.08 as equivalent to look at no. 10 a sealing of the shut-off body. The presence of the monitoring and control system shall be demonstrated by an international pollution prevention certificate according to MARPOL 73/78.
Emerges from the IOPP certificate referred to in point 3 or the national certificate issued by a flag State referred to in point 4, that the ship with collecting tanks is equipped in order to maintain all the oily bilge water and oil residues on board, is to see § 8.09 met no. 2.
(e) in Chapter 9: § 9.17;
f) from Chapter 10: § 10.01 and 10.02 No. 1;
(g) Chapter 16: for sea-going vessels, which are approved as part of a Federation.
h) Chapter 22: Chapter 22 is considered fulfilled, if stability is equivalent to the applicable resolutions of the International Maritime Organisation (IMO), the corresponding stability information were audited by the competent authority and the container in the usual for the maritime way are secured.

§ 20.02 (dropped out) Chapter 21 specific provisions for recreational craft article 21.01 General for sports vehicles apply to construction, equipment and crews only the articles 21.02 and 21.03

Article 21.02 application of part II 1.
Apply for pleasure craft: a) from Chapter 3: sections 3.01; 3.02 No. 1 letter a, no. 2; § 3.03 no. 1 letter a, no. 6; § 3.04 no. 1;
b) Chapter 5;
(c) in Chapter 6: § 6.01 no. 1; Article 6.08;
(d) in Chapter 7: § 7.01 Nos. 1 and 2; § 7.02; § 7.03 Nos. 1 and 2; § 7.04 no. 1; § 7.05 no. 2, section 7.13, if there is a radar one man steering position;
(e) in Chapter 8: § 8.01 no. 1, 2; § 8.02 No. 1, 2; Section 8.03 no. 1, 3; § 8.04; Section 8.05 no. 1 to 10, 13; Section 8.06, 8.07 §, § 8.08 No. 1, 2, 5, 7, 10; § 8.09 No. 1; section 8.10;
receive f) from Chapter 9: § 9.01 no. 1;
(g) in Chapter 10: § 10.01 no. 2, 3, 5 to 14; Section 10.02 No. 1 letter a-c, no. 2 letter a and e to h;
Section 10.03 no. 1 letter a, b, and d, with at least two portable fire extinguishers on board; exist § 10.03 no. 2 to 6; § 10.03a; §§ 10.03a; 10.03b, section 10.03c, 10.05;
h) Chapter 13;
(i) Chapter 14 2.
Sports cars, which are subject to the Directive 94/25/EC (directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the approximation of the laws, regulations and administrative provisions of the Member States relating to recreational craft), extend the initial assessment and the follow-up only to: a) section 6.08, if there is a turn indicator;.
b) § 7.01 no. 2; § 7.02; § 7.03 no. 1 and § 7.13, if a single man helm radar is before time;
c) § 8.01 no. 2; § 8.02 No. 1; Section 8.03 no. 3; Section 8.05 no. 5; Section 8.08 No. 2; section 8.10;
d) § 10.01 no. 2, 3, 6 and 14; Section 10.02 No. 1 letters b and c, no. 2 letter a and e to h; Section 10.03 no. 1 letter b and d, no. 2 to 6; Article 10.05;
(e) Chapter 13;
f) from Chapter 14: aa) article 14.12;
BB) section 14.13, where testing is performed in accordance with the requirements of the Directive 94/25/EC after the liquefied natural gas plant and an acceptance report to present is the Commission thereon;
CC) articles 14.14 and 14.15 with the proviso that the liquid gas system must; comply with the requirements of Directive 94/25/EC
DD) Chapter 14 entirely, if the liquefied gas installation is fitted after placing on the market of the sports car.

Article 21.03 (fallen off) Chapter 22 stability of vessels, the container transport § 22.01 General 1.
Are required under the Rhine navigation police regulation for ships carrying containers, stability information, the provisions of this chapter are to apply.
The stability information by a Commission of inquiry to examine or check and provided with an appropriate endorsement.
2. stability information must allow a comprehensible for the ship leader statement about the stability of the vessel in the respective Beladungsfall.
The stability information shall at least include: a) indicated on the permissible stability characteristics, the permissible (abbreviation not representable) values, or the allowable charge focus heights;
b) information on the spaces that can be filled with water ballast;
(c) forms for the stability control;
(d) a sample calculation or application notes for the skipper.
3. can a ship either container unsecured or secured promotion, each special calculation methods for the determination of stability are required for the carriage of unsecured and secured for the transport container loads.
4. a container load is considered certain, only if the individual containers by means of guided tours or clamping devices fixed to the body of the ship are connected and their situation cannot change during the trip.
Chapter 22a specific provisions for vehicles, exceeding 110 m in length section 22a. 01 application of part I for vehicles with L greater than 110 m, excluding ships, no.3 is the Commission of inquiry, which will later issue the certificate, in addition to § 2.03 to before start of construction (new construction or extension of operating vehicle) by the owner or his agent notify. This Commission of inquiry carries out inspections during the construction phase. The visits can be omitted if a certificate presented prior to the construction of a recognized classification society insured that it carries out the construction supervision.

§ 22a. 02 application of part II II apply to vehicles with L greater than 110 m in addition to the requirements of the section § 22a. 03-22a. 05.

§ 22a. 03 strength sufficient strength of the hull in the meaning of § 3.02 No. 1 1(a) (longitudinal and transverse strength and local strength) must be demonstrated by an attestation of a recognized classification society.

§ 22a 04 buoyancy and stability 1.
The numbers 2 to 10 2 apply to vehicles with a length of more than 110 m, except passenger ships.
The basic values for the stability calculation - ship empty weight and centre of gravity of weight - need to by an inclining test according to IMO resolution MSC 267 (85) Annex 1 (where. 2009 p. 724) are determined.
3. the applicant must demonstrate through a calculation based on a process of falling away buoyancy, that the buoyancy and the stability of the vessel are appropriate in the Leckfall. All calculations must be carried out with free trim and free immersion. A charge, have sufficient buoyancy and stability of the vessel in the Leckfall which corresponds to the maximum immersion and evenly is distributed over all cargo holds, as well as detected at maximum supplies and full tank. The stability calculation for the worst Beladungsfall is making for inhomogeneous charge. This stability calculation is to carry on board. This need for the intermediate States of flooding (25%, 50% and 75% of the charge in the final State of the flooding and, where appropriate, for the State immediately before the cross flooding) and provided for the final State of the flooding under the above charging terms calculated proof of sufficient stability.
Following assumptions taken into account are 4 for the Leckfall: a) expansion of damage on one side of the ship: longitudinal expansion: at least 0.10 L, transverse dimensions: 0.59 m, vertical extent: from the base upward unlimited.
b) extent of the damage to the ship's bottom: longitudinal extent: at least 0.10 L, transverse dimensions: 3.00 m, vertical extension: excluded from the base up 0.39 m, swamp.
(c) all in the damage area falling Jock for leak to see, that is, the SCHOTT Division must be chosen so that the vehicle remains afloat after the flooding of two or more departments directly lying in a row. For the main engine room only the buoyancy for the status of a Department needs to be proven, which means that Maschinenraumendschotte is considered to be undamaged. Soil damage are also querschiffs adjacent departments as flooded.
d) flood judges the ability to flood is believed to 95%. Is proven by a calculation that the Middle surge of a Department is less than 95%, the calculated value can be employed. The following values must not be less than:-machinery and premises 85% - holds 70% - double bottoms, fuel tanks, ballast tanks, etc., depending on whether they accordingly be accepted their determination for the vehicle floating at the level of the draught as full or empty to 0 or 95%.
(e) for the calculation of the free surface effect in all intermediate States of flooding is assumed by the gross surface area of the damaged areas.
5 in all intermediate States of flooding referred to in point 3 the following criteria must be respected: a) the heeling angle φ of the equilibrium position of the intermediate state must not exceed 15 °, in the case of unsecured containers 5 °,.
(b) on the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate state, the positive area of the lever arm curve must be 0.03 m, a righting lever GZ ≥ 0,02 m, in the case of unsecured containers, before the first unprotected opening immersed or a heeling angle φ of 27°, in the case of unsecured containers 15 °, is reached.
(c) non-watertight openings may not immersed before the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate state is reached.
6th in the final State of the flooding the following criteria must be respected: a)
The lower edge of not waterproof resealable openings, in particular from doors, Windows, entry doors, must be at least 0.10 m above the level of swimming.
(b) the heeling angle φ of the equilibrium position shall not exceed 12 °, in the case of unsecured containers 5 °.
(c) on the heel in the equilibrium position, the positive area of the lever arm curve must be 0,05 m a righting lever of GZR≥ and the area under the curve must at least 0,0065 m · wheel reach before the first unprotected opening immersed or a heeling angle φ of 27°, in the case of unsecured containers 10 °, is reached.
PDF-Dokument is displayed in its own window d) if non-watertight openings immersed before the equilibrium position is reached, the flooding of rooms, which are connected with them, is taken into account in the leak stability Bill.
7 be cross flood openings to reduce asymmetrical flooding provided the following conditions must be complied: a) for the calculation of the transverse flooding is the IMO resolution. 266 (VIII) (more. 2010 p. 457) to apply.
(b) you must act automatically.
(c) they must be equipped with shut-off valves.
(d) the time for the full compensation may not exceed 15 minutes.
8. If openings on the undamaged sections can additionally flood can be sealed watertight, these closing devices on both sides must be legible fitted with the following caption: "Immediately after passage close opening".
9. the mathematical proof is considered according to paragraphs 3 to 7 provided when leak stability calculations are presented under part 9 of the ADN with a positive result.
10. as far as the plane of maximum draught is necessary to fulfil the requirement referred to in point 3, new set.

§ 22 a 05 additional requirements 1 vehicles of l of more than 110 m must: a) from the wheelhouse of to use bug-blasting machine have a multiple screw drive with at least two independent engines of equal power and one that is effective even when unladen vehicle, or from the wheelhouse of to use bug-blasting machine feature a single screw propulsion and a. The bug blasting machine must have its own energy supply, be effective also in vehicle unladen and failure of the routs drive allow a moving under its own power;
(b) a navigation radar system with turning indicator after § 7.06 have no. 1;
(c) a fixed installed Lenz system according to § have 8.08;
(d) section 2.09 point 1.1 requirements in annex XI, Chapter 2.
2. vehicles, other than passenger ships, with L greater than 110 m, entering the above from Mannheim, must in addition a) in the event without the use of heavy mountain equipment in the middle third of the vehicle be separated. The separate parts of the ship remain afloat after separation;
(provide b) a proof of a recognized classification society about the buoyancy, the location of the trim and stability of the separate parts of the ship, which must contain also a statement, from which loading condition, the buoyancy of the two parts is no longer given. The detection is carried on board;
(c) as a double hull vessels according to ADN be built; Dry cargo ships have the paragraphs 9.1.0.91 to 9.1.0.95, tank ships the 9 of the ADN correspond to paragraphs 9.3.2.11.7 and 9.3.2.13 to 9.3.2.15 of part;
(d) an additional screw propulsion referred to have 1 letter of a first half-sentence;
(e) an entry in the ship's certificate under number 52 have to comply with the specific requirements according to points (a) to (d).
3. passenger vessels with L greater than 110 m, entering the above from Mannheim, must in addition to number 1: a) be constructed under the supervision of a recognized classification society for its highest class or rebuilt. This must be confirmed by a certificate of the classification society. The current class is not required;
(b) either a raised floor with a height of at least 600 mm, and a SCHOTT Division who ensures that the ship with flooding of two waterproof any neighboring departments not below the diving line immersed and there remains a residual safety clearance of 100 mm or have a raised floor with a height of at least 600 mm and a double hull with a distance between the side wall of the vessel and the longitudinal bulkhead of at least 800 mm;
(c) an extra screw drive with at least two mutually independent from the wheelhouse of operable bug Beam steering system have engines of equal power and one that is effective in longitudinal and transverse direction;
(d)) that can directly use stern anchor from the wheelhouse of.
(e) an entry in the ship's certificate under number 52 have to comply with the specific requirements according to points (a) to (d).

§ 22a 06 application of part IV on rebuilding vehicles that are converted to a length of more than 110 m, allowed the investigation chapter 24 only on the basis of specific recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine to apply.

§ 22.02 boundary conditions and calculation methods for the proof of stability with carriage of unsecured containers 1.
In unsecured containers any calculation method for determining the stability of the vessel by following boundary conditions to be has: a) the metacentric height shall not be less than 1.00 m.
(b) under the simultaneous influence of the centrifugal force in the rotation, the wind pressure and the influence of the free surfaces of liquid must not exceed the occurring tilt 5 ° and side deck do not water.
(c) the krängende lever from the centrifugal force when the rotation is to calculate the following formula: In this formula mean: cKZ coefficient (cKZ = 0,04) [s2/m];
v the maximum rate of the vessel against water [m/s];
Height of centre of gravity of the laden vessel base [m];
T' draught of the laden vessel [m].
(d) the krängende lever from wind pressure is to calculate the following formula: in this formula: cKW coefficient (cKW = 0,025) [t/m2];
A' excess water lateral plan in the laden ship [m2];
D ' deplacement of the laden vessel [t];
LW height of centre of gravity of the excess water lateral surface A' above the water line [m];
T' draught of the laden vessel [m].
(e) the krängende lever from free surfaces of rainwater and recycled water in the cargo area or in a raised floor is to calculate the following formula: in this formula: cKfO coefficient (cKfO = 0.015) [t/m2];
(b) width of the considered space or room section [m];(*) l length of the considered space or room section [m];(*) D ' deplacement of the laden vessel [t].
f) for every Beladungsfall is to be expected with half supplies of fuel and fresh water.
2. the stability of a comply with unsecured containers loaded is considered as sufficient, if the existing is equal to or less than Zul'Aman according to the following formulas. This must be calculated per for various displacements throughout the depth range.
(a) must not value less than 11.5 be used (11.5 = 1 / tan 5°).
(b) the smaller value for formula a or b is decisive.
In these formulas mean: maximum allowable height of centre of gravity of the laden vessel base [m];
Height of the Metazentrums base [m] according to the approximation formula for number 3.
F each existing freeboard on ½ L [m];
Z factor for the centrifugal force in the Rotary District of v the maximum rate of the vessel against water [m/s];
TM each average draught [m];
hKW krängender lever from lateral wind pressure referred to in point 1(d) [m];
hKfO sum of the heeling lever free liquid surfaces referred to in point 1(e) [m].
3. approximate formula for no curves sheet is present, the value determined from the following approximate formulas can for the calculation referred to in point 2 and article 22.03 no. 2 are: a) for vessels with pontoon type b) for other ships (*) room sections of free liquid surfaces occur when independent liquid surfaces are formed by watertight longitudinal and/or transverse divisions.
Chapter 22B specific provisions for fast ships section 22 b 01 General 1 fast ships must be built as cabin vessels.
2. the following bodies are forbidden on fast ships: a) devices fitted with wick burners according to article 13.02;
b) oil furnaces with evaporation burners according to articles 13.03 and 13.04;
(c) heating with solid fuels according Article 13.07;
d) liquefied gas installations according to chapter 14.

§ 22b. 02 application of part I 1.
In addition to § 2.03, fast ships under the supervision of a recognized classification society which has special rules for fast ships that must be constructed according to the applicable regulations and classified. The class is to maintain.
2. by way of derogation from article 2.06, the validity period of navigability licences issued according to the provisions of this chapter is maximum five years.

§ 22 b. 03 application of part II 1. without prejudice to paragraph 2 and article 22 b. 02 No. 2 apply for fast ships the chapters of 3 to 15 with the exception of the following provisions: a) § 3.04 no. 6 para 2;
b) article 8.08 No. 2 sentence 2;
c) article 11.02 No. 4 set 2 and set 3.
d) article 12.02 No.4 sentence 2;
e) article 15.06 No. 3 letter a paragraph 2 sentence 3. 2 by derogation from article 15.02 No. 9 and § 15.15 No. 7 be can remotely all bulkhead doors.
3. by way of derogation from § 6.02 No. 1 must go a second independent propulsion system of the rowing machine or a manual drive into service failure or malfunction of the propulsion system of the rowing machine without delay.
4.
In addition to the requirements of part II the section apply for fast ships section 22b 04-22b. 12.

§ must have seats 22 b 04 seats and seat belts for the maximum number of persons on board. Seats must be equipped with safety belts. Safety belts may be waived if there is a suitable impact protection, or in cases where they are required in the HSC Code 2000 Chapter 4 section 6 not.

§ 22b 05 freeboard derogation from § 4.02 and 4.03 § the freeboard shall be at least 500 mm.

§ 22 b 06 buoyancy, stability and subdivision for fast ships need a) buoyancy and stability characteristics, ensuring the safety of the vehicle at the trawler speed in undamaged condition as well as in the Leckfall, b) stability characteristics and stabilization systems that ensure the safety of the vehicle when operating with dynamic lift and in the transitional phase, c) stability properties in operation with dynamic lift and in the transition phase, which allow the vehicle to any system wrongdoing sure reach in displacement condition , be demonstrated sufficiently.

§ 22 b 07 wheelhouse 1 establishment a) derogation from § 7.01 no. 1 is to establish the wheelhouse, that both the helmsman and a second crew member at any time can perform their tasks while driving.
(b) the steering position is so arranged that the persons referred to in letter a find their jobs. The navigation, manoeuvrability, monitoring, messaging facilities and other mission critical devices are as close to arrange, side by side, both the helmsman and a second crew member receives all the information required to operate the equipment and controls in a sitting position depending on the requirement. In each case: aa) be the tax level of the helmsman as a radar man helm;
BB) the second crew member at his place of work have an own radar image (slave) and be from his workplace in a position to obtain the message delivery and to intervene in the propulsion of the vehicle.
c) which must be in letter of a of listed persons even when properly put on safety belts in a position to operate the equipment referred to in b without disability.
2. sight a) by way of derogation from § 7.02 No. 2 may the perspective shadow from sitting position and under all loading conditions no longer be as a vehicle length across the bow.
(b) by way of derogation from § 7.02 No. 3 must be off the starboard beam the sum of sectors without free field of vision ahead up to 22.5 ° backwards not more than 20 ° on each side. Every single sector without free field of view must not exceed 5°. The clear sector between two sectors without free field of vision must be no less than 10°.
3. instruments which need to instrument panels for the control and the monitoring section 22 b. 11 investments referred separately be arranged at clearly marked point within the wheelhouse. If necessary, also applies to facilities for to urination of collective life-saving appliances.
4. lighting in areas or on equipment that must be illuminated during operation, is to use red light.
5. Windows are to prevent reflections. There must be facilities to avoid glare from sunlight.
6 surface materials are reflections by surface materials to prevent in the wheelhouse.

§ 22 b/08 additional equipment fast cars must be equipped with: a) a radar and a turn indicator after § 7.06 No. 1 and b) enclosing individual life-saving appliances according to European standard EN 395: 1998 for the total maximum number of persons on board.

§ 22b 09 closed areas 1 General publicly accessible rooms and apartments and the associated equipment must be designed so, that individuals with proper use can hurt themselves at normal start or stop or emergency start and emergency stop, nor when manoeuvring under normal driving conditions respectively in case of failure or faulty operation.
2. communication of a) to provide information about security measures all passenger ships with acoustic and Visual installations must be equipped, which can be seen and heard by all passengers.
(b) with the help of the facilities described in 3(a), the skipper can give instructions to the passengers.
(c) for each passenger instructions for emergencies including a general sketch of the vehicle must be in the vicinity of the seat available, showing all exits, evacuation routes, emergency equipment, life saving equipment, as well as the donning of lifejackets.

§ 22 b. 10 exits and escape routes escape and rescue routes must meet the following requirements: a) an easier, more secure and faster access from the steering position to the public rooms and the apartments must be ensured.
(b) the escape routes to emergency exits must be clearly and permanently marked.
(c) all exits must be adequately labelled. How of the opening mechanism must be from outside and inside, clearly recognizable.
(d) the escape routes and emergency exits must have a suitable safety guidance system.
(e) in addition to the outputs, there must be enough space for a crew member.

§ 22b. 11 fire protection and fire-fighting 1 course, public rooms and apartments as well as kitchens and machinery spaces must be connected to an appropriate fire alarm system. The presence of fire, and the fire area must automatically are displayed at one point occupied continuously by the vessel's personnel.
2. engine rooms are to provide 10.03 b with a permanently installed fire-extinguishing according to §.
3. publicly available rooms and apartments and their escape routes must be equipped with an automatic pressure water spray system according to § 10.03a. Fire can be derived quickly and directly to the outside.

§ 22 b 12 transitional fast ships within the meaning of § 1.01 number 20a, possessing a valid ship's certificate on March 31, 2003, must meet following requirements of this chapter: a) on the renewal of the vessel certificate § § 22 b 01; 22b 04; 22b/08; 22b. 09; 22b. 10; 22b. 11 no. 1;
(b) on 1 April 2013 § 22b 07 No. 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6;
(c) on the 1st January 2023 the remaining provisions.

§ 22.03 boundary conditions and calculation methods for the proof of stability during transport of secured containers 1.
For safe containers each calculation method for determining the stability of the vessel must assume following boundary conditions: a) the metacentric height shall not be less than 0.50 m.
(b) under the simultaneous influence of the centrifugal force in the rotation, the wind pressure and the influence of the free surfaces of liquid, no opening of the hull must be water.
(c) the heeling lever from the centrifugal force in the rotation, the wind pressure and free liquid surfaces are no. 1 according to the formulas of § 22.02 to calculate letter c to e.
(d) for each Beladungsfall are the half stocks of fuel and fresh water basis to lay.
2. the stability of a comply with safe containers loaded is considered as sufficient, if the existing is equal to or less than Zul'Aman according to the following formulas. This must be calculated per for various displacements throughout the depth range.
(a) for a smaller value may be used as 6.6 and for any value less than 0.
(b) the smaller value for formula a or b is decisive.
In these formulas mean: l widths of inertia of water line at TM [m4] according to the approximation formula in point 3;
i width of inertia of parallel to the base line the water displacement of the vessel at TM [m3];
F' immaterial freeboard R ' = H'-TM [m] or a vertical distance between the lower edge of the first submerged slopes opening and the water line if the upright position of the vessel [m];
b distance same opening by mid ship [m];
H' idealistic side height q sum of the volumes of deckhouses, hatches, trunks and other superstructures up to a height of up to 1.0 m H, or until the bottom of the viewing volume. The smaller value is decisive. Volume fractions, which are arranged within a range of 0,05 L from the ends of the ship, shall be disregarded [m3].
3. approximate formula for I has a curves available, can be used to number 2 for the calculation of the value for the width of inertia I of the water line from the following approximate formulas: a) for vessels with pontoon type b) for other ships article 22.04 procedure for assessing stability on Board that can process the stability assessment the documents be found no. 2 according to § 22.01.
Part III crew regulations Chapter 23 equipment of vessels with regard to the occupation of sections 23.01 through 23.08 (dropped out) Article 23.09 equipment of ships apply the provisions referred to in annex XI § 2.01.

§ 23.10 up 23.15 (fallen away) part IV Chapter 24 transitional and final provisions article 24.01 application of the transitional provisions on vehicles, which are already in operation 1.
The provisions of articles 24.02 to 24.04 apply only to vehicles which are at the entry into force of this regulation in the possession of a valid vessel certificate according to the Rhine vessel inspection regulations, applicable on 31 December 1994 or on 31 December 1994 in construction or reconstruction were.
2. for vehicles that do not fall under section 1, article 24.06 apply
Article 24.02 derogations for vehicles which are already in operation 1 without prejudice to the articles 24.03 and 24.04 to vehicles that do not fully comply with the provisions of this regulation, a) these are adapted in accordance with the transitional terms in the table below and b) until their adaptation on December 31, 1994 amended the Rhine vessel inspection regulations correspond to.
2. in the table below:-"N.E.U.": the provision does not apply to vehicles which are already in operation, it was because, the affected parts are replaced or modified, i.e. the requirement shall apply only for new construction and replacement or reconstruction of the affected parts or areas. Are existing parts are replaced by replacement parts in same technique and style, this means no substitute 'E' in the sense of these transitional provisions.
-"Renewal of the certificate of the ship": the requirement must be met at the next following on the specified date renewal of the period of validity of the vessel certificate.
§ § and no. content period or remarks Chapter 3 3.03 Nr 1 (a) location of the collision bulkhead N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 2 apartments N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 safety equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 4 gas density separation of apartments by machine , Boiler and holds N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 5 2nd paragraph remote monitoring of rear bulkhead doors N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 7 Vorschiffe with anchor niche N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2041 3.04 no. 3 sentence 2 insulation in engine rooms N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate No. 3 set 3 and set 4 openings and closing institutions N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate No. 6 engine room outputs machine rooms that not the machinery spaces were prior to 1995 in accordance with § 1.01, need only with a 2nd output retrofitted to be set at N.E.U, at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 Chapter 5 5.06 No. 1 1 low speed for vehicles built before 1996 at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 Chapter 6 6.01 no. 1 manoeuvrability under Chapter 5 N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 3 incline and ambient temperatures N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 7 shaft bushings steering shafts for vehicles built before 1996 at N.E.U, at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 6.02 No. 1 presence of separate hydraulic reservoir N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 duplication of control valves in hydraulic drive systems N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2020 separate routing of the pipeline for the second controller in hydraulic drive systems N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2020 6.02 No. 2 in operation setting the 2nd drive system with only a control plot N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 3 reached the manoeuvrability under Chapter 5 at operating the second drive system / N.E.U hand operation. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 6. 03 no. 1 connecting of other consumers on hydraulic-powered equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 6.05 no. 1 automatic uncoupling of the hand steering wheel N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 6.06 No. 1 two independent control systems N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 6.07 No. 2 letter a hydraulic tank level alarm and alarm of operating pressure N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 letter e monitoring the buffer systems N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 6.08 No. 1 requirements for electronic systems according to § 9.20 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 Chapter 7 7.02 No. 3 paragraph 2 unobstructed view in the sight of the helmsman N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 5 minimum light transmittance N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 7.03 no. 7 deleting the alarms N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate, as far as not radar single man helm available no. 8 automatically switches to a different power source N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 7.04 no. 1 operating engines and control equipment N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate No. 2 machine control as far as not a radar one man steering position available : N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 at direct reversible machines, 1.1.2010 when other machines no. 3 display unless not a radar one man steering position available: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 9 set 3 operation by means of a lever N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 set 4 inadmissibility indicating direction of shear beam N.E.U. , no later than 7.05 no. 1 signal lights, their housing, accessories and lighting signal lamps, their housing, accessories and light sources that meet the requirements of the regulations about the color and light intensity of the Board lights and the approval of signal lights on November 30, 2009 in the navigation of the Rhine, may still be used when renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010.
7.06 may until the renewal of the vessel certificate after 31 December 2009 No. 1 navigational radar equipment, navigation radars, which were approved before 1 January 1990 and built prior to January 1, 2000, approved prior to 1 January 1990 at the latest be built until the end of the December 31, 2011 and be operated if a valid installation certificate (1989-II-35, where. 1989 S. 830 No. 127 annex 3) is present.
 
 
Turn indicators, which were approved prior to 1 January 1990 in turn indicators which were approved before 1 January 1990 and built prior to January 1, 2000, may be built up to the renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2015 and be operated, if a valid installation certificate (1989-II-35, where. 1989 S. 830 No. 127 annex 3) is present.
 
 
Navigational radar equipment and turn indicators, which have been approved before 1 January 1990 navigational radar equipment and turn indicators, which as of January 1, 1990, on the basis of the provisions relating to the minimum requirements and test conditions for radar navigation equipment in the Rhine, as well as the rules concerning the minimum requirements and test conditions for turn indicators in the Rhine were admitted, may be installed and, if a valid installation certificate on the basis of the regulations for the installation and functional testing of radar navigation equipment and the turn indicators in the Rhine (1989-II-35 , Where. 1989 S. 830 No. 127 Appendix 3) or is the system M part III of this regulation, be operated.
7.06 No. 3 Inland AIS equipment of IMO class A transponders, demonstrably 1.4.2008 built before a were, 7.12 paragraph 1 adjustable control houses N.E.U., up to 12 admitted 7.09 alarm system N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate with no hydraulic reduction: at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 paragraph 2 and 3 N.E.U. , no later than on renewal of the vessel certificate Chapter 8 8.01 no. 3 only internal combustion engines, fuel flashpoint above 55 ° C N.E.U., at the latest on renewal of the certificate of the ship after the 1.1.2015 8.02 No. 1 backup of machinery against unintentional start-up N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 4 shielding of cable connections N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2025 No. 5 pipe systems N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal boat attestes after the 1.1.2025 No. 6 insulation of machine parts N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 8.03 no. 2 monitoring equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 3 (dropped out) No. 4 display and put out of operation of automatic speed reduction N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 5 shaft seals of drive systems N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 8.05 no. 1 of fuel oil tanks made of steel N.E.U, at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 2 self closing drain valves N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate No. 3 no fuel tanks before the collision bulkhead N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 4 no fuel tanks and their fittings on machinery or exhaust pipes N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010. Up to this point, it must be ensured by container or drip trays that leaking fuel can be conducted safely.
 
No. 6 set 3 to 5 set up and design the ventilation tubes and interconnections N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 7 set 1
Actuation of the quick closing valve on the tank deck off, even if the affected premises are closed N.E.U., at the latest renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 9 set 2 readability of locating facilities up to the highest level N.E.U., at the latest in renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 13 level monitoring not only for the engines, but also for the other , engines required for driving N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 8.06 lubricating oil tanks, cables and accessories N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 8.07 tanks for oils used in power transmission systems, switching, drive and heating systems are cables and accessory N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 8.08 No. 8 inadmissibility of simple shut-off devices as connecting ballast cells at the Lenz system for cargo holds. , the ballasting furnished are to N.E.U., at the latest at renewal ship attestes after January 1, 2010 No. 9 tracking facility in cargo hold bilge N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 8.09 No. 2 facilities for the collection of oily water and used oil N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 8.10 No. 3 noise limit of 65 dB(A) for stillliegende ships N.E.U. , at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 Chapter 8a the provisions apply not a) for engines that were installed before 1 January 2003 aboard and b) for replacement engines *, the up to 12 on board ships which were on 1.1.2002 in operation, install.
8A.02 No. 2 limit values for engines that were installed before the following on board apply the limit values in the following table: * a replacement motor is a used, refurbishers, which is similar to the engine replaced in terms of power, speed and installation conditions.
PN [kW] CO [g/kWh] HC [g/kWh] NOx [g/kWh] PT [g/kWh] 37 ≤ PN < 75 6.5 1.3 9.2 0.85 of 75 ≤ PN < 130 5.0 1.3 9.2 ≥ 0.70 PN 130 5.0 1.3 n ≥ 2800 min-1 = 9.2 0.54 of 500 ≤ n < 2800 min-1 = 45 · n(-0,2) § § and no. content period or remarks Chapter 9 9.01 no. 1 2 required documents are set to present the SUK N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2035 No. 2 plans of the main, emergency and distribution switchboards must 2. painting on Board no. 3 are N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 ambient temperatures inside and on deck N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 9.02 No. 1 to 3 power systems N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 9.05 no. 4 protective conductor cross-section N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after the 1.1.2015 9.11 no. 4 ventilation of closed rooms, cabinets or boxes, in which situated accumulators are letter d direct power supply for consumers for propulsion and maneuvering N.E.U N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate 9.12 No. 2. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 3 letter b ground fault monitoring device N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 9.13 emergency shut-down devices N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.201 9.14 No. 3 sentence 2 ban of single pole switch in washing and bathrooms and other wet rooms N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 9.15 No. 2 minimum cross section per conductor of 1.5 mm2 N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 10 cable for portable control houses N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 9.16 no. 3 set 2 second circuit N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.19 alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.20 electronic equipment N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 9.21 electromagnetic compatibility N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 Chapter 10 10.01 anchor equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 10.02 No. 1 set of 2 letter b containers made of steel or another shock-resistant and non-combustible material at least 10 l content N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate No. 2 letter a certificate for wire ropes and other ropes the first rope, on the ship is replaced: N.E.U, no later than January 1, 2008-second and third rope: 1.1.2013 10.03 no. 1 European standard for replacement, no later than 1 January 2010 No. 2 suitability for fire classes A, B and C, with spare, no later than 1 January 2010 No. 4 Massecuite of CO2 and the capacity for replacement , no later than 1 January 2010 10.03a fixed fire extinguishing systems installed in apartments, control buildings and passenger spaces N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 10.03 b permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine, boiler and pump rooms (*) 10.04 application of European standard on dinghies N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 10.05 no. 2 inflatable lifejackets N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2010. life-jackets , which are the 30.9.2003 aboard, can still be used until the renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010.
 
 
Chapter 11-11.02 No. 4 setting up the outer edges of decks, corridor Borden and other workspaces N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 11.04 Power Board (*) first renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 at more than 7.30 m width 11.05 Nr. 1 access of the jobs N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 2 and 3 doors as well as inputs and outputs and courses with elevation changes of more than 0.50 m N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 4 stairs at constantly occupied jobs N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 11.06 No. 2 exits and emergency exits N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 11.07 No. 1 set 2 climbing equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 (*) 1.
CO2 fire extinguishing systems fixed before 1 October 1980 remain calm until the renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1st, 2035, when they meet no. 5 as amended by the decision of 1975-I-23 § 7.03.
2. fire extinguishers fixed before 1 April 1992, operated with the extinguishing of halon 1301 (CBrF3), remain approved, 1 January 2005 until the renewal of the vessel certificate after, but at the latest until 1 January 2010 when they meet no. 5 as amended by decision 1985-II-26 section 7.03.
3. CO2 fire-extinguishing installations from 1 April 1992 to 31 December 1994 installed remain calm until the renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1st, 2035, when they meet no. 5 of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations force on 31 December 1994 § 7.03.
4. from 1 April 1992 to 31 December 1994, issued recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine to § 7.03 no.5 of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations force on 31 December 1994 remain valid until the renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1st, 2035.
5. § 10.03 b No. 2 letter a is up to the renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1st, 2035 only, whose keel if these plants be built into ships, was laid after 1 October 1992.
(**)
The rule applies to ships that were created after December 31, 1994 on keel and in-service ships with the following proviso: in a renewal of the entire cargo area, the provisions of section 11.04 must be complied. With conversions, spanning the entire length of the course Board area and that the clear width of the side deck is changed, a) article 11.04 must be maintained, if the existing prior to the modification clear width of the side deck to a height of 0,90 m, or about the clear width should be reduces, b) the existing prior to the modification clear width of the side deck to a height of 0,90 m, or about the clear width should not be less than , if these dimensions are smaller than those according to § 11.04. § § and no. content deadline or comments No. 2 and 3 N.E.U., at the latest renewal of the vessel certificate 11.10 hatch covers N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 11.11 winches N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 11.12 No. 2, 4, 5, and 9 nameplate, safety devices , 11.13 storing of flammable liquids N.E.U., documents apartments for the people living on board N.E.U., aboard N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate Chapter 12 12.01 no. 1 usually no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate the 1.1.2035 12.02 No. 3 location of floors N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the certificate of the ship after the 1.1.2035 No. 4 lounges and bedrooms N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate the 1.1.2035 No. 6 height in apartments N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 8 floor of lounges N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the certificate of the ship after the 1.1.2035 No. 9 volume of spaces N.E.U., no later than upon renewal of the vessel certificate to the 1.1.2035 No. 10 air volume per person N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035
 
No. 11 dimensions of doors N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 12 letter a and b arrangement of staircases N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 13 pipes for dangerous gases and dangerous liquids N.E.U., at the latest renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 12.03 sanitary installations N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 12.04 kitchens N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 12.05 (dropped out) 12.06 heating and ventilation N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 12.07 No. 1 set of 2 other home furnishings N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 chapter 15 15.01 no. 1 letter c non-application of section 8.08 No. 2 set 2 N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 letter d non-application of section 9.14 No. 3 sentence 2 at nominal voltages above 50 V N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 2 letter c ban oil heating furnaces with evaporation burners according to § 13.04 N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 letter d ban on heating with solid fuel according to § 13.07 N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010. The rule does not apply to vehicles with solid fuel-powered drive systems (steam engines).
 
Letter e ban on liquid gas installations according to chapter 14 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045. The transitional provision applies only if warning devices are supplied according to § 15.15 No. 9.
15.02 No. 2 number and arrangement of the Scot N.E.U., at the latest on renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 Nr 5 sentence 2 diving limit, if no bulkhead deck applies to passenger ships, that were created before the 1.1.1996 on Kiel, the rule at N.E.U, no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045.
 
No. 10 letter c duration of the remote valve closing N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 12 alarm in the wheelhouse, which indicates which bulkhead door height of double bottoms, width of the wall ducts N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 is open N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate No. 15 15.03 no. 1 and 6 intact stability N.E.U. increase the authorized number of passengers , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. of 7 and 8 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 9 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 vertical expansion of the ground leak N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 for ships with a waterproof deck at a distance of at least 0.50 m and less than 0.60 m from the bottom of the ship , which for the first time a ship clearance received before December 31, 2005, is N.E.U.
 
 
2 Department status N.E.U.
 
No. 10 to 13 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 15.05 no. 2 letter a number of passengers for which a summary area according to article 15.06 is assigned to no. 8 N.E.U., at the latest on renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 letter b number of passengers, which the stability calculation according to article 15.03 underlying N.E.U is set. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate the 1.1.2045 15.06 No. 1 set 1 passenger compartments on all decks behind the collision bulkhead and the rear bulkhead N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 set 2 requirements on deck areas, a housed are N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate No. 2 cabinets and rooms according to section 11.13 for flammable liquids N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 No. 3 letter c set 1 clearance height of outputs N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the certificate of the ship after the 1.1.2045 set 2 clear width of doors of passenger cabins and other small spaces for the width of 0.7 m is N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045.
 
Letter f set 1 dimensions of the fire exits N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 letter g outputs, for use by persons with reduced mobility are N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 4 letter d doors, for use by persons with reduced mobility are provided N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 5 requirements for connecting corridors N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 6 point (b) escape routes to collecting surface N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 letter c escape routes through engine rooms N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 escape routes through kitchens N : E.U.., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 letter d no crampons corridors, ladders or similar in escape routes N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the certificate of the ship after the 1.1.2045 No.7 suitable safety guidance system N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 8 requirements of quilts N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 9 requirements on stairs and landings in the passenger area of N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 10 letter a sentence 1 railing according to standard EN 711: 1995 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 set 2 amounting to Schanzkleidern and railings of decks, used by persons with reduced mobility be N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 b set 2 clear width of openings , which is used for the boarding of persons with reduced mobility 12 land strips according to EN will N.E.U, no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 Nr 14206: 2003 N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 No. 13 traffic areas and walls in traffic areas, for use by persons with reduced mobility are provided N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 14 set 1 nature of glass doors, glass walls in traffic areas and window panes N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 15 requirements for structures, the fully or whose roofs consist of requirements for enclosures N.E.U Windows N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate No. 16 drinking water plants according to § 12.05 N.E.U., no later than December 31, 2006 no. 17 set 2 requirements of toilets for persons with reduced mobility N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate to the 1.1.2045 No. 18 ventilation systems for cabins without openable Windows N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate after the 1.1.2045 No. 19 requirements of article 15.06 of rooms , where crew or cabin crew is housed 15.07 propulsion system N.E.U. requirements N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045, no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 request to loudspeaker systems in the passenger cabin for passenger ships with optical fiber by less than 40 m or more than 75 people is 15.08 No. 2 the rule at N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010.
 
No. 3 applies to requirements to the alarm system for day-trip vessels the rule at N.E.U, at the latest renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010.
 
No. 3 letter c alarm system to warn the crew and the crew through the navigation for cabin vessels shall be the rules at N.E.U, at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007.
 
No. 4 level alarm for each watertight Department N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 5 two motor-driven bilge pumps N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 6 fixed installed Lenz system N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 7 open the refrigerators from the inside N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 No. 8 ventilation system for CO2 dispensing systems in rooms N.E.U, no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 9 first aid kits N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 15.09 No. 1 set 1 lifebuoys N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 No. 2 Einzelrettungsmittel N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 No. 3 facilities for a safe transition N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 4 Einzelrettungsmittel for 100% of passengers according to EN 395:1998, EN 396:1998, EN ISO 12402-3:2006 and EN ISO 12402-4:2006 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 kind of life-saving appliances for passenger ships , which were before the 1 January 2005 with appropriate collective life-saving appliances provided, be applied as an alternative to the individual life-saving appliances.
For passenger ships, which were no. 6 before 1.1.2005 with collective life-saving appliances according to article 15.09, these count as an alternative until the renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 to the individual life-saving appliances.
 
No. 9 testing of life-saving equipment according to the manufacturers N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 No. 10 dinghy with engine and searchlight N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 11 stretcher N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 15.10 No. 2 section 9.16 no. 3 also applies to corridors and lounges for passengers N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 3 adequate lighting of emergency N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2015 No. 4 of 25 m or less applies to emergency power plant for day-trip vessels with fiber optic the rule at N.E.U, at the latest renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015.
 
Letter f emergency power for lamps according to section 10.02 No. 2 letter i N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 8(3)(i) emergency power for elevators and lifts according to article 15.06 No. 9 set 2 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 6 set 1 surfaces according to article 15.11 no. 2 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 set 2 and 3 installation of the cable N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate the 1.1.2015 set 4 emergency power plant above the edge of the diving N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate after the 1.1.2015 15.11 no. 1 Brandschutztechnische suitability of materials and components N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the certificate of the ship after the 1.1.2045 No. 2 execution of surfaces N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after the 1.1.2045 No. 3 in rooms , surface treatments used except machinery and store rooms, and decking, as well as items pursuant to sentence 2 must be flame retardant.
N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 No. 4 ceiling and wall coverings made of non-combustible materials N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 5 furniture and fixtures in quilts made of non-combustible materials N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 6 fire test procedures code N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 7 insulation materials in accommodation spaces not flammable N.E.U., at the latest in renewal of the vessel certificate for the 1.1.2045 No. 7a plan or similar mobile equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate No. 8 requirements for doors in parting surfaces N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 9 walls referred to in point 2 from deck to deck on cabin vessels without pressure water spray system , Ends of the walls between cabins: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 10 surfaces N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 11 air locks N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 12 steps from steel or another equivalent non-combustible material N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 13 a Chequer of the indoor stairs by walls after number 2 N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 14 ventilation systems; Luftversorgungsanla-gen N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 15 ventilation systems in kitchens, kitchen stoves with deductions N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 16 control stations, stair shafts, quilts and smoke extractors N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 17 fire detection system for day-trip vessels: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 15.12 No. 1 letter c portable fire extinguisher in kitchen N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate No. 2 letter a 2nd where N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 3 (b) and (c) pressure and water jet length N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 4 Hydrant valves N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate to the 1.1.2007 axially connected to no. 5 reel N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 No. 6 materials, protection against ineffective be N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 7 avoid the possibility of freezing of pipes and hydrants N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 8 letter of b independent operation of the fire fighting pumps N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 letter c water jet length on all decks N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 letter d installation of fire N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 9 fire extinguishing system in machinery spaces N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 15.13 safety organisation for day-trip vessels: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 15.14 No. 1 waste water collecting tanks or onboard sewage treatment plants for cabin vessels with 50 or fewer beds and for day-trip vessels : N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 2 requirements for waste water collection tanks for cabin vessels with 50 or fewer beds and for day-trip vessels with 50 or fewer passengers: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 15.15 No. 1 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 5 presence of tenders , a platform or a comparable institution for passenger ships, which are approved for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 beds: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 6 presence of a sailor, a platform or a comparable institution for passenger ships, which are approved for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 beds: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 No. 9 warning devices for liquid gas systems N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the certificate according to § 14.15 chapter 16 16.01 no. 2 special winches or equivalent facilities on the vehicle suitable for pushing for vehicles, the own before the units slide without tensioning device have been admitted: N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 3 last sentence requirements of drives N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2035 17 17.02 provisions in addition to applicable No. 3 shall apply chapter the same transitional provisions for the paragraphs cited in this paragraph.
17.03 no. 1 General alarm system N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate No. 4 maximum load by lifting N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 17.04 Nos. 2 and 3 rest safety distance when opening N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 17.05 Nos. 2 and 3 residual freeboard N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 17.06 inclining test and proof of stability N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 17.08 draught marks and draught ad N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate Chapter 20 20.01 Article 7.01 no. 2; Section 8.05 no. 13 and section 8.10 for sea-going vessels, which are not intended for the carriage of goods according to the ADN and the keel of which was laid before the 1.10.1987: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015.
 
 
§ 8.09 No. 2 N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 chapter 21 21.01 up 21.03 for sports cars, which were built before the units: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 article 24.03 derogations for vehicles, the keel of which was laid 1 on April 1, 1976 or earlier.
On vehicles, the keel of which was laid on 1 April 1976 or earlier, the following provisions shall be applied in addition to the provisions of § 24.02.
In the table mean: mean in the table below:-"E.U..": the provision does not apply to vehicles which are already in operation, unless unless the affected parts are replaced or converted, i.e. the provision applies only when replacement or reconstruction of the affected parts or areas. Are existing parts are replaced by replacement parts in same technique and style, this means no substitute 'E' in the sense of these transitional provisions.
-"Renewal of the certificate of the ship": the requirement must be met at the next following on the specified date renewal of the period of validity of the vessel certificate.
§ § and no. content period or remarks Chapter 3 3.03 no. 1 position of the collision bulkhead N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 3.04 no. 2 boundary surfaces of bunkers with residential and passenger spaces E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 No. 7 of maximum permissible sound pressure level renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 Chapter 4 4.01 no. 2 safety distance , Freeboard, minimum freeboard renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 4.02 and 4.03 Chapter 7 7.01 no. 2 residual noise level N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 7.05 no. 2 check of the signal lights renewal of the vessel certificate Chapter 8 8.08 No. 3 and 4 minimum flow rate and Lenz pipe diameter renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 8.10 No. 2 drive noise
N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 Chapter 9 9.01 requirements for electrical installations N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.03 protection against touching, penetration of foreign bodies and water N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.06 permissible maximum voltage N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.10 generators and motors N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.11 no. 2 installation batteries N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.12 switchgear N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.14 installation material N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.15 cables N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 9.17 signal lights N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 Chapter 12 12.02 No. 5 noise and vibration in apartments renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 Chapter 15 15.02 No. 5, diving limit, if no bulkhead deck E.U.., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 6 sentence 1, no. 7 to no. 11 and no. 13 15.02 No. 16 waterproof window E.U.. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 15.04 safety clearance, freeboard and draught marks E.U.., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 15.05 number of passengers renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 15.10 No. 4, no. 6, emergency powersupply E.U.., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 No. 7, no. 8 and no. 11 2 section 15.11 no. 3 is set 1 and no. 6 on day-trip vessels , whose keel on 1 April 1976 or earlier was laid to apply until the first renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1, 2045, with the proviso that only the surfaces used in the escape routes colors used, paints and other products for surface treatment, as well as deck coverings must be flame retardant and smoke or toxic substances in extraordinary quantities may not be.
3. paragraph 15.11 no. 12 is on day-trip vessels, the keel of which was laid on 1 April 1976 or earlier, up to the first renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1, 2045, only with the provision to apply, it is sufficient if instead of a load-bearing steel structure of stairs serving as emergency exit stairs are such that in the event of fire remain about equally long usable as stairs with load-bearing steel structure.

Article 24.04 other deviations 1.
For vehicles, the minimum freeboard established according to section 4.04 of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations amended on March 31, 1983, the Commission of inquiry at the request of the owner can fix the freeboard according to § 4.03 force on 1 January 1995.
2. vessels, the keel of which was laid before July 1, 1983, need need Chapter 9 not to meet, but correspond to at least the applicable on 31 March 1983 version of Chapter 6.
3. § 15.06 No. 3 letter a letter a with regard to the arrangements relating to the single hose length are no. 3 e and paragraph 15.12 only for passenger ships, the keel of which was laid after September 30, 1984, and apply on rebuilding the affected areas, no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2045. 4.
If the application of the provisions referred to in this section after the expiry of the transitional provisions is practically difficult or unreasonably high costs, the Commission of inquiry on the basis of recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine may permit derogations from these rules. These deviations are to be entered in the certificate.
5. This provision in the quality requirements for equipment refers to a European or international standard, so these pieces of equipment may be used after a new version or revision of this standard still not longer than 20 years further after new version or revision of the standard.

§ 24.05 (without content) § 24.06 derogations for vehicles, which are not under section 24.01 covered 1.
For vehicles, for which from 1 January 1995 for the first time, a certificate is granted pursuant to this regulation, the following provisions apply, provided that they not were on 31 December 1994 in construction or conversion.
2. the vehicles shall comply with the applicable on the date of issuance of their vessel certificate version of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations. Notwithstanding sentence 1 passenger ships, a certificate is granted from January 1, 2006 and before January 1, 2007 according to this regulation, can comply with the requirements of chapter 15 of this regulation in the version of December 31, 2005.
3. the vehicle must be adapted to the regulations which came into force after first obtaining of their vessel certificate in accordance with the transitional provisions listed in the table below.
4. § applies 24.04 no. 4 and 5.
5. in the table below:-"N.E.U.": the provision does not apply to vehicles which are already in operation, unless unless the affected parts are replaced or converted, i.e. the provision applies only for new construction and replacement or reconstruction of the affected parts or areas. Are existing parts are replaced by replacement parts in same technique and style, this means no substitute 'E' in the sense of these transitional provisions.
-"Renewal of the certificate of the ship": the requirement must be met at the next following on the specified date renewal of the period of validity of the vessel certificate.
§ § and no. content period or comments in Chapter 3 3.03 force no. 7 Vorschiffe with anchor niches the provision shall apply from 1 January 2001 at N.E.U, at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2041 1.10.1999 3.04 no. 3 sentence 2 insulation in engine rooms N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.4.2003 No. 3 set 3 and set 4 apertures and shutter organs N.E.U. at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.10.2003 Chapter 6 6.02 No. 1 duplication of control valves in hydraulic drive systems N. E.U.., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2020 season separate routing of the pipeline for the second controller in hydraulic drive systems N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2020 1.4.2007 6.07 No. 2 letter a hydraulic tank level alarm and alarm of operating pressure N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 local chapter 7 7.04 no. 3 display as far as not a radar one man steering position available : N.E.U., at the latest on issue or renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.4.2007 No. 9 set 3 operation by means of a lever N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.4.2007 set 4 inadmissibility the display direction of the thrust Jet N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.4.2007 7.05 no. 1 signal lights, their housing and accessories and lights signal lights , whose housing, accessories and light sources that meet the requirements of the regulations about the color and light intensity of the Board lights and the approval of signal lights on November 30, 2009 in the navigation of the Rhine, may still be used.
1.12.2009 7.06 may no. 1 navigational radar equipment, navigation radars, which were approved before 1 January 1990 and built prior to January 1, 2000, approved before January 1, 1990 until the renewal of the vessel certificate after December 31, 2009, at the latest be built until the end of the December 31, 2011 and be operated, if a valid installation certificate (1989-II-35, where. 1989 S. 830 No. 127 annex 3) is present.
1.12.2009 turn indicators, which were approved prior to 1 January 1990 in turn indicators which were approved before 1 January 1990 and built prior to January 1, 2000, may be built up to the renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2015 and be operated, if a valid installation certificate (1989-II-35, where. 1989 S. 830 No. 127 annex 3) is present.
1.12.2009 navigational radar equipment and turn indicators, which have been approved before 1 January 1990 navigational radar equipment and turn indicators, which as of January 1, 1990, on the basis of the provisions relating to the minimum requirements and test conditions for radar navigation equipment in the Rhine, as well as the rules concerning the minimum requirements and test conditions for turn indicators in the Rhine were admitted, may be installed and, if a valid installation certificate on the basis of the regulations for the installation and functional testing of radar navigation equipment and the turn indicators in the Rhine (1989-II-35 , Where. 1989 S. 830 No. 127 Appendix 3) or is the system M part III of this regulation, be operated.
1.12.2009 7.06 No. 3 Inland AIS devices of IMO class are A transponders which were demonstrably fitted before the consolidated up to 31 December 2011 approved consolidated Chapter 8 8.02 No. 4 shielded cable connections N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2025 1.4.2007 No. 5 pipe systems N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2025 1.4.2007 No. 6 insulation of machine parts N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.4.2003 8.03 no. 4 display and put out of operation of automatic speed reduction N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.4.2004 No. 6
Facilities for automatic speed reduction N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.4.2004 8.05 Nr. 7 set 1 press of the quick-closing valves on the tank deck from, even if the affected premises are closed N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 consolidated 8.05 no. 9 set 2 sighting equipment must be readable up to the highest level N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.4.1999 No. 13 level monitoring not only for the engines, but also for the other, necessary for driving engines N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.4.1999 8.06 lubricating oil tanks, cables and accessories N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.4.2007 8.07 tanks for oils, in power transmission systems , Switchable, drive and heating systems be used cables and accessory N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 local chapter 8a the provisions apply not a) for engines that were installed before 1 January 2003 aboard and b) are for Austauschmotoren(*), which installed up to 12 on board ships which were on 1.1.2002 in operating.
1.1.2002 8a.02 No. 2 limit values for engines that were installed before the following on board apply the limit values in the following table: 1.7.2007 (*) a replacement engine is a used, refurbishers motor, which is similar to the engine replaced in terms of power, speed and installation conditions.
PN [kW] CO [g/kWh] HC [g/kWh] NOx [g/kWh] PT [g/kWh] 37 ≤ PN < 75 6.5 1.3 9.2 0.85 of 75 ≤ PN < 130 5.0 1.3 9.2 ≥ 0.70 PN 130 5.0 1.3 n ≥ 2800 min-1 = 9.2 0.54 of 500 ≤ n < 2800 min-1 = 45 · n(-0,2) § § and no. content period or comments in Chapter 10-10.02 force no. 1 sentence 2 letter b tanks from steel or another shock-resistant and non-combustible material at least 10 l content N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.12.2011 No. 2 letter a certificate for wire ropes and other ropes the first rope, on the ship is replaced : N.E.U, no later than January 1, 2008-second and third rope: 1.1.2013 1.4.2003 10.03 no. 1 European standard with spare, no later than 1 January 2010 1.4.2002 No. 2 suitability for fire classes A, B and C, with spare, no later than 1 January 2010 1.4.2002 No. 4 Massecuite of CO2 and the capacity to spare, no later than January 1, 2007 April 10.03a permanently installed fire extinguishing systems in apartments, control buildings and passenger spaces N.E.U. at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2035 Mr 10.03 b permanently installed fire-fighting systems in machine , Boiler rooms and pump rooms (*), at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2035 Mr 10.04 application the European standard on dinghies N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.10.2003 10.05 no. 2 inflatable lifejackets N.E.U., at the latest can be 1.1.2010. lifejackets which are the 30.9.2003 aboard, when renewal of the vessel certificate after until the renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 next used.
1.10.2003 Chapter 11 11.12 No. 2, 4, 5, and 9 nameplate, safety devices, documents on board N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.12.2011 11.13 storing of flammable liquids N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.10.2002 Chapter 12 12.05 (dropped out) Chapter 15 15.01 no. 1 letter c non-application of section 8.08 No. 2 set of 2 N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 letter d non-application of section 9.14 No. 3 sentence 2 at nominal voltages above 50 V N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 2 letter c ban oil heating furnaces with evaporation burners according to § 13.04 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 letter d ban on heating with solid fuel according to § 13.07 N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 letter e ban on liquid gas installations according to chapter 14 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045. The transitional provision applies only if warning devices are supplied according to § 15.15 No. 9.
1.1.2006 15.02 No. 2 number and arrangement of the Scot N.E.U., at the latest on renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 5 sentence 2 diving limit, if no bulkhead deck applies to passenger ships, that were created before the 1.1.1996 on Kiel, the rule at N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 15 height of double bottoms, width of the wall course N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 15.03 no. 1 and 6 intact stability N.E.U. increase the authorized number of passengers, at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. of 7 and 8 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 9 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 vertical expansion of the ground leak N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 for ships with a waterproof deck at a distance of at least 0.50 m and less than 0.60 m from the floor, for the first time received a certificate issued prior to December 31, 2005, is 1.12.2011 2 Department status N.E.U. N.E.U. 1.1.2006 no. 10 to 13 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 15.05 no. 2 letter a number of passengers , for a gathering space after paragraph 15.06 No. 8 proven is N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 letter b number of passengers, that the stability calculation according to article 15.03 the basis is 15.06 No. N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 1 set 1 passenger spaces below the bulkhead deck and the stern bulkhead N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 set 2 requirements of deck areas which are a housed N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate to the 1.1.2045 1.12.2011 No. 2 cabinets and rooms after section 11.13 for flammable liquids N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 no. 3 letter c set 1 clearance height of outputs N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 set 2 light width of doors of passenger cabins and other small rooms for the size of 0.7 m is N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2045. 1.1.2006 letter f set 1 dimensions of the fire exits N.E.U., at the latest on renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 letter g outputs , the use by persons with reduced mobility are intended for N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 4 letter d doors, for use by persons with reduced mobility are N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 5 requirements of walkways N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 6 letter b escape routes to collecting areas N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 letter c escape routes through engine rooms N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1 January 2007 1.1.2006 escape routes through kitchens N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2015 letter d no crampons corridors, ladders or similar in escape routes N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 7 N.E.U suitable safety guidance system. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 no. 8 requirements for collecting surfaces N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 9 letter a to c, point (e) and the last sentence requirements for stairs and landings in the passenger area N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 10 letter a sentence 1 railing according to standard EN 711 : 1995 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 set 2 amounting to Schanzkleidern and railings of decks, by persons with reduced mobility used be N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 b set 2 clear width of openings used for the boarding N.E.U of persons with restricted mobility. , at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 12 country bars in accordance with standard EN 14206: 2003 N.E.U., at the latest renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 no. 13 traffic areas and walls at traffic areas, the use by persons with reduced mobility are intended for N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 14 set 1 nature of glass doors , Glass walls in traffic areas and window panes N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 15 requirements for structures, the fully or whose roofs consist of Windows overlooking N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 requirements for enclosures N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate 1.12.2011 No. 16 drinking water systems in accordance with § 12.05 N.E.U. , no later than December 31, 2006 January 1, 2006 no. 17 sentence 2 requirements for toilets for persons with limited mobility
N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 18 ventilation system for cabins without openable Windows N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 15.07 propulsion system requirements N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 15.08 No. 2 request to loudspeaker systems in the passenger cabin for passenger ships with optical fiber by less than 40 m or more than 75 persons shall be the rules at N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010. 1.1.2006 no. 3 requirements to the alarm system for day-trip vessels applies the rule at N.E.U, at the latest renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010. 1 January 2006 no. 3 letter c alarm system to warn the crew and the crew through the navigation for cabin vessels applies the rule at N.E.U, at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate.
1.1.2006 no. 4 level alarm for each watertight Department N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 5 two motor-driven bilge pumps N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no.6 Festinstalliertes excellence system N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 no. 7 open the refrigerators from the inside N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 no. 8 ventilation system for CO2 dispensing systems in rooms N.E.U, no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 9 first aid kits N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 15.09 No. 1 set 1 lifebuoys N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 no.2 Einzelrettungsmittel N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 no. 3 facilities for a safe passage of N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 4 Einzelrettungsmittel for 100% of passengers according to EN 395:1998, EN 396:1998, EN ISO 12402-3:2006 and EN ISO 12402-4:2006 N.E.U., is at least applied for renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2007 1.1.2006 they become kind of life-saving appliances for passenger ships which were equipped before 1.1.2005 with appropriate collective life-saving appliances, alternatively the individual life-saving appliances.
For passenger ships, which were no. 6 before 1.1.2005 with collective life-saving appliances according to article 15.09, these count as an alternative until the renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 to the individual life-saving appliances.
1.1.2006 no. 9 testing of life-saving appliances according to manufacturer data N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 no. 10 dinghy with engine and searchlight N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 11 stretcher N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 15.10 No. 2 section 9.16 no. 3 applies to corridors and lounges for passengers.
N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 no. 3 adequate emergency lighting N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 no. 4 emergency powersupply for day-trip vessels with fiber optic 25 m or less shall be the rules at N.E.U, no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015. 1.1.2006 letter f emergency power for lamps according to section 10.02 No. 2 letter i N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 8(3)(i) emergency power for elevators and lifts according to article 15.06 No. 9 set 2 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 no. 6 set 1 surfaces according to article 15.11 no.2 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 set 2 and 3 installation of the cable N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 set 4 emergency power plant above the edge of the diving N.E.U., no later than at renewal of the certificate of the ship after the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 15.11 no. 1 Brandschutztechnische suitability of materials and components N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after which 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 2 execution of surfaces N.E.U., at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 3 in rooms , surface treatments used except machinery and store rooms, and decking, as well as items pursuant to sentence 2 must be flame retardant.
N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015 1.1.2006 no. 4 ceiling and wall coverings made of non-combustible materials N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 5 furniture and fixtures in quilts made of non-combustible materials N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 6 fire test procedures code N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 7 insulation materials in accommodation spaces non-flammable N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 7a plan or similar mobile equipment N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.12.2011 No. 8 letters a, b, c set 2 and d requirements for doors in N.E.U surfaces. , at the latest at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no.9 walls referred to in point 2 from deck to deck on cabin vessels without pressure water spray system, ends of the walls between cabins: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 10 surfaces N.E.U., at the latest when renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 12 steps from steel or another equivalent non-combustible material N.E.U. , no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 13 a Chequer of the indoor stairs by walls after number 2 N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 14 ventilation systems and air supply systems N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 15 ventilation systems in kitchens, kitchen stoves with deductions N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 16 control stations , Stair shafts, collecting areas and smoke extraction systems N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 17 fire detection system for day-trip vessels: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 15.12 No. 1 letter c portable fire extinguisher in kitchen N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 no. 2 letter a 2nd where N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 4 Hydrant valves N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 axially connected to no. 5 reel N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1 January 2006 no. 6 materials; Protection against ineffective be N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 7 avoid the possibility of freezing of pipes and hydrants N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 8 letter of b independent operation of the fire fighting pumps N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 letter d installation of fire N.E.U. , at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 9 fire extinguishing system in machinery spaces N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2015. The transitional provision does not apply to passenger ships, which were laid after the 31 December 1995 on keel and made of wood, aluminum, or plastic whose hull and the machinery spaces were not produced no. 3 and 4 of a material according to § 3.04.
1.1.2006 15.13 safety organisation for day-trip vessels: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate 1.1.2006 15.14 No. 1 waste water collecting tanks or onboard sewage treatment plants for cabin vessels with 50 or fewer beds and for day-trip vessels: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 2 requirements for waste water collection tanks for cabin vessels with 50 or fewer beds and for day-trip vessels with 50 or fewer passengers : N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 15.15 No. 1 damage stability N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2045 1.1.2006 no. 5 presence of a sailor, a platform or a comparable institution for passenger ships, for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 beds approved are: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 6 presence of tenders , a platform or a comparable institution for passenger ships, which are approved for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 beds: N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the vessel certificate after 1.1.2010 1.1.2006 no. 9 warning devices for liquefied natural gas facilities N.E.U., at the latest upon renewal of the certificate referred to in article 14.15 1.1.2006 Chapter 22a 22a. 05 no. 2 additional requirements for vehicles with more than 110 m L , who want to drive for vehicles above from Mannheim, possess a valid on the 30.09.2001 licences of a competent authority, do not apply the rules on the leg for the special permit has been granted.
1.10.2001 Chapter 22b 22b. 03 no. 3 in operating procedure of the second independent propulsion system or manual drive N.E.U., at the latest on renewal of the vessel certificate according to the 1.1.2025 1.4.2005 (*) 1.
CO2 fire extinguishing systems from 1 January 1995 to 31 March 2003 installed remain authorised until the renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1st, 2035, if they comply with section 10.03 no.5 of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations, applicable on 31 March 2002.
2. from 1 January 1995 to 31 March 2002, issued recommendations of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine to section 10.03 remain valid until the renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1st, 2035 No.5 of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations, applicable on 31 March 2002.
3. § 10.03 b No. 2 letter a is up to the renewal of the vessel certificate after January 1st, 2035 only, whose keel if these plants be built into ships, was laid after 1 October 1992.
6. for new vehicles with lengths of more than 110 m, the keel of which is laid before October 1, 2001, letter d for the journey between Mannheim and Karlsruhe can be waived the fulfillment of section 22a. 05 no. 2. This limitation of the trip is to enter at number 10 in the ship's certificate.

section 24.07 (without content) section 24.08 transitional provision to section 2.18 1.
Before April 1, 2007, granted official ship number be with April 1, 2007 by preceded by the digit "0" to European ship numbers.
2. the European ship number is no later than at renewal of the vessel certificate after March 31, 2007, in the certificate and in the directory according to Appendix C registered, as well as installed on the vehicle.

§ 24.09 transitional provisions on the occasion of the passage of the ADNR on the ADN certificates of approval, the approved of by resolution 2001-II-27 and in the regulation on the recast of the regulation concerning the carriage of dangerous goods on the Rhine and to the recast of the regulation on the transport of dangerous goods on the Moselle from July 12, 2003 (BGBl. II p. 648) the regulation concerning the carriage of dangerous goods on the Rhine (ADNR) , have been granted and their expiration date is not exceeded, apply as in § 1.02 number 2 letter of b called approval certificates according to ADN.

System A (sample) request for investigation is the examination of the vehicle described below to the investigation Commission for a first investigation - investigation - follow-up - voluntary investigation _ (*) requested.
 
 
 
2 1 name and address of the owner: name of the vehicle 3 place and number of registration: 4 hometown: 5 European ship number or official ship number: 6 type of the vehicle: 7(*) special abilities: 8 name and location of the shipyard: 9 year:  10 capacity/water displacement  t(*) - m3(*) 11 number of motors to capital ship drive ð 12 total main propulsion power of  kW 13 number of main propellers 14 is  the certificate requested for the trip :
 
 
-
auf dem Rhein(*)
 
 
-
zwischen ................................... und ................................... (*) 15 the vehicle, yet was not untersucht(*) - untersucht(*) was the last time in... on...
 
16(*) the vehicle has a recognised classification society certificate No. 2 according to section 2.12.
 
 
 
 
 
issued most valid until 17(*) the ship has a certificate of approval, issued in accordance with the provisions of ADN by the valid through 18 place proposed for the examination date and time: 19 addresses, to which the reply and any messages to be: 20 following plants are attached to review this request: a)(*) ship letter, b)(*) certificate relating to the allocation of uniform European vessel number or the official ship number , c)(*) calibration certificate, d)(*) certificate of the steam boilers and other pressure vessels, e)(*) certificate of approval for the transport of dangerous goods on the Rhine, f)(*) certificate of the preliminary investigation, g)(*) certificate according to § 2.12, issued by the recognized classification society, h)(*) plan of electrical systems and controls, i)(*) certificate of the fixed fire extinguishing systems, k)(*) certificate of the liquefied natural gas facilities, l)(*) plans and calculation notes for passenger ships, m)(*) other calculation documents and evidence , n)(*) type-approval certificate, o(*) motor parameters Protocol and instructions of the manufacturer for control of exhaust gas relevant components and engine parameters.
 
 
                                                    
 
 
                                                    
                                                                                                                                 , the (signature of the owner or his representative) 21's name and address, which is to set up analysis: notes on number 6 by ships following information: tug, towboat, self-propelled barge, motor tanker, freight barge, tank barge, freight barges, tank barges, ship-borne barges, ferry, ship or kind to others describing.
Details of the type of device for floating devices.
Vehicle information of the main building material.
7 specifying, whether the vehicle is used for other purposes, as its construction is equivalent to: as suitable for use as a tow boat, as a towboat, a coupling vehicle, as barges, as the barge, as a passenger ship.
10 if the vehicle is not calibrated, an estimated.
21 l) for passenger ships, the plans (deck plans, longitudinal section, Hauptspantquerschnitt) provide information about the dimensions and the type of the vessel; they are accompanied by sketches of the surfaces to be measured on a scale suitable for the entry of the sizes.
(*)
As appropriate the pattern B paint system it is referred to in annex V, part II, Appendix C is the sample referred to in annex VI, part II, Appendix D 1.
The pattern applies for dry goods vessels referred to in annex V, part VIII 2.
The pattern applies to tank vessels referred to in annex V, part IX system E (dropped out) Appendix F (dropped out) Appendix G applies the pattern according to annex V, part VI system H shall apply the provisions of annex XI annex 1 system I security sign image no 1 entry for unauthorized color: red/white/black picture 2 fire, open light and smoking prohibited color: red/white/black screen 3 Note on a portable fire extinguisher color : red/white image 4 warning before general danger color: Black/Yellow fig. 5 extinguishing hose color: red/white Figure 6 fire extinguishing color: red/white image 7 hearing protection use color: blue/white Figure 8 first aid kit color: green/white picture 9 quick closing valve of the tank color: brown/white the pictograms used may vary slightly or more detail be provided as the representations in this plant, that the meaning is not changed and no differences and adjustments to make the meaning incomprehensible.

Annex J - applies only for provisions of additional vehicles with certificate of emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants - - and sample certificates - content part I supplementary provisions 1 marking of the engines 2. General requirements for construction and maintenance of the motors of 3 tests 4. assessment of the conformity of production of 5 families of motor and motor group part II description sheet (pattern) Annex 1 - essential characteristics of the master engine/engine type (pattern) Annex 2 - essential characteristics of the engine family/engine group (model) Annex 3 - essential characteristics of engines in the engine family / Motor Group (pattern) part III type approval sheet (sample) Annex 1 - test results (pattern) part IV schema for the numbering of type-approval part V list of approvals for engine types, families and motor group part VI list of manufactured engines (pattern) part VII data sheet for motors with type approval (pattern) part VIII engine parameter log (pattern) facility J, part I part I supplementary provisions 1 bear identification Motors 1.1 approved motor need as a technical unit the following information (labelling) : 1.1.1 trade mark or trade name of the manufacturer of the engine, 1.1.2 engine type, (if applicable) engine family or engine group and type-approval according to part IV of this annex, 1.1.4 unique identification number (serial number), 1.1.3 number year of manufacture of the engine of 1.2 the marking in accordance with section 1.1 must during the entire useful life of the engine durable and clearly legible and indelible? Use stickers or signs, they must attach so that also the fastening is stable during the useful life of the engine and that the stickers/signs without destruction or defacing can be removed.
1.3 the identification must be attached to an engine part that is necessary for the normal operation of the engine and usually during the useful life of the engine of any replacement needed.
1.3.1
Labelling must be positioned so that it is visible after the motor with all auxiliary equipment necessary for the engine operation is completed.
If necessary, the motor must have an additional removable plate made of a durable material 1.3.2, which must contain all the information referred to in section 1.1 is to install it so that the particulars given in section 1.1 after installing the motor in a vehicle are clearly visible and easily accessible.
1.4 the marking in accordance with section 1.1 must allow an unambiguous determination of the production sequence.
1.5 all parts of an engine, which can have an influence on the emissions of particulate and gaseous pollutants, must be clearly marked and identified.
1.6 must be the engines with the marking in accordance with section 1.1 and section 1.5 when leaving the production.
1.7 the exact location of the mark in accordance with section 1.1 is to specify in the type-approval certificate section 1.
2. General requirements for construction and maintenance of the motors 2.1 the parts that can have an impact on the emission of gaseous pollutants and particulate must be designed, constructed and installed be, that the engine under normal operating conditions meet the requirements of chapter 8a.
2.2. the manufacturer must take technical measures to ensure the effective limitation of the emissions during the normal useful life of the engine and under normal operating conditions in accordance with Chapter 8a. These provisions is deemed to have been observed if no. 2 and of section 4.3.2.1 of this system is complied with the provisions of § 8a.02.
2.3 when using an exhaust gas catalytic converter and/or a particulate filter, the manufacturer through durability tests and appropriate records must demonstrate that a proper function of these after-treatment devices can be expected during the useful life of the engine. The manufacturer is required to keep the records referred to in section 4.2.3. A planned replacement of the institution after a certain running time of the motor is allowed. Each adjustment practised on a regular basis, repair, disassembly, cleaning or replacement of engine components or systems with the aim to prevent the exhaust aftertreatment device-related malfunction of the engine, may be carried out only to the extent, is technically needed to ensure a proper functioning of the emission limitation system. The requirements in relation to an accordingly scheduled maintenance included in the operating instructions for the customer and must be approved. The section of the operating instructions concerning the maintenance or replacement of Nachbehandlungseinrichtung(en), is to include the description documents.
2.4 engines must be designed to allow a simple check of the components, the adjustable features and motor parameters, which affect their emission behavior. The manufacturer has a guide for controlling exhaust gas relevant components and engine parameter no. 17 According to § 8a.01 to enclose the description sheet.
3. inspections 3.1 emissions 3.1.1 the procedure for measuring the emission of gaseous pollutants and particulate from the engine for testing shall is laid down in the directive no. 16. Others can be admitted to the measuring methods prescribed in this directive by the competent authority, if their equivalence is proved. If an engine type, engine family or engine group should be checked after a different standard or test cycle as the authorised in these terms and conditions of the manufacturer to the competent authority must provide evidence that the weighted Middle exhaust gas and particle emissions from the engine comply with the threshold values of the table no. 2 in § 8a.02.
3.1.2 shall not exceed the limit values over the entire physically possible adjustable range of these characteristics the emissions from engines with adjustable features. A characteristic of an engine is considered to be adjustable, if it is accessible or not permanently sealed in the usual way. The competent authority may require adjustable features on certification to certain values within the adjustable range to be adjusted to ensure compliance with the regulations.
3.1.3 includes a section 5 in connection with part II of this annex set engine family or engine group more than a performance area, the emission values of the parent engine (type approval) and of all engines within the engine family or engine group (conformity of production) must comply with the more stringent rules for the higher performance range. It is free the applicant to limit the determination of engine families and motor groups on individual performance areas and to make the application for the approval.
The test only for the required is 3.2 type tests 3.2.1 for the type-approval of an engine family or engine group (the) Stamm-Motor(en) of this engine family or engine group.
3.2.2 If the results show the type test of an engine that its exhaust gas and particle emissions not complying with the limit values in the table no. 2 in § 8a.02, a device for the reduction of emissions can be fitted. If such an arrangement is valid as an essential component of the motor and is to be noted in the description of the motor. Prior to the issuance of a type-approval certificate a type test must be carried out again. The establishment of emission-cutting must be indicated together with all other documents required by the authority in the information document. In the description of the motor the installation - and midterm exam for the establishment procedure must also be stated, to ensure their correct operation.
3.2.3 if additional substances like ammonia, urea nitrogen, steam, water, or fuel additives are used to ensure that the exhaust gas and particulate emissions from the engine comply with the limit values in the table no. 2 in § 8a.02, requires measures to monitor the consumption of these substances. The information folder must contain enough information to easily be able to prove that the consumption of these additional substances in compliance with the limits of the table corresponds to no. 2 in § 8a.02.
Motor vehicles may be installed 3.3 installation and intermediate 3.3.1 only with the constraints, which were presented in the context of the scope of the type-approval. In addition may intake depression and the exhaust back pressure not exceeding specified value annex of 1 or 3 No. 1.17 and 1.18 for the type-approved engine in part II.
3.3.2 on motors, which belong to a family, must perform no setting changes or modifications that may affect the exhaust gas and particle emissions or which are outside the intended setting, when their installation on board. Settings within the envisaged adjustment range is considered to be changes to the settings in accordance with 3.1.2.
3.3.3 on motors, which belong to a group of motor, may be carried upon installation or operating on Board setting changes or modifications which are permitted in accordance with the type test.
3.3.4 If setting changes or modifications to the engine are made according to the type-approval, are exactly in the motor parameters log to note this.
3.3.5 motors, where none of the settings differ from the manufacturer's specifications or modifications have been made, is usually sufficient to a valid type-approval certificate to prove that the exhaust gas and particulate emissions from the engine comply with the limit values in the table no. 2 in § 8a.02.
3.3.6 If the installation and Foundation examination has revealed that are the engines installed on board in their parameters, components and adjustable features in part recorded in the information package, so is to assume that the exhaust gas and particle emissions of the engines comply with the limits of table no. 2 in § 8a.02.
3.3.7 that competent authority may reduce installation or intermediate examination in accordance with these terms and conditions at its discretion for an engine, for which a type-approval certificate has been issued. The entire test must be performed for at least one cylinder or an engine of an engine family or engine group and may only be reduced if it is expected that all other cylinders or Motors put the same performance as the tested cylinder or engine on the day.
4. assessment of the conformity of production 4.1 when assessing the presence of the necessary rules and procedures for the effective control of the conformity of production before type-approval the competent authority assumes that the manufacturer on a registry fulfils the requirements of the harmonized standard EN 29002 (whose scope includes the production of the engines) or an equivalent accreditation standard. The manufacturer provides detailed information about the registration and undertakes to inform the competent authority of any change in the validity or the scope. To ensure that the requirements of § 8a.02 serial No. 2, suitable controls of the production are carried out.
4.2
The holder of the approval must ensure 4.2.1, that there are procedures for the effective control of the quality of the product;
4.2.2 have access to testing facilities that are required for the inspection of conformity to the approved type;
4.2.3 ensure that the test results are recorded and the records and supporting documents for a period to be agreed with the competent authority be available;
examine the results of each type of test 4.2.4, the stability of the engine characteristics, taking into account the scatters usual in the series production allows you to detect and ensure
4.2.5 ensure that any sampling of engines or specimens, which have delivered seems of a mismatch in a particular examination, give reason for a further sample collection and testing. There are all necessary measures must be taken to restore conformity of production.
4.3. the authority which has granted type-approval may check at any time the procedures applied in the individual production facilities to control of the match.
4.3.1 in each examination are provided the testing and manufacturing documents the examiner.
4.3.2 appears the quality of audits as unsatisfactory or it seems necessary to verify the validity of the information supplied on the basis of section 3.2, is the following procedure to apply: 4.3.2.1 an engine is taken from the series and subjected to the test according to section 3.1. The measured exhaust gas and particulate emissions may in the table in section 8a.02 No. 2 values do not exceed.
A motor taken the series not meets the requirements of section 4.3.2.1 4.3.2.2, so the manufacturer may require sample measurements taken engines of same design on some of the series, where the sample must include the engine originally taken. The manufacturer determines the size "n" of the sample in agreement with the competent authority. With the exception of the engine originally taken are the engines of scrutiny to undergo. The arithmetic mean () the results obtained with the sample must then be determined for each pollutant. Series production is considered in terms of determining compliant, if the following condition is met: where is k: a statistical factor that depends on "n" and is given in the table below: n 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 k 0,973 0,613 0,489 0.421 0,376 0,342 0,317 0,296 0,279 n 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 k 0,265 0,352 0,242 0.233 0,224 0,216 0,210 0,203 0,198 St :, where x an any single result goal with the sample of n is L: the permissible limit to § 8a.02 No. 2 for each examined pollutant 4.3.3 the competent authority must the engines make check, which partially or totally are retracted in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
4.3.4 usually be carried out the checks of the conformity of production, where the competent authority is entitled to once a year. Failure to comply with the provisions referred to in section 4.3.2, the competent authority has to ensure that all necessary measures are taken to restore conformity of production immediately.
5 families of motor and motor Group 5.1 procedures for the selection of an engine family 5.1.1 the engine family can be set on the basis of fundamental design characteristics, that are common to all engines of this family. In some cases, an interaction between the characteristics is possible. These effects must also be taken into account to ensure that only engines with similar exhaust emission characteristics are associated with a particular engine family.
5.1.2 engines can be associated with the same engine family, if they agree on the following essential characteristics: 5.1.2.1 operation: - stroke, - four-stroke;
5.1.2.2 coolant: - air - water, oil;
5.1.2.3. individual cylinder displacement: - the total dispersion of the Motors must be not more than 15%, - number of cylinders for engines with exhaust aftertreatment device.
5.1.2.2 coolant: - air - water, oil;
5.1.2.3. individual cylinder displacement: - the total dispersion of the Motors must be not more than 15%, - number of cylinders for engines with exhaust aftertreatment device.
5.1.2.4 kind of air suction: - naturally aspirated engines, - supercharged engines;
5.1.2.5 type/nature of the combustion chamber: - pre-Chamber, - swirl Chamber, - direct injection 5.1.2.6 valves and channels - configuration, size and number: - cylinder head - cylinder wall;
5.1.2.7. fuel system: - pump line nozzle - series fuel injection pump, distributor injection pump, - single injection - pump-nozzle system, common rail;
5.1.2.8 other features: - exhaust gas recirculation, - water injection/emulsion, - air injection, - charge air cooling;
5.1.2.9 exhaust-gas aftertreatment: - oxidation catalyst, - reduction catalyst - reactor, - particulate filter.
5.1.3 If the engines in the family have other variable features that can affect the exhaust gas and particle emissions, so these features must be also identified and taken into account in the selection of the parent engine.
5.2 procedure for the selection of a motor unit 5.2.1 the motor unit can be set on the basis of fundamental design characteristics that are common to all motors of this group. In some cases, an interaction between the characteristics is possible. These effects must also be taken into account so that it is ensured that only engines with similar exhaust emission characteristics are associated with a particular motor group.
5.2.2 a motor group is more the following basic characteristics, in addition to those in section 5.1.2 for engine families, defined by: 5.2.2.1 bore and stroke dimensions;
5.2.2.2 methods and design features of the boot and exhaust systems: - constant pressure, - vibrant system;
5.2.2.3 design features of the combustion chamber, which affect the exhaust gas and particulate emissions;
5.2.2.4 construction characteristics of the fuel injection system, the piston and the injection cam which determine the basic characteristics, affecting the exhaust gas and particulate emissions, and 5.2.2.5 maximum rated power per cylinder at the maximum rated speed. The maximum range of the power reduction within the motor unit must be declared by the manufacturer and approved by the competent authority.
5.2.3 can be only an engine group part viewed as engines, if you match these characteristics for all relevant engines in section 5.2.2. A defining a motor group can accept the competent authority but, if only one of these characteristics to all engines of a proposed motor group. This, the engine manufacturer in the information folder must demonstrate that the exhaust gas and particle emissions of all engines within the motor Group despite the deviation of one of these characteristics continue to comply with the limits of table no. 2 in § 8a.02.
5.2.4 the competent authority may admit the following settings and modifications to the engines of motor group: 5.2.4.1 settings to adapt to the conditions of the Board: - fuel injection timing to compensate for different fuel properties, - fuel injection timing to optimize the maximum cylinder pressure, different fuel supply to the individual cylinders.
5.2.4.2 modifications to the engine optimisation for the purpose: - turbocharger, - injection components: - Plungerspezifikationen, - Entlastungsventilspezifikationen, - fuel injectors, - cam profiles: - inlet / exhaust valve, injection cam, - combustion chamber.
5.2.4.3 changes that go beyond the above settings and modifications, require a special justification.
5.2.5 of the competent authority must be submitted to the approval of settings in 5.2.4 and modifications all of it as deemed necessary documents. The competent authority may require the repetition of individual or all parts of the type test, the installation or the intermediate examination of the engine.
5.3 selection of the parent engine 5.3.1 the competent authority must approve the selection of the parent engine of the engine family or engine group before conducting the tests. The highest rate of fuel delivery per stroke is a major criterion for the selection of the parent engine. Furthermore, the method must be based on the choice of an engine, has characteristics and properties which experience has shown (shown in g/kWh) produce the highest emissions. For this purpose, detailed knowledge of engines within the engine family or engine group are necessary. Circumstances, the competent authority can get that it is appropriate to determine the worst emission value of the engine family or engine group by testing a second engine. Consequently the competent authority can attract a further engine testing, the characteristics of which indicate that he has the highest emissions of all motors of this engine family or engine group.
5.3.2 ways the engine of an engine family or engine group other variable features on which an influence on the exhaust emissions can be attributed to, to hold these features and taken into account in the selection of the parent engine.
Plant J, part II (pattern) part II information document Nr.(1)... to the type-approval, concerning measures for the reduction of the emission of gaseous pollutants and particulate from diesel engines, for installation in
Vehicles of the Rhine are root engine/engine type (2):...
0 General information 0.1. make (trade name of manufacturer):...
0.2 manufacturer designation for which (the) Motortyp(en), the parent engine and, if necessary, motors of the Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(2):...
0.3 manufacturer types encoding according to the indications on the motor:...
0.4. intended purpose of the Motors(3):...
0.5 name and address of manufacturer:...
Where appropriate, name and address of manufacturer's representative:...
0.6. location, coding and method of affixing of the engine identification number:...
Address(es) 0.7 location and method of affixing of the type-approval number: 0.08 the Assembly...
Attachments 1. essential characteristics of the master engine/motor type 2. essential characteristics of the engine family/engine group 3. essential characteristics of the engines in the engine family/engine group 4 (if applicable) characteristics of with the engine-related vehicle parts 5. instructions to carry out the monitoring of the components of the adjustable features and engine parameters 6 photographs of the parent engine 7 other installations (list here any other plants) date , Motor manufacturer's signature...
 
 
 
 
(1) to forgive number of the information document by the competent authority.
(2) delete if not applicable.
(3) such as ship propulsion - Propellerkurver, main propulsion - constant speed.
Plant J, part II, annex 1 (patterns) key features of the master engine/MOTOR type 1. Description of the engine 1.1 manufacturer:...
 
1.2. manufacturer's engine code:...
 
1.3 workings: Viertakt/Zweitakt(1) 1.4 bore:... mm 1.5 hub:... mm 1.6. number and arrangement of cylinders:...
 
1.7. engine capacity:... cm³ 1.8 nominal power:... kW at rated speed:... min-1 1.9 speed:... min-1 at maximum torque:...
NM 1.10 volumetric Verdichtungsverhältnis(2):...
 
1.11 description of combustion system:...
 
1.12 drawing (s) of combustion chamber and piston crown...
 
1.13. minimum cross sectional area of inlet and outlet ports:... mm2 1.14 cooling system 1.14.1 liquid cooling 1.14.1.1 kind of liquid:...
 
1.14.1.2 pump ja/nein(1) 1.14.1.3 characteristics or make (s) and type (s) (if applicable):...
 
1.14.1.4. drive ratio (s) (if applicable):...
 
1.14.2 air cooling 1.14.2.1. blower: ja/nein(1) 1.14.2.2. characteristics or make (s) and type (s) (if applicable):...
 
1.14.2.3. drive ratio (s) (if applicable):...
 
 
 
 
1.15 temperatures permitted by the manufacturer 1.15.1 liquid cooling: maximum temperature at outlet:...
K 1.15.2 air cooling: reference point:...
Maximum temperature at reference point:...
K 1.15.3 maximum charge air temperature at the intercooler outlet (if applicable):...
1.15.4 K maximum exhaust temperature at the point in the exhaust and Auspuffkrümmer(n):...
K 1.15.5 lubricant temperature: minimum maximum...
K K 1.16 charger: ja/nein(1) 1.16.1 brand:...
 
1.16.2 type:...
 
1.16.3 description of the system (E.g. maximum pressure, discharge valve (wastegate), if applicable):...
 
1.16.4 intercooler: ja/nein(1) 1.17 intake system: maximum permissible inlet depression at rated speed and full load:... kPa 1.18. exhaust system: maximum permissible exhaust back pressure at rated speed and full load:... kPa 2. additional devices to reduce the pollutants (if any, and if not covered by another heading)-description and/or Skizze(n):...
 
 
 
 
3. fuel system 3.1 fuel pump Druck(2) or characteristic diagram:... kPa 3.2 fuel injection system 3.2.1 3.2.1.1 pump brand...
 
3.2.1.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.2.1.3 injection quantity:... and... mm³(2) per stroke or cycle at... min-1 pump (rated speed) or ...min 1 (maximum torque) or characteristic.
Indication of the method used: on engine / on the Pumpenprüfstand(1) 3.2.1.4 injection timing 3.2.1.4.1 timing curve of the Spritzverstellers(2):...
 
3.2.1.4.2 setting of the Einspritzzeitpunkts(2):...
 
3.2.2 3.2.2.1 injection lines length:... mm 3.2.2.2 internal diameter:... mm 3.2.3 injector (s) 3.2.3.1 brand...
 
3.2.3.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.2.3.3 Öffnungsdruck(2) or characteristic diagram: kPa 3.2.4 controller 3.2.4.1 brand...
 
3.2.4.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.2.4.3 speed at Volllast(2):... min-1 3.2.4.4 greatest speed without Last(2):... min-1 3.2.4.5 Leerlaufdrehzahl(2):... min-1 3.3 3.3.1 cold start-up brand...
 
3.3.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.3.3 Description:...
 
 
 
 
4. valve timing 4.1 maximum valve lift and opening and closing angles based on the Totpunkte, or equivalent characteristics:...
 
Delete (1) 4.2 reference clearances and/or Einstellbereiche(1).
(2) specify tolerance.
Plant J, part II, Appendix 2 (pattern). essential characteristics of the MOTORENFAMILIE/MOTORENGRUPPE(1) 1 common Kenndaten(1): 1.1 functioning:...
1.2 coolant...
1.3 air intake method:...
1.4. type/nature of the combustion chamber:...
1.5 valves and interpretation of slot - configuration, size and number: 1.6 fuel system:...
1.7 motor functional systems: identity verification in accordance with Skizze(n) number:-charge air cooling:... - Abgasrückführung(2):-Wassereinspritzung/Emulsion(2):-Lufteinblasung(2):...
1.8 Abgasnachbehandlungssystem(2):...
Proof of the same (or parent engine of the lowest) ratio: System capacity / fuel delivery per stroke, pursuant to diagram number:...
 
 
2. installation of Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(1) 2.1 designation of Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(1):...
2.2 specification of engines this Familie/Gruppe(1): Stamm-Motor(3) designation number of cylinders rated speed (min-1) output per stroke (mm³) rated power (kW) maximum torque speed (min-1) output per stroke (mm³) maximum torque (nm) lower idle speed (min-1) cylinder capacity (% of parent engine) 100 (1) under consideration in the Rhine vessel inspection regulations Appendix J of part I section 5 specified requirements to fill out.
(2) "n.z.." for "not applicable" specify.
(3) detailed description see plant 1st plant J, part II, annex 3 (pattern) significant characteristics of the motors in the Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(1) 1 description of the engine 1.1 manufacturer:...
 
1.2. manufacturer's engine code:...
 
1.3 workings: Viertakt/Zweitakt(2) 1.4 bore:... mm 1.5 hub:... mm 1.6. number and arrangement of cylinders:...
 
1.7. engine capacity:... cm³ 1.8 nominal power:... kW at rated speed:... min-1 1.9 speed:... min-1 at maximum torque:...
NM 1.10 volumetric Verdichtungsverhältnis(3):...
 
1.11 description of combustion system:...
 
1.12 drawing (s) of combustion chamber and piston crown...
 
1.13. minimum cross section area of inlet and exhaust pipes:...
 
 
 
 
1.14 1.14.1 cooling liquid cooling 1.14.1.1 kind of liquid:...
 
1.14.1.2 pump ja/nein(2) 1.14.1.3 characteristics or make (s) and type (s) (if applicable):...
 
1.14.1.4. drive ratio (s) (if applicable):...
 
1.14.2 air cooling 1.14.2.1. blower: ja/nein(2) 1.14.2.2. characteristics or make (s) and type (s) (if applicable):...
 
1.14.2.3. drive ratio (s) (if applicable):...
 
 
 
 
1.15 temperatures permitted by the manufacturer 1.15.1 liquid cooling: maximum temperature at outlet:...
K 1.15.2 air cooling: reference point:...
Maximum temperature at reference point:...
K 1.15.3 maximum charge air temperature at the intercooler outlet (if applicable):...
1.15.4 K maximum exhaust temperature at the point in the exhaust and Auspuffkrümmer(n):...
K 1.15.5 lubricant temperature: minimum maximum...
K K (1) for each motor the engine family/engine group to be put forward separately. Tabular listings are allowed.
(2) delete if not applicable.
(3) tolerance indicate.
1.16 charger: 1.16.1 ja/nein(1) brand:...
 
1.16.2 type:...
 
1.16.3 description of the system (E.g. maximum pressure, discharge valve (wastegate), if applicable):...
 
1.16.4 intercooler: ja/nein(1) 1.17 intake system: maximum permissible inlet depression at rated speed and full load:... kPa 1.18. exhaust system: maximum permissible exhaust back pressure at rated speed and full load:... kPa 2. additional devices to reduce the pollutants (if any, and if not covered by another heading)-description and/or Skizze(n):...
 
 
 
 
3. fuel system 3.1 fuel pump Druck(2) or characteristic diagram:... kPa 3.2 fuel injection system 3.2.1 3.2.1.1 pump brand...
 
3.2.1.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.2.1.3 injection quantity:... and... mm³(2) per stroke or cycle at... min-1 pump
(Rated speed) or ...min 1 (maximum torque) or characteristic.
Indication of the method used: on engine / on the Pumpenprüfstand(1) 3.2.1.4 injection timing 3.2.1.4.1 timing curve of the Spritzverstellers(2):...
 
3.2.1.4.2 setting of the Einspritzzeitpunkts(2):...
 
3.2.2 3.2.2.1 injection lines length:... mm 3.2.2.2 internal diameter:... mm 3.2.3 injector (s) 3.2.3.1 brand...
 
3.2.3.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.2.3.3 Öffnungsdruck(2) or characteristic diagram: kPa 3.2.4 controller 3.2.4.1 brand...
 
3.2.4.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.2.4.3 speed at Volllast(2):... min-1 3.2.4.4 greatest speed without Last(2):... min-1 3.2.4.5 Leerlaufdrehzahl(2):... min-1 3.3 3.3.1 cold start-up brand...
 
3.3.2 unsuccessful...
 
3.3.3 Description:...
 
 
 
 
4. valve timing 4.1 maximum valve lift and opening and closing angles based on the Totpunkte, or equivalent characteristics:...
 
Delete (1) 4.2 reference clearances and/or Einstellbereiche(1).
(2) specify tolerance.
Plant J, part III (design) part III type approval sheet seal of the competent authority no of type-approval:...
Extension no.:...
Notification about - the grant/extension/refusal/the Entzug(1) of type-approval for an engine type, engine family or engine group with regard to the emission of pollutants according to the Rhine vessel inspection regulations (where appropriate) reason for the extension:...
SECTION I 0 General information 0.1 make (trade name of manufacturer):...
0.2 manufacturer designation for the (the) Motortyp(en), the parent engine and, if necessary, the motors of the Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(1):...
0.3 manufacturer types encoding according to the indications on the motor / engines:...
Place:...
Method of affixing:...
0.4. purpose of use of the engine (2):...
0.5 name and address of manufacturer:...
Where appropriate, name and address of manufacturer's representative:...
0.6. location, coding and method of affixing of the engine identification number:...
0.7 location and method of affixing of the type-approval number:...
0.8 address(es) of Assembly...
(1) delete if not applicable.
(2) such as ship propulsion - propeller curve, marine drive - constant speed.
SECTION II 1 if necessary, restrictions...
1.1 special features which are to be observed when installing the motor / motors in the vehicle:...
1.1.1 of maximum permissible intake depression:... kPa 1.1.2 of maximum permissible exhaust back pressure:... kPa 2.
For conducting the tests of responsible technical Dienst(1):......
3. date of Prüfberichts(2):...
4. number of test report:...
5. the undersigned hereby certifies the accuracy of the manufacturer's instructions in the attached information document of the (the) above Motors/engines, as well as the validity of the attached test results in relation to the type of engine or the parent engine. That (the) test specimens have been selected with the approval of the competent authority of the manufacturer and as vorgestellt(3) (root) engine type: the type-approval is erteilt/erweitert/verweigert/entzogen(3): place:...
Date:...
Signature:...
Equipment: information folder test results (see Appendix 1) (1) the checks performed by the competent authority itself, "eliminates" specify.
(2) where appropriate, including correlation study to sample, which are different from the reference systems, according to Rhine vessel inspection regulations annex J, part I, delete section 3.1.1 (3).
Plant J, part III, annex I (sample) test results 0 General information 0.1. make (trade name of manufacturer):...
0.2 manufacturer designation for which (the) Motortyp(en), the parent engine and, if necessary, motors of the Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(1):...
 
 
 
1. information on the implementation of Prüfung(en)(2) 1.1 test cycle designation of the Prüfzyklus(3):...
1.2 engine performance 1.2.1 engine speeds: idle speed:... min-1 speed:... min-1 1.2.2 rated power:... kW 1.3 emissions results of emission testing limit values CO:... g/kWh CO:... g/kWh HC:... g/kWh HC:... g/kWh NOx... g/kWh NOx... g/kWh particle:... g/kWh particle:... g/kWh 1.4 competent authority or technical service place, date:...
Signature:...
(1) delete if not applicable.
(2) to specify in the case of multiple test cycles for each one.
(3) enter the underlying test cycle according to the provisions of the directive to the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulations No. 16 part II section 3.6.
Plant J, part IV (pattern) part IV schema for numbering of types authorisations 1 classification number consists of 5 sections, by the sign "*" are separated.
 
Section 1: The capital letter "R", followed by the code of the Member State which has granted the approval: 1 for Germany, 2 for France, 4 for the Netherlands, 6 for Belgium 14 for the Switzerland section 2: the marking of requirement level. It is assumed that the requirements with regard to the emission of gaseous pollutants and particulate will be exacerbated in the future. The different levels of requirements identified by Roman numerals. The initial requirements are indicated by the numeral I.
 
Section 3: The name of the test cycles. Because engines receive a type-approval for different purposes on the basis of the respective test cycles, are the names of the relevant to specify test cycles here.
 
Section 4: A four-digit sequential number (with leading zeros if applicable) for the base approval number. The sequence shall start from 0001.
 
Section 5: A two-digit sequential number (with leading zero if applicable) for the extension. The sequence starts with 01 for each base approval number.
(2 examples) third parties of the Netherlands granted approval according to level I, and the application of the motors for marine propulsion - propeller curve (yet no extension): R 4 * I * E3 * 0003 * 00 b) second extension to the fourth approval issued by Germany, according to level II, for marine propulsion - constant speed and - propulsion propeller curve: R 1 * II * E2E3 * 0004 * 02 attachment J, part V (design) part V list of type approvals for motor types , Engine families and motor group seal of the competent authority list no.:...
 
 
Period from... to...
 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Fabrikmarke(1) manufacturer Bezeichnung(1) type-approval number date of type-approval extension, refusal to Entziehung(2) reason of extension, refusal or withdrawal date of extension, refusal of Entziehung(2) (1) in accordance with type-approval certificate.
(2) Please enter.
Plant J, part VI (pattern) part VI list of produced engines seal of the competent authority list no.:... for the period from... to...
 
The following information are made to the types of engines, engine families, motor groups and approval numbers of engines, which have been manufactured within the above period in accordance with the provisions of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations,:. make (trade name of manufacturer):...
Manufacturer designation for the (the) Motortyp(en), the parent engine and, if necessary, motors of the Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(1): the type-approval number:...
Date of issue...
Date of initial issue (with supplements):...
Name of the Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(2):...
Name of the Motorenfamilie/Motorengruppe(2):...
Engine the engine family/engine group: 1:...
2: ...
n: ...
Engine identification number:... 001... 001... 001... 002... 002... 002... ...m ...p ...q (1) delete as appropriate.
(2) if necessary, omit; the example shows an engine family with "n" different engines, of which units of motor 1 with the numbers... 001 to... m, engine 2 with the numbers... 001 to... p, the motor n with the numbers... 001 to... q were produced.
Plant J, part VII (pattern) part VII data sheet for motors with type approval seal of the competent authority motor description emissions (g/kWh) item No. No. date of type approval make motor type-type approval number / engine family / engine group cooling mittel(1) number of cylinders total displacement (cm3) power (kW) rated speed (min-1) combustion nung(2) sustainability behand-lung(3) test cycle CO HC NOX PT (1) liquid or air.
(2) to use abbreviations: direct injection, PC = pre / swirl Chamber shows DI, NA = naturally aspirated, TC = turbocharged, and turbo charged with intercooler shows TCA. Examples: DI NA, DI TC, DI TCA, PC NA, PC TC, PC TCA.
(3) to use abbreviations: CAT = catalyst, particulate filter = layer PT, EGR = exhaust gas recirculation.
Plant J, part VIII (pattern) section VIII engine parameter log 0 General information 0.1 information about the motor 0.1.1 factory brand...
0.1.2 manufacturer name:...
 
 
0.1.3 type-approval number:...
0.1.4 engine identification number:...
 
 
0.2 documentation
 
The motor parameters are to examine and document the test results. The documentation is done on separate sheets, individually to that number, by the auditor to sign and this Protocol at be are.
 
 
 
0.3 test is the Anleitung(1) of the manufacturer to carry out the monitoring of the components testing based on making the adjustable features and engine parameters. The examiner may waive in justified individual cases according to own discretion controlling certain motor parameters.
 
 
 
0.4 includes this engine parameter log including the accompanying records a total... (2) pages.
 
 
 
(1) see the Rhine vessel inspection regulations annex J of part I section 2.4 section 8a.11 to fill in no. 3 (2) of the auditor.
1 motor parameters, it will certify that the tested engine of the specified parameters is not impermissibly differs.
1.1 installation test name and address of the testing authority:...
 
 
 
Name of Inspector:...
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
 
 
 
Examination recognized by the competent authority:...
 
 
 
 
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
Seal of the competent authority 1.2 □ Zwischenprüfung(1) □ Sonderprüfung(1) name and address of the testing authority:...
 
 
 
 
 
Name of Inspector:...
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
 
 
 
 
Examination recognized by the competent authority:...
 
 
 
 
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
Seal of the competent authority (1) tick the appropriate box.
1.2 □ intermediate □ Sonderprüfung(1) name and address of the testing authority:...
 
 
 
 
 
Name of Inspector:...
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
 
 
 
 
Examination recognized by the competent authority:...
 
 
 
 
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
Seal of the competent authority 1.2 □ Zwischenprüfung(1) □ Sonderprüfung(1) name and address of the testing authority:...
 
 
 
 
 
Name of Inspector:...
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
 
 
 
 
Examination recognized by the competent authority:...
 
 
 
 
 
Place and date:...
 
Signature:...
Seal of the competent authority (1) tick the appropriate box.
Plant J, part VIII, annex I (pattern) system to the motor parameters log ship name:...
Uniform European vessel number:...
□ Einbauprüfung(1) □ Zwischenprüfung(1) □ Sonderprüfung(1) manufacturer:...
 
Engine type:...
 
(Make/brand/trade name of the manufacturer)
 
(Engine family/group / manufacturer name)
Rated power (kW):...
Rated speed (min-1):...
Number of cylinders:...
Purpose of the engine:...
 
 
(Main propulsion/generator drive/bug Jet/auxiliary motor, etc.)
Approval No.:...
 
Motor year:...
Motoridentifizierungs No.:...
 
Location:...
 
(Serial number / unique identification number)
 
 
 
 
The engine and its exhaust gas relevant components have been identified based on the rating plate. The audit was conducted on the basis of the "Manual of the manufacturer to carry out the control of emission relevant components and engine parameters".
 
 
 
A) component testing additional exhaust gas relevant components that are listed in the "Manual of the manufacturer to carry out the control of emission relevant components and engine parameters" must be entered.
Component part number determined, Übereinstimmung(1) cam shaft/piston of □ Yes of □ no □ eliminates injector of □ Yes of □ no □ eliminates record/software No.
 
□ Yes of □ no □ eliminates injection of □ Yes of □ no □ eliminates head of □ Yes of □ no □ □ yes of □ no □ turbocharger eliminates intercooler of □ Yes of □ no □ eliminates eliminates B) examination of the adjustable features and engine parameters determined value Übereinstimmung(1) fuel injection timing, fuel injection duration of □ Yes of □ no C) examination of the intake system and exhaust system □ complying with the approved values was checked by measurement.
Intake depression: kPa... at rated speed and full load.
Exhaust back pressure:... kPa at rated speed and full load.
□ There was carried out a Visual inspection of the intake system and exhaust system. No abnormalities were found, that closed on non-compliance with the approved values.
(D) comments: (following different settings, modifications or changes to the built-in diesel engine have been identified.)
 
 
 
Name of Inspector: place and date: signature: (1) tick the appropriate box.

Attachment K (dropped out) system L scheme of uniform European vessel number (ENI) A A A x x x x x code of the competent authority that granted the European ship number [number] at this schema is "AAA" for which the competent authority has granted the European ship number, assigned three-digit code according to the following ranges: 001-019 France 020-039 Netherlands Germany 040 059 060 069 Belgium 070-079 Switzerland 080-099 reserved for vehicles from countries , die keine Vertragsparteien der Mannheimer Akte sind, und für die vor dem 1. April 2007 ein Rheinschiffsattest ausgestellt worden ist
100-119
Norwegen
120-139
Dänemark
140-159
Vereinigtes Königreich
160-169
Island
170-179
Irland
180-189
Portugal
190-199
reserviert
200-219
Luxemburg
220-239
Finnland
240-259
Polen
260-269
Estland
270-279
Litauen
280-289
Lettland
290-299
reserviert
300-309
Österreich
310-319
Liechtenstein
320-329
Tschechische Republik
330-339
Slowakei
340-349
reserviert
350-359
Kroatien
360-369
Serbien
370-379
Bosnien und Herzegowina
380-399
Ungarn
400-419
Russische Föderation
420-439
Ukraine
440-449
Weißrussland
450-459
Republik Moldau
460-469
Rumänien
470-479
Bulgarien
480-489
Georgien
490-499
reserviert
500-519
Türkei
520-539
Griechenland
540-549
Zypern
550-559
Albanien
560-569
Die ehemalige Jugoslawische Republik Mazedonien
570-579
Slowenien
580-589
Montenegro
590-599
reserviert
600-619
Italien
620-639
Spanien
640-649
Andorra
650-659
Malta
660-669
Monaco
670-679
San Marino
680-699
reserviert
700-719
Schweden
720-739
Kanada
740-759
Vereinigte Staaten von Amerika
760-769
Israel
770-799
reserviert
800-809
Aserbaidschan
810-819
Kasachstan
820-829
Kirgisistan
830-839
Tadschikistan
840-849
Turkmenistan
850-859
Usbekistan
860-869
Iran
870-999
reserviert
„xxxxx“ steht für die von der zuständigen Behörde granted five-digit serial number system M navigational radar equipment and turn indicators in the navigation of the Rhine (reference: BGBl. I 2012, 2823-2837) (text see: BinSchUO2008AnhIIAnl M) plant N requirements for Inland AIS equipment and provisions relating to the installation and functional testing of Inland AIS equipment plant N, part I - applies only to vehicles with certificate - A. requirements for Inland AIS equipment Inland AIS equipment must comply with the requirements of the test standards contained in decision 2007-I-15. Compliance is identified by a type approval tests of a competent authority.
B. installation and function test of Inland AIS equipment on board with the installation of Inland AIS devices on board are to comply with the following conditions: 1 the Inland AIS devices allowed only by a specialist company to perform, which is recognized by the competent authority.
2. Inland AIS unit must be installed in the wheelhouse or in another easily accessible location.
3. it must be visually recognizable whether the device is operating. The device has a fail-safe circuit with its own protection constantly with electric energy be supplied via and be connected directly to the supply.
4. the antennas of the Inland AIS are devices to install and to connect to the devices that it could operate safely under all normal operating conditions. Other devices may only be connected if the interfaces of both devices are compatible.
5. before first use after installation, with renewals or extensions of the ship's certificate (except for section 2.09 No. 2 of the Rhine vessel inspection regulations) as well as after each modification to the ship, which could adversely affect the operating conditions of these devices, must be by the competent authority or by a recognised specialist company an installation and function test be performed.
6. the recognised specialist company that has carried out the installation and function test, issues a certificate in accordance with Annex N part II about the special characteristics and the proper function of the Inland AIS unit.
7. the certificate is constantly carrying on board.
8 operating instructions must be handed to remain on board. This is to be noted in the certificate of the installation.
C. briefing of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine the Rhine States and Belgium share the Central Commission immediately a) any designation of a competent authority, b) any granting or withdrawal of type-approval for Inland AIS equipment, c) with any recognition of a specialist company for the installation of Inland AIS devices or removal of such recognition.
Plant N, part II - applies only to vehicles with certificate - (pattern) certificate on the installation and operation of Inland AIS equipment type/name of vessel: European ship number or official ship number: ship owners name: address: phone: Inland AIS unit type manufacturer registration number serial number
 
 
 
 
This is to certify that the Inland AIS equipment of this vehicle the requirements of the plant N, part I, Rhine vessel inspection regulations, requirements to inland AIS equipment and provisions relating to the installation and functional testing of Inland AIS units, equivalent to and that a manual to remain on the vehicle was delivered.
Recognised specialist company name: address: telephone: stamp place date signature authority responsible for the recognition of specialist company name: address: telephone: plant N, part III - applies only to vehicles with certificate - (pattern) 1 directory of after the Rhine ship examination for approval of Inland AIS equipment authorities country name address phone number email address Belgium Germany France Netherlands Switzerland is given no authority, no competent authority named on the part of the State concerned.
2. directory of the Inland AIS approved after the Rhine vessel inspection equipment item No. No. type manufacturer holder of the type-approval day of the certification authority ZulassungsNr.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3. directory of approved after the Rhine ship examination on the basis of equivalent type authorisations, the Inland AIS equipment item No. No. type manufacturer holder of the type-approval day of the certification authority ZulassungsNr.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4. list of after the Rhine vessel survey for the installation or replacement of Inland AIS devices recognised specialist companies Belgium No. Number name address phone number email address is specified no trade company, no recognition was pronounced for companies in this country.
Germany no. Number name address phone number email address is specified no trade company, no recognition was pronounced for companies in this country.
France no. Number name address phone number email address is specified no trade company, no recognition was pronounced for companies in this country.
Netherlands no. Number name address phone number email address is specified no trade company, no recognition was pronounced for companies in this country.
Switzerland no. Number name address phone number email address is specified no trade company, no recognition was pronounced for companies in this country.

Plant O directory of the certificate according to § 1.03 as equivalent certificates and conditions for their recognition (without content) recognised system P data to identify of a vehicle 1 European ship number in accordance with § 2.18 (annex V, part I or II, no. 3, and annex VI, part I or II, 5th column) 2 name of the vehicle (annex V, part I or II, no. 1 and annex VI , Part I or II, 4th column) 3. nature of the vehicle in accordance with § 1.01 numbers 1 to 25 (annex V, part I or II, no. 2) 4 length in accordance with § 1.01 no. 56 (annex V, part I or II, no. 17a) 5 width about everything in accordance with § 1.01 no. 59 (annex V, part I or II, no. 18a) 6 draught according to § 1.01 no. 62 (annex V , Part I or II, no. 19) 7 data source (= Rhine ship's certificate / certificate of community) 8 capacity (annex V, part I or II, no. 21 and annex VI, part I or II, 13 column) for the vehicles, the transportation of the goods serve no. 46 (annex V, part I or II, no. 21 and annex VI, part I or II, 13 column) for vehicles 9 water displacement in accordance with § 1.01, which serve 10 operator (owner or his authorised representative shall not the carriage of goods , exhibiting § 2.02 11 Investigation Commission (annex V, part I or II and annex VI, part I or II) 12 number of the Rhine vessel certificate / Community certificate (annex V, part I or II and annex VI, part I or II, 1st column) 13 expiration of the validity (annex V, part I or II, no. 11, and annex VI, part I or II, 17 column) 14 copyright of the record if available 1 national ship number 2. type of vehicle according to the standard / technical specification for electronic messages in the inland waterways 3. single or double hull construction according to ADN/ADNR 4. page height in accordance with § 1.01 no. 61 5 gross tonnage (for ships) 6 IMO number (for ships) 7 call sign (for ships) 8 MMSI number 9 ATIS code of 10 species, number, issuing authority, and expiration date of other documents system Q service instructions according to § 1.07 No.   1 requirements for Dodge and turning properties no.   2 requirements for minimum speed, stop and reverse properties no.   3 requirements for coupling systems and coupling devices of vehicles that move on a rigid dressing or moving of a rigid body are no.   4 without contents No.   5 noise measurements no.   6 without contents No.   7 special anchor with reduced Ankermasse No.   8 strength waterproof ship Windows no.   9 requirements for sprinkler systems no. 10 specimen of certificate for liquid gas systems in Kanalpenichen No. 11 issue of the Community certificate No. 12 of fuel tanks on floating devices no. 13 minimum thickness of the outer skin on no. 14 without contents No. 15 barges transportation from your own force no. 16 no content no.17 suitable fire alarm systems no. 18 proof of buoyancy, trim position and stability of separate components for ships no. 19 replacement engines no. 20 equipment of ships , the standard S1 or S2 comply with requirements for security systems no. 22 No. 21 taking into account the specific security needs of persons with reduced mobility without No. 24 contents No. 23 suitable gas warning device No. 25 cable Note: the Central Office can ship inquiry/ship gauging Office for vehicles that run on waterways of in zones 3 and 4 allow for the areas of deviations from the relevant values given in the following service instructions listed in Appendix IV.
The Central Office of ship inquiry/ship gauging Office can set higher requirements in relation to the relevant values given in the following service instructions for vessels operating on waterways of in zones 1 and 2, for the areas listed in annex III.
Service instruction No. 1 requirements on Dodge and turning properties (§§ 5.09 and 5.10 i. V. m. § 5.02 number 1, 5.03 number 1, 5.04 and 16.06 of annex II) 1 General information and conditions for the implementation of the dodges of 1.1 to section 5.09 to ships and associations can Dodge in time and the off soft properties are to be proved by evasive maneuvers on a test drive route according to § 5.03. This is through simulated evasive action to port and starboard with predetermined sizes, where for certain speeds of rotation of the of panning and supporting limits for the time required, it needed to be observed, to prove.
To comply with the requirements referred to in point 2, and while in compliance with a special depth of at least 20% of the draught, but at least 0.50 m 2. is implementation of the dodges and measurement (schematic diagram in Appendix 1 to this service statement) 2.1 the evasive action carried out as follows: from the constant initial speed of Vo = 13 km/h to water is at the beginning of the manoeuvre (time to 0 = s , R = 0 ° / min rotational speed, rudder angle δo = 0 °, constant motor speed setting) by rudder setting an alternate movement of the vessel or association to port or starboard to initiate. The rudder angle δ or the position of the control organ δa is in active controls to adjust according to the instructions under 2.3 at the beginning of the dodges. The set rudder angle δ (E.g. 20 degrees starboard) is to maintain, until it reaches the value of the rotational speed r1 for the respective ship - or association size referred to in 2.2. When the turning speed r1 is reached, the time t1 is to record and Gegenruder with the chosen rudder angle δ (E.g. 20 degrees starboard) to give (support), to exit the on swivel movement and on to swing in the opposite direction, i.e. the rotation speed to the value of r2 = due to 0 and to rise again to the value referred to in 2.2. The time t2, if the turning speed r2 = 0 is reached, is to record. Upon reaching the turning speed r3 to 2.2 Gegenruder with the same rudder angle δ to give in order to stop the rotation. The time t3 is to record. When the turning speed r4 = 0 is reached, the time t4 is to record and the ship or the association with freely selectable rudder movements on output rate is then to bring.
2.2 the following limit values to achieve the turning speed r4 in dependency of h are ship or association sizes and water depth to comply: Ship or association size L x W = to continuing rotational speed r1 complied r3 [° / min] limits the time required t4 [s] in shallow and deep water δ = δ 20 degrees = 45° 1,2 ≤ h/T ≤ 1.4 1.4 < h/T ≤ 2 h / T > 2 1 all motor vessels; single-line convoys ≤ 110 x 11.45 20 ° / min 28 ° / min 150 ship of 110 s 110s 2 single-track convoys up to 193 x 11.45 or two-lane convoys up to 110 x 22,90 12 ° / min 18 ° / min 180 ship 130 s 110 s 3 two-lane convoys ≤ 193 x 22,90 8 ° / min 12 ° min 180 ship 130 s 110 s 4 lane convoys up to 270 x 22,90 or three-lane convoys up to 193 x 34,35 6 ° / min 8 ° / min (*) (*) (*) (*) after establishment of the nautical expert t1 time required , t2, t3 and t4 for the turning speed r1, r2, r3, and r4 is to note: according to annex 2 to this service statement in the measurement log. The limits specified in the table shall not exceed the values t4.
2.3
There are at least four evasive manoeuvres carried out based on an evasive maneuver - to starboard with a rudder angle δ = 20 degrees to port with a rudder angle δ = 20 degrees - to starboard with a rudder angle δ = 45 ° - to starboard with a rudder angle δ = 45 °.
The evasive maneuvers are to repeat if necessary (such as when uncertainty of the measured values or unsatisfactory history). The rotation speeds prescribed for 2.2 and limits the time needed is required. For active controls or special types of rudder, the position of the control body are δa or the rudder angle δa, where appropriate, at the discretion of the expert, taking into account the design of the control unit by way of derogation from δ = 20 degrees and δ = 45 ° set.
2.4 to determine the speed at which a turn indicator must be located aboard, which complies with the requirements relating to the minimum requirements and test conditions for turn indicators in the navigation of the Rhine.
2.5 the charge State at the evasive action after § 5.04 should be preferably 70% up to 100% of the maximum working load. The approval for the descent and the climb on this loading is performed the test drive with reduced loading to restrict.
The sequence of evasive maneuvers and the used names refer to the schematic representation of annex 1 to this service statement.
3. turn properties are the turning properties of ships and associations with L of not longer than 86 m and not more than 22.90 m B sufficient within the meaning of section 5.10 i. V. m. § 5.02 number 1, if an opening tool maneuver with an initial speed of 13 km/h water limits for keeping to Bow Valley were followed after the service statement number 2. While the Flott water conditions are according to 1.1 to comply.
4.1 regardless of the requirements of paragraphs 1 to 3 a must 4. other requirements) controls with hand drive one turn of the hand wheel at least 3° travel to and b) control devices can reach an average rate of 4 ° over the entire range of possible rudder deflection per second with a motor-driven mechanism for largest immersion of the rudder.
This requirement is also in vessel at full speed in a rowing motion across the range of 35 ° 35° starboard to check port. In addition is to check whether the rudder at full power retains the outermost position. Active controls or special types of rudder is this provision to be applied mutatis mutandis.
4.2 additional facilities required to achieve the manoeuvrability after § 5.05, these must comply with the requirements of Chapter 6 and in paragraph 52 of the vessel certificate is to enter the following note: "the Flankenruder(*) referred to in paragraph 34 /Bugsteuereinrichtungen(*) / other Einrichtungen(*) ist(*) /sind(*) to reach the manoeuvrability under Chapter 5 required."
(*)
                        
Delete where inapplicable.
5. recording the measurements and logging are according to the procedure described in Appendix 2 to this service manual perform measurement, logging and recording of experimental data.
Appendix 1 to the service instruction No. 1 schematic representation of the dodges Appendix 2 to the service instruction No. 1 Measurement Protocol take evasive action and turning properties Investigation Commission:...
Datum: .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Name: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Name des Fahrzeuges: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Eigentümer: ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Art des Fahrzeuges
 
 
Strecke: ............................................................................................................................................
oder Verbandes: ......................................................................................
 
Pegel [m]: ..........................................................................................................................................
L x B [m x m]: .............................................................................................
 
Wassertiefe h [m]: ............................................................................................................................
TVersuch [m]: ................................................................................................
 
h/T: ...................................................................................................................................................
 
 
Flow velocity [m/s]:...
Loading % of maximum (attempting) [t]:...
 
Tragfähigkeit: ...................................................................................................................................
Wendegeschwindigkeitsanzeiger
 
 
 
Typ: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rudder design: standard design / special Bauart(*) active control device: ja/nein(*) readings of evasive action: Wendeeigenschaften(*) location at the beginning of the turnaround maneuver... km site at the end of the turn maneuver... km rowing machine type of drive: hand/motorisch(*) rudder deflection per Umdrehung(*):... o rate of about the whole Bereich(*): ... ° / s rate of over the Bereich(*) 35° BB after 35° TR:... ° / s (*) delete as appropriate.
Service instruction No. 2 requirements on the minimum speed, stop and reverse properties (§§ 5.06, 5.07 and 5.08 i. V. m. the sections 5.02 number 1, 5.03 number 1, 5.04 and 16.06 of annex II) 1 minimum speed according to § 5.06 the speed against water is adequate within the meaning of § 5.06 number 1, if she at least 13 km / h. It must, in determining the properties of the stop: a) the for the depth of the special conditions are met according to 2.1 b) measurement, logging, recording and evaluation of the experimental data will be performed.
2. stop and reverse properties in accordance with § 5.07 and 5.08 § 2.1 ships and societies can in time Bow Valley stop in the sense of § 5.07 number 1, if it stop Bow Valley against reason at an initial speed of 13 km/h water, Flott water depths of at least 20% of the draught, but not less than 0.50 m, is shown. In following limits must be observed: a) in flowing waters (flow speed 1.5 m/s) stalemate against water on a course that must be measured against country, more than 550 m for ships and associations with one - length L > 110 m or - width B > 11,45 m or 480 m for ships and associations with one - length L ≤ 110 m / width B ≤ 11,45 m be achieved. The stop maneuver ends at standstill against country.
(b) in still waters (flow rate is less than 0.2 m/s) must the deadlock against water on a track, measured against country, of not more than 350 metres in ships and associations with a - L length > 110 m or - width B > 11,45 m or 305 m in ships and associations with one - length L ≤ 110 m / width B ≤ 11,45 m are achieved. Also, the reversing properties by a reversing attempt to prove are in quiet waters in addition. It must be in reverse a speed obtainable by at least 6.5 km/h.
(Measurement, logging and recording of experimental data after a) or b) are after in the Appendix 1 procedures for this service manual perform.
The ship or the Association must remain sufficiently manoeuvrable during the entire test.
2.2 the loading condition when you try after § 5.04 must be as 70-100% of the maximum working load. This loading condition shall be evaluated in accordance with Annex 2 to this service statement. The permitted displacement for the descent according to the existing load has a lower loading than 70%, the ship or of the Association when attempting to determine if the limits referred to in 2.1.
2.3 meet when attempting to not the same conditions as set out in 2.1 are the actual values of the initial velocity and the flow rate to evaluate the results obtained according to the procedure described in Appendix 2 to this service statement.
Must not exceed the deviation from the prescribed initial speed of 13 km/h + 1 km/h be the flow rate between 1.3 and 2.2 m/s must be in the flowing water, otherwise are attempts to repeat.
2.4 the maximum displacement permitted in the descent or the largest load resulting from this or the maximum dipped cross-section of ships and associations is to be set on the basis of tests and be entered in the certificate.
Appendix 1 to the service instruction No. 2 measurement, logging and recording of experimental data at the stop manoeuvre 1 stop maneuver that in Chapter 5 designated ships and associations need to test drive line in flowing or still waters a stop maneuvers perform, to prove that they can keep Bow Valley with the help of their propulsion system without the use of anchors. The stop maneuver is basically carried out according to the procedure shown in Figure 1. It starts when driving at constant speed - to - be as accurately as possible 13 km/h compared to water with the shift from "ahead" on "backwards" (point A in the command "Stop") and ends on reaching the standstill against country (point E: v = 0 against land or point D point = E: v = 0 against water and land to stop maneuvers in still waters).
Stop manoeuvres in flowing waters must also location and time of reaching from standstill against water (ship point moves D: v with velocity = 0 against water) be detained.
The measured values are to be noted in a measurement log as shown in table 1. Prior to the implementation of the stop maneuver are the fixed information required in the measurement log header.
The mean flow velocity (vSTR) body of water in the area of the fairway is to determine - where available - depending on the level or by measuring the motion of a floating body, and in the measurement log.
Basically, the use of calibrated logging for detection of ship speed against water is allowed, during stop when so that the motion and the measurement data can be recorded in the above sense.
2. recording of measured values and logging (table 1) first is the initial velocity to water for the stop maneuver to determine. This can be done by measuring the time interval between two landmarks. In flowing waters, whose mean flow velocity is taken into account.
(A) passing through a land-mark begins with the command "Stop" the stop cycle. The passing of the landmark is to determine perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vessel and to log. The passage of all other landmarks during the stop manoeuvre is same way to determine and the respective land-mark (E.g. kilometre) to record the time of the passing in the measurement log.
The recording of the measured values shall be made as far as possible at a distance of 50 m. The respective time of reaching the points B and C - as far as detectable - and the points D and E are to be noted and the respective site to estimate. The information provided in the measurement log to the speed must not be included, but should be held to better adjust of the initial velocity.
3. Description of the sequence of the stop maneuver the sequence of stop manoeuvre as shown in Figure 1 is present in the chart. This is first of all to draw the way-time curve, using the data of the measurement protocol, and points A to E are to be marked. Can then determine the values of the average speed between two measurement points and the speed-time curve is drawn.
This is done as follows (see Figure 1): by forming the quotient of a path difference and the corresponding time difference Δs/Δt medium ship speed for just the time difference is calculated.
Example: For the time interval of 0 second up to 10 seconds is the distance of 0 m up to 50 m travelled.
ΔS/Δt = 50 m / 10 s = 5.0 m/s = 18.0 km/h this value is applied as the average speed of the abscissa value of 5 seconds. In the second time interval of 10 seconds to 20 seconds 45 m are laid back.
ΔS/Δt = 45 m / 10 s = 4.5 m/s = 16.2 km/h at the brand, D the ship relative to the water, i.e. the flow is approximately 5 km/h.
 
 
 
 
Picture in picture 1: 1 end of the stop maneuver labels A command "Stop" B propeller propeller is C D rotates backwards v = 0 against water E v = 0 against country v LR v against country s ship speed appropriate way against country T measured time kind of examination of the vessel route:...
Commission:...
 
or Association:...
 
Level [m]:...
Date:...
 
L x B [m]: …………………………………………..
 
Water depth [m]:...
Name:...
 
L x B [m]: …………………………………………..
 
Slope [m/km]:... …………………………
Exit No.:...
 
Loading VSTR [km/h]:...
 
 
(attempting to) [t]:………………………………….
 
 
[m/s]: ……………………..
 
 
% of the maximum working load:...
 
Maximum motor PB [kW]:...
 
Displacement [m3]:...
 
 
Drive system according to Appendix 2, table 2:...
 
 
Location s [river km] time [SEC] Δs [m] Δt [SEC] vIL [km/h] speed n [min-1] [min-1] comments table 1: measurement log stop maneuvers Appendix 2 to the service instruction No. 2 evaluation of the results of the stop maneuver 1 based on the recorded measured values pursuant to annex 1 to the service instruction No. 2 is to determine the compliance with the limit values. The conditions during the stop manoeuvre differ significantly from the standard conditions or doubts as to the compliance with the limit values, so are the measurement results to evaluate. For this purpose, the following procedure for calculating stop maneuvers can be applied.
2. theoretical way of stop at standard conditions referred to in point 2.1 of the service statement No. 2 (sSOLL) and the conditions during the stop manoeuvre (sIST) are calculated and the appropriate stop way (metering) in relationship. The revised stop way of stop manoeuvre under standard conditions (SNORM) is as follows: letter a or b of the service statement No. 2 was the stop maneuvers with a load of 70-100% of the maximum working load referred to in point 2.2 of the service statement carried no. 2, the displacement is for determining sNORM calculation of sSOLL and sIST (DIST = DSOLL) to insert that existing when attempting to load corresponds to.
Results in determining SNorm according to formula 2.1, that the respective limit exceeds or is lower than, so by varying the DSOLL the value of sSOLL as far as reducing or increasing that limit now is respected (sNORM = respective limit) is. The maximum displacement permitted in the descent is then set.
3. According to the referred to in point 2.1 a and b of the service statement No. 2 limits set are only the ways of stop - phase I (shift from "full ahead" to "full reverse"): sI and - phase II (end of "Redirect" "Stop relative to the water"): sII to the charge (see Figure 1). The total stop way arises to formula 3.1 SBus = sI + sII 4.
The single stop routes are calculated as follows: calculation of stop maneuvers figure 2 graph in formulae 4.1 to 4.7 mean: the coefficient for the formulae 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7 can be found in the following tables: table 1: k-factors for a) motor vessels and single-line convoys b) lane convoys c) three-lane convoys a) b) c) dimension k1 0.95 0.95 0.95 - k2 0.115 0,120 0.125 kg · s2 m4 k3 1.20 1.15 1.10 - k4 0.48 0.48 0.48 - k6 0.90 0.85 0.80 - k7 0.58 0.55 0.52 - table 2: coefficient f for the ratio of pole traction backwards to the motor drive power drive system f dimension modern nozzles with approximate off trailing 0,118 kN/kW older jets with the sharp trailing edge of 0,112 kN/kW propeller without nozzle 0,096 kN/kW rudder propellers with nozzles (usually: sharp trailing edge) 0,157 kN/kW rudder propellers without nozzle 0.113 of kN/kW table 3 : Diagram to determine the RT/v2 according to D1/3 (B + 2T) annex to the service statement No. 2 Appendix 2 examples of the application of the annex 2 (evaluation of the results of the stop maneuver) example I 1.
 
Data of the Association and its vehicles formation: self-propelled barge with a laterally coupled barges (Europa IIa) L [m] B [m] Tmax [m]
TGF(*)max [t] DMax [m3] PB [kW] GMS 110.0 11.4 3.5 2 900 3 731 1 500 SL 76.5 11.4 3.7 2 600 2 743 - 110.0 Association 22.8 3.7 5 500 6 474 1 500 GMS drive system: modern nozzles with rounded rear edge (*) TGF capacity = 2.
 
Readings from stop maneuver velocity: = 1.4 m/s ≈ 5.1 km/h ship speed (from water): ≈ = 3.5 m/s 12.5 km/h ship speed (for a country): = 4.9 m/s ≈ 17.6 km/h reverse time (measured) (point A to C): = 16 s stop route against water (point A to D): = 340 m from loading condition (estimate if necessary): = 5 179 m3 ≈ 0.8 DMax existing draft of the Association :
 
=
 
2,96 m
≈ 0,8 Tmax
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3.
 
Limit according to point 2.1 2(a) or (b) compared with SNORM da B > 11,45 m and because the Association is in flowing waters, letter applies to him in accordance with point 2.1 a: SNORM ≤ 550 m 4.
 
Determination of the corrected stop way in standard conditions - measurement in accordance with Annex 1 (see point 2): SMESSUNG = 340 m - to calculate: 4.1 coefficients for the calculation of system 2 4.2 calculation of SIST 4.3 calculation of SSOLL output values: 4.4 check on compliance with the permissible stop trail at standard conditions SNORM to formula 2.1 of Appendix 2 assessment: permissible is clearly not the case, i.e..
 
 
 
 
-Approval for descent is the presented loading condition (0.8 · DMax) readily possible - greater load capacity possible, which can be determined according to paragraph 5.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5. possible increase of DIST in the downhill conclusion: da (DSOLL) border > DMax (8 756 > 6 474) of the Association of this formation can (they-Hey 1) be approved for the full offload in the downturn.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Example II 1.
 
Data of the Association and its vehicles formation: large motor ships sliding by 2 barges ahead and 1 light laterally coupled.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
L [m] GMS of B [m] Tmax [m] TGF(*)max [t] DMax [m3] PB [kW] 110.0 11.4 3.5 2 900 3 731 1 500 SL 76.5 11.4 3.7 2 600 2 743 - Association 186,5 22.8 3.7 10 700 11 960 1 500 GMS drive system: modern nozzles with rounded rear edge (*) TGF capacity = 2.
 
Readings from 3 stop maneuver.
 
Limit referred to in paragraph 2.1 letter a or b of the service statement compared with SNORM da B > 11,45 m and because the Association is in flowing waters, letter applies a the service statement # 2: him in accordance with point 2.1 SNORM ≤ 550 m 4.
 
       Determination of the corrected stop way in standard conditions 4.1 coefficients for the calculation in accordance with Appendix 2 4.2 4.3 calculation of SSOLL output values: 4.4 check on compliance with the permissible stop trail at standard conditions SNORM according to formula 2.1 of Appendix 2 assessment: permissible limit will be significantly exceeded, therefore approved for the descent only with reduced load capacity possible, which may be determined in accordance with paragraph 5.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5. authorised D * follows in the descent according to formula 2.1 of Appendix 2 to this: conclusion: since the allowable in the downhill displacement D * is only 7 950 m3, allowable bearing capacity is approximately t service instruction No. 3 is 0.66 • 10 700 = 7 112 clutch system requirements in this formation (see 1) and want dome facilities of vehicles that move on a rigid dressing or moving of a rigid body (§§ 16.01 , 16.02, 16.06 and 16.07 of annex II) in addition to the requirements of Chapter 16 of annex II, the relevant provisions are under the Rhine Police Regulation of ship (§§ 6.21, 8.03, 8.05) Note.
1 each clutch system must ensure the rigid connection of the vehicles of an Association General requirements 1.1, i.e. the coupling device must prevent against each other movements of vehicles under the intended conditions of use in longitudinal or transverse direction, so that the formation as a "nautical unit" can be seen.
1.2 the coupling system and its elements must can be easily and safely operated, so that the vehicles can be coupled quickly and without risk of staff.
1.3 the coupling system and its connecting elements must can properly absorb the forces under the intended conditions of use and introduce into the body of the ship.
1.4 there must be a sufficient number of digits to dome.
2. coupling forces and general design of the coupling device the coupling devices of to allow associations and formations must be calculated taking into account a sufficient security. This is true as meets, if for the design of the coupling elements of longitudinal joints at least according to 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 calculated coupling forces as the breaking strength is applied.
2.1 dome point between the towboat and barges or other vehicles: 2.2 dome point between schiebendem motor ship and deferred vehicles: 2.3 dome set between deferred vehicles: kN before a propelling vehicle at the dome between the first pushed and the Davor coupled vehicles 1200 as largest coupling force is regarded as sufficiently, even though according to the formula 2.3 a larger value results in.
Dome bodies of all other longitudinal connections between pushed vehicles, the coupling force determined according to the formula in 2.3 for the design of the coupling devices must be based.
In these formulas mean: 2.4.1 for the coupling of the individual vehicles in longitudinal direction must be provided at least two dome places. Each dome site is according to 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 to measure the calculated coupling force. A single point of the dome can be permitted when using rigid fasteners, provided ensures that a safe connection of vehicles.
The breaking strength of the wire ropes is to select according to the provided cable guide. Wire ropes are allowed no more than three times and are to be selected according to their intended use.
2.4.2 for pusher craft with only a pushed lighter can be applied the formula for the determination of the coupling strength in 2.2, if this pusher for moving more of this light are permitted.
2.4.3 bollards or equivalent devices must that can accommodate any coupling forces and be present in sufficient numbers.
3. Special requirements for articulated couplings shaft couplings must be designed to ensure the rigid connection of the vehicles. Compliance with the requirements of Chapter 5 can be checked in trials with rigid Association referred to in section 16.06.
The drive of flexible coupling to the buckling must allow a proper feedback from the bent State. The requirements of §§ 6.02 to 6.04 shall apply mutatis mutandis, i.e. motor drives using a substitute available to must be for them and whose energy source failure.
Operation and monitoring of the articulated coupling must be from the steering station be possible (at least the movement to the buckling), the requirements of § § 7.03 and 7.05 apply mutatis mutandis.
Service instruction No. 4 (without content) service statement No. 5 noise measurements (§§ 3.04 number 7, 7.01 2, 7.03 number 6, 7.09 3, 8.10, 11.09 number 3, 12.02 5, 17.02 paragraph 3 (b) and 17.03 number 1 of annex II) 1 metrics are General to verify the maximum sound pressure level referred to in annex II, to set measurement procedures and the conditions for the quantitative, reproducible detection of the sound pressure level according to paragraphs 2 and 3.
2 60651: 1994 meters that gauge must meet the requirements of a class 1 device according to EN.
Before and after each series of measurements a calibrator of the class must be attached to the microphone 1 according to EN 60942: 1998, to calibrate the measuring system. The accordance of the Calibrator with the requirements according to EN 60942: 1998 must be checked once per year. The conformity of the equipment with the requirements according to EN 60651: 1994 must be checked every two years.
3. noise measurements 3.1 on vessels carry out the measurements according to ISO 2923: 2003 sections 5 to 8. However, only the A weighted sound pressure level shall be measured.
3.2 the airborne noise emitted by vessels
The noise emissions by vessels on inland waterways and in ports is covered by measurements according to EN ISO 2922: 2000 sections 7 to 11. During the measurement, the engine room doors and Windows must be closed.
4 the measurements are documentation according to the "log noise measurements" to document (annex).
System to the service instruction No. 5 log noise measurements - for water vehicles according to ISO 2923:2003 - of airborne noise emitted by vessels according to EN ISO 2922:2000(*) A vehicle data 1.
 
Vehicle type and name:...
 
 
Uniform European vessel number:...
2. owner:...
3. main drive 3.1 main engines no. manufacturer type year of construction power (kW) speed (min-1) two-stroke-stroke charge Yes/No 1 2 3 4 3.2 transmission: manufacturer:... Type:... Reduction ratio: 1:...
3.3 propeller number:... Leaf number:... Diameter:... mm nozzle: ja/nein(*) 3.4 rudder type:...
4. ancillary aggregates: No. to the drive manufacturer type year of construction power (kW) speed (min-1) 1 2 3 4 5.
 
Noise protection measures:...
6.
 
Bemerkungen: ………………………………………………………………………...
 
 
………………………………………………………………………………………...
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(*)
                        
Delete where inapplicable.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(B) used instruments 1.
 
Sound level meter manufacturer:... Type:... Final exam:...
2. octave / octave band Analyzer manufacturer:... Type:... Final exam:...
3 calibrator manufacturer:... Type:... Final exam:...
4.
 
Zubehör:
 
 
…………………………………………………………………………….…………
5.
 
Bemerkungen: ……………………………………………………………….………
 
 
……………………………………………………………………………………….
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(C) measuring State - vehicle 1.
 
Formation during the measurement:...
2. load/displacement:... t / m ³ (*) (corresponds to approx.... % of the maximum) 3.
 
Main machine speed:... min-1 (equivalent to approx.... % of the maximum) 4.
 
Revolving units no.:...
5.
 
Bemerkungen: ……………………………………………………………………….
 
 
……………………………………………………………………………………….
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(D) measurement conditions - environment 1.
 
Measuring section... to mountain to Tal(*) 2.
 
Water depth:... m (level m =......) 3.
 
Weather:... Temperature:... ° C wind strength:... BF 4.
 
Extraneous noise: No/Yes (*), which...
5.
 
Bemerkungen: …………………………………………………………………….
 
 
……………………………………………………………………………………….
 
 
……………………………………………………………………………………….
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(E) measuring implementation 1.
 
Measurement by:...
2.
 
am: …………………………………………………………………………………
3. remarks:...
 
 
……………………………………………………………………………………..
4. signature:...
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(*)
                        
Delete where inapplicable.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
F. 1 measurements noise measurement on vessels no. measuring point doors open window measured dB(A) comments closed
open closed
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
F. 2 measurements noise measurement of airborne noise emitted by vessels no. measuring point reading dB (A) comments service instruction No. 6 (without contents) service instruction No. 7 special anchor with reduced Ankermasse (§ 10.01 paragraph 5 of annex II) part I: collected approved special anchors that are approved special anchor with reduced Ankermasse by the competent authorities according to § 10.01 number 5 in the table below.
No. anchor approved reduction of Ankermasse in % competent authority 1 HA you 30% Germany 2 D' special 30% Germany hone 35% Germany 4 (hollow) 3 pool 1 pool 2 (full) 40% Germany 5 de Biesbosch-Danforth 50% Germany of 6 Vicinay Danforth 50% France of 7 Vicinay AC 14 25% France of 8 Vicinay type 1 45% France of 9 Vicinay type 2 45% France of 10 Vicinay type 3 40% France 11 stick 35% France 12 D ' hone-Danforth 50% Germany 13 Schmitt anchor high holding 40% Netherlands part 2 : Testing and approval of special anchors with reduced Ankermasse (reduction of according to § 10.01 points 1 to 4 of annex II identified anchor mass) 1 Chapter 1 - approval 1.1 Special anchor with reduced Ankermasse according to § 10.01 paragraph 5 of annex II to be approved by the competent authority. It sets the approved reduction in the Ankermasse for the special anchor according to the described in the following procedure.
1.2 an admitted to special anchor is only possible if the measured reduction of Ankermasse is equal to or greater than 15%.
Referred to in point 1.1, 1.3 applications for approval as a special anchor are to provide to the competent authority of one of the Rhine River States or Belgium. The application shall be accompanied by the 10-fold copies: a) an overview of dimensions and the dimensions of the special anchor for every available size of anchor the associated principal dimensions and the designation of type of are included, b) a brake diagram for the comparison anchor A referred to in point 2.2, and to allow special anchor B, which is set up and provided with an assessment of this from an institution designated by the competent authority.
1.4 the competent authority shall asked requests to them on reductions of Ankermasse which allow you to try intends having regard to the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine. You then reports the approved special anchor stating the type designation and the approved reduction in the Ankermasse to the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine. You granted the applicant the approval until 3 months after the communication to the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine under the proviso that it raises no objection.
2. Chapter 2 - test procedure 2.1 the braking force diagrams referred to in point 1.3 must be specified in the braking forces of A comparison anchor and to allow special anchor B as a function of the speed on the basis of tests in accordance with points 2.2 to 2.5. Appendix 1 shows a way for brake tests.
2.2 comparison anchor used in the experiments, A must be a conventional clip anchor, which is equivalent to the following sketch and the following information and its Ankermasse is at least 400 kg.
The specified dimensions and the dimensions are valid with a tolerance of ± 5%, however, the area of each flunks must be at least 0.15 m2.
2.3 the ground of B Special anchor used in the experiments must not differ from the mass of the comparison anchor A not more than 10%. The tolerances are larger, the forces must converted proportionally to the mass.
2.4 the braking force diagrams must be linear for the speed range (v) 0 to 5 km/h (above ground). To do this, B must run on a to be determined by the competent authority flow range with coarse gravel and river route with fine sand, alternating three attempts to mount A comparison anchors and the special anchor. On the Rhine, the range at Rhine kilometer 401 / 402 and attempts can serve as reference route for experiments with coarse gravel with fine sand track at Rhine kilometer 480 / 481.
2.5 the anchor to be examined must be towed on each attempt with a steel cable whose length is between the anchor and the Festival do point to the slow vehicle or unit equal to 10 times the fixed-mongering point above the anchor ground height.
2.6. the percentage of the reduction of the mass of the anchor is calculated by the following formula: the percentage of the reduction of the Ankermasse of the special anchor B is based on the comparison of anchor A; r
PA mass of comparison anchor (A);
PB the dimensions of the special anchor (B);
FA the holding force of the comparison anchor (A) v = 0,5 km/h;
FB the holding force of the special anchor B at v = 0,5 km/h;
AA the area on the brake diagram, made from - the parallel to the ordinate axis at v = 0 - the parallel to the ordinate axis at v = 5 km/h - the parallel to the abscissa axis at the holding force F = 0 - the allowable percentage is one of six to number the braking curve for the comparison anchor A. from same definition as for AA, however, using the brake curve for the special anchor B. 2.7 2.6 calculated and averaged values of r. plant to the provisions for the evaluation and approval Special bolts example of an Ankerprüf method with a single lane two Schubvermand service statement No. 8 strength waterproof ship Windows (section 15.02 No. 16 of annex II) 1 General according to article 15.02 paragraph 16 of annex II waterproof window below the diving line must be, if they won't open, possess sufficient strength and number 14 comply with the requirements of article 15.06.
2. construction of watertight ship window that point 16 of annex II are requirements according to article 15.02 regarded as fulfilled, when the construction of watertight ship window complies with the following provisions.
Only toughened glass must be used according to ISO 614, Edition 2.1 04/94.
2.2 round ship Windows need the ISO 1751, Edition 04/94 series B: medium window type: open / fixed Windows correspond to.
2.3 square ship window must the ISO 3903, Edition 04/94 series E: heavy window type: not to open / fixed Windows correspond to.
2.4 instead of Windows of the ISO type window can be used, executing is equivalent to at least the requirements of paragraphs 2.1 to 2.3.
Service instruction No. 9 automatic pressure water spray systems appropriate requirements for automatic pressure water spray systems (§ 10.03a point 1 of the annex II) within the meaning of § 10.03a number 1 must satisfy the following conditions: 1 the automatic pressure water spray system must ready be persons on board. No additional action by the crew shall be necessary to trigger the system.
2. the plant must be under the required pressure constant. Pipes must always be filled with water up to the spray nozzles. The plant must have a continuous water supply. No betriebsstörenden impurities in the system can get. To attach the appropriate gauges and test equipment are for the monitoring and inspection of the system (E.g. pressure gauges, water gauge for pressure tanks, test cable for the pump).
3. the pump for the water supply of the spray nozzles must start automatically at a pressure drop in the system. The pump must be so powerful that she can provide these necessary spray nozzles at a concurrent actuation of all for the spraying of the area of the greatest space to be protected constantly in sufficient quantities and with the required pressure with water. The pump may provide just the automatic pressure water spray system. At failure of the pump the spray nozzles on other pump existing on board can be supplied with sufficient water.
4. the spray system must be divided into sections, and each section may include no more than 50 spray nozzles.
5. number and arrangement of the nozzles need to ensure an effective distribution of water in the spaces to be protected.
6 spray nozzles must address at a temperature of 68 ° C to 79 ° C.
7. the arrangement of the parts of the automatic pressure water spray system in the spaces to be protected shall be limited to the minimum necessary. No such equipment may be installed in the main engine room.
8. on one or more appropriate bodies, of which at least one always must be occupied by staff, optical and acoustic detectors must exist, which show the triggering of the automatic pressure water spray system for each section.
9. for the power supply of the entire automatic pressure water spray system two independent energy sources must exist, which may not be placed in the same room. Each energy source must be able to operate the plant alone.
10. an installation plan of the automatic pressure water spraying system must be submitted prior to their installation of the investigation Commission for testing. The types and performance data of used machines and apparatuses must emerge from this plan. A certified by a recognized classification society and approved system, which fulfils at least the above requirements may be approved without further examination.
11. the presence of an automatic pressure water spray system must be entered in the ship's certificate under number 43.
Service instruction No. 10 specimen of certificate for liquid gas systems in Kanalpenichen (section 19.02 point 7 of annex II) certificate for liquefied natural gas facilities 1 name of the vehicle 2. uniform European vessel number 3 place and number of registration 4. name and address of the owner the existing on the vehicle liquid gas systems in ist/sind(*) of the Sachverständigen(*)... has been tested and entspricht/entsprechen(*) after his acceptance report of the... (*) the prescribed conditions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Die Anlage(n) umfaßt/umfassen(*) die folgenden Verbrauchsgeräte:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Anlage
Lfd. Nr.
Art
Marke
Typ
Standort
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Diese Bescheinigung gilt bis zum ...........................................................................................................................
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
..............................................................................., den .......................................
 
 
(Place)
 
(Datum)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
.........................................................................................
 
 
 
Commission of inquiry...
 
 
 
 
 
 
Sachverständiger(*)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Siegel
.......................................................................................
 
 
 
 
(Signature)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(*)
                        
Delete where inapplicable.
 
 
Extension of the certificate for liquefied gas installations the validity of the certificate for liquefied natural gas facilities of the... valid up to the... will - as a result of the review by the expert... - According to the inspection report... of the... extended up to the.........
 
 
(Place)
(Datum)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            ................................................................................................
 
 
Siegel
 
             Untersuchungskommission
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            ..................................................................................................
 
 
 
 
                   (Signature)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Extension of the certificate for liquefied gas installations the validity of the certificate for liquefied natural gas facilities of the... valid up to the... will - as a result of the review by the expert... - According to the inspection report... of the... extended up to the.........
 
 
(Place)
(Datum)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            ................................................................................................
 
 
Siegel
 
             Untersuchungskommission
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            ..................................................................................................
 
 
 
 
                   (Signature)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Extension of the certificate for liquefied gas installations the validity of the certificate for liquefied natural gas facilities of the... valid up to the... will - as a result of the review by the expert... - According to the inspection report... of the... extended up to the.........
 
 
(Place)
(Datum)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            ................................................................................................
 
 
Siegel
 
             Untersuchungskommission
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            ..................................................................................................
 
 
 
 
                   (Signature)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Service instruction No. 11 exhibition of ship certificate 1 General information 1.1 forms of exhibition of the ship's certificate may only be used in the forms approved by the competent authority. The forms are filled out only on one side.
All pages 1 to 13 in new issuance of a ship's certificate must be issued even if no entries are made on individual leaves.
1.2 font is typewriter or printer navigability to fill. Entries by hand print should be made only on an individual basis. The font must be authentic document. As font color for all entries is only black or blue allowed. Abrogation of the inserted information must in red take place.
2. registrations 2.1 deletions of the given alternatives by the with *) marked information are not applicable to to delete.
Unspecified is 2.2 numbers without entries to one of the numbers 1 to 48 possible or necessary, to fill line running the field with one over the entire length of the field.
2.3 termination of the last page of the ship's certificate as long as no page 13 inserts are necessary (see 3.2.3), the set is on page 13 below "(Fortsetzung auf Seite *) ' deleted.
First change by hand on one side of a page can be changed only once 2.4 changes 2.4.1, but several changes are possible simultaneously. A specification that needs to be changed is to paint red. An alternative that was previously deleted (see 2.1), or a number that previously had no entry (see 2.3), is to underline with a red line. The new entry is not in the modified field, but on the same side as 'changes...", the line"This page has been replaced"shall be deleted.
2.4.2 the page is changed more changes by hand on a page for more changes and the necessary changes, as well as previous changes are immediately entered in numbers. In the field of "Changes", the line "Change number" shall be deleted.
The old page is at the investigation Commission, which has issued the certificate.
2.4.3 will replace the page changes computer changes by computer and the necessary changes, as well as previous changes are immediately entered in numbers. In the field of "Changes", the line "Change number" shall be deleted.
The old page is at the investigation Commission, which has issued the certificate.
2.5 Überklebungen Überklebungen entries or Einklebungen (E.g. with other data to a number) are not allowed.
3. sharing and adding pages 3.1 Exchange of the first page of the ship's certificate not replaced. In addition the procedure applies to the exchange of pages after 2.4.2 or 2.4.3. 3.2 supplement if the space on the pages 10, 12, or 13 of the ship's certificate for more entries no longer sufficient, by adding additional pages complemented it.
Extension/confirmation of the validity if a further extension is needed after the sixth extension on page 10, the notice "Continued on page 10a" written below on page 10 3.2.1, a form page 10 is marked as "Page 10a" and inserted after page 10. In paragraph 49 above, the corresponding entry is made on page 10a. The page 10a is marked below with the notice "Continued on page 11".
3.2.2 it is procedure analog extension of the certificate for liquefied natural gas facilities 3.2.1, page 12a is inserted behind the page 12.
3.2.3 Annex to the certificate on page 13 is below the phrase "End of the ship's certificate" in red, the Middle sentence deleted, "(Fortsetzung auf Seite *)" red underline, and behind it the number "13a" written. This change is sealed, a form page 13 is marked as "Page 13a" and inserted after the page 13. The provisions apply mutatis mutandis to this page 13a in 2.2 and 2.3.
Other attachments (page 13, 13 c, etc.) are appropriately handled.
4. explanation of the numbers in the single numbers, requiring no further explanation, are not mentioned below.
2. if applicable, are to use the terms laid down in article 1.01. Other ship types must be entered with their usual trade designation.
15. This number is only complete for ships, where one or more of the aptitudes of 1.1 or 1.2 or 3 in number 14 is not deleted, otherwise the table as a whole is to delete.
15.1 in the table is / are to enter the number (s) of the listed bands in the column "Formation sketch", free lines to delete.
Other formations can be drawn under "More information" and obtained the designation 18, 19, 20, etc.
If it is not apparent from the suitability to the slide in the previous certificate which formations are allowed, the note from the previous certificate number 52 can be transferred. In the 1st line of "Legal information" must be entered: "See point 52".
Here is entered only the coupling between the propelling vehicle and the deferred part of the Association 15.2 couplings.
17-20 according to calibration certificate, for 17-19 to two decimal places, for 20 without decimal point. Length overall and the largest dimensions of the vehicle including all fixed upstream and protruding parts specify width about everything; Specify the largest size of the hull length L and width B (see also § 1.01 - definitions).
21 capacity at carriers in t according to calibration certificate for the largest approved draft referred to under 19 displacement for other vehicles in m3. If there is no calibration certificate, the displacement from the product of the Völligkeitsgrades of the displacement with the length of optical fiber is to identify business and the average depth at maximum immersion level width.
23 number of existing sleeping places in the passenger beds (including folding beds and the like).
24. only the watertight transverse bulkheads, going from side wall to side wall, are taken into account.
26 if applicable, are the following terms to use:-hand-operated hatch covers;
-hand-operated roll hatches;
-hand-operated hatch cars;
-mechanically operated hatch cars;
-mechanically operated hatches.
Other types of Luke roofs must be entered with their usual trade designation.
Not all spaces have a roof hatch, these rooms are possible in number to specify, 52. 28 value without a decimal place.
30, 31 and 33 as winds counts each winch housing, regardless of the number of anchor operated within the same enclosure or tow wire.
34. under "Other investments" to enter, that are using no rudders (E.g. Zykloidalpropeller -, rudder propellers, thrusters).
The hand drive also electrical auxiliary drives are entered here.
When the debug control system only a remote control refers to "remote-controlled" from the steering station from the wheelhouse.
35. only the nominal values are numbers 2 and 3, paragraph 15.01 after section 8.08 number 1 (c) and section Aug 15 number 5 to enter, and only on vehicles with keel was laid down after the 1.4.1976. 36.
To clarify, a sketch may be necessary.
37. There are numbers 1 to 4 without reduction only the Sollmassen according to § 10.01.
38. it only the minimum lengths are number 10, and the minimum breaking strength according to § 10.01 according to § 10.01 number 11.
The chains have different breaking forces, to specify both values are "Breaking load per chain".
39., 40 there are only the minimum lengths and breaking strength for the new calculation in accordance with section 10.02 number 2.
42. the Commission of inquiry can add to the list of required equipment; It must be however objects, which are indispensable for the appropriate type of vehicle or its field of application to maritime safety; the addition takes place in point 52. left column, line 3 and line 4: for passenger ships is the first listed equipment subject to rule out, and for the second, the length of the land bridge, as determined by the Commission of inquiry must be given. For all other vehicles, the second listed equipment is completely to delete; has Commission approved the investigation but a shorter Jetty of land as in section 10.02 paragraph 2 letter d is intended to delete only the first half and to specify the length of the land bridge.
Left column, line 6: here the number is number 2 in accordance with section 10.02 letter f and § 15.08 to specify number 9 prescribed first aid kits.
Left column, line 10: here the number is the number in accordance with section 10.02 to indicate 1 letter d to f prescribed fire-resistant container.
43. fire extinguishers that are required under the provisions of other safety regulations, E.g. ADNR, are not covered here.
44. line 3: the addition is in Community certificates which are to extend from January 1, 2010, "according to EN 395: 1998 or 396: 1998" to rule out, if there are no corresponding to these standards lifejackets on board.
Row 4: Community certificates be lengthened after the 1.1.2015 or assumes a new tender on board the addition "with 1 set of rudder strap, 1 fixed mooring line, 1 baler" is to rule out. The addition "in accordance with EN 1914: 1997" is to rule out, if there is no corresponding to this standard dinghy on board.
46. typically a 24-h cannot be entered operation, when beds are missing or the noise level is too high.
50 expert sign only if he has filled out the page 11.
52. here entered additional conditions, facilitation, understanding entries in individual numbers, or similar.
5. transitional arrangements for vehicles with a Community certificate 5.1 existing Community certificates in the existing Community certificates are no longer registered apart from the exemption under section 2.09 number 2 extensions.
5.2 interchange on a follow-up
At a follow-up examination of a vehicle, which is still not a Community certificate according to the model of annex V part 1, one is to be issued. This section 2.09 are number 4 and § 2.17. Service statement No. 12 of fuel tanks on floating devices (§§ 8.05 number 1 and 17.02 number 1 letter d of annex II) to section 8.05 number 1 the fuel tanks must to the body of the ship include or be permanently installed in the ship.
On floating devices need to be fabricated or installed permanently in the ship the tanks for the fuel supply of the machinery as part of the hull, but can be run as portable tanks, if the following conditions are met: 1 the capacity of these containers 1 000 litres must not exceed.
2. the container must be adequately fastened and grounded.
3. the container must be made of steel of sufficient thickness and a leak tub to be installed. It must be running so that leaking fuel in the waterway can be reached. The leak tub can be omitted in double-walled vessels with leak protection or leak warning and if a filling is ensured only through automatic nozzle. When you use a container approved under the provisions of a Rhine River State or Belgium and approved, the conditions this number 3 as a met.
A corresponding notice is to be entered in the certificate.
Service instruction No. 13 minimum thickness of the outer skin of barges (§ 3.02 point 1 of annex II) follow-up according to section 2.09 of barges, which will be towed only, can the Commission of inquiry minor deviations of section 3.02 number allow 1(b) on the minimum thickness of the shell plating. The deviation must be not more than 10% and the minimum thickness of the shell shall not be less than 3 mm.
The deviations must be entered in the ship's certificate under number 52.
Only the suitability of number may apply to under point 14 of the vessel certificate 6.2 "will be towed vehicle without engine drive".
The aptitudes are number 1 to 5.3 and 6.1 to delete.
Service instruction No. 14 (without content) service instruction No. 15 transportation from your own force (sections 10.03 b number 2 2(a), 15.07 points 1 and 22 a 05 1(a) of annex II) 1 minimum movement movement from its own force within the meaning of §§ 10.03 b paragraph 2 letter a, 15.07 points 1 and 22a 05 1(a) applies as sufficiently if the bow rudder drive the ship or the compilation of moving away from the ship a 6.5 km/h to water achieved a speed of 20 ° / min can be initiated and supported at a speed over water 6.5 km/h.
2. trials review of minimum requirements must be kept the sections 5.03 and 5.04.
Service instruction No. 16 emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants - test procedures (chapter 8a of annex II) table of contents Part I definitions, symbols and abbreviations 1 definitions, symbols and abbreviations 2 symbols and abbreviations 2.1 symbols for the Prüfkennwerte 2.2 symbols for the chemical components 2.3 abbreviations part II testing 1 Introduction 2 test conditions 2.1 General conditions 2.2 conditions for the test of engine 2.3 2.4 engine intake system engine exhaust system 2.5 cooling system 2.6 oil 2.7 2.8 Test fuel determination of dynamometer settings
3 verification 3.1 preparation Probenahmefilter 3.2 mounting of the measuring 3.3 starting the dilution system and the engine 3.4 adjustment of the dilution ratio of 3.5 checking the analysers 3.6 test cycles and weighting factors 3.7 reconsideration of the analysis equipment plant 1 measurement and sampling procedures 1 dynamometer 2 exhaust flow 3 measurement accuracy 4 determination of the gaseous components of 5 particle analysis Appendix 2 1 calibration of analytical equipment 1.1 Introduction 1.2 calibration gases 1.3 application of the analytical and sampling 1.4 leak test 1.5 calibration procedures 1.6 checking calibration 1.7 test the efficiency of the NOx Converter 1.8 setting the FID 1.9 interference effects with NDIR and CLD analysers 1.10. calibration intervals 2 calibration of the particulate measuring system 2.1 Introduction 2.2 measurement of the flow rate of 2.3 checking the dilution ratio 2.4 checking the partial flow conditions 2.5 calibration intervals Appendix 3 evaluation of measurements and calculations 1 evaluation of measured values for gaseous emissions 2 particulate emissions 3 calculation of the gaseous emissions of 4 calculation of the particulate emission part III technical data of the reference fuel for the tests for type-approval and verification of conformity of reference fuel for inland waterway vessels
Part IV analysis and sampling system 1 determination of the gaseous emissions of 2 determination of the particulates 2.1 dilution system 2.2 particle sampling system part I definitions, symbols and abbreviations 1 definitions for the purposes of this directive the 1.1 "gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (expressed as C1: H1, 85), and oxides of nitrogen, the latter expressed as Stickstoffdioxid-(NO2)Äquivalent;
1.2 "particulate" substances which are separated at a temperature of no greater than 325 K (52 ° C) after dilution of the exhaust gases of the diesel engine with filtered pure air on a specified filter medium
1.3 "Power" the power in kilowatts (kW) according to ISO 3046, taken on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft or equivalent component and determined in accordance with the procedures according to ISO 3046 for measuring the performance of internal combustion engines for motor vehicles in accordance with Directive 80/1269/EWG(1), where however the motor cooling fan excluded wird(2) and the test conditions and reference fuel of this Directive correspond;
1.4 "rated speed" limited maximum speed at full load of the controller according to the instructions of the manufacturer;
1.5 "part load ratio" certain the percentage of the highest available torque at an engine speed;
1.6 "maximum torque speed" which, the highest torque available is engine speed according to the manufacturer's instructions;
1.7 "intermediate speed" engine speed in accordance with part II, section 3.6.5 (test cycle C1) this directive, one of the following conditions fulfilled: a) for engines which are designed to operate in a specific speed range on a full load torque curve, the intermediate speed is the specified maximum torque speed if it is within a range of 60 to 75% of the nominal speed.
(b) the specified maximum torque speed is less than 60% of rated speed, the intermediate speed corresponds to 60% of the nominal speed.
(c) the specified maximum torque speed is more than 75% of rated speed, the intermediate speed corresponds to 75% of the nominal speed.
(d) for engines that are not designed to operate over a speed range under steady state conditions on the full load torque curve, the intermediate speed is usually between 60% and 70% of the largest nominal speed.
2 symbols and abbreviations 2.1 symbols for the Prüfkennwerte symbol unit term AP m2 cross sectional area of the Isokinetic sampling probe AT m2 cross-sectional area of the exhaust pipe aver Weighted average values m3/h for: flow rate;
 
kg/h mass flow rate C1 - C1 equivalent Kohlenwaserstoff conc ppm concentration (with trailing part designation) Vol.-% ppm concc background corrected concentration Vol.-% concd ppm concentration of the dilution air Vol.-% DF - dilution factor fa - atmospheric factor in the laboratory FFH - fuel specific factor for the calculation of the wet concentrations based on the hydrogen-carbon ratio of dry levels GAIRW kg / h mass flow rate of the intake air, moist GAIRD kg / h mass flow of intake air, dry GDILW kg / h mass flow of the dilution air , moist GEDFW kg / h equivalent diluted mass flow, damp GEXHW kg / h mass flow rate of the exhaust gas, wet GFUEL kg / h fuel mass throughput GTOTW kg / h mass flow rate of the diluted exhaust gas, wet HREF g/kg reference value of absolute humidity i - lower index for a single checkpoints of KH - humidity correction factor for NOx credits - humidity correction factor for particulates KW 10.71 g / kg for calculation of humidity correction factor for NOx and particulate HA g/kg absolute humidity of the intake air HD g/kg absolute humidity of the dilution air , a correction factor for conversion from the dry to the wet basis of the intake air KW, d – correction factor for conversion from the dry to the wet basis of the dilution air KW, e - correction factor for conversion from the dry to the wet correction of the diluted exhaust gas KW, r - correction factor for conversion from the dry to the wet correction of the raw exhaust gas L % percentile torque related to the maximum torque at test speed lower index for the pollutant mass throughput MDIL kg mass mass of the dilution air sample through the sampling filters particle MSAM g/h
kg mass of through the sampling filters particle gleiteten sample diluted MD mg secluded particle Probenahmemasse of the dilution air MF mg secluded particle Probenahmemasse pa kPa saturation vapour pressure of the engine intake air (ISO 3046: psy = PSY ambient pressure during the test) kPa pB barometric pressure (ISO 3046: PX = PX ambient air pressure at the site;)
Py = PY ambient air pressure at the test) pd kPa saturation vapour pressure of the dilution air of ps kPa dry atmospheric pressure P kW uncorrected power PAE specified kW total power used by auxiliaries which were attached and after part I section 1.3 of this directive are not necessary PM for inspecting kW measured maximum power at test speed under the test conditions (see Appendix 1 of the type-approval certificate) PM kW at the various test levels measured power q - dilution ratio r - ratio of the cross sectional areas of the isokinetic probe and the exhaust pipe RA % relative humidity of the Intake air Rd % relative humidity of the dilution air RF - FID response factor S kW setting of the dynamometer Ta K absolute temperature of the intake air TD K absolute dewpoint temperature Tref K reference temperature (combustion air: 298 K) TSC K air temperature after charge air cooler TSCref K temperature of air temperature after charge air cooler VAIRD m3/h volume flow rate of the intake air, dry VAIRW m3/h volume flow rate of the intake air, moist VDIL m3 volume of VDILW m3/h volume flow rate of dilution air dilution air through the particulate sampling filters , moist VEDFW m3/h equivalent volume of the diluted exhaust gas flow, damp VEXHD m3/h volume flow rate of the exhaust gas, dry VEXHW m3/h volume flow rate of the exhaust gas, damp VSAM m3 volume of sample through particulate sampling filters VTOTW m3/h volume flow rate of the diluted exhaust gas, wet WF - weighting factor WFE - effective weighting factor 2.2 symbols for the chemical CO of components of carbon monoxide CO2 carbon dioxide HC hydrocarbons NOx nitrogen oxides No. nitrogen monoxide NO2 nitrogen dioxide O2 oxygen C2H6 ethane PT particles DOP Dioctylphthalate CH4 methane C3H8 propane H2O water PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene 2.3 FID
Flame ionisation detector HFID heated flame ionisation detector NDIR dispersive infra-red absorption analyser CLD Chemilumineszenz detector HCLD heated chemiluminescent detector PDP Verdränger pump CFV critical flow venturi tube (1) OJ P. 46. directive of l375 of 31.12.1980, as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (OJ L238 of the 15.8.1989, p. 43).
(2) this means contrary to the requirements of annex I section 5.1.1.1 of Directive 80/1269/EEC, the engine cooling fan may be not installed during the test for the determination of the nominal power of the motor. The manufacturer performs the check but with integral motor cooling fan, the power absorbed by the fan to the performance obtained in this way must be added.
Part II testing 1 Introduction 1.1 this directive describes the procedure for the measurement of gaseous pollutants and particulate pollutants from the engines to be tested.
1.2 for the type test, the engine on a dynamometer is to rebuild and to connect to a service brake.
1.3 the measurement of gaseous pollutants and particulate pollutants from the engines to be tested is necessary, within the framework of an installation or a midterm are the following provisions apply accordingly.
1.4 arising are doubts with regard to the requirements of this directive, the requirements of standards DIN EN ISO 8178 to note.
2 test conditions 2.1 General conditions the volume and the volume flow rate are always related to 273 K (0 ° C) and 101.3 kPa to specify.
2.2 conditions for the test of engine 2.2.1 of atmospheric are to measure factor the absolute temperature Ta (Kelvin) the combustion air at the inlet of the engine, and the dry atmospheric pressure ps (in kPa), and the fa is to calculate the following formula: Naturally aspirated and mechanically supercharged engines: turbocharged engines with or without charge air cooling: 2.2.2 validity test is a test to be considered valid at fa : 0,98 ≤ fa ≤ 1.02 if it for compelling technical reasons is not possible, to comply with these limits, must be fazwischen 0.93 and 1.07. In this case, the emission of particles must be corrected according to EN ISO 8178-1. Correction is not necessary for the gaseous emissions.
2.2.3 engines with charge air cooling 2.2.3.1 the temperature of the coolant and the charge air temperature shall be recorded. The cooling system must be set at a speed and the load of the motors, which are intended for the test cycles. The air temperature and the pressure drop in the cooler may vary ± 4 K and ± 2 kPa by the motor manufacturer.
The test engine must 2.2.3.2 with the provided equipment, with a raw water temperature of 25 ° C within the permissible emission limits can be used for the purpose. A further increase of the temperature of the water through the heat exchanger installed on board, such as for the cooling water system, must also be considered.
2.2.4 deviations which competent authorities may allow deviations from the above conditions for the test of engine.
The test engine must be provided 2.3 engine intake system with a suction system, whose intake depression specified upper limit for a clean air filter is located within the of the manufacturer at the engine operating conditions, which according to the manufacturer of the greatest air throughput resulting. A test shop system may be used if it reflects the actual engine operating conditions.
2.4 engine exhaust the engine to be tested must be provided with an exhaust system, whose exhaust backpressure specified upper limit of the engine operating conditions corresponding to the manufacturer, which result in the declared maximum power.
2.5. cooling system of the engine to be tested must be equipped with a motor cooling system, which allows to maintain the normal operating temperatures prescribed by the manufacturer of the engine.
2.6 lubricating oil are the characteristics of the oil used for the test record and submit together with the test results.
2.7. Test fuel 2.7.1 it is to use the reference fuel as described in part III of this directive.
2.7.2 can allow the use of a commercially available fuel authority by way of derogation from 2.7.1. The fuel must comply with the requirements of standards DIN EN 590. Compliance with these requirements shall be demonstrated.
2.7.3 the cetane number and the sulphur content of the reference fuel used for the test shall be recorded. The records shall be attached to the information folder.
2.7.4 the fuel temperature at the injection pump inlet must comply with the specifications of the manufacturer and must be indicated in the information folder.
2.8 determination of dynamometer intake depression and the exhaust back pressure settings are to adjust the sections 2.3 and 2.4 on the upper limits specified by the manufacturer.
The maximum torque values must be determined to calculate the torque values for the specified test levels by measuring when the specified test speeds. For engines which are not designed to operate over a speed range on the full load torque curve, the maximum torque at the respective test speeds by the manufacturer shall be indicated.
The engine setting for each test level shall be calculated using the following formula: with a ratio of can the value be verified by PAE by the competent authority, which granted the type-approval.
3 verification 3.1 preparation of the sampling filters is at least an hour before the exam to bring every single filter in a closed, but unsealed Petri dish to the stabilization in a weighing chamber. After the stabilization phase is to consider each filter and record the tare weight. Then, the filter in a closed Petri dish or a sealed filter holder is to be kept until use. Uses the filter within eight hours after its removal from the weighing chamber, so it needs to be balanced again prior to its use. The storage time to the use of the filter can be extended according to the requirements of annex 3, section 2.
3.2 mounting of the measuring devices are as prescribed in part IV to install the devices and probes. A full flow dilution system is used for the dilution of exhaust gases, is the exhaust pipe on the system to connect.
3.3 starting the dilution system and the engine is the dilution system to start and the engine to start until all temperatures and pressures at full load and rated speed (section 3.6.7) are stable.
3.4. adjustment of the dilution ratio of the particle sampling system is to start and operate (for the multiple filter method optional) applying the single filter method to bypass. The particulate background of the dilution air may be determined by dilution air is passed through the particulate filters. When using filtered dilution air, a measurement at any one time can be before, during or after the test. Is the dilution air is not filtered, measurements at least three times are (after the start, before stopping, and near the middle of the cycle) to make and determine the average values.
The dilution air is to adjust so that the maximum filter surface temperature for each measuring point is 325 K (52 ° C) or less. The total dilution ratio shall be not less than four.
The sample mass flow rate through the filter at all test levels at a constant ratio to the mass flow of the diluted exhaust gas must be for the single filter method in full flow systems. This mass ratio is maintained 5% - with the exception of the first 10 seconds of each inspection stage for systems without bypass option - with a tolerance of ±. For partial flow dilution systems with single filter method of mass flow rate must be kept constant 5% through the filter - with the exception of the first 10 seconds of each inspection stage for systems without bypass option - at each stage of the test with a tolerance of ±.
With CO2 or NOx concentration controlled systems, the CO2 or NOx content of the dilution air at the beginning and end of each test to measure is. Must be CO2 or NOx background concentration of the dilution air before the test concentrations measured after the test within 100 ppm or 5 ppm differ.
When using an analysis system working with diluted exhaust gas are the respective background concentrations to determine by dilution air samples be redirected into a sampling bag over the entire test sequence across.
The ongoing background concentration (without bag) on at least three points (at the beginning, at the end, and near the middle of the cycle) can be determined and the values averaged. Background measurements can be omitted at the request of the manufacturer.
Other methods for setting and checking the dilution ratio, which correspond to the State of the art, can be applied also after consultation with the competent authority.
3.5 review of the analysis of the devices for emission analysis are to adjust to zero and the measuring range.
One is 3.6 test cycles and weighting factors 3.6.1 for each motor type and for every parent engine of an engine family or engine group in section 3.6.2 to 3.6.5 to apply specified test cycles to determine compliance with the emission limit values.
3.6.2 marine engines with constant speed, that are used for the main propulsion, including diesel-electric drive, as well as for systems with constant speed propeller is to apply test cycle E2 in accordance with table 1.
Table 1 test cycle for "Ship main drive with constant speed" (including units with diesel-electric propulsion and constant speed propeller) test cycle E2 speed 100% 100% 100% 100% torque 100% 75% 50% 25% weighting factor 0.2 0.5 0.15 0.15 3.6.3 for ship propulsion and ship auxiliary drives, which are operated under the propellers Act is to apply test cycle E3 according to table 2.
Table 2 of test cycle for "Ship propulsion propeller characteristics and ship auxiliary drives with propeller characteristic" test cycle E3 speed 100% 91% 80% 63% performance 100% 75% 50% 25% weighting factor 0.2 0.5 0.15 0.15 3.6.4 for auxiliary engines with constant speed is to apply test cycle D2 according to table 3.
Table 3 of test cycle for "Auxiliary engines with constant speed" test cycle D2 speed 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% torque 100% 75% 50% 25% 10% weighting factor 0.05 0.25 0.3 0.3 0.1 3.6.5 for auxiliary engines with variable speed and variable load, covered not in above categories Macquarie, is to apply test cycle C1 according to table 4.
Table 4 of test cycle for "Auxiliary engines with variable speed and variable load" test cycle C1 speed nominal speed intermediate speed idle torque 100% 75% 50% 10% 100% 75% 50% 0% weighting factor of 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.15 3.6.5.1 the C1 test cycle torque values are percentage values that specify the ratio of torque to driving to the maximum torque for the corresponding load point for the specified speed.
3.6.5.2 who is intermediate speed for test cycle C1 to specify section 1.7 of these service instructions of the manufacturer in accordance with part I.
3.6.6 If a manufacturer applies for a new test cycle application for a motor for already due to another in section 3.6.2 of test cycle set to 3.6.5, a type-approval has been granted, can refrain from the competent authority, making the entire certification process for the new application. In this case, the manufacturer can demonstrate compliance through a recalculation, the measurement results of the inspection stages of the first type-approval with the weighting factors of the new test cycle can be used to calculate the weighted total emissions of the new test cycle application.
3.6.7 conditioning of the engine are the engine and the system to continue to stabilise the engine parameters according to the recommendations of the manufacturer warm at nominal speed and torque.
Note: Through the conditioning period, the impact can be prevented by deposits in the exhaust system, which from a previous test. In addition, is required between the inspection stages a stabilization period, which serves the widest possible elimination of a mutual influence on each test level.
3.6.8 test sequence is the test carried out according to the order of the inspection stages of test cycles specified in the tables 1-4.
After the initial transition period, the prescribed speed within the higher value must be at each stage of the test cycle by either ± 1% of rated speed or ± 3 min-1 be kept; This does not apply to the lower idling speed, where the tolerances specified by the manufacturer must be observed. The specified torque is to hold that the average for the period of measurements with a tolerance of ± 2% corresponds to the maximum torque at the test speed.
A minimum time is required for each measurement point of ten minutes. Longer Probenahmezeiten are required when assessing an engine so accumulates a sufficient particulate mass on the measuring filter, can be extended as needed during the testing stage.
The duration of the inspection stages is to record and to play.
The concentrations of the gaseous emissions are to be measured during the last three minutes of each inspection stage and record.
The particulate sampling and measuring of gaseous emissions should not be made before engine stabilization in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and must be terminated at the same time.
The fuel temperature must be measured at the inlet of the fuel injection pump or according to the instructions of the manufacturer. The point of measurement shall be recorded.
3.6.9 of analyzers output is the output of the analysers on a line recorder or with an equivalent data acquisition system to record, with the exhaust gas flowing at least during the last three minutes of each inspection stage through the analysers. A sampling bag used for the diluted CO and CO2 measurement (see Appendix 1 section 4.4), the sample should be during the last three minutes of each inspection stage the bag Guide. The bag test is to analyze and record the result.
3.6.10 the single filter method or the multiple filter method be particulate sampling can particulate sampling (Appendix 1, section 5). Since the results of these methods may exhibit slight variations, also the method used must be specified together with the results.
The respective test level of the test cycle of associated weighting factors during the sampling must be considered in applying the single filter method, the throughput or the sampling time be adjusted accordingly by placing / is.
The sampling must be done as late as possible at each stage of the test. The swab each inspection stage should be at least 20 seconds for the single filter method and for the multiple filter method is at least 60 seconds. For systems without bypass option, sampling each inspection stage must last at least 60 seconds at single and multiple filter methods.
3.6.11 engine conditions engine speed and load, intake air temperature, fuel flow and air or exhaust gas flow shall be measured for stabilization of the motor at each stage of the test.
The measurement of the exhaust flow or the measurement of the combustion air and fuel consumption is not possible, so a calculation can be made according to the carbon and oxygen balance method (see EN ISO 8178-1 Annex 1).
All data required for calculation shall be recorded (see Appendix 3, sections 1 and 2).
3.7 review of analysis devices after the emission test be a zero gas and the same span gas are used for review. The test is considered valid, if the difference between the two measuring results is less than 2% of the concentration of the test gas.
Appendix 1 to the service instruction No. 16 the gaseous and particle-like components of emissions of the motor for testing shall are part II measuring and sampling procedures to measure with the methods described in part IV. The description of these methods includes a representation of the recommended analytical systems for the gaseous emissions (part IV, section 1) and the recommended respective sampling systems (part IV, section 2).
1 dynamometer is to use an engine dynamometer, which with adequate characteristics to perform the test cycles described in part II section 3.6. The instrumentation for torque and speed must enable the measurement of net power within the prescribed limits. Additional calculations may be necessary.
The measuring instruments must exhibit a such accuracy that the maximum tolerances of the values specified in section 3 are not exceeded.
2 exhaust flow
The exhaust flow is the one in the sections 2.1 to 2.4 above methods to determine.
2.1 direct measurement of direct measurement of the exhaust flow by a flow nozzle or equivalent measurement system (details see ISO 5167).
Note: The direct measurement of the gas flow rate is a complicated procedure. It must arrangements to avoid measurement errors, which affect the emission value errors.
2.2 air and fuel measurement measurement of the air flow and the fuel flow.
The devices used for the measurement of air and fuel flow must have the accuracy specified in section 3.
The calculation of the exhaust flow is carried out as follows: GAIRW + GFUEL = GEXHW (for Abgasmaße moist) or VEXHD = VAIRD - 0,766 × GFUEL (for dry exhaust volume) or VEXHW = VAIRW + 0.746 × GFUEL (for wet exhaust volume) 2.3 carbon balance method calculation of the Abgasmasse on the basis of fuel consumption and the off-gas concentrations of the carbon balance method (see part II, Appendix 3).
2.4 total flow rate of the diluted exhaust using a full flow dilution system must the total flow of the dilute exhaust (GTOTW, VTOTW) with a PDP or a CFV measured to be (part IV section 2.1.2). The measuring accuracy must comply with the provisions of part II annex 2 section 2.2.
3 accuracy the calibration of all measuring instruments must be verifiably attributed to national or international standards and comply with the following requirements: item No. number allowable deviation value (± values based on values of the motor) permissible deviation (± values according to ISO 3046) calibration intervals (months) 1 motor speed 2% 2% 3 2 torque 2% 2% 3 3 performance 2 %(1) eliminates 3% 4 fuel consumption 2 %(1) 3% 6 5 specific Krafstoffverbrauch is 3% not applicable 6 airflow 2 %(1) 5% 6 7 exhaust flow 4 %(1) eliminates 6 8 coolant temperature
2 K 2 K 3 9 lubricant temperature 2 K 2 K 3 10 exhaust backpressure 5% of the maximum 5% 3 11 vacuum in the intake manifold 5% of the maximum 5% 3 12 exhaust gas temperature 15 K 15 K 3 13 air inlet temperature (combustion air) 2 K 2 K 3 14 atmospheric pressure 0.5% of the read value 0.5% 3 15 humidity of the intake air is (relatively) 3% 1 16 Krafstofftemperatur 2 K 5 K 3 17 dilution tunnel temperatures 1.5 K eliminates 3 18 dilution air humidity 3% is 1 19
Flow rate of the diluted exhaust accounts for 2% of the reading value 24 (partial flow) (Vollstrom)(2) (1) which are based calculation of gaseous emissions under this directive partly on different measurement and/or calculation methods. Due to the total tolerances for the calculation of the exhaust gas emission, the permissible values for some parameters for application in the corresponding equations must be less than the allowable tolerances specified in ISO 3046-3.
(2) full power systems - the CVS positive displacement pump or critical flow venturi pipe are to calibrate after installing, essential maintenance work or finding a corresponding need for which in part IV described examination of the CVS system.
4. determination of the gaseous components 4.1 General requirements for analysis devices that need analysis equipment a range who complies with the requirements of the accuracy in the measurement of the concentrations of the exhaust gas components (section 4.1.1). It is recommended to use, that the measured concentration falls between 15% and 100% of full scale the analysis equipment.
The full scale end value is 155 ppm (or ppm C) or less or be used as reading systems (computers, data processors) below have a sufficient accuracy and resolution of 15% of full scale, and concentrations below 15% of full scale are allowed. In this case, additional calibrations must be made to ensure the accuracy of the calibration curves (Appendix 2, section 1.5.5.2).
The electromagnetic compatibility of equipment must be at a level that prevents additional errors.
4.1.1 measurement error the total measurement error, including the cross sensitivity to other gases - see annex 2 section 1.9 - may the smaller value of either ± 5% of the reading or 3,5% of full scale do not exceed. At concentrations of less than 100 ppm the measurement error shall not exceed ppm ± 4.
4.1.2 repeatability the repeatability, defined as 2.5 times the standard deviation of 10 repeated response responses to a given calibration gas, must not exceed ± 1% of full Ppmc for each used measuring range above 155 ppm (or ppm C) or ± 2% range for each below 155 ppm (or ppm C) amount.
4.1.3 not exceed noise that may peak-to-peak the analyser response to zero and calibration gases for a period of ten seconds 2% of full scale on all ranges used.
The zero drift during a one hour period less than 2% of full scale on the lowest range used must be zero point drift 4.1.4. The zero value is defined as the mean response, including noise, to a zero gas during a period of 30 seconds.
The measuring range drift during a one hour period less than 2% of full scale on the lowest range used must be 4.1.5 measuring range drift. The difference between zero value and span response is defined as the measurement range. The measuring range span response is defined as the mean response, including noise, to a span gas during a period of 30 seconds.
4.2 gas drying the choice gas drying device to use must affect the concentration of the measured gases as low as possible. The application of chemical dryer for the removal of water from the sample is not allowed.
4.3 analysis devices that applicable principles will be measuring in the sections 4.3.1 to 4.3.5 of this plant described. A detailed description of the measurement systems is included in part IV.
The gases to be measured are to analyze with the following devices. In non-linear analysers, the use of Linearisierungsschaltkreisen is permitted.
4.3.1 Kohlenmonoxid-(co-)analyse which carbon monoxide analyser must be a dispersive infra-red absorption analyser (NDIR).
4.3.2 Kohlendioxid-(CO2-)Analyse which carbon dioxide Analyzer must be a dispersive infra-red absorption analyser (NDIR).
4.3.3 Kohlenwasserstoff-(HC-)analyse which have hydrocarbon analyser heated flame ionisation detector (HFID) with detector, valves, pipework, etc. to be, which is so necessary to heat, keeps the gas temperature to 463 K (190 ° C) ± 10 K.
4.3.4 Stickoxid-(NOx-)analyse who needs nitric oxide Analyzer a chemiluminescent analyser (CLD) or heated chemiluminescent analyser (HCLD type) with a NO2/NO converter be, if measured on a dry basis. Measured on a wet basis is a hold on above 333 K (60 ° C) HCLD with converter to use, as long as the examination on water vapor quench (Appendix 2, section 1.9.2.2) is met.
4.4 sampling of emissions of gaseous pollutants probes for gaseous emissions must be positioned so that they at least 0.5 m or three times the diameter of the exhaust pipe (depending on whichever is higher) are near the outlet of the exhaust system - where appropriate - away and so close on the motor, that an exhaust gas temperature of at least 343 K (70 ° C) at the probe is guaranteed.
In a multi-cylinder engine with a branched exhaust manifold, the inlet of the probe so far in the direction of flow must be away that the sample for the average gaseous emissions from all cylinders is representative. In a multi-cylinder engine with individual groups of manifolds, such as for example in a V engine, the removal of individual samples from each group and the calculation of the average emissions of gaseous is allowed. It other methods can be applied, that correspond to the above methods has been proven. In the calculation of the gaseous emissions, the total exhaust mass flow of the engine is to be based.
Is the composition of the exhaust gas is influenced by an exhaust aftertreatment system, the exhaust sample tests level I this conditioning and testing level II behind this facility must be taken. When using a full flow dilution system for the determination of the particle, the gaseous emissions in the diluted exhaust gas can be determined. The probes must be close to the particulate sampling probe in the dilution tunnel (part IV section 2.1.2 for DT, section 2.2 for PSP). CO and CO2 can be determined either by sampling into a bag and subsequent measurement of the concentration in the sampling bag.
5 particle analysis
The determination of the particulates requires a dilution system. The dilution can be done with a partial flow or full flow dilution system. The flow capacity of the dilution system must be so great that no water condensation in the dilution and sampling will occur and that the temperature of the diluted exhaust gas can be held directly above the filter holder at or below 325 K (52° C). With high humidity, it is permissible to Dehumidifying the dilution air before entering the dilution system. We recommend a dilution air pre-heating above the temperature limit of 303 K (30 ° C), at an ambient temperature of less than 293 K (20 ° C). However, the temperature of the dilution air prior to the introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel 325 K (52° C) must not exceed.
For partial flow dilution systems have the particulate sampling probe in the vicinity and (facing upstream) above the probe for the gaseous emissions according to section 4.4 and pursuant to part IV of section 2.1.1, figures 4-12 (EP and SP), be attached.
The partial flow dilution system must be such that is a division of the exhaust, while the smaller part is diluted with air and then used for particulate measurement. As a result, a very accurate determination of the dilution ratio is required. Different methods of sharing can be used with the type Division of influence on which to use sampling and procedure (part IV section 2.1.1).
A particle are required for the determination of the particulate sampling system, particulate sampling filters, a microgram balance, and a weighing chamber with controlled temperature and humidity.
The particulate sampling can be done by two methods: a) a pair of filters is used for the single filter method for all inspection stages of the test cycle (see section 5.1.3). During the Probenahmephase of the examination must be paid strongly on the collection times and the throughputs. On the other hand, only one pair of filters is required per test cycle.
(b) for the multiple filter method, the one own pair of filters must be used for each test step of the test cycle (see section 5.1.3). This method allows for a less strict sampling, but consumed more filters.
5.1 5.1.1 particulate sampling filters specification of the filter for the certification exams are Fluorocarbon coated glass fibre filters or fluorine carbon membrane filter required. Other filter media can be used for special applications. All filter types have the separation of 0.3 µm DOP (Dioctylphthalate) at a flow rate of gas between 35 and 80 cm/s is at least 95%. Correlation tests performed between testing laboratories or between a manufacturer and an approval authority, filters of identical quality to use are so.
5.1.2 filter size the particle filters have a minimum diameter of 47 mm have (effective diameter 37 mm). Larger diameter filters are allowed (section 5.1.5).
5.1.3 main - and secondary filter the diluted exhaust gases during the test sequence by an in a row arranged pair of filters (primary and back-up filter) derive. The back-up filter must lie no more than 100 mm downstream of the main filter and do not touch this. The filter can be separately or in pairs - the effective pages turned each other - weighted.
5.1.4 filter face velocity a gas face velocity must be achieved through the filter of 35 to 80 cm/s. The pressure drop may increase between the beginning and end of the test to not more than 25 kPa.
5.1.5 filter loading for the single filter method is the recommended minimum filter loading 0,5 mg / 1 075 mm2 area. For the most common filter sizes, the following values result: filter diameter (mm) recommended diameter of the effective filter area (mm) recommended minimum filter loading (mg) 47 37 0.5 70 1.3 60 90 80 2.3 110 100 3.6 for the multiple filter method the minimum filter loading, the sum of all the filters is the product of the respective preceding value and the square root of the total number of the inspection stages.
5.2 specification for the weighing and the analytical balance 5.2.1 conditions for the weighing chamber the temperature of the Chamber (or room) in which (the) the particle filter is being conditioned and weighed during the entire duration of the conditioning and weighing at 295 K (22 ° C) ± 3 K to keep. The humidity is a dewpoint of 282,5 K (9,5 ° C) ± 3 K and a relative humidity of 45 ± 8% to keep.
5.2.2 comparison filter weighing chamber (or the room) to ambient air free from any contaminants (such as dust) be that could settle during the stabilization of on the particulate filters. Errors of the specifications set forth in section 5.2.1 for the weighing shall be allowed if their duration does not exceed 30 minutes. The weighting should conform to the required specifications, before it enters the staff. At least two unused reference filters or comparison filter pairs are to consider, but no more than at a distance of four hours to this preferably at the same time with the weighings. The comparison filters must be the same size and consist of the same material as the sample filters.
If is the average weight of reference at weighings by more than ± 5% (± 7,5% per filter pair) of the recommended minimum filter loading (section 5.1.5) changes, to see all sample filters as unusable, and the exhaust emissions test must be repeated.
If the stability criteria specified in section 5.2.1 for the weighing chamber are not met, but when weighing the comparison filter (-filter pair) the above criteria have been complied with, the manufacturer can either acknowledge the calculated weights of the sampling filters or the checks for invalid declare where the control system of the Microbalance is to adjust and repeat the test.
5.2.3 analytical balance to determine the weights of all filters used analytical balance must a precision (standard deviation) of 20 µg and a resolution of 10 µg (1 digit = 10 µg) have. For filters less than 70 mm diameter, the precision and resolution of 2 µg and 1 µg are required.
5.2.4 are avoiding electrostatic reactions avoid electrostatic reactions to neutralize the filter before the weigh-in, for example, by a Poloniumneutralisator or units with similar effect.
5.3 additional provisions for the measurement of the particle are all coming with the raw exhaust or dilute gases in contact parts of the dilution system and the sampling system from the exhaust pipe up to the filter holder be construed that the deposition of particles on it and the change in the particle be kept as low as possible. All parts must consist of electrically conductive material, which is not connected with the components of the exhaust gas; It must be grounded to prevent electrostatic reactions.
Appendix 2 to the service instruction No. 16 part II 1 calibration of analytical equipment 1.1 Introduction each Analyzer is as often as necessary to calibrate so that it complies with the requirements specified in this standard for accuracy. The applicable analysis devices according to annex 1 section 4.3 calibration procedure is described in this section.
The shelf life of all calibration gases is 1.2 calibration gases.
The expiration date of the calibration gases stated by the manufacturer shall be recorded.
1.2.1 pure gases the required purity of gases arises from the below limits of pollution. Following gases must be available:-purified nitrogen (contamination ≤ 1 ppm C, ≤ 1 ppm CO, ≤ 400 ppm CO2, ≤ 0,1 ppm No.)-purified oxygen (purity > 99,5 Vol.-% O2)-hydrogen-helium mixture (40 ± 2% hydrogen, balance helium) (contamination ≤ 1 ppm C, ≤ 400 ppm CO)-purified synthetic air (contamination ≤ 1 ppm C, ≤ 1 ppm CO, ≤ 400 ppm CO2) , ≤ 0,1 ppm No.) (oxygen 18-21 Vol.-%). 1.2.2 calibration gases gas mixtures with the following chemical compositions must be available: - C3H8 and purified synthetic air (see section 1.2.1), - CO and purified nitrogen, - no. and purified nitrogen (the amount of NO2 contained in this calibration gas 5% of no. salary does not exceed), - O2 and purified nitrogen, - CO2 and purified nitrogen, - CH4 and purified synthetic air, - C2H6 and purified synthetic air.
Note: Other gas combinations are allowed provided the gases do not react.
The true concentration of a calibration and span gas must be within ± 2% of the nominal value. All calibration gas concentrations are to be expressed as a volume fraction (% or ppm volume fraction).
The gases used for calibration can be obtained also using a gas divider diluting of purified N2 or purified synthetic air. The mixing device must be so accurate that the concentrations of the calibration gas mixture with an accuracy of ± 2% can be determined.
1.3 application of the analytical and sampling for the application of the analysis units are to follow the instructions of the device manufacturer for the commissioning and operation. The minimum requirements contained in the sections 1.4 to 1.9 must be observed.
1.4. leakage test
The system is to carry out a leak test. The probe must be removed from the exhaust system, and whose end is close. The pump of the analyser must be activated. After a previous stabilisation phase, all flow meter must display zero. This is not the case, so the tapping lines must be checked, and the error is correct. The maximum permissible leakage on the vacuum side shall be 0,5% of actual throughput for the tested part of the system. The analyzers - and bypass flow rates can be used to estimate the actual throughput.
Another method is the concentration step change at the beginning of the sampling line through conversion of zero calibration gas.
The reading indicates a lower concentration compared to the introduced concentration after a sufficiently long period of time, so this suggests problems with calibration or leakage.
1.5. calibration procedure 1.5.1 are all devices to calibrate measurement system, and the calibration curve must be checked with the help of calibration gases. The gas flow rate must be the same as when the sample was taken.
1.5.2 heating time the heating time depends on the manufacturer's recommendations. No details are available, so a minimum time is recommended for heating the analyzers by two hours.
NDIR and HFID analyser the NDIR analyser must 1.5.3 if required, tuned and the combustion flame of the HFID analyser optimized be (section 1.8.1).
1.5.4 calibration every measuring range used during normal operation is to calibrate.
The CO, CO2, NOx, CH - and O2 analysers are set using purified synthetic air (or nitrogen) to zero.
The appropriate calibration gases are to initiate the analysers and the values recorded, and the calibration curve is to be determined in accordance with section 1.5.5.
The zero setting is to check and, if necessary, to repeat the calibration procedure.
1.5.5 calibration curve determination 1.5.5.1 General notes which calibration curve of the analyser with the help of at least five calibration points (excluding zero) determines which should be arranged as far as possible the same distance. The nominal value of the highest concentration must be not less than 90% of full scale.
The calibration curve is calculated by the method of square of errors. If the resulting polynomial degree is greater than 3, the number of calibration points (including zero) at least equal to this degree plus 2 must be.
The calibration curve must not differ 1% of full scale at zero 2% not more than ± from the nominal value of each calibration gas and up to ±.
Based on the calibration curve and the calibration points can be determined, whether the calibration was performed correctly. The different characteristics of the Analyzer shall be indicated in particular a) measuring range, b), c) date of calibration.
1.5.5.2. calibration at less than 15% of full scale the analyser calibration curve is determined with the help of by at least ten calibration points (excluding zero) which should be arranged so that 50% of the calibration points are below 10% of the full scale.
The calibration curve is calculated by the method of square of errors.
The calibration curve must from the nominal value of each calibration point by more than ± 4% and 1% different from the full scale at zero within ±.
1.5.5.3 other methods if it can be shown that other methods (E.g. computer, electronically controlled range switch) can give equivalent accuracy, so must be used to this.
1.6 checking calibration is each range used during normal operation to check prior to each analysis as follows: the calibration is checked by using a zero gas and a Messbereichskalibriergases, whose nominal value is more than 80% of the full scale of the measuring range.
The measured value within ± is different for the two points 4% of full scale from the declared reference value, the adjustment parameters can be modified. If this is not the case, a new calibration curve shall according to section 1.5.4 to determine.
1.7 testing of the efficiency of the NOx Converter which is the efficiency of the converter used for the conversion of NO2 in NO, as indicated in the sections 1.7.1 to 1.7.8 (Figure 1) determines.
1.7.1 test arrangement can be using an ozone generator according to figure 1 (see also Appendix 1 section 4.3.5) represented test arrangement according to the following procedure determines the efficiency of the converter.
Figure 1 schematic diagram of the device for the determination of the efficiency of the NO2 converter 1.7.2 calibration of the CLD and the HCLD are where the most common operating range according to the manufacturer using zero and span gas (whose No. content 80% of full scale must approximate the NO2 concentration of the gas mixture must be less than 5% of the NO concentration) to calibrate. The NOx analyser must be set on the NO mode so that the span gas not through the converter passes. The concentration shall be recorded.
1.7.3 calculation of the efficiency of the NOx Converter is calculated as follows: a = NOx concentration according to section 1.7.6 b = NOx concentration according section 1.7.7 c = NO concentration according to section 1.7.4 d = NO concentration according section 1.7.5 1.7.4 is addition of oxygen via a T connection piece the passing gas continuous oxygen or zero air used to, until the concentration is approximately less than the indicated calibration concentration according to section 1.7.2 20%. (The analyser is in the NO mode).
The indicated concentration c shall be recorded. The ozone generator is switched off during the entire process.
1.7.5 then activation of the ozonator ozone generator is switched on enough ozone to produce the NO concentration goes back to about 20% (minimum 10%) of the calibration concentration given in section 1.7.2. The indicated concentration d shall be recorded. (The analyser is in the NO mode).
1.7.6 NOx mode the No. analyser is then on the NOx mode switch, causing the gas mixture (consisting of NO, NO2, O2 and N2) now passes through the converter. The indicated concentration a shall be recorded. (The analyser is in the NOx mode).
Switching off of the ozone generator then the ozone generator is switched off 1.7.7. The gas mixture according to section 1.7.6 passes through the converter into the display unit. The indicated concentration b shall be recorded. (The analyser is in the NOx mode).
1.7.8 is switched to NO mode when switched off ozone generator on the NO mode, so, also the influx of oxygen or synthetic air is locked. The NOx reading of the analyser shall not deviate by 5% from the value measured according to section 1.7.2 to within ±. (The analyser is in the NO mode).
1.7.9 inspection intervals is the efficiency of the converter to check prior to each calibration of the NOx analyser.
1.7.10 efficiency requirement must not be lower than 90% of the efficiency of the converter, however, a higher level of efficiency is strongly recommended by more than 95%.
Note: If the NOx Converter when operating the analyser in the most common range is not achieved a reduction from 80% to 20% according to section 1.7.2, the largest area shall be used, with the reduction can be achieved.
1.8 setting of the FID 1.8.1 is optimization of the sensitivity of the detector of the HFID according to the device manufacturer. To optimize the response for the most common operating range, a calibration gas of propane in air can be used.
At a setting of fuel gas - and air currents, which corresponds to the manufacturer's recommendations, a calibration gas of 350 ± 75 is to initiate ppm C in the Analyzer. The sensitivity of a particular fuel gas stream shall be determined based on the difference between the calibration gas signal and the zero gas signal. The fuel gas flow is above and below the manufacturer's specification to set a low. The difference between the signal of the calibration and zero at these fuel gas streams shall be recorded. The difference between the calibration and the zero gas response is to apply in the form of curves and the fuel gas flow on the fat side of the curve to adjust.
1.8.2 hydrocarbon response factors is the Analyzer be calibrated with propane in air and purified synthetic air according to section 1.5.
The response factor shall be determined when introducing an analyser into service and after major maintenance work. The response factor (RF) for a particular hydrocarbon species is the ratio of the C1 reading displayed on the FID to the concentration in the gas cylinder, expressed in ppm C1.
The concentration of the test gas must be so that approximately 80% of full scale are displayed. The concentration must be with an accuracy of ± 2%, relative to a gravimetric standard expressed in volume be known. Also, the gas bottle for 24 hours at 298 K (25 ° C) ± 5 K must be conditioned.
The test gases to be used and the recommended response factor are at a) methane and purified synthetic air: 1.00 ≤ RF ≤ 1.15 b) propylene and purified synthetic air: 0.90 ≤ RF ≤ 1.10 c) toluene and purified synthetic air: 0.90 ≤ RF ≤ 1.10
These values are relative to a response factor (RF) of 1,00 for propane and purified synthetic air.
1.8.3 is the oxygen interference check oxygen interference check to make when introducing an analyser into service and after major maintenance work.
The response factor is defined in section 1.8.2 and accordingly to determine. The test gas to be used and the recommended response factor are at a) propane and nitrogen: 0,95 ≤ RF ≤ 1.05 this value is relative to a response factor (RF) of 1,00 for propane and purified synthetic air.
The FID burner air oxygen concentration must not differ 1 mol % of the oxygen concentration of the burner air that was used when the last of the oxygen interference check a maximum ±. The difference is greater, must be checked the oxygen interference and the analyser adjusted if necessary.
Affect 1.9 interference effects with NDIR and CLD analysers that can gases are included in addition to the gas in the exhaust gas to be analyzed, the reading in several ways. Positive interference occurs in NDIR instruments where the interfering gas gives the same effect as the gas being measured, but to a lesser extent. A negative interference occurs in NDIR instruments, and in CLD instruments by the interfering gas widening the absorption band of the measured gas, by the interfering gas suppresses the radiation. The tests of cross sensitivity shall be sections 1.9.1 and 1.9.2 before the analyser's initial use and after major maintenance work.
1.9.1 can affect the performance of CO analyser interference check of water CO analyser and CO2. You can therefore a CO2 span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100% of full scale of the maximum operating range used during testing at room temperature water beads, where to record the output signal of the Analyzer. The output signal of the Analyzer must be ppm than 3 ppm for ranges from 300 ppm, not more than 1% of full scale and in areas below 300.
1.9.2 NOx analyser quench checks are two gases that need concern for CLD (and HCLD) analyzers of focusing on CO2 and water vapour. The interference of these gases are proportional to their concentrations, and therefore require test techniques to determine the quench at the highest expected concentrations experienced during testing.
1.9.2.1 control the CO2 quench a CO2 span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100% of full scale of the maximum operating range is NDIR analyser and the CO2 value through which to guide as to record A. Then is to dilute the gas to approximately 50% with NO span gas and to lead, and to record the value of CO2 and of NO value as B or C through the NDIR and the (H) CLD. The CO2 is shut off and only the NO span gas be passed through the (H) CLD and the NO value is as a record D.
The cross-sensitivity is calculated as follows: and must be not greater than 3% of full scale.
A the concentration measured with the NDIR undiluted CO2% B the concentration of the diluted CO2% C measured with the NDIR the diluted NO concentration measured with CLD in ppm D the measured with CLD of undiluted NO concentration in ppm 1.9.2.2 control the water quench this review only applies to wet gas concentration measurements. In the calculation of water quench is the dilution of the NO span gas with water vapour and scaling of water vapour concentration of the mixture when compared to the concentration expected during the test to be considered. A NO span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100% of full scale to the normal operating range is passed through the (H) CLD and the NO value recorded D as. The NO gas shall then through water at room temperature and passed through the (H) CLD and the NO value is as C - to draw. The absolute pressure in the Analyzer and the water temperature shall be determined and recorded as E and F, respectively. The saturation vapour pressure of the mixture, F corresponding to the temperature of the water in the wash bottle, is to determine and record it as G. The water vapour concentration of the mixture is H (in %) be calculated as follows: and recorded as H. Expected of the diluted NO span gas (in water vapour) concentration shall be calculated as follows: and as de record. The maximum when assessing expected water vapour concentration in the exhaust gas (in %) based on the concentration of the undiluted CO2 span gas (A, as measured in section 1.9.2.1) - starting from the Atomic ratio H/C of fuel from 1.8 to 1 - as follows to appreciate: HM = 0,9 · A and as HM to record.
The water quench shall be calculated as follows: and shall be not more than 3% of the real value.
De expected diluted NO concentration (ppm) C of the diluted NO concentration (ppm) HM maximum water vapour concentration (%)
H actual water vapour concentration (%)
Note: It is sure that the NO span gas with this validation has a very low concentration of NO2, since absorption of NO2 in water has not been accounted for in the quench calculations.
1.10. calibration intervals the analyzers are at least every three months and after any repair of the system or change that could affect the calibration be calibrated according to section 1.5.
2. calibration of the particulate measuring system 2.1 introduction is any device as often as necessary to calibrate so that it complies with the requirements specified in this standard for accuracy. The calibration procedure the units after Appendix 1 to be applied to section 5 and part IV is described in this section.
2.2 measurement of the flow rate must be the calibration of gas flow meter or the flow measurement instrumentation due to national or international standards.
The error of the measured value may be within ± 2% of the reading value.
The gas flow is determined by differential pressure measurement, so the error of the difference between maximum size will be that the accuracy of GEDF is within a tolerance of ± 4% (see also part IV section 2.1.1 EGA). The calculation can be done by making the middle square root of the error of each device.
2.3 checking of the dilution ratio of use of particle sample without EGA (part IV section 2.1.1) is to check the dilution ratio for each new engine installation with the engine running and using the measurements of the CO2 or NOx concentrations in the raw exhaust gas and in the diluted exhaust gas.
The measured dilution ratio shall not deviate from the dilution ratio from CO2 or NOx concentration measurement within ± 10%.
The review in an appropriate manner without the measurement of CO2 or NOx concentrations can be when using flow meters of high accuracy (part II section 3.4).
2.4 checking the partial flow conditions the range of the exhaust gas velocity and the pressure oscillations are check and adjust, if necessary, according to the provisions of part IV of section 2.1.1 (EP).
2.5. calibration intervals the flow measurement instrumentation are at least every three months and after any repair of the system or changes that may affect the calibration to calibrate.
Appendix 3 to the service instruction No. 16 part II evaluation of measurements and calculations 1 evaluation of measured values for gaseous emissions to assess emissions of gaseous pollutants is the average of the records of the last 60 seconds of each inspection stage to form and are the average concentrations (conc) of HC, CO, NOx, and - when using the carbon balance method - to determine CO2 during each test level of the average values of the records and the corresponding calibration data. A different kind of record can be applied if this an equivalent data acquisition.
The average background concentrations (concd) may be determined on the basis of the readings of the dilution air into the collection bag or on the basis of the continuous measurement of background (made without the collecting bag) and the corresponding calibration data.
2 particulate emissions particulate assessment are the laden masses (MSAM, i) or to record total volumes (VSAM, i) the sample through the filters for each inspection stage.
The filters are again returned to the weighing chamber and conditioned at least one, but not more than 80 hours and then to weigh. The gross weight of the filters is to record and to deduct the net weight (see part II, section 3.1). The particulate mass (MF for single filter method, MF, i for multiple filter method) is the sum of the particulate masses collected on the primary and back-up filters.
Applying a background correction, the extent shall be recorded (MDIL) or volume (VDIL) of the dilution air through the filters and the particulate mass (MD). More than a measurement was made, the quotient is MD/MDIL or MD/VDIL for each individual measurement to calculate and the average of the values to determine.
The occupied filter can not immediately be transported after the measurement in the weighing chamber, are permitted storage times of according to the following table: storage temperature storage period conditions 8 hours 0 ° C 24 hours - 5° C 10 days - 10 ° c.
Unlimited 3 calculation of the gaseous emissions to be included in the test report inspection results are determined as follows: 3.1 determination of the exhaust flow are the values of the exhaust gas flow rate (GEXHW, VEXHW or VEXHD) to determine for each stage of the test according to annex 1, sections 2.1 to 2.3.
When using a full flow dilution system, the total flow rate of the diluted exhaust (GTOTW, VTOTW) for each stage of the test is to determine according to Appendix 1, section 2.4.
3.2 conversion of dry/wet correction is GEXHW, VEXHW, GTOTW or VTOTW, the measured concentration is according to the following formula in a value for the wet correction to convert, if the measurements not for wet correction has been made: conc (wet) = kW × conc (dry) for the raw exhaust gas: or: for the diluted exhaust gas: or FFH may be calculated as : For the dilution air: for the intake air (if different from the dilution air): This means: HA absolute humidity of the intake air, g water per kg of dry air HD absolute humidity of the dilution air, g water per kg of dry air Rd relative humidity of the dilution air, % RA relative humidity of the intake air, % pd saturation vapour pressure of the dilution air, kPa pa saturation vapour pressure of the intake air, kPa pB barometric total pressure, kPa 3.3 humidity correction for NOx 3.3.1 the NOx emission from the ambient air conditions is dependent on diesel engines as , the NOx concentration, taking into account temperature and humidity of the ambient air using the factor KH given in the following formula is correct: This means: A 0,309 GFUEL/GAIRD - 0,0266 B - 0,209 GFUEL/GAIRD + 0,00954 T air temperature in K Ha humidity of the intake air, g water per kg of dry air: RA relative humidity of the intake air, % pa saturation vapour pressure of the intake air, kPa pB barometric total pressure , kPa 3.3.2 diesel engines with charge air cooler for diesel engines with charge air cooler must be used the following equation as an alternative: This means: TSC air temperature after charge air cooler TSC ref reference temperature for raw cooling water 25 ° C, must be set by the manufacturer as follows to calculate other variables see section 3.3.1. 3.4 calculation of the emission mass flow rates that are mass flow rates of emissions for each test point: a) for the Rohabgas(1): or : Gas mass = v · conc. · VEXHD or: gas mass = w · conc. · VEXHW b) for the diluted Abgas(1): gas mass = u · concc · GTOTW or: gas mass = w · concc · VTOTW this mean: = concc = conc-concd (1 - (1/DF)) concc is the background corrected concentration DF = 13.4 /(concCO2 + (concCO + concHC) · 10-4) or: DF = 13,4/concCO2 the coefficients u - wet, v - dry, w - wet are to use according to the following table: gas u v w of conc. NOx 0,001587 0,002053 0,002053 ppm CO 0,000966 0.00125 0.00125 ppm HC 0,000479 - 0,000619 ppm CO2 15,19 19,64 any race were 19.64 percent the density of HC is based upon an average carbon / hydrogen ratio of 1: 1,85. (1) In the case of NOx is the NOx concentration () Noxconc or Noxconcc) with KHNOX (humidity correction factor for Nox9 specified in section 3.3) to multiply as follows: KHNOX x conc or KHNOX x concc 3.5 calculation of specific emissions is the specific emission (g/kWh) be calculated for all individual components as follows: this PI is pm =, i + PAE, i the weighting factors used in the above calculation and the number of test levels (n) comply with section 3.6. follow these steps to calculate part II 4 calculation of the particulate emission which is particulate emission : 4.1 humidity correction factor for particulates as depends on the particle emissions of diesel engines by the ambient air conditions, the mass flow rate of the particles, taking into account the humidity of the ambient air using the factor kp given in the following formula must be corrected: KP = 1 /(1 + 0,0133 ·) (HA – 10,71))
Determined Ha humidity of the intake air, g of water kg of dry air RA relative humidity of the intake air, % pa saturation vapour pressure of the intake air, kPa pB barometric total pressure, kPa 4.2 partial flow dilution system are to be included in the test report the results of particulate emissions in the following steps. Because different types of control of the dilution ratio must be applied, apply different methods for calculating the equivalent mass flow rate of the diluted exhaust gas of GEDF or equivalent diluted exhaust gas VEDF volume throughput. All calculations must be based on the average values of the individual inspection stages (i) while the minimum.
4.2.1 isokinetic systems GEDFW, i GEXHW =, i · Qi or: VEDFW, i VEXHW =, i · Qi or: where r the ratio of the cross sectional areas of the isokinetic probe AP and the exhaust pipe AT matches: 4.2.2 systems with measurement of CO2 or NOx concentration GEDFW, i GEXHW =, i · Qi or: VEDFW, i VEXHW =, i · Qi here is: concentration of the damp tracer gas in the raw exhaust gas concE the concentrations measured on a dry basis concD concentration of damp tracer gas in the diluted exhaust gas of concA of wet concentration of tracer gas in the dilution air are to transform in accordance with section 3.2 wet basis.
Systems with CO2 measurement and carbon balance method here is 4.2.3: CO2D CO2 concentration of the diluted exhaust gas of CO2A CO2 concentration of the dilution air (concentrations in volume percent, wet) this equation is based on the assumption of the carbon balance (which carbon atoms led to are released the motor than CO2) and is determined in the following steps: GEDFW, i GEXHW =, i · Qi and 4.2.4 systems with flow measurement GEDFW, i GEXHW =, i · Qi and 4.3 full-flow-dilution system to be included in the test report the results of particulate emissions are determined as follows.
All calculations must be based on the average values of the individual inspection stages (i) while the minimum.
GEDFW, i = GTOTW, i or VEDFW, i = VTOTW, i 4.4 is calculation of the particulate mass flow rate of the particulate mass flow rate be calculated as follows: for the single filter method: or: where: (GEDFW) aver, (VEDFW) aver, (MSAM) aver, (VSAM) aver over the test cycle by adding the individual inspection stages during the over determined to determine through cutting-values: where i = 1,... n for the multiple filter method: or: where i = 1 ,... n of the particulate mass flow background correction can be made as follows: for the single filter method: or: is more than a measurement made, (MD/MDIL) or (MD/VDIL) shall by to replace (MD/MDIL) aver or (MD/VDIL) aver.
or: DF = 13,4/concCO2 for the multiple filter method: or: is more than a measurement made, (MD/MDIL) or (MD/VDIL) shall by to replace (MD/MDIL) aver or (MD/VDIL) aver.
or: DF = 13,4/concCO2 4.5. calculation of the specific emissions are the specific particulates PT (g/kWh) as follows to berechnen(1): for the single filter method: for the multiple filter method: = PI x pm, i + PAE, i 4.6 effective weighting factor for the single filter method is the effective weighting factor WFE as follows to calculate i for each inspection stage: or: where i = 1,..., the value of the effective weighting factors n may differ from the values of the weighting factors listed in part II of section 3.6 within ± 0,005 (absolute value).
(1) the particulate mass flow rate of PTmass shall be multiplied by KP (humidity correction factor for particles according to section 4.1).
Part III technical data of the reference fuel for the tests for type-approval and verification of conformity of reference fuel for Binnenschiffe(1) Note: the highlights feature the essential characteristics in relation to engine performance/exhaust emissions.
 
Limits and Einheiten(2) test Cetanzahl(4) min. 45(7) max. 50 DIN EN ISO 5165 density at 15 ° C minimum 835 kg / m3 maximum 845 kg/m3(10) DIN EN ISO 3675, ASTM D 4052 Siedeverlauf(3) - max. 95% Sales 370° C DIN EN ISO 3405 viscosity at 40 ° C min 2,5 mm2/s max 3,5 mm2 / s DIN EN ISO 3104 sulphur min. 0.1 Massen-%(9) max. 0.2 Massen-%(8) DIN EN ISO 8754 , DIN EN 24260 flash point min 55 ° C DIN EN ISO 2719 limit of the Filterability (CFPPP) min. - max. + 5 ° C DIN EN 116 copper plate corrosion Max 1 DIN EN ISO 2160 Conradsonzahl (coking tendency) at 10% residue max. 0.3 mass % DIN EN ISO 10370 ash content max 0,01 mass % ASTM D 482(12) water content max. 0.05 mass % ASTM D 95/D 1744 number of neutralisation (strong acid) min. 0.20 mg KOH/g Oxidationsbeständigkeit(5) of max 2,5 mg / 100 ml ASTM D 2274 Zusätze(6) (1) to the thermal efficiency of an engine or vehicle are calculated, the calorific value of the fuel can be determined using the following formula: specific energy (calorific value) (net) MJ/kg = (46,423-8,792 d2 + 3,17 d) · (1 - (x + y + s)) + 9.42 s - 2,499 x this mean: d = density at 288 K (15 ° C) x y = water content in weight % (% / 100) = ash content in weight % (% / 100) s = sulphur content in weight % (% / 100).
(2) the values specified in the rule are "actual values". When establishing the limit values were the provisions of the ASTM document D 3244 "defining a basis in disputes concerning the quality of petroleum products «applied a minimum difference was taken into account when determining maximum of 2R above zero;" When establishing a maximum and a minimum is the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility).
Without prejudice to this measure serve statistical purposes should seek the manufacturer of the fuel anyway, where a maximum of 2R is agreed to reach a zero value, and where upper and lower bounds are specified, one to reach average. If in doubt, whether a fuel meets the prescribed requirements, the provisions of the document of the ASTM D 3244. (3) which give figures apply the total evaporated quantities (percentage recovered of plus percentage loss).
(4) the cetane is not the prescribed minimum requirement of 4R. The terms of ASTM D 3244 document must be applied to the search for a solution in disputes between Krafstofflieferanten and consumers given sufficiently many reps to achieve the required precision of preference to single determinations.
(5) even though oxidation stability is monitored, the duration of storage capacity is probably limited. With regard to the conditions of storage and the shelf-life information from suppliers are requesting.
(6) only the products of distillation and cracked hydrocarbons should be used for this fuel. a desulphurization is allowed. The fuel must contain no metallic additives or other additives to increase the cetane number.
(7) lower values are permitted, however, is in this case the cetane number of the reference fuel used to specify.
(8) higher values are permitted, but in this case is the sulphur content of the reference fuel to specify.
(9) these values are continuously revise, taking into account the development of the market. For first approval of an engine without aftertreatment the value of 0.050 mass % on request of the applicant as the minimum value for the sulphur content is allowed; in this case the measured particulate value according to the following equation must be corrected upward to the average value is nominally intended as the sulphur content of the fuel (0.150 mass %): PTadj = PT + [SFC • 0,0917 • (NSLF - FSF)] this mean: PTadj = adjusted PT value (g/kWh) PT = measured weighted specific emission value for particulate emission (g/kWh) SFC = weighted specific fuel consumption (g/kWh) according to the following formula NSLF = average of the nominally intended mass percentage of sulfur (i.e. 0,15 %/100) FSF = mass fraction of sulfur content of fuel (% / 100) equation to the) Calculation of the weighted specific fuel consumption: where: = PI x pm, i + PAE, i to assess the conformity of production in accordance with annex J section 4.3.2 the requirements by using a reference fuel with a sulphur content % corresponds to the minimum / maximum value of 0.1/0.2 mass that must be met.
(10) higher values up to 855 kg / m3 are allowed; in this case, the density of the reference fuel is to specify. The requirements by using a reference fuel which complies with the minimum / maximum level of 835/845 kg / m3, must be met to assess the conformity of production in accordance with annex J of section 4.3.2.
(12) from the date of execution by DIN EN ISO 6245 to replace.
Part IV analysis and sampling system table: systems for sampling of gaseous and particle emissions number of figure description 2 exhaust gas analysis system for raw exhaust 3 exhaust gas analysis system for diluted exhaust 4 partial flow, isokinetic flow, suction blower control, fractional sampling 5 partial flow, isokinetic flow, pressure blower control, fractional sampling 6 partial flow, CO2 or NOx control, fractional sampling 7 partial flow, CO2 and carbon balance, total sampling type 8 partial flow, simply venturi and concentration measurement, fractional sampling 9 partial flow, twin venturi or Panel and concentration measurement , Fractional sampling 10 partial flow, multiple tube Division and concentration measurement, fractional sampling 11 partial flow, flow control; Total sampling type 12 partial flow, flow control, fractional sampling type 13 full flow, positive displacement pump or venturi tube with critical flow, fractional sampling 14 particulate sampling system in section 1 1 determination of the gaseous emissions of detailed descriptions of the recommended sampling and analysis systems are 15 dilution system for full flow system and included in the figures 2 and 3. Because equivalent results can be achieved with different arrangements, an exact match with these figures is not required. Additional components can be used such as instruments, valves, solenoids, pumps and switches, to gain more information and coordinate the functions of the subsystems. Some systems may be waived some components that are not required for maintaining the accuracy, if her disappearance appears justified according to good technical judgement.
Components of gaseous emissions - CO, CO2, HC, NOx it is described an analytical system for the determination of the gaseous emissions in the raw exhaust gas or the diluted exhaust gas, based on use a HFID analyser for the measurement of hydrocarbons, - NDIR analysers for the measurement of carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide, - a HCLD or equivalent analyser for the measurement of nitrogen oxides.
For the raw exhaust gas (see Figure 2), the sample for the determination of all components with a sampling probe or two close together the probes can be removed and internally split to the different analysers. It is important to ensure that at any point of the analysis system condensates of exhaust components (including water and sulphuric acid) form.
The sample for the determination of the hydrocarbons with a different sampling probe is to refer to as the sample for the determination of the other components in the diluted exhaust gas (see Figure 3). It is important to ensure that at any point of the analysis system condensates of exhaust components (including water and sulphuric acid) form.
Figure 2 flow diagram of exhaust gas analysis system for CO, NOx and HC Figure 3 flow diagram of diluted exhaust gas CO, CO2, NOx and HC analysis system description - figures 2 and 3 General information: all the components with which comes the gas sample into contact, must be kept at the temperature prescribed for the respective system.
-A stainless steel with closed end multi-hole probe is SP1: Recommended probe for taking samples of the raw exhaust gas (Figure 2 only). The internal diameter must not be greater than the inside diameter of the sampling line. The wall thickness of the probe must be no larger than 1 mm. At least three holes on three different radial planes and of such a size are required that they remove about the same flow. The probe must extend across at least 80% of the exhaust pipe cross-section.
-SP2: Probe to HC sampling from the diluted exhaust gas (Figure 3 only) the probe - the first 254 mm to 762 mm of the hydrocarbon sampling line (HSL3) form, have an inner diameter of at least 5 mm - installed in the dilution tunnel DT (section 2.1.2) at one point be where the dilution air and exhaust gas are well mixed (i.e. approximately 10 tunnel diameters downstream of the point where located, enter the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel) , be placed - in sufficient distance (radially) from other probes and the tunnel wall to avoid interference by waves or swirls, - be heated so that the temperature of the gas flow at the outlet of the probe is increased to 463 K (190 ° C) ± 10 K.
-SP3: Probe for the removal of CO, CO2, and NOx samples of the diluted exhaust gas (Figure 3 only) the probe must - located on the same plane as SP2, - be placed at sufficient distance (radially) from other probes and the tunnel wall to avoid interference by waves or spinal - be heated over its entire length and so isolated that the minimum temperature of 328 K (55 ° C) is , to avoid condensation.
-HSL1: Heated sampling line used sampling line gas sampling from a single probe to the (s) Aufteilungspunkt(en) and the HC analyser.
The sampling line must - have an internal diameter of at least 5 mm and not more than 13,5 mm - made of stainless steel or PTFE, - on a wall temperature of 463 K (190 ° C) ± 10 K, measured at every separately controlled heated section, be kept, if the temperature of the exhaust gas at the sampling probe is to including 463 K (190 ° C), - maintained at a wall temperature of about 453 K (180 ° C) , if the temperature of the exhaust gas at the sampling probe is more than 463 K (190 ° C), - immediately before the heated filter (F2) on the HFID constantly by 463 K (190 ° C) ± 10 K have a gas temperature.
-HSL2: when using a cooler, up to the converter, and when not in use of a cooler to be held down to the Analyzer on a wall temperature of 328 k to 473 K (55 to 200 ° C) - made of stainless steel or polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) are heated NOx sampling line which has sampling line -.
Since the sampling line only to prevent the condensation of water and sulphuric acid must be heated, the temperature depends on the sulphur content of the fuel.
-SL: Sampling line for CO (CO2) the line must consist of PTFE or stainless steel. She may be heated or unheated.
-BK: background bag (optional, Figure 3 only) for the measurement of the background concentrations.
-
BG: Sampling bag (optional, Figure 3 only, CO and CO2) to measure the concentrations of the samples.
-F1: Heated pre-filter (optional) if present, it is at the same temperature to keep as HSL1.
-F2: Heated filter this filter must any solid particles from the gas sample remove, before it gets to the Analyzer. It must have the same temperature as HSL1. The filter must be changed if necessary.
-P heated sampling pump is the pump to heat up to the temperature of HSL1.
-HC of heated flame ionisation detector (HFID) for the determination of the hydrocarbons. The temperature can be kept on 453 k to 473 K (180 to 200 ° C).
-CO, CO2 NDIR analysers for the determination of carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide.
-NO2 (H) CLD analyser for the determination of the oxides of nitrogen. A HCLD is used it is to keep at a temperature of 328 k to 473 K (55 to 200 ° C).
-C: Converter for the catalytic reduction of NO2 to NO prior to analysis in the CLD or HCLD is a converter to use.
-B: cooler to cool and condense water from the exhaust sample. The cooler is by ice or cooling system at a temperature of 273 to 277 K (0 ° C to 4 ° C) to keep. The cooler is optional if the analyser determined Appendix 2, sections 1.9.1 and 1.9.2 - has been no impairment caused by water vapour - part II.
You may not use chemical dryer for the removal of water from the sample.
-T1, T2, T3: temperature sensor to monitor the temperature of the gas stream.
-T4: temperature sensor temperature of the NO2-NO converter.
-T5: temperature sensor to monitor the temperature of the cooler.
-G1, G2, G3: manometer to measure the pressure in the sampling lines.
-R1, R2: pressure controller for controlling the air or fuel pressure for the HFID.
-R3, R4, R5: pressure regulator to control the pressure in the sampling lines and the flow to the analysers.
-FL1, FL2, FL3: flow meter for monitoring of the sample bypass flow.
-FL4 to FL7: flow meter (optional) to monitor the flow rate through the analysers.
-V1 to V6: valve suitable valves to initiate the test, calibration gas optional or to close the supply line to the Analyzer.
-V7, V8: solenoid valve to bypass the NO2-NO converter.
-V9: needle valve to balance the flow through the NO2-NO converter and the bypass.
-V10, V11: needle valve regulates the flow to the analysers.
-V12, V13: drain valve to drain the condensate from the cooler B. - V14: diverter valve for the selection of sample - or background bag.
2. determination of the particulates give detailed descriptions of the recommended dilution and sampling systems sections 2.1 and 2.2 and figures 4 to 15. Because equivalent results can be achieved with different arrangements, an exact match with these figures is not required. Additional components can be used such as instruments, valves, solenoids, pumps and switches, to gain more information and coordinate the functions of the subsystems. Some systems may be waived some components that are not required for maintaining the accuracy, if her disappearance appears justified according to good technical judgement.
2.1 dilution system 2.1.1 partial flow dilution system (figures 4 to 12) it is described a dilution system based upon the dilution of a part of the exhaust emissions. The Division of the exhaust and the subsequent dilution process can be made with different types of dilution systems. For the subsequent deposition of the particles either the entire dilute exhaust gas or only a portion of the diluted exhaust can be directed through the particulate sampling system (section 2.2, Figure 14). The first method is called total sampling type, called the fractional second.
The calculation of the dilution ratio depends on the type of the applied system. The following types are recommended:-isokinetic systems (figures 4 and 5) with these systems the current initiated in the transfer tube from the gas velocity and/or pressure produced is equivalent to the bulk exhaust stream, so that a free and uniform exhaust flow at the sampling probe is required. This is usually accomplished using a resonator and a straight pipe upstream of the sampling point. The Division ratio is then calculated from easily measurable values, such as such as pipe diameter. It is to note that the ISO rate is used only on the approximation of the flow conditions and not on the approximation of the size distribution. The latter is typically not required, because the particles are so small that they will follow the fluid streamlines.
-Systems with flow control and concentration measurement (figures 6 to 10) with these systems, the sample is taken the bulk exhaust stream by adjusting the dilution air flow and the total flow rate of the diluted exhaust gas. The dilution ratio is determined from the concentrations of tracer gases, such as CO2 or NOx, are already included in the engine exhaust. The concentrations of the diluted exhaust gas and the dilution air are measured, and the concentration in the raw exhaust gas can be either measured directly or determined at known fuel composition on the basis of the fuel flow and the carbon balance equation. The systems can be regulated on the basis of the calculated dilution ratio (figures 6 and 7) or on the basis of the flow into the transfer tube (figures 8, 9 and 10).
-Systems with flow control and flow measurement (figures 11 and 12) with these systems, the sample is taken the bulk exhaust stream by adjusting the dilution air flow and the total flow rate of the diluted exhaust gas. The dilution ratio is determined from the difference of the two flow rates. The flowmeter must each other involved precisely calibrated, errors to significant the relative magnitude of the two flow rates at larger dilution ratios can result (Figure 9 and above). Flow control is very directly by the flow rate of the diluted exhaust is kept constant and the dilution air flow rate demand changed.
The benefits of partial flow dilution systems come fully to fruition, is special attention to the prevention of particle loss in the transfer tube, to focus on ensuring a representative sample from the engine exhaust, and on the determination of the split ratio.
These critical points are included in the described systems.
Figure moves through the transfer tube TT to the dilution tunnel DT using the Isokinetic sampling probe ISP from the exhaust pipe EP 4 partial flow dilution system with isokinetic probe and fractional sampling (SB control) raw exhaust gas. The differential pressure of the exhaust gas between exhaust pipe and probe intake is measured with the differential pressure transducer DPT. This signal is transmitted to the flow controller FC1 that controls the suction blower SB to a differential pressure is maintained by zero at the tip of the probe. Under these conditions, exhaust gas velocities in EP and ISP are consistent, and the flow through ISP and TT is a constant fraction of the exhaust gas flow. The split ratio is determined from the cross sectional areas of EP and ISP. The dilution air flow rate is measured with the flow measurement device FM1. The dilution ratio is calculated from the dilution air flow rate and the split ratio.
Figure moves through the transfer tube TT to the dilution tunnel DT using the Isokinetic sampling probe ISP from the exhaust pipe EP 5 partial flow dilution system with isokinetic probe and fractional sampling (PB control) raw exhaust gas. The differential pressure of the exhaust gas between exhaust pipe and probe intake is measured with the differential pressure transducer DPT. This signal is transmitted to the flow controller FC1 that controls the suction blower SB to a differential pressure is maintained by zero at the tip of the probe. To do this, a small portion of the dilution air, whose Durchsatz already was measured with the flow measurement device FM1, is taken and initiated by means of a pneumatic orifice in the TT. Under these conditions, exhaust gas velocities in EP and ISP are consistent, and the flow through ISP and TT is a constant fraction of the exhaust gas flow. The split ratio is determined from the cross sectional areas of EP and ISP. The dilution air is sucked from the suction blower SB by the DT and measured the throughput with FM1 at the inlet to the DT. The dilution ratio is calculated from the dilution air flow rate and the split ratio.
Figure is 6 partial flow dilution system with measurement of CO2 or NOx concentration and fractional sampling raw exhaust gas from the exhaust pipe EP through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT to the dilution tunnel DT. The concentrations of a tracer gas (CO2 or NOx) are measured with the in the raw and diluted exhaust gas and of the dilution air (s) EGA. These signals are transmitted to the flow controller FC2 either the pressure blower PB or the suction blower SB controls so that the desired pitch and dilution ratio of the exhaust gas is maintained in the DT. The dilution ratio is calculated from the concentrations of tracer gas in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas and of the dilution air.
Figure 7
Partial flow dilution system derives DT TT to the dilution tunnel with measurement of CO2 concentration, carbon balance and total sampling raw exhaust gas from the exhaust pipe EP through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube. The CO2 concentrations are measured with the in the diluted exhaust gas and of the dilution air (s) EGA. The CO2 and fuel flow GFUEL signals transmitted either to the flow controller FC2, or to the flow controller FC3 of the particulate sampling system (see Figure 14). FC2 controls the pressure blower PB and FC3 of the particulate sampling system (see Figure 14), making the flow of entering into the system and leave it be adjusted so that the desired pitch and dilution ratio of the exhaust gas is maintained in the DT. The dilution ratio is calculated using the carbon balance method based on the concentrations of CO2 and the GFUEL.
Figure is due to the vacuum the venturi tube produces UN in the DT from the exhaust pipe EP through the sampling probe SP and directed the transfer tube TT to the dilution tunnel DT 8 partial flow dilution system with easy venturi, concentration measurement and fractional sampling raw exhaust gas. The gas flow rate through the TT depends on the momentum Exchange at the venturi and is therefore affected by the absolute temperature of the gas at the exit of TT. Therefore, the exhaust split a given tunnel flow rate is not constant, and the dilution ratio is slightly lower than at high load at low load. The concentration of the tracer gas (CO2 or NOx) are measured (s) EGA with the in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas and of the dilution air, and the dilution ratio is calculated from the measured values.
Figure is 9 partial flow dilution system with twin venturi or double-diaphragm, concentration measurement and fractional sampling raw exhaust gas from the exhaust pipe EP through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT to the dilution tunnel DT directed, by means of a flow divider that contains a few Aperture or venturi tubes. The first divider (FD1) is located in the EP, the second (FD2) in the TT. In addition, two pressure control valves (PCV1 and PCV2) are required so that a constant exhaust split can be maintained by controlling the backpressure in the EP and the pressure in the DT. PCV1 is located the SP downstream in the EP, PCV2 between the pressure blower PB and the DT. The concentration of the tracer gas (CO2 or NOx) are measured in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas and the dilution air with the (s) EGA. You are to check the exhaust split required and can adjust PCV1 and PCV2 used in a precise split control. The dilution ratio is calculated from the tracer gas concentrations.
Figure 10 partial flow dilution system with multiple tube Division, concentration measurement and fractional sampling is raw exhaust gas from the exhaust pipe EP through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT to the dilution tunnel DT directed, by means of divider mounted in the EP, which consists of a series of tubes with the same dimensions (diameter, length and bend RADIUS equal). Exhaust gas flowing through one of these tubes is directed to the DT, exhaust gas flowing through the other tube is passed through the damping Chamber DC. So, the exhaust split is determined by the total number of tubes. A constant split control between the DC and the exit of TT is a differential pressure of zero ahead, which is measured with the differential pressure transducer DPT. A differential pressure of zero is achieved by fresh air is injected into DT at the exit of TT. The concentration of the tracer gas (CO2 or NOx) are measured in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas and the dilution air with the (s) EGA. You are to check the exhaust split required and can adjust PCV1 and PCV2 used in a precise split control. The dilution ratio is calculated from the tracer gas concentrations.
Figure is 11 partial flow dilution system with flow control and total sampling raw exhaust gas from the exhaust pipe EP through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT in the dilution tunnel DT directed. The total flow is set P of the particulate sampling system through the tunnel with the flow controller FC3 and the sampling pump (see Figure 16). The dilution air flow is controlled by the flow controller FC2, which may use GEXH, GAIR or GFUEL as command signals, for the desired exhaust split. The sample flow into DT is the difference of the total flow and the dilution air flow. The dilution air flow rate is measured with the flow measurement device FM1, the total flow rate with the flow measurement device FM3 of the particulate sampling system (see Figure 14). The dilution ratio is calculated from these two flow rates.
Figure is 12 partial flow dilution system with flow control and fractional sampling raw exhaust gas from the exhaust pipe EP through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT in the dilution tunnel DT directed. The exhaust split and the flow rate into DT are controlled by the flow controller FC2, which adjusts the flows (or speeds) of the pressure blower PB and the suction blower SB according to. This is possible because the sample taken with the particulate sampling system in the DT is returned. GEXH, GAIR or GFUEL can be used as command signals for FC2. The dilution air flow rate is measured with the flow measurement device FM1, the total flow rate with the flow measurement device FM2. The dilution ratio is calculated from these two flow rates.
Description - figures 4 to 12 - EP: exhaust pipe the exhaust pipe may be insulated. To reduce the thermal inertia of the exhaust pipe, a thickness to diameter ratio of 0.015 or less is recommended. The use of flexible sections is to limit length to diameter ratio of 12 or less. Bends are to limit, to reduce inertia deposits to a minimum. Among the system a test bed silencer, so it can be isolated.
For an isokinetic system, the exhaust pipe from the tip of the probe from upstream at least six pipe diameters and downstream three pipe diameters must be free of elbows, bends and sudden diameter changes. The gas velocity must be higher than 10 m/s in the sampling area; This does not apply to the idle state. Pressure oscillations of the exhaust gases must not exceed ± 500 PA on average. Any measure to avoid the fluctuations in pressure, which goes beyond the use of a vehicle - exhaust system (including silencer and after-treatment system), must not alter engine performance and cause the no particle deposition.
A straight pipe is recommended for systems without isokinetic probe, upstream from the tip of the probe the six pipe diameter and downstream from this point must have the triple tube diameter.
-SP: Sampling probe (figures 6 to 12) the inside diameter must be at least 4 mm. The ratio of the diameter of the exhaust pipe and probe shall be at least four. The probe must be an open tube, which turned to the direction of flow in the axis of the exhaust pipe is attached, or must be himself described to a multiple hole probe - like under SP1 in section 1 -.
-ISP: Isokinetic sampling probe (figures 4 and 5) is the Isokinetic sampling probe facing in the axis of the exhaust pipe at a point to attach the direction of flow, where the flow described in the section of EP conditions; It is construed as meaning that a proportional sample of the raw exhaust gas is ensured. The internal diameter must be at least 12 mm.
A control system is necessary for isokinetic exhaust split is achieved by maintaining a differential pressure of zero between EP and ISP. Under these conditions, exhaust gas velocities in EP and ISP are identical, and the mass flow through ISP is a constant fraction of the exhaust gas flow. The ISP must be connected to a differential pressure transducer. The scheme with the between EP and ISP, a differential pressure of zero is reached, is the speed of the fan or the flow control.
-FD1, FD2: flow divider (Figure 9) is a pair of venturis or aperture in the exhaust pipe EP and in the transfer tube TT attached, thus a proportional sample of the raw exhaust gas is ensured. The control system consisting of two pressure control valves PCV1 and PCV2 is necessary so that a proportional breakdown by controlling pressure in the EP and DT can be carried out.
-FD3: flow divider (Figure 10)
Set tubes (multiple tube unit) is installed in the exhaust pipe EP provide a proportional sample of the raw exhaust gas. One of this tube directs exhaust to the dilution tunnel DT, the exhaust gas from the other tube flows into a damping Chamber DC. The tubes must have the same dimensions (same diameter, length, bend RADIUS); as a result, the exhaust split by the total number of tubes is dependent on. A control system is necessary so that a proportional allocation can be done by maintaining a differential pressure of zero between the confluence of the multiple tube unit into DC and the exit of TT. Under these conditions prevail proportional exhaust gas velocities in EP and FD3, and the flow in the TT is a constant fraction of the exhaust gas flow. The two points must be connected to a differential pressure transducer DPT. The establishing of a differential pressure of zero is controlled by the flow controller FC1.
-ECA: exhaust gas analyser (figures 6 to 10) it CO2 or NOx analysers may be used (with carbon balance method CO2 analyzers only). The analyzers are used to calibrate the analyzers for the measurement of gaseous emissions as well. One or several analyzers can be used to determine the concentration differences.
The measuring systems must exhibit a such accuracy that the accuracy of GEDFW, i or VEDFW, i is ± 4%.
-TT: transfer tube (figures 4 to 12) the transfer tube for the particulate sample must - as short as possible, but not more than 5 m be - have a diameter equal to the diameter of the probe or greater, but not more than 25 mm is - have exiting on the centreline of the dilution tunnel and point in the flow direction.
Pipes length are up to a meter to isolate, whose maximum Wärmeleitfähigkeit /(m × K) amounts to 0.05 W, with the thickness of the insulating layer corresponds to the diameter of the probe with a material. Pipes of more than one meter in length are to insulate and heat that the wall temperature is at least 523 K (250 ° C).
Alternatively, required the transfer tube wall temperatures can be determined also by standard calculations of heat transfer.
-DPT: 500 PA be ± differential pressure transducer (figures 4, 5 and 10) which has the largest range of differential pressure transducer.
-FC1: flow controller (figures 4, 5 and 10) is for the isokinetic systems (figures 4 and 5) a flow controller to maintain a differential pressure of zero between EP and ISP is required. The adjustment can be made as follows: a) control the speed or flow of the suction blower (SB) and maintain constant the speed of the pressure blower (PB) during each mode (Figure 4) or b) by adjusting the suction blower (SB) to a constant mass flow of the diluted exhaust and controlling the flow of the pressure blower PB, making the flow of the exhaust gas sample in an area is controlled at the end of the transfer tube (TT) (Figure 5).
In systems with controlled pressure the remaining error in the control loop must not exceed ± 3 PA. The pressure oscillations in the dilution tunnel must not exceed ± 250 Pa on average.
Multiple tube systems (Figure 10) a flow controller is required of the multiple tube unit and the exit of TT to maintain a differential pressure of zero between the outlet so that the exhaust gas flow is divided equally. The setting can be done by controlling the injection air flow rate, which flows at the outlet of TT in the DT.
-PCV1, PCV2: pressure control valves (Figure 9) two pressure control valves are for the Doppelventuri - / Double diaphragm system needed for a proportional division of power can be done by controlling the backpressure of EP and the pressure in the DT. The valves must be located downstream of SP in EP and between PB and DT.
-DC: damping Chamber (Figure 10) is at the exit of the multiple tube system to attach a damping Chamber, to hold to the pressure oscillations in the exhaust pipe EP as low as possible.
-UN: Venturi tube (Figure 8) a venturi tube in the dilution tunnel DT attaches, to create a vacuum in the range of the output of the transfer tube TT. The gas flow in the TT is determined by the momentum Exchange at the venturi and is proportional, the flow of the pressure blower PB in the bottom so that a constant dilution ratio is achieved. Since the momentum Exchange is influenced by the temperature at the exit of TT and the pressure difference between the EP and the DT, the actual dilution ratio at low load is slightly smaller than at high load.
-FC2: a flow controller may be used flow controller (figures 6, 7, 11 and 12; optional) to control the flow of the pressure blower PB and/or the suction blower SB. It can be connected to the exhaust flow or the power and/or to the CO2 or NOx differential signal transmitter.
Used a compressed air supply system (Figure 11), the FC2 directly controls the air flow.
-FM1: flow measurement device (figures 6, 7, 11 and 12) gas meter or other flow instrumentation to measure the dilution air flow. FM1 is optional if PB for the flow meter is calibrated.
-FM2: flow measurement device (Figure 12) gas meter or other flow instrumentation to measure the flow rate of the diluted exhaust gas. FM2 is optional if the suction blower SB for the flow meter is calibrated.
-PB: pressure blower (figures 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 12) can be connected to control the dilution air flow rate PB on the flow controller FC1 and FC2. A PB is not required if a butterfly valve is used. The PB is calibrated, it can be used to measure the dilution air flow.
-SB: suction blower (figures 4, 5, 6, 9, 10 and 12) only for Teilprobenahmesysteme. The SB is calibrated, it can be used to measure the flow rate of the diluted exhaust gas.
-DAF: dilution air filter (figures 4 to 12) it is recommended to filter the dilution air and so background hydrocarbons are removed by activated carbon. The dilution air must have a temperature of 298 K (25 ° C) ± 5 K.
On the manufacturer's request a dilution air sample to the determination of indoor air particles is according to good engineering practice, which can then be pulled off from the values measured in the diluted exhaust gases.
-PSP: Particulate sampling probe (figures 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 and 12) the probe forms the front section of the PTT and - must be against the current directed attached at a point approximately 10 tunnel diameters, located where the dilution air and exhaust gas are well mixed, i.e. on the centreline of the dilution tunnel DT downstream from the point, where the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel;
-must have a minimum diameter of 12 mm;
-can be heated by direct heating or by dilution air pre-heating to wall temperature does not exceed 325 k (52° C), provided that does not exceed the temperature of air prior to introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel 325 K (52 ° C);
-may be insulated.
-DT: dilution tunnel (figures 4 to 12) the dilution tunnel: - must be so long, that the exhaust gases in turbulent flow conditions can mix completely with the dilution air
-must be made of stainless steel and for dilution tunnels with a diameter of 75 mm, a relative thickness to diameter of no more than 0.025 exhibit, - with an inside diameter of up to 75 mm a nominal wall thickness of at least 1,5 mm for dilution tunnels;
-shall be at least 75 mm in diameter at a Teilprobenahmesystem;
-should have a total sampling type as at least 25 mm in diameter;
-can be heated by direct heating or by dilution air pre-heating to wall temperature does not exceed 325 k (52° C), provided that does not exceed the temperature of air prior to introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel 325 K (52 ° C);
-may be insulated.
The engine exhaust gases must be mixed thoroughly with the dilution air. At Teilprobenahmesystemen, the mixing quality is to check (at least four equally distributed measurement points) after commissioning with the engine running by means of a CO2 profile of the tunnel. A mixing orifice may be used if necessary.
Note: the ambient temperature is below 293 K (20 ° C) in the vicinity of the dilution tunnel (DT), so should be provided to avoid particle losses on the cool walls of the dilution tunnel. Therefore, we recommend a heating or insulation of the tunnel within the above specified limits.
At high engine loads the tunnel can be cooled by non-aggressive means such as a circulating fan as long as the temperature of the coolant not less than 293 K (20 ° C) - Hey: heat exchanger (figures 9 and 10) of the heat exchanger must exhibit such a performance, that the temperature at the inlet to the suction blower SB of the average operating temperature observed during the test to within ± 11 K is different.
2.1.2 full flow dilution system (Figure 13) there is a dilution system described based upon the dilution of the total exhaust using the CVS (constant volume sampling) concept. The total volume of the mixture of exhaust and dilution air must be measured. Either a PDP or a CFV system may be used.
For subsequent collection of the particulates, a sample of the dilute exhaust gas is passed through the particulate sampling system (section 2.2, figures 14 and 15). This is done directly, called single dilution. Again diluted the sample in a secondary dilution tunnel, called double dilution. The latter is useful, if the rules in relation to the filter face temperature with single dilution cannot be met. Although the double dilution system partly a dilution system, it is Figure 15 in section 2.2, described as a modification of a particulate sampling system, because it has the most typical components of a particulate sampling system.
The gaseous emissions can be determined in the dilution tunnel of a full flow dilution system. Therefore probes for the gaseous components in Figure 13 will not appear, but in the descriptions. The relevant provisions are set out in section 1.
Description - Figure 13 - EP: exhaust pipe of the exhaust pipe length from the outlet of the exhaust manifold, the turbocharger or aftertreatment device to the dilution tunnel must be not more than 10 m. All pipes with the exception of any in the exhaust system of the smoke meter are the length of the system exceeds 4 m, above this threshold to isolate. The thickness of the insulating layer must be at least 25 mm. The thermal conductivity of the insulating material, exceed measured, no more than 0.1 W /(m × K) at 673 K (400 ° C). To reduce the thermal inertia of the exhaust pipe a thickness to diameter ratio of not exceed 0.015 is recommended. The use of flexible sections shall be limited to a strength to diameter ratio of no more than 12.
Figure 13 full flow dilution system is the total amount of raw exhaust gas in the dilution tunnel DT with the dilution air are mixed.
The flow rate of the diluted exhaust is measured either with a positive displacement pump PDP or with a venturi tube with critical flow CFV. A heat exchanger HE or electronic flow compensation EFC may be used for proportional particulate sampling and for flow determination. Since particulate mass determination is based on the total flow rate of the diluted exhaust, the dilution ratio calculation is not required.
-PDP: the PDP positive displacement pump measures the total flow of the dilute exhaust flow from the number of the pump revolutions and the pump Chamber volume. The exhaust backpressure must not artificially be lowered by the PDP or dilution air inlet system. Static exhaust backpressure measured with the CVS system must remain in the static pressure kPa with a tolerance of ± 1.5 measured without connection to the CVS at identical engine speed and load.
The gas mixture temperature immediately ahead of the PDP must remain with a tolerance of ± 6 K within of the average of operating temperature observed during the test, when no flow compensation is used.
Flow compensation can only be used if the temperature at the inlet of the PDP 323 K (50 ° C) does not exceed.
-CFV: Venturi pipe with critical flow the CFV is used to measure the total flow of the dilute exhaust gas under saturation conditions (critical flow). Static exhaust backpressure measured with the CFV system operating shall remain kPa in the area of static pressure with a tolerance of ± 1.5 measured without connection to the CFV at identical engine speed and load. The gas mixture temperature immediately ahead of the CFV must be with a tolerance of ± 11 K within of the average of operating temperature observed during the test, when no flow compensation is used.
-Hey: heat exchanger (optional application of EFC) the performance of the heat exchanger must be sufficient to maintain the temperature within the limits required above.
-EFC: Electronic flow compensation (applying a Hey optional) is the temperature maintained at the inlet of the PDP or CFV, either electronic system is required for the purpose of continuous measurement of the flow rate and control of the proportional sampling in the particulate system.
Therefore the continuously measured flow rate signals are used to correct the sample flow rate through the particulate filters of the particulate sampling system (see figures 14 and 15).
-DT: dilution tunnel of the dilution tunnel: - must have a small enough in diameter to cause turbulent flow (Reynolds number greater than 4 000), and be sufficiently long so that the exhaust gases mix completely with the dilution air. A mixing orifice may be used;
-must have a minimum diameter of 75 mm;
-may be insulated.
The engine exhaust gases are at the point where it is introduced into the dilution tunnel, to create and to mix completely.
When using single dilution, a sample is taken from the dilution tunnel into the particulate sampling system (section 2.2, Figure 14). The flow capacity of the PDP or CFV must be sufficient to keep the temperature of the diluted exhaust stream directly from the primary particulate filter on less than or equal to 325 K (52° C).
When using double dilution, a sample is taken from the dilution tunnel for further dilution in the secondary tunnel and out through the sampling filters (section 2.2, Figure 15).
The flow capacity of the PDP or CFV must be sufficient to maintain the temperature of the diluted exhaust stream in the DT in the PDP on less than or equal to 464 K (191° C). The secondary dilution system must provide sufficient secondary dilution air to maintain the doubly-diluted exhaust stream immediately before the primary particulate filter at a temperature of less than or equal to 325 K (52° C).
-DAF: dilution air filter it is recommended to filter the dilution air and so background hydrocarbons are removed by activated carbon. The dilution air must have a temperature of 298 K (25 ° C) ± 5 K. At the request of the manufacturers plate a dilution air sample to the determination of indoor air particles is according to good engineering practice, which can then be pulled off from the values measured in the diluted exhaust gases.
-PSP: Particulate sampling probe the probe forms the front section of the PTT and - must be against the current directed attached at a point approximately 10 tunnel diameters, located where the dilution air and exhaust gas are well mixed, i.e. on the centreline of the dilution tunnel DT downstream from the point, where the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel;
-must have an internal diameter of at least 12 mm;
-can be heated by direct heating or by dilution air pre-heating to wall temperature does not exceed 325 k (52° C), provided that does not exceed the temperature of air prior to introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel 325 K (52 ° C);
-may be insulated.
The particulate sampling system is required for collecting the particles on the particulate filter 2.2 particulate sampling system (figures 14 and 15). In the case of partial flow dilution systems with total sampling type, in which the entire sample of the diluted exhaust gas is passed through the filter, make the dilution system (section 2.1.1, figures 7 and 11) and sampling usually a unit. In the case of partial flow or full flow dilution systems with fractional sampling where only a portion of the diluted exhaust gas is passed through the filter, are the dilution system (section 2.1.1, figures 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 and 12, as well as section 2.1.2, Figure 13) and sampling generally separate entities.
This service manual is the double dilution system (DVS, Figure 15) of a full flow dilution system as a specific modification of a typical particulate sampling system as shown in Figure 14. The double dilution system includes all important components of a particulate sampling system, such as, for example, filter holder and sampling pump, and about some characteristics of a dilution system, such as the dilution air supply and a secondary dilution tunnel.
To avoid influencing the control loops, we recommend that you allow the sampling pump during the entire testing process in operation. For the single filter method is a bypass system to use to direct the sample at desired times through the sampling filters. Interference of the switching procedure on the control loops are to limit to a minimum.
Description - figures 14 and 15 - PSP: particulate sampling probe (figures 14 and 15) the sampling probe shown in the pictures is the front section of the particulate transfer tube PTT.
The probe - must be against the current directed attached at a point approximately 10 tunnel diameters, located where the dilution air and exhaust gas are well mixed, i.e. on the centreline of the dilution tunnel DT of the dilution system (see section 2.1) downstream from the point, where the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel;
-must have an internal diameter of at least 12 mm;
-can be heated by direct heating or by dilution air pre-heating to wall temperature does not exceed 325 k (52° C), provided that does not exceed the temperature of air prior to introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel 325 K (52 ° C);
-
can be isolated.
Figure 14 particulate sampling system a sample of the diluted exhaust gas is taken using the sampling pump P through the particulate sampling probe PSP and the particulate transfer tube PTT from the dilution tunnel DT of a partial flow or full flow dilution system. The sample is passed through the filter holder (s) FH, in which (where) the particulate sampling filters are included. The sample flow rate is controlled by the flow controller FC3.
When using the electronic flow compensation EFC (see Figure 13) of the diluted exhaust gas flow is used as command signal for FC3.
Figure 15 is dilution system (full flow system only) a sample of the diluted exhaust gas flow through the particulate sampling probe PSP and the particulate transfer tube PTT from the dilution tunnel DT of a full flow dilution system to the secondary dilution tunnel SDT and diluted there again. Then the sample is passed filter holder (s) through which the particulate sampling filters (which) are included. The dilution air flow rate is usually constant whereas the sample flow rate with the flow controller FC3 is regulated. When using the electronic flow compensation EFC (see Figure 13), of the total diluted exhaust gas flow is used as command signal for FC3.
-PTT: be particulate transfer tube (figures 14 and 15) that particulate transfer tube must not exceed 1 020 mm long; its length can be kept as low as possible. Dimensions affect the portion of the probe--the partial-flow dilution system with fractional sampling type and the full flow simple dilution system up to the filter holder;
-the partial flow dilution system with total sampling type the part of the end of the dilution tunnel to the filter holder;
-with the full flow double dilution system the part of the probe to the secondary dilution tunnel.
The transfer tube - can be heated by direct heating or by dilution air pre-heating to wall temperature does not exceed 325 k (52° C), provided that does not exceed the temperature of air prior to introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel 325 K (52 ° C);
-may be insulated.
-SDT: secondary dilution tunnel (Figure 15) the secondary dilution tunnel should have a minimum diameter of 75 mm and be long enough that the doubly-diluted sample at least 0.25 seconds lingers. The main filter FH holder must be located in not more than 300 mm of the exit of the SDT.
The secondary dilution tunnel: - can be heated by direct heating or by dilution air pre-heating to wall temperature does not exceed 325 k (52° C), provided that does not exceed the temperature of air prior to introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel 325 K (52 ° C);
-may be insulated.
-University of applied sciences: for the main and back-up filter, filter holder (figures 14 and 15) may be used either a single filter holder or separate filter holder. The provisions of part II, Appendix 1, section 5.1.3 must be kept.
The filter holder - can be heated by direct heating or by dilution air pre-heating to wall temperature does not exceed 325 k (52° C), provided that does not exceed the temperature of 325 K (52 ° C);
-can be isolated.
-P sampling pump (figures 14 and 15) the particulate sample pump must be distant from the tunnel so that the inlet gas temperature is maintained constant (± 3 K), if no flow correction by FC3 is done.
-DP: dilution air pump (Figure 15) (only for full flow double dilution) the dilution air pump is arranged so that the secondary dilution air with a temperature of 298 K (25 ° C) ± 5 K is supplied.
-FC3: flow controller (figures 14 and 15) accordingly to achieve is to a compensation of the particulate sample flow temperature and pressure fluctuations in the sample path, if no other funding is available, a flow controller to use. Application of the electronic flow compensation EFC (see Figure 13) a flow controller is regulation.
-FM3: flow measurement device (figures 14 and 15) (particulate sample flow) the gas or liquid flow meter must be so far from the sample pump be, that the inlet gas temperature remains constant (± 3 K), if no flow correction by FC3.
-FM4: flow measurement device (Figure 15) (dilution air, full flow double dilution only) the gas or liquid flow meter must be so arranged, keep the temperature of the inlet gas at 298 K (25 ° C) ± 5 K.
-BV: ball valve (optional) the diameter of the ball valve must be not less than the inside diameter of the sampling tube and a switching time must be less than 0.5 seconds.
Note: the ambient temperature is in the vicinity of PSP, PTT, SDT, and FH less than 239 K (20 ° C), so to avoid particle losses on the cool wall of these parts to. Therefore, it is recommended to heat up these parts within the limits specified in the appropriate descriptions or isolate. It is also recommended, to drop the filter face temperature during sampling not below 293 K (20 ° C).
At high engine loads, the above parts can be cooled by non-aggressive means such as a circulating fan, as long as the temperature of the cooling medium is not below 293 K (20 ° C).
Service instruction No. 17 functional fire alarm system (section 10.03 b No. 3, § 15.11 no. 17 and section 22 b. 11 no. 1 of annex II) fire alarm systems are regarded as appropriate, if they meet the following conditions.
0 components 0.1 fire alarm systems consist of a) fire alarm system, b) fire indicator system, c) Control Panel, as well as the external energy supply.
0.2 the fire alarm system can be divided into one or more sections of the fire.
0.3 can have one or more display units the fire indicator system.
0.4 the control panel is the central control of the fire alarm system. There are also parts of fire indicator system (display device).
A fire alarm section can have one or more fire alarm 0.5.
0.6 fire alarms can be executed as a) heat detectors, b) smoke detector, c) Ion Detector, d) Flame detectors, e) combination alarm (fire, of two or more of the alarms referred to in 1(a) to (d) consisting of a combination).
Fire detectors that respond to other factors displayed the beginning of fire, may be admitted by the Commission of inquiry, provided that not less than the fire referred to in letters a to e are sensitive.
(0.7 fire detector can a) with b) be carried out without individual identification.
1. building regulations 1.1 General 1.1.1 prescribed fire alarm systems must be always ready for use.
1.1.2 the fire required according to section 2.2 must be automatically. Additional manual fire detectors may be installed.
1.1.3 the system with accessories must be designed to withstand charging voltage fluctuations and surges, changes in the surrounding temperature, vibration, humidity, shock, shocks and corrosion, which typically occur on vehicles.
1.2 1.2.1 energy energy sources and electrical circuits, which are necessary for the operation of the fire alarm system must be self-monitoring. An optical and acoustic alarm signal on the Control Panel must be raised when an error occurs that differs by a fire alarm signal.
1.2.2 there must be at least two sources of energy for the electric part of the fire alarm system, of which a source must be an emergency power system (emergency power source and emergency switchboard). There must be two separate feeds intended solely for this purpose. These must lead arranged automatic switch to one in or close to the control panel for the fire alarm system. On day trip vessels with fiber optic up to 25 m and on motor vessels, its own emergency power source is sufficient.
1.3 fire alarm system 1.3.1 fire detector must be summarized in fire alarm sections.
1.3.2 fire alarm systems may not be used for any other purpose. Deviating may closing the doors be raised according to article 15.11 no. 8 and similar functions on the control panel and displayed on this.
1.3.3 fire alarm systems must be so designed that the first displayed fire alarm does not prevent further fire alarms by other fire alarms.
The fire alarm system includes 1.4 fire alarm sections 1.4.1 no remote portable fire individual identification, so a fire alarm section must not be more than one deck to monitor. Excluded from this is a fire alarm section that monitors a pit stairs.
The number of closed areas in every fire alarm section must be limited to avoid delays in the discovery of the Fire hearth. More than fifty closed rooms in a fire sign section are not permitted.
The fire alarm system includes a remote portable fire individual identification, so the fire alarm sections may monitor multiple decks and an arbitrary number of closed rooms.
A fire alarm section shall be according to article 15.11, no. 10 include formed area a 1.4.2 on passenger ships, which have no fire alarm system with remote communicable fire individual identification. The response to a fire alarm in a single cabin in this fire registration area must trigger a Visual and audible signal underway before this cabin.
1.4.3 must make their own fire alarm sections kitchens, engine and boiler rooms.
1.5 1.5.1 fire
Heat, smoke, or ion detectors must be used as a fire alarm. Fire detectors may be used only in addition.
1.5.2 fire detectors must be tested.
1.5.3 all automatic fire detectors must be such that they can be reviewed and reinstated for normal monitoring without replacement of a component for proper functioning.
1.5.4 smoke detectors must be adjusted so that they appeal to a smoke-induced damping of the brightness per metre of more than 2% to 12.5%. Smoke detector built into kitchens, engine and boiler rooms must address within sensitivity limits, which meet the requirements of the ship Investigation Commission, with under - or sensitivity of smoke detectors must be avoided.
1.5.5 heat detectors must be adjusted so that when temperature rise rates of less than 1 ° C / min talk at temperatures of more than 54° C to 78° C.
At higher rates of temperature rise of heat detectors must address within temperature limits, where an under - or hypersensitivity of the heat detector is avoided.
The permissible operating temperature of the heat detector 1.5.6 with the approval of the Commission of inquiry can be increased to 30 ° C above the maximum temperature in the upper part of the space from engine - and boiler rooms.
1.5.7 the sensitivity of the flame detector must be sufficient to determine flame against a lighted background of space. In addition, flame detector must be equipped with a system for the detection of false readings.
1.6 fire alarm system and Control Panel 1.6.1 must trigger a Visual and audible fire alarm signals the activation of a fire alarm in the control panel and display devices.
1.6.2 the control panel and the display device must be arranged at one point occupied continuously by the vessel's personnel. A display device must be located in the wheelhouse.
1.6.3 the display devices must show at least the fire alarm section, in which a fire has become effective.
1.6.4 on or next to any display device must appear unequivocal information about the monitored rooms and the location of the fire alarm sections.
2 installation instructions 2.1 fire alarm must be positioned so that an optimum functioning is guaranteed. Bodies found near beams and ventilation ducts or other places where air currents could affect the performance of, and places where shocks or mechanical damage are likely, must be avoided.
2.2 In general fire alarms are located on the ceiling must be at least 0.5 metres from the Scots. The greatest distance between the fire alarms and Scots must comply with the following table: type of fire detector largest floor area per fire detector largest distance between the fire detectors largest distance of the fire by the Scots heat 37 m2 9 m 4.5 m smoke 74 m2 11 m 5.5 m who can Commission of inquiry on based experiments, which demonstrate the characteristics of the detector, for other distances or allow.
2.3 laying belonging to the fire alarm system wiring by machine and boiler rooms or other fire-prone areas is not allowed, unless this is required for the fire detection from these spaces or to connect to the appropriate power supply.
3. test 3.1 fire alarm systems need a) after installation, b) regularly, at least every two years, will be checked by an expert. For machinery and boiler rooms, this testing takes place under changing machine operation and ventilation conditions.
3.2 the assessment is a certificate signed by the Inspector to be, indicating the date of inspection should.
Service instruction No. 18 proof of buoyancy, trim position and stability of separate parts of the ship (§ 22a. 05 no. 2 i. V. m. the articles 22.02 and 22.03 of annex II) 1.
A proof of the buoyancy, trim position and stability according to § is 22 05 no. 2 a letter of a separate ship parts to assume that both parts were previously partially discharged or unloaded or but backed up the excellent addition about the hatch coaming container in a suitable manner to prevent slipping.
2. for each of the two parts are therefore at calculating after article 22.03 (boundary conditions and calculation method for the stability detection during transport of secured containers) to comply with the following requirements: - the metacentric height MG shall not be less than 0.50 m, - a residual safety clearance of 100 mm must be present - the speed to consider is 7 km/h, - as wind pressure is to be 0.01 t / m2.
3. the angle of inclination (≤ 5°) the according to § 22a 05 no. 2 does not need to be kept separate ship parts, since this - has been prescribed for unsecured containers derived from the coefficient of friction -.
The krängende lever free liquid surfaces is no. 1 according to the formula in section 22.02 letter e.
4. the requirements according to paragraphs 2 and 3 as a met, if for each of the two parts the stability requirements under the regulation concerning the carriage of dangerous goods on the Rhine (ADNR) at 9.1.0.95.2. are respected.
5. proof of the stability of the separate parts of the ship can be done under the assumption of homogeneous loading because these - if not previously present - before the separation can be made or but the ship unloaded largely will be.
Service instruction No. 19 replacement engines (§ 24.02 No. 2 and article 24.06 No. 5 to chapter 8a of annex II) 1 General introduction according to article 24.02 No. 2 and article 24.06 No. 5 the provisions of chapter 8a do not apply to replacement engines, until December 31, 2011 aboard ships that were on January 1, 2002, in operation, will be installed. After the footnotes listed to these regulations, a replacement engine is a used, repaired motor, which is similar to the engine replaced in terms of power, speed and installation conditions.
2. for further explanation is a replacement engine, if a) demonstrated, that the motor is; built before January 1, 2002
b) demonstrated, that the motor has been in use and has been repaired;
(c) the engine of the same design as the original engine is (series motor, V-motor);
(d) the motor has the same number of cylinders as the original engine;
(e) the rated power of the engine differs no more than 10% of the original engine;
(f) the rated speed of the engine differs no more than 10% of the original engine.
Service instruction No. 20 equipment for vessels that comply with the standard S1 or S2 (§ 23.09 of annex II) 1 General introduction to article 23.09 No. 1 of annex II must ships which should be driven with minimum crew (standard S1 and S2), comply with the rules listed in this provision. After article 23.09, no. 1 confirmed the Commission of inquiry in the certificate that the ship complies with these regulations.
These regulations is additional equipment requirements that apply in addition to the requirements, a ship must match, so that the certificate is issued. Provisions of article 23.09, which could be interpreted differently, are described in the present instructions. Accordingly, the provisions of article 23.09 are no. 1 of in annex II to be interpreted as follows: 2. § 23.09 No. 1.1 2.1 letter a - drive systems has a ship over a direct reversible main engine, to the compressed air system, which is required for the reverse of the direction of thrust, a) either be held continuously by an independent regulatory compressor under pressure or b) after an alarm in the wheelhouse with a unit , which can be started from the steering station, used under pressure. This unit has a separate fuel tank, this tank - in accordance with section 8.05 must have no 13 - a Füllstandswarneinrichtung in the wheelhouse.
2.2 letter b - level of the main engine room bilges the debug control plant is required to comply with the maneuvering requirements of Chapter 5, applies the space of bug control system as the main engine room.
2.3 letter c - automatic fuel supply 2.3.1 the drive system has a day tank, must a) whose content ensure the operation of the drive unit during 24 hours, with a consumption of 0.25 litres per kW per hour assumed is, b) the fuel supply pump for refilling of the day tanks be continuously operated or c) this with - a switch which automatically switches the fuel supply pump at a certain low level of the day tank and - a switch , which with a filled day tank the fuel supply pump enters equipped be.
The day tank must have 2.3.2 on an level alarms that meet the requirement no. 13 after section 8.05.
2.4 letter d - no special effort for the control device hydraulically powered steering systems meet this requirement. Manually powered steering systems may require no effort by more than 160 N to their activity.
2.5 letter e - required visual and acoustic signals when driving to the markers belong to the Rhine navigation police regulations not cylinders, balls, cones and bicones.
2.6 letter f - direct communication and understanding with the engine room 2.6.1 direct communication is ensured, if a)
between the wheelhouse and control position a direct visual contact is possible winches and bollards on the forward or aft, and also the distance from the wheelhouse to this operation stands is no more than 35 m and b) the apartment directly from the wheelhouse is accessible from.
2.6.2 communication with the engine room deemed guaranteed, if in section 7.09 No. 3 sentence 2 called signal separately switch referred to in no. 2 can be actuated from the in section 7.09.
2.7 i - drive letter and similar revolving parts include: a) hand operated windlasses (the force when suspended anchors deemed highest effort);
b) cranks for lifting doors;
(c) cranking on fattening and chimney winds.
Does not include: a) Verhol - and coupling winches.
(b) cranks of cranes, as far as these are not intended for ship's boats are.
2.8 letter m - ergonomic layout the regulations shall be deemed, if a) the wheelhouse according to the European standard DIN EN 1864:2008 is set up or b) the wheelhouse is set up so that a single person can control the ship with radar assistance, or c) the wheelhouse meets the following requirements: aa) the instrumentation and controls are located in the front line of sight and in an arc of at most 180 ° (90 ° to starboard and port side 90 °) , including floor and ceiling. You must be legible and clearly visible from the spot where the helmsman usually is.
BB) the most important controls such as steering wheel or lever, engine controls, radio control, operation of the acoustic signals and the encounter characters required according to national or international shipping police regulations must be, that the distance between the to starboard and the controls arranged to port is not more than 3 m. It must be possible that the helmsman operated the engines without letting go of the operation of the control device and can also still use the other controls, such as the radiotelephone installation, the acoustic signals and the encounter characters required according to national or international shipping police regulations.
CC) the operation of encounter characters necessary according to national or international shipping police regulations while driving is done electrically, pneumatically, hydraulically or mechanically. By way of derogation, a control using a pull wire is only allowed, if this operation is certainly possible from the steering station.
3. § 23.09 No. 1.2 individually 3.1 letter a - engine ship motor vessels that are suitable according to of the vessel certificate to the slide, however a) have no hydraulic or electric powered coupling winches or b) whose hydraulically or electrically driven coupling winches according to section 3.3 of these service instructions do not meet the requirements, obtained the standard S2 as individually moving motor ships.
The comment "Standard S2 does not apply to the pushing motor vessel" is entered in paragraph 47 of the vessel certificate.
3.2 letter c - flotilla motor vessels that are suitable and with hydraulically or electrically driven clutch winds that meet the requirements of section 3.3 of this service manual are equipped, have however no own bug-blasting machine, according to of the vessel certificate to push get the standard S2 as a motor ship that moved a flotilla. The comment "Standard S2 does not apply to the individual motor ship" is entered in paragraph 47 of the vessel certificate.
3.3 letter (c) sentence 1 and 2(d) set 1 - special winches or equivalent facilities to tension the ropes (coupling devices) here required coupling facilities are according to article 16.01 minimum prescribed number 2 facilities which serve and meet the following requirements in accordance with service instruction No. 3, section 2.1 and 2.2 (longitudinal joints) to withstanding the coupling forces: a) the institution makes the clamping force required for the coupling purely mechanically.
(b) the operating parts of the institution is located on the device itself. By way of derogation, a remote control is approved, when -, who operated the establishment, has a full unobstructed view of the facility from its control position;
-at this stage of the operation a device is available, which prevents accidental operation.
-the institution has an emergency stop device.
(c) the establishment has a braking device, which takes effect immediately when the operating device is released, or if the power fails.
(d) the clutch wire rope must resolve manually after a drive failure.
3.4 letter (c) sentence 2 and 3(d) set 2 - operation the bug blasting machine control device of the bug blasting machine must be firmly installed in the wheelhouse. The requirements of § 7.04 are no. 8 to comply. The wiring to control the bug blasting machine must be firmly fitted to the bow of the pushing motor vessel or vessel.
3.5 letter e - equivalent manoeuvrability equivalent manoeuvrability ensures a propulsion system, consisting of a) an extra screw drive and at least two independent drive units of similar capacity, b) at least a Zykloidalpropeller, c) at least one rudder propellers or d) is at least a 360 ° water jet propulsion.
Service instruction No. 21 requirements for safety management systems (paragraph 15.06 No. 7 and § 22 b. 10 point d of annex II) 1 General 1.1 according to the above provisions appropriate security systems must exist on passenger ships and fast ships to make evident the escape routes and emergency exits, if the effectiveness of the normal emergency because of smoke is restricted. Such security systems must be designed as a ground-level security systems. This service instruction relates to the approval, installation, and the maintenance of these security systems.
1.2 in addition must bear the escape routes, including stairs, exits and emergency exits, no. 3 for emergency lighting according to section 15.10 in their entire history, especially at corners and intersections, with a safety control system.
1.3. the safety management system must be working at least thirty minutes after activation.
1.4 products from safety management systems may be either radioactive or toxic.
1.5 explanation of the safety management system must in addition to the safety plan according to article 15.13 No. 2 and be installed in each cabin.
2. definitions 2.1 ground-level security control systems (low-location lighting - LLL): electric lighting or photoluminescent signs along the escape routes, so that all escape routes are easily identifiable.
2.2 of long after lights end system (PL): security guidance from long luminous material. These materials contain a chemical product (example: zinc sulfide), which is able to save energy in lighting visible radiation. The long after glowing materials emit light that becomes visible when the ambient light source loses its effectiveness. There is no light source that is required for a further suggestion, the long after luminous materials play off the accumulated energy in form of light emissions, which weaken over time.
2.3 electric gespeistes system (EP): use security system that requires electrical energy for its operation, such as systems, light bulbs, light-emitting diodes, Electroluminescent tapes or lamps, fluorescent lamps, etc..
3. corridors and stairs 3.1 in all gears LLL must be uninterrupted, apart from the interruptions from corridors or doors, so that results in a visible guidance along the escape route. LLL, which conform to an international standard and include a visible but not continuous guidance, can also be used. The Guide mark should be provided at least on one side of the aisle: located on the wall not more than 0.3 m above the ground or floor not more than 0,15 m from the wall. In tunnels, which are about 2 m, the leading marking on both sides must be provided.
3.2 in dead ends, LLL at intervals of not more than 1 m with arrows or equivalent physicians of direction of should be provided, pointing in the direction of escape.
3.3 on all stairs, LLL at least on a page is to bring no more than 0.3 m above the levels. It must make the position of each level for a person located above or below this level. For stair widths over 2 m, LLL on both sides is to install. Each landing is to mark that beginning and end can be seen.
4. doors lead 4.1 which low-level control marking must to handle of the exit door. To avoid confusion, so other doors may not be marked.
4.2 If doors in parting surfaces No. 5 are designed as sliding doors in bulkheads and no. 2 after paragraph 15.11 according to article 15.02, the opening direction must be marked.
5. signs and markings 5.1 the directions for the marking of escape routes must be made long after the bright material or electric light. The dimensions of the labels and markings must be adapted to the LLL.
5.2 at all outputs, corresponding signs are to install. These signs are also in the mentioned area on the side of the doors to install, where the handle is.
5.3 all signs must form a contrast to the backgrounds (wall or floor).
5.4
For the LLL are standardized symbols (for example, those who die in the decision of A. 760 (18) IMO describes) to use.
6 systems 6.1 which width of long after the bright bands must be long after lights end at least 0.075 m. By way of derogation from even narrower photoluminescent tapes can be used if its luminance is increased accordingly, to compensate for the missing width.
6.2 long after lights end must afterglow materials 10 minutes after failure of all external lighting sources with a luminance of at least 15 mcd/m2. The system must have then another 20 minutes of 2 mcd/m2 a luminance.
6.3 all substances of a long after radiant system must accommodate at least the minimum amount of surrounding light, which is required to sufficiently charge long after the bright fabrics, so that they can meet the above requirements to the luminance.
7 electrically powered systems 7.1 electric-powered systems must be connected emergency power source required by no. 4 to the after section 15.10, so that they can be supplied under normal circumstances by the main power source and when the emergency power source is switched on by the emergency source of power. To enable the assessment of the capacity of the emergency source of power, the electrically powered systems must be used on the list of the consumer in case of emergency.
7.2 electrically fed systems must can be activated either automatically or be activated with one hand from the steering station.
7.3 in the case of installation of electrically powered systems the following standards for the luminance is required: 1 the active parts of electrically powered systems have a luminance of at least 10 cd/m2 exhibit.
2. each source of systems with miniature light bulbs must have an average spherical luminous intensity of at least 150 mcd, whereby the distance between the individual lamps must be no more than 0.1 m.
3. the individual sources of systems with light-emitting diodes must have a peak strength of at least 35 mcd. The angle of the light cone, where the light intensity is only half as big, must be adapted to the expected approach and direction. The distance between the individual lamps must be not more than 0.3 m.
4. the Luminiscence systems must function after failure of the power source, to which they must be connected according to section 7.1, still 30 minutes further.
7.4 all electrically powered systems must be so designed that the failure of a single light source, a single band of lights or a single battery does not defeat the markings.
7.5 electrically fed systems shall meet the provisions of section 9.20 with regard to vibration testing and thermal testing. By way of derogation from section 9.20 No. 2 letter c heat testing at a reference temperature of 40 ° C is possible.
7.6 electrically fed systems must meet the requirements of section 9.21 with regard to electromagnetic compatibility.
7.7 electrically fed systems according to IEC 60529:1992 a minimum degree of protection IP 55 have.
8. check the luminance of the LLL must be checked by an expert at least once every five years. The assessment is a certificate signed by the experts to be, showing the date of inspection. The luminance in a single measurement does not meet the requirements this service manual, are measurements in at least 10 places same distance to carry out. Meet not the requirements of this service manual, over 30% of the measurements the security systems need to be replaced. The safety systems in the course are 20 to 30% of the measurements do not satisfy this service manual, to re-examine a year.
Service instruction No. 22 taking into account the specific safety needs of persons with reduced mobility (§ 1.01 no. 90, § 15.01 no. 4, article 15.06 No. 3 to 5, 9, 10, 13 and 17, § Aug 15 No. 3, section 15.10 No. 3 and section 15.13 No. 1 to 4 of annex II) 1 Introduction persons with reduced mobility have security requirements that go beyond those of other passengers. These needs will be taken into account by the requirements in chapter 15, which will be explained below.
These requirements are to ensure that persons with restricted mobility safely staying aboard ships and can move. In addition a comparable level of security should be offered in the event of an emergency situation basically these people as other passengers.
It is not necessary that all passenger areas meet the specific security needs of persons with reduced mobility. Therefore, the requirements apply only in certain areas. However the opportunity must be the persons concerned, to inform, so that they can accordingly make your stay on Board about the expansion of the areas especially decorated for them from safety point of view. It is the responsibility of the owner of the vessel to hold the corresponding areas, identify and communicate the persons with reduced mobility.
The regulations with respect to the persons with reduced mobility orient themselves — the Directive 2003/24/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 14 April 2003 amending Directive 98/18/EC of the Council on safety rules and standards for passenger ships and - the Guide to the domestic ferry facilities for disabled in accordance with the resolution No. 25 of the UN Economic Commission for Europe.
The definition of "Persons with reduced mobility" used in annex II is largely identical with those of the directive, most of the technical requirements from the Guide. Therefore, both rules can be used to make decisions in cases of doubt. Overall policy and guideline however exceed in their requirements those set out in annex II.
The requirements of annex II concern not investors and similar facilities. Subject to national rules.
2. § 1.01 no 90 - definition of "Persons with reduced mobility" persons with reduced mobility are those who can not move due to his own physical limitations or to perceive their environment as other passengers. These include people with vision or hearing or persons accompanying children that are carried or worn in stroller. Within the meaning of those provisions, persons with reduced mobility not however are those with mental limitations.
3. section 15.01 no. 4 - General provisions: areas, areas that are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility extend in the simplest case by the entrance to the authorities in case of an emergency evacuation is intended. You must - include a place where life-saving are impounded or in case of emergency be issued, - seats - a similarly renovated toilet (section 10 of this service manual), as well as - the connection paths between them.
The number of seats should be at least roughly the number of people with reduced mobility which, seen over a longer period of time - are more common at the same time on board. The number is set by the owner due to his experience, because it is beyond the knowledge of the Commission of inquiry.
Also on cabin vessels are pathways to the passenger cabins, which are used by persons with reduced mobility be taken into account. The number of these booths is to be determined by the ship owners in the same way as the number of seats. Requirements to the special fitting out of cabins - not be except for the width of the doors -. It is the responsibility of the owner to take necessary further precautions.
Sentence 2 of the regulation is worded identically with section 24.04 no. 4, only based on taking into account the specific safety needs of persons with reduced mobility. Therefore, it is to proceed with their application equally. Should the recommendations call for alternative measures that may be this particular organizational type.
4. § 15.06 No 3 letter g - outputs of spaces in the requirements for the width of connecting corridors, exits and openings in Schanzkleidern or railings, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility or usually for on or off the boat go used by persons with reduced mobility, carrying of prams is also considered as the fact , that people on different types of walking aids or wheelchairs may be instructed. Outputs or openings for that go on or off the boat is the increased space required for any necessary support staff also invoice.
5. § 15.06 No. 4 letter d - doors the requirements for the design of the channel by doors which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, allow that people who rely on walking AIDS, can safely open these doors.
6 § 15.06 No. 5 letter c – connecting corridors see the comments to section 4 of these instructions.
7 § 15.06 No. 9 - stairs and lifts the requirements for the design of stairs take into account in addition to a possible limited movement ability also limitations of vision.
8.
§ 15.06 No. 10 letter a and b - bulwarks, railing requirements bulwarks and railings of decks, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, a larger amount before, because these people rather be in a situation where you can lose your balance or does not hold itself.
See also the comments on section 4 of this service statement.
9 § 15.06 No. 13 - traffic areas to persons with reduced mobility for various reasons more often support or adherence to equipped walls in traffic areas, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, which is why with handrails at an appropriate height are.
See also the comments on section 4 of this service statement.
10 § 15.06 No 17 - toilets even on the toilet should persons with reduced mobility to safely stop and move accordingly here is why at least a toilet.
11 § 15.08 No. 3 letter a and b - burglar alarm people with reduced mobility can rather get into situations where they are dependent on help of others. In areas where they do not can be seen in normally by the crew, the crew members or passengers, so the possibility of an alarm must be provided. This applies to toilets, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility.
Persons with restricted mobility are also those with limited sight or hearing. The the system for alerting the passengers - at least in the areas, which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility - must take account of by appropriate optical and acoustic signalling.
12 section 15.10 No. 3 letter d - adequate lighting persons with restricted mobility are also those with restricted vision. Adequate lighting of areas which are intended for use by persons with reduced mobility is therefore essential and must comply with generally higher requirements as a lighting for other passenger areas.
13 § 15.13 No. 1 - security role the to be included in the security role specific security measures, which are required for persons with reduced mobility, must enter a possible limited movement ability as well as limitations of hearing and vision. For these people, including those for the normal operation must be considered in addition to the measures in the event of an emergency.
14 § No. 2 - security plan that are areas according to section 3 of this service manual mark 15.13.
15 § 15.13 No. 3 letter b - application of security role and security plan at least the copies of the security role and the security plan, the for use by persons with reduced mobility provided for in sections are attached, must be designed that they can be read even if possible, of persons with impaired vision. This can be achieved E.g. by appropriate choice of contrast and font size.
There are also plans at a height to install, where it can be read even by wheelchair.
16 no. 4 - rules of conduct for passengers the comments to section 15 of this service statement shall apply mutatis mutandis § 15.13.
Service instruction No. 23 map of the intended use of the motor to the type-approval and special purposes of the motor (motor applications) (§§ 8a.03, 8a.11 and system J i. V. m. § 8a.07, service instruction No. 16 of annex II) to section 8a.02 an engine that is installed in a vehicle or machinery on board, if he exceeds a certain rating must no. 3 and not covered by relevant legislation , have a type approval, certifying compliance with the provisions of chapter 8a.
Type-approval is to apply for according to § 8a.03 and grant by the competent authority according to the procedure according to § 8a.04.
According to § 8a.07, an equivalent type-approval according to Directive 97/68/EC can be recognized.
section 8a.11 contains provisions for the testing of engines.
Because engines can be used for different purposes, both in annex II, Appendix J as appointed in the directive 97/68/EC in several places and in accordance with the supplementary provisions, the directive serves as guidance for the implementation of these provisions. The following table lists the essential requirements to be taken into account.
 
Sites annex II Directive 97/68/EC complementary testing system J part I no. 3 and service statement No. 16 Annex I no. 4 intended use system J part II No. 0.4 system J part III No. 0.4 system J part VIII annex II No. 0.4 Annex VII No. 0.4 the allocation number of the type-approval system J part IV section 3 Annex VIII section 2 in conjunction with annex III section 3.7 this service manual shows in the first part of the mapping of the Purpose of the engine (engine application) to the test specifications and test cycles according to the type-approval procedure and a second part contains provisions for special motor applications.
Part I map of the purpose of the engine (engine application) to the type-approval which is mapping of the purpose of the engine (engine application) to the test specifications and test cycles according to type-approval procedures to undertake on the basis of the following table.
Motor application legal engine category limit level testing Vorschrift(2) cycle ISO 8178 vehicle home and vehicle auxiliary drive engines with propeller characteristics I Richtlinie(1) V IIIA C(3) E3 annex IIO - I, II(4) - E3 vehicle main drive motors with constant speed (including plants with diesel-electric propulsion and constant speed propeller) II directive V IIIA C(3) E2 annex II - I, II(4) - E2 auxiliary engines with constant speed III directive V IIIA B D2 H , I, J, K D, E, F, G, II II - I, annex II(4) - D2 of variable speed and variable load IV directive V IIIA A C1 H, I, J, K L, M, N, P IIIB Q, R IV annex II - I, II(4) - C1 (1) Directive 97/68/EC.
(2) specification of Directive 97/68/EC annex III, section 3.7.1 (3) which engine application "Vehicle main drive with constant speed" or "Vehicle drive with propeller characteristics" must be specified in the type approval certificate.
(4) the limits of stage II of annex II to apply pursuant to decision 2003-II-27 of the Central Commission for the navigation of the Rhine as of 1 July 2007 part II provisions for engines with special uses (motor applications) 1 engines, which are provided in the operation on board for more than a motor application a) auxiliary engines, which power machines, the both require the motor application III also IV of the table in part I of this regulation , must have a type-approval for each application according to this table.
(b) main drive motors, which in addition propel machines, must have only the necessary for the type of main drive type-approval in accordance with the table in part I of this regulation, unless the ship's drive is the main application of the motor. The time of next door twist is more than 30%, of the motor next to the type-approval of application of main drive must have also a type-approval for the next door twist.
2. bug Jet a) direct or driven generator with variable speed and load bug Jet Propulsion are associate I or IV of the table in part I of this regulation to the motor applications.
(b) bug jet propulsion, which are powered by a generator with constant speed, are associate II, III or IV of the table in part I of this regulation to the motor applications.
3. Leistungsgeminderte motors which have engines with the rating certified in the type-approval documentation, II, Appendix J of part I should be specified on the motor with the marking referred to in annex, to be installed. Must not necessarily power units or machines of same power consumption. The power can be reduced by engine-external measures on the capacity required for the application.
Service instruction No. 24 suitable gas warning device (section 15.15 No.9 of annex II) 1.
According to article 24.02 No. 2 and article 24.06 No. 5 (each transitional provisions to paragraph 15.01 no. 2 letter e may liquid gas systems for household purposes on existing passenger vessels up to the first extension of the ship's certificate after the 1.1.2045 only provided further be operated that a gas warning device there is no. 9 after paragraph 15.15.) According to § 15.15 No. 9 may in the future also admitted for the first time to transport passenger ships, the length of which does not exceed 45 m, liquid gas systems for household purposes are incorporated, if such a warning system is installed at the same time.
2. after paragraph 24.02 No. 2 and article 24.06 No. 5 (each transitional provisions to paragraph 15.15 No. 9) this gas warning devices in the first renewal of the certificate must be installed according to § 14.15.
3. a gas warning system consists of sensors, a device and cables. It is considered suitable, if it meets at least the following requirements.
3.1 request to the system (instrument, sensors, pipes) 3.1.1 that warning must at the latest be reach or exceed one of the following values: a) 10% lower explosive limit (LEL) of a propane-air mixture and b) 30 ppm CO (carbon monoxide).
3.1.2 the time until the triggering of the alarm system shall not exceed 20 s.
3.1.3 the settings that trigger the alert section 3.1.1 and that determine the time after section 3.1.2 may cannot be changed.
3.1.4 measuring gas production must be designed so that an interruption or obstruction is detected. A corruption must by measuring gas loss or air entry because of leaks are prevented or detected and reported.
3.1.5 the devices must be designed for temperatures from-10 to 40 ° C and 20 to 100% relative humidity.
3.1.6 the gas warning system self-monitoring and such be that an unauthorized switching off is not possible.
3.1.7 from the on-board power supply are powered gas warning devices against power failure to buffer. Battery-powered equipment must be fitted with a display for the drop of the battery voltage.
The device consists of evaluation and display unit 3.2 requirements for the device 3.2.1.
The alarm when reaching or exceeding must letter a and b specified limits in section 3.1.1 optically and acoustically occur 3.2.2 in the monitored room, in the wheelhouse or somewhere else constantly occupied. It must be clearly visible and clearly audible under operating conditions with the largest equity noise. It must differ from all other acoustic and optical signal character in the room to be protected. The acoustic alarm must be clearly audible even with connection doors closed before the entrances and in the adjacent rooms. The audible alarm can be switched off after tripping. The optical alarm can go out only if the values referred to in section 3.1.1 below.
3.2.3 it must be possible, the messages for reaching or exceeding the in section 3.1.1 letter a and b specified limits separately to detect and unique to.
3.2.4 If the device is a special condition (start-up, fault, calibration, configuration, maintenance, etc.), must be shown this. Errors of the entire system or individual components must be displayed with optical and acoustic alarms, where the audible alarm can be switched off after tripping. The optical alarm may go out but only after elimination of the fault.
3.2.5 have the possibility to spend various messages to (special conditions limits), it must be possible to identify them separately and clearly associate. If necessary, a composite signal must show that not all messages can be issued. In this case the messages must appear primarily starting with the highest safety relevance. The display of non-common messages must be possible on push of a button. The ranking must be apparent from the documentation of the device.
3.2.6 the devices must be so designed that an unauthorized intervention is not possible.
3.2.7 when all used signalling and alarm equipment must be controlled the control element of the alarm and the indicator device outside of the rooms, where the gas supplies and the equipment are located.
3.3 requirements for the sensors / compounds 3.3.1 in any room with appliances must exist near these devices sensors of the gas warning device. The sensors / compounds are to install that gas buildup be detected before they reach the values referred to in section 3.1.1. Arrangement and installation must be documented. The selection of the sites is to establish by the manufacturer or the assembled trade company. Probennahmeleitungen should be as short as possible.
3.3.2 the sensors must be easily accessible to allow regular calibration, maintenance, and security.
3.4 3.4.1 installation requirements must be the entire gas warning device installed by a specialised company.
3.4.2 installation have to be considered: a) local ventilation devices, b) structural arrangements (design of the walls, partitions, etc.) that facilitate the accumulation of gases or difficult and c) prevention of damage by mechanical damage, water - or heat damage.
3.4.3 all Probennahmeleitungen are arranged so that condensation is excluded.
3.4.4 did the installation to be made that an unauthorized manipulation is excluded where possible.
4. calibration / testing of Appendix 4.1 before of commissioning is the gas warning system according to manufacturer's instructions to calibrate.
4.2 the gas warning system is regularly according to the manufacturer by an expert or an expert to calibrate and check. The assessment is a certificate signed by the expert or experts to be, indicating the date of inspection should.
4.3 elements of gas warning device with limited lifetime must be replaced in good time before the expiry of the specified lifetime.
5. marking 5.1 all devices must legibly and indelibly, at least with the following information be provided: a) name and address of the manufacturer, b) statutory labelling, c) designation of series and type, d), where appropriate, the serial number, e) where necessary, all instructions essential for safe use and f) per sensor an indication to the calibration gas.
5.2 elements of for gas warning equipment with limited life duration must be marked clearly as such.
6. following manufacturer regarding the gas warning device must be available on board: a) complete instructions, drawings and diagrams to safe and proper operation, as well as to installation, commissioning and maintenance of the gas warning system, b) operating instructions, which must contain at least: aa) which bb in the event of an alarm or a failure of measures,) the security measures for non-availability (E.g., calibration, testing, fault) and cc) those responsible for the installation and repair , c) instructions for calibration before use and for routine calibrations including for prolonged periods of time, d) power supply, e) importance of alarms and indicators (E.g. special conditions), f) information to detect malfunctions and troubleshooting, g) nature and scope of exchange of components with limited lifetime and h) nature, scope and time interval of the tests.
Service instruction No. 25 cable (§§ 9.15 and 15.10 No.6 of annex II) General (all vehicles - section 9.15) 1.
In applying section 9.15, no. 5 is to take into account the restricted ventilation of shielded cables or cords in fully enclosed cable ducts.
2. According to section 9.15 No. 9 should be limited the number of cable connections to a minimum. You are allowed to repair and replacement purposes and exceptional ease of installation. Cable connections, which are manufactured in accordance with number 3.28 and Annex D of IEC 60092-352:2005 or rules recognized by a Member State as equivalent, can be regarded as acceptable.
Passenger ships - section 15.10 1 cable and wiring on passenger ships are considered as satisfactory if the conditions in paragraphs 2 and 3 are met.
2. cables which ensure emergency power systems according to article 15.10 No. 4 No. 6 must meet to comply with the requirements of section 15.10 paragraph 2 following conditions: a) the cables are to be routed, that they're not useless by a heating of the bulkheads and decks which could be caused by a fire in an adjoining room.
(b) if the cable supply plants in highly flammable areas, should the cable routing in such areas do not over or run in the vicinity of the upper part of diesel engines and oil fired plants or close to hot surfaces, E.g. exhaust pipes of diesel engines. If there is no other way of laying the cables against damage should be protected by heat and fire. This can be done by a cover or a shaft made of steel sheet.
(c) cables and associated equipment, supplied by the emergency source of power, should be as far as possible in a safe range.
(d) the cable systems are designed so that a fire in one of parting surfaces of type A according to article 15.11 no. 2 limited space does not affect the important safety equipment in another such room. This is satisfied if the main and emergency power supply cable does not run through the same space. In the event that they run through the same space, the requirement shall be deemed fulfilled if: aa) they are relocated as far away or bb) emergency power supply cables are fire-resistant.
3. in setting up bundle cable glands is sure that their flame retardant properties are not affected. This is satisfied if the cables IEC 60332-3:2000 or that by a Member State as equivalent rules. This is not the case, should fire retardant devices in long cable runs (more than 6 m vertical and 14 m horizontal) are provided if the cables are not fully enclosed by cable channels. Using inappropriate colors, channels, bays, etc. can impact significantly on the fire propagation characteristics of cables and must be avoided. The use of special cable types such as radio frequency cables can be admitted without having the above requirements must be observed.